You are on page 1of 252

ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AND INFORMATION & COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY

(ICT) SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND


COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AND INFORMATION & COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY (ICT) SYSTEM INSTALLATION FOR OFFICE BUILDINGS FOR THE ECOWAS
LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) AT LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

1
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION

2
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SERVICES ENGINEERING FOR OFFICE BUILDINGS FOR THE ECOWAS
LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) AT LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE.

3
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION

CONTENTS

1.0 TENDER CONDITIONS

2.0 DESIGN CRITERIA TENDER SPECIFICATIONS

3.0 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION

4.0 SCHEDULE OF APPENDICES

4
EQUIVALENCY OF STANDARDS AND CODES

Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods and materials
to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of the latest current edition or revision of the
relevant standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract document.

Where such standards and codes are notional, or relate to a particular country or region, other authoritative
standards that ensure a substantially equal or higher quality than the standards and codes specified will be
accepted subject to Project Manager’s prior review and written consent. Differences between the standards
specified and the proposed alternative standards shall be fully described in writing by the Contractor and
submitted to the Project Manager at least 14 days prior to the date when the Contractor desires the Project
Manager’s consent.

1.0 TENDER CONDITIONS:

1.1 Introduction
The purpose of this document and supporting drawings/data is to illustrate and describe the Contract
Works associated with the Electrical Engineering Services (EES) Systems + Applications.

The information contained in the Technical Specification and depicted on the Drawings is for the purpose
of obtaining a competitive Tender for the EES Contract Works

The Contractor must allow for liaising with other trades to ensure that the EES Installation is properly
coordinated / integrated into the Contract Works / Building Complex as a whole.
It is recommended that the Contractor visits the site in order to acquaint himself with the existing site
conditions, (access, existing site infrastructure services etc.), that might affect his Tender.

No claim arising out of any misunderstanding or neglect shall be considered.

1.2 Extent of the Contract Works


The EES Contract Works shall include all the necessary labour and materials and all
construction/building works, together with such tests, adjustments and commissioning of the electrical
engineering services systems and applications as are required to form a “complete installation”.

The Building Engineering Services (BES) Contract Works “Complete Installation” shall mean not only
the major items of plant and equipment detailed in this Document, but all of the incidentals/sundry
components required for the complete execution of the Contract Works.

1.3 Contract Works: Design Development


The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the design development work in connection with the
EES Contract Works; this is in addition to that of the fundamental design of the electrical engineering
services systems and applications specified within this Document and supporting drawings/data.

The Contractor shall allow, within his Tender, for the following particular design development
calculations:
(i) Lighting
To determine the required number of circuits, protection devices and cable sizes, based upon the
completed lighting installation drawings developed.

(ii) Small Power Requirement


To determine the required number of circuits, protection devices and cable sizes, based the
completed small power installation drawings developed.

(iii) Distribution Boards


To determine the required rating of protection devices, cable sizes and appropriate load balancing
illustration, based upon the completed lighting and small power installation drawings developed.

5
(iv) Incoming Electrical Power Supply (Panel board)
To determine the required rating and size of MCCB’s and associated protection devices/cable sizes
based upon completed installation drawings and electrical schematic diagram.
The Contractor shall provide the M+E Engineer with the design development drawings / data for his
consideration, prior to the ordering of any capital plant.
The accuracy of such information, as submitted, shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.4 Contract Works: Named Plant, Equipment+ Materials


The fundamental design of the EES Systems + Applications has been based upon the named
manufacturers/suppliers of the plant, equipment and materials, as recorded within this Document.

The operating characteristics, performance and overall quality of the named plant, equipment and
materials have been validated against the design criteria, setting the minimum standard to be achieved.

The overall space planning of the building complex has taken into account the physical weight
dimensions of the named plant and equipment, together with the space required around the plant and
equipment for maintenance and the future replacement of the individual components and /or their
complete renewal.

Items of plant and equipment, as named, have been sourced from a number of international
manufacturers/suppliers, acknowledged as having had experience in providing equipment suitable for the
intended use/application, with proven longevity under operation in harsh climatic conditions.

The Contractor shall be at liberty to consider alternative manufacturers / suppliers; in doing so, the
Contractor is required to complete the Tender Declaration Form – Plant + Equipment and to submit the
latter with his Tender.
In submitting alternative names, the Tenderer shall be expected to have checked that his proposed
manufacturers / suppliers’ plant and equipment satisfies the overall performance, quality and dimensional
requirements when compared to the manufacturer / supplier as named within this Document.
The Contractor shall be required to provide, at the time of submitting his Tender, full technical details of
any proposed alternative manufacturer / supplier of the following:
(i). Main Electrical LV Panelboard, Fused Switch Disconnectors + Distribution Boards
(ii). Lighting Fittings and Switches
(iii). Small Power Requirement

1.5 Contract Works: Regulations and Standards


The EES Installation shall comply with the Technical Specification (s) set out within this Document with
all relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice and with all other relevant Statutory Instruments and
Regulations current at the time of Tender.

1.6 Contract Works: Materials and Workmanship


All materials must be suitable for their intended use/application and must comply with the relevant
Standards and be installed in accordance with the Codes of Practice and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
All site operatives must be suitable qualified and experienced for the work that they are assigned to carry
out. All workmanship must be of a good standard.
The Project Architect and the M+E Engineer shall reject poor materials and workmanship and it shall be
the contractor’s responsibility to put right such rejected Contract Works at his own expense.

1.7 Contract Works: Programme


The Contractor shall allow adequate time within his overall Contract Works Programme for presenting
and receiving comments to / from the Project Architect / M+E Engineer with respect to:
i. Design Development Information
ii. Installation Drawings
iii. Testing and Commissioning Procedures

6
1.8 Supervision of the Contract Works
The Contractor shall employ a competent, qualified and experienced Principal Resident Site Engineer,
who shall be in charge of the Contract Works during all working hours and in attendance until the whole
of the Contract Works has been completed and accepted on behalf of the Employer/User.

The Contractor’s appointed representative shall attend meetings on site and be empowered to answer on
behalf of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall appoint a Deputy Site Engineer to cover for periods of absence of the Principal
Residence Site Engineer.

1.9 Coordination of the Contract Works


The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the all Electrical Engineering Services
Systems, such that each may be installed in a manner which ensures the correct performance of the
system and avoids conflict in the positioning of the various Building Engineering Services (BES)
elements.
The Contractor shall include within his Tender for the detailed development of his Installation Drawings
to contribute to a fully coordinated and integrated BES Installation.

1.10 Contract Works: Installation Drawings


The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Architect/ M+E Engineer, Installation Drawings
for all of the EES systems to be installed under the Contract Works, together with such schedules, data,
calculations, systems schematics and other supplementary details necessary to execute the Contract
Works.
The Installation Drawings shall be fully detailed, depicting the positions and physical dimensions of all
of the BES Systems Components.
The minimum scale for the production of the coordinated Installation Drawings shall be:-
LV Panelboard Switch room: 1: 20
Floor Plans 1: 50
Site Services 1: 200

The Contractor shall make due allowance for the preparation of the EES Installation Drawings within his
Tender and within his Overall Contract Works Programme

1.11 Contract Works: Fixing of the Services Installation


The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the sizing, supply and installation of all supports/fixings
for the electrical engineering services.

1.12 Contract Works: Builders Work


Builders Work in connection with (BWIC) the EES Contract Works, such as duct, holes, basses, chasses
etc. shall be detailed by the Contractor as separated drawings.
The Contractor shall inform the Project Architect/M+E Engineer of any BWIC that may affect the
building structure and/or envelope. The Contractor shall make due allowance for the detailing of the
BWIC requirements within his Tender and within his overall Contract Works Programme

1.13 Contract Works: Testing and Commissioning


The Contractor shall ensure that suitably qualified and experienced personnel, together with the necessary
instrumentation, are available at the time required to set to work, test and commission the mechanical and
electrical engineering services systems. The format of the testing and commissioning procedure, together
with the details to be entered on the test sheets, shall be agreed with the M+E Engineer.
The Contractor shall agree with the Project Architect/M+E Engineer a Programme for the testing and
commissioning of the various EES Systems. The M+E Engineer shall retain a detailed record of all the
testing and commissioning procedures on site for examination.
The testing and commissioning shall demonstrate, amongst other things, that:
(i) All electrical circuits are properly electrically and physically protected and earthed.
(ii) All electrical switchgears are neatly positioned, levelled and secured.

7
1.14 Contract Works: Record Documentation
The Contractor shall supply to the Project Architect/M+E Engineer, as a prerequisite to the Practical
Completion of the Contract Works, a comprehensive record of the completed mechanical and electrical
engineering services installation. This shall take the form of:-
i. AutoCAD based disk detailing all INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.
ii. 4 No. Dyeline prints of all INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.
iii. 4 No. Bound A4 copies of the OPERATING + MAINTENANCE MANUALS, to include:-

a) Copies of all testing and commissioning certificates.


b) Manufacturers/Suppliers technical data for the maintenance and operation of all plant and
equipment, together with a schedule of spares provided.
c) Schedule recording all installation drawings.

The Contractor shall maintain accurate records of all testing and commissioning procedures throughout
the course of the Contract Works for incorporation into the O + M Manuals.

The Contractor shall have available a DRAFT COPY of the Record Documentation for inspection by the
Project Architect/M+E Engineer prior to Practical Completion of the Contract Works.

1.15 Contract Works: Instruction of Employer’s Staff


The Contractor shall include within his tender, under the heading “Record Documentation”, from the
instruction of the Employer’s Appointed Maintenance Staff on the operation of the EES Systems, to
include emergency/breakdown procedures.
The instruction shall take place following the testing and setting to work of the EES Systems.
A “Draft” copy of the Operating + Maintenance Manual shall be made available for review by the
Employer’s representative during this period.

1.16 Contract Works: Variations


All instructions, variations, additions to the Contract Works are only valid when agreed to/signed for by
the Project Architect (Manager).
Should the Contractor receive, during the progress of the Contract Works, any instruction for additional
work, Which he considers may affect the completion of the Contract Works within the prescribed
Contract Period, he shall be required to formally notify the Project Architect in writing within seven days
of the receipt of such and instruction.

1.17 Contract Works: Practical Completion


The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the EES Installation and shall have prepared his own
defects inspection list and shall duly attend to the same, prior to offering the completed EES Installation
to the Project Architect (Manager) for inspection and acceptance on behalf of the Employer.
The Project Architect/M+E Engineers’ inspection shall be one of formality and should not be considered
as an inspection for the purposes of forming the Contractor’s final list scheduling the Outstanding Works.

The Contractor shall agree with the Project Architect/M+E Engineer, a suitable date for the FINAL
INSPECTION.

1.18 Maintenance of Services


Any works necessitating interruption or termination of any services required to be maintained or serving
areas outside of the designated works area shall be thoroughly coordinated and not be initiated until a
Programme of works indicating disruption time scales and/or temporary arrangements has been
submitted and agreed fully by all concerned.

1.19 Contract Works: Defects Liability Period


The Contractor shall be responsible under the Contractor for addressing/correcting all of the EES
Contract Works defects occurring within a period of SIX MONTHS, commencing from the date of the
PRACTICAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATION.

8
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall provide prompt and effective “call back” service
to attend to any urgent faults which may develop and which would affect the day-to-day function of the
building complex and facilities.

The Contractor shall retain a written log on site recording the details of the defect – i e, date notified/date
attended, fault identified, action taken, together with any ongoing investigations/remedial work.

1.20 Contract Works: Provisional Sums


Provisional Sums have been entered on the Electrical Engineering Services Installation – Tender
Breakdown – Form of Tender Document.
These Provisional Sums provide for Works of Costs, which cannot be foreseen, defined or detailed at the
time of preparing the EES Contract Works Tender Documentation.

The Provisional Sums include for the Contractor’s overheads and profit and therefore are to be included
in the Tender Breakdown as net sums without any further additions.
Instructions as to the deduction of expenditure in whole or in part of the Provisional Sums shall be
instructed by the Project Architect (Manager) during the course of the Contract Works, as found
necessary.

1.21 Contract Works: Schedule of Rates


The Contractor shall submit within his Tender, a priced copy of the Schedule Rates.

Each of the elemental rates shall include for all necessary labour and materials, together with overheads
and profit.
The declared Tender rates shall be used to evaluate all Works added, deleted and/ or amended against the
Contract Works Tender.

The Project Architect (Manager) reserves the right to reject any tender which does not include the
completed Schedule of Rates, returned with the Tender Submission.

1.22 Contract Works: Tender Breakdown


The Contractor shall, when submitting his Tender for the Contract Works, enter on the Tender
Breakdown – Form of Tender Document, Lump Sum Costs for each of the Electrical Engineering
Services elements as prescribed.
The Project Architect reserves the right to reject any Tender, which does not include the completed
Tender Breakdown.

2.0 TENDER SPECIFICATIONS:


2.1 Introduction:
2.2 General:
The Power Distribution System (PDS) for the Office Buildings at the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) Lungi
International Airport, Freetown shall be supplied from a 800A, 8-way MCCB LV Panelboard for Site-2,
located in the new LV Panelboard Switchroom. The entire electrical system shall be based on a 230/400V,
3 phase and neutral, 50 Hz, Terra Neutral- Separate (TN-S) system.

2.3 Regulations and standards


The complete installation shall comply with all relevant British / European Standards and, where indicated,
with other standards and specifications and all amendments thereto. A Certificate of compliance shall be
provided for the Project Architect, to be included in the handover.

2.4 Design parameters


Division of installations:
The installation shall be divided into circuits as necessary to:
a. Avoid danger and minimize inconvenience in the event of a fault
b. Facilitate safe inspection, testing and maintenance
c. Take account of hazards that may arise from the failure of a single circuit such as a lighting circuit

9
d. Reduce the possibility of unwanted tripping of Residual Current Devices (RCD) due to excessive
protective conductor current not due to fault
e. Mitigate the effect of electro-magnetic disturbances
f. Prevent the indirect energizing of a circuit intended to be isolated

3.0 Prospective fault current (Pfc)


If a protective device is to operate safety, its rated short-circuit capacity must be not less than the
prospective fault current at the point where it is installed.
The distributor needs to be consulted as to the prospective fault current at the origin of the installation.

4.0 Earth loop impedance external (Ze)


The Ze is to comply with British Standards.

5.0 Voltage droop


The voltage drop between the origin of the installation and a lighting point should not exceed 3% of the
nominal voltage and for other current using equipment or socket outlets should not exceed 5%

6.0 Electrical installation:


6.1 General.
The contractor shall procure, install, inspect, test and commission the entire electrical system within the
proposed building as stated within this Specification and associated drawings.

6.2 Main supply.


The main supply should comprise of a TN-S system at 400V, 50 Hz. The incoming supply cable from the
Dedicated Power Transformer located within the Generator House should be run and terminated to a 800A
TP&S Fused Switch Disconnector located in the Transformer Room and cable run underground via a
service duct system as shown on the drawing.
The contractor is to liaise with the Electrical Distribution Service Authority (EDSA) to arrange for a Permit
to Work for the connection of the main supply cable to and from the Power Transformer.

The HT cable is to have the following characteristics complete with indoor termination kits as required and
in accordance with Local Regulations:
a) Be a minimum 95mm2, 3 core, Cu/XLPE/PVC/PVC cable with wire shield rated for 0.6/11kV
b) Have a current carrying capacity of 235Amps at 32oC ambient temperature

The LV supply from the Transformer should be terminated to the ATS-2 through a 630A, TP&N Fuse
Disconnector Switch located within the Generator House. The LV supply cable from the ATS should then
enter the building through an adequate sized uPVC pipe or similar.
The LV cable is to have the following characteristics complete with cable lug termination as required and
in accordance with International / Local Regulations:
a) Be a minimum 240mm2, 4 core, Cu/XLPE/PVC/SWA/PVC cable rated for 0.6/1kV
b) Have a current carrying capacity of 410 Amps at 32oC ambient temperature

7.0 Electrical service ducts


7.1 Service duct detail.
The supply cable is to be laid or drawn through a combine services duct.

7.2 Trenching:
No work shall commence until the Contractor has taken all reasonable steps to ensure that the area is free
of all cable, drains and other services. A cable Avoidance Tool (CAT) and Signal Generator (Genny) or
any other equivalent cable detector tool is to be used to detect services. Unless otherwise indicate the
following is required:
a) Excavations within 600mm of existing services shall be by handing digging. Any damage to services
shall be reported immediately to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer. No repairs or replacement
10
shall be done unless the Project Architect/M&E Engineer gives approval. All works will be at the
Contractors expense.

b) Cables shall be buried at a sufficient depth to avoid being damaged by any disturbance of the ground
reasonably likely to occur. Trenches shall be excavated to the depth specified by the Project Engineer.

c) All cable enclosed within trenches are to be installed in accordance with the recognized specification.
The Contractor shall ensure an accurate record of the location is made and passed to the Project
Architect/M&E Engineer

d) Warning tapes and covers. A traceable warning tape shall be placed above the cable duct.

The following will be required:


e) The tape shall be laid at a depth of 300mm below the finished surface level except where the depth of
paved area exceeds 300mm in which case the tape shall be laid immediately below the base.

f) Warming tapes shall be traceable and be not less than 150mm wide and 0.1mm thick.
They shall be yellow in colour and bear continuously repeated legend ‘CAUTION ELECTRIC
CABLE BELOW’’, or similar, in black letters.

g) Service entry:
Cable entry to the building shall be installed in a cable duct. The cable duct is to be sized and located
in a suitable location. The cable duct is to be sealed with appropriate material to prevent the ingress of
moisture or vermin. The bore shall be smooth and entirely free from rough spots and sharp edges.
Correct size of duct shall be sized for the cable to be drawn in and the bending radius of the cable
shall comply with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8.0 LV electrical equipment


8.1 General:
All intake equipment is to be installed indoors. The main supply is to be installed via a lockable isolator
before entering the distribution board.

8.2 Main intake isolator:


The main intake isolator will be installed directly below the distribution board. The isolator is to have the
ability to be locked off in the OFF position.

8.3 Distribution board:


The distribution board shall comply with the relevant British Standards as well as the follow:
A It shall be suitable for surface mounting or concealed in blockworks, have lockable doors (supplier
with two keys) and be controlled by an on-load integral disconnector.

Keys shall be labelled and handed to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer at practical completion.
B Where spare ways are provided they shall be fitted with blanking pieces
C All neutral and earth connections shall be made to bars within the distribution board each connection
having an individual terminal. The neutral shall have a removable link to facilitate testing.
D The connections to the neutral and earth bar shall be made to correspond with the order of the phase
connection.
E All conductors terminated at the board shall be appropriately marked with cable ring markers
indicating the circuit number and phase connection.
F All covers, doors and access plates into the distribution board shall be gasketed to achieve a minimum
protection of IP 32.
G Access for cabling shall be from the front only. Shrouding to IP2X shall be fitted to prevent
accidental contact with live parts. Warning labels shall be provided and fixed.

11
H There shall be a circuit schedule identifying each circuit giving reference, description, rating of
protective device and connected load located inside the distribution board
I The circuit schedule shall be typed on an A4 sheet laminated and securely fixed to the inside of the
distribution board door.

8.4 Protection. Protection against electric shock for the electrical installation will be by means of automatic
disconnection of supply. Each protective device is to be identified. Identification on neutral bus bar and
protective conductor bar shall clearly relate each terminal to its respective device. Overload protection will
be provided by the use of the following devices.
A. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) MCB shall comply with BSEN61008-1:2012 and have the
following characteristic:
(i) Doors shall have a locking system or shall require a special tool for the opening and have a minimum
rated short circuit capacity (1cn) of 10kA unless otherwise specified.
(ii) MCBs shall be capable of withstanding calculated operational and fault currents as well as calculated
power frequency stress voltages.
(iii) Three phase MCB shall trip all phases on any fault condition.
(iv) Provision shall be made to enable the operating mechanism to be padlocked in the OFF position.

B. Residual Current Breaker with Overload Protection (RCBO’s).


All 13A socket outlets within the Office Buildings at Lungi International Airport, Freetown for the
Ecowas Logistic Deport shall be connected through Residual Current Breaker with Overload
Protection (RCBO’s).

All RCBO’s shall comply with BS EN 61009-1:2004+14:2012 and have the following characteristics:
(i) RCBOs shall be capable of withstanding calculated operational and fault currents as well as
calculated power frequency stress voltages.
(ii) The units shall be double or triple pole as required and mounted enclosed within the distribution
board.
(iii) The RCBO shall automatically open the protected circuit on an earth leakage fault between
phase and earth equal to or greater than the fault current sensitivity rating of the device.
(iv) The operating mechanism shall be independent trip- free and shall not be able to be held closed
against an earth fault. The units shall be complete with a test button and trip re- set device.
(v) The RCBO shall have position contact indication whereby the opening of the device is clearly
indicated by a mechanical indicator. This indicator shall be linked to the device main contacts to
show the positive opening of poles.

8.5 The ratings and type of protective devices can be found in the Electrical Distribution Board schedules.

8.6 Labelling:
The Contractor shall ensure they label the following:
a. Lighting and Emergency Exit lighting.
All emergency test key switches shall be labelled EMERGENCY LIGHT.
b. Switches and outlets.
All switches, socket outlets and isolators are to be labelled with their associated circuit numbers i.e.
DB1/1/L1.

8.9. Circuit diagram:


On completion of the electrical system installation, as built drawings of the circuit layouts are to be
produced and be included in the Health and Safety File and issued to the Authorities at the Office Buildings
at Lungi International Airport, Freetown for the Ecowas Logistic Deport during the handover.

12
9.0 Final circuits
9.1. General:
All fixtures and fittings shall be securely fixed and checked before and after Installation for defects and
damage. All defective fittings shall be replaced. All socket outlets shall be run as ring final circuit.

9.2 Sockets:
Socket outlets shall comply with the relevant British Standard for the type of outlet indicated. Socket
outlets shall be of the type and rating as indicated. PVC and metal sockets are to be selected dependent on
the room function. All other areas are to be fitted with PVC and store areas are to be fitted with metal
outlets (PVC conduit, back box and faceplate).

9.3 Mounting heights:


Socket outlets shall be mounted at a height of 400mm above FFL and located in positions shown on the
associated drawings.

9.4 Fixed power circuits:


All fixed power shall be supplied by redials. The split Air Conditioning Units (ACU’s) are to be supplied
via individual radial circuits dedicated to each ACU. The split Unit ACU’s are to have lockable rotary
isolator switches for the external condenser.

9.5 General. Lux levels are to be achieved as specified. The light fittings are to be of a sufficient IP rating to
protect against dust and insect ingress. The lights to be used are detailed in the lighting drawings, capable
of achieving the light levels as design.
9.6 Emergency lighting:
Emergency lighting systems and equipment shall comply with BS 5266-1:2011. The emergency lighting
should be integral to the entire lighting system. The emergency lighting shall have the following:
a) Emergency escape lighting:
Emergency escape lighting shall provide illumination for the safety of personnel leaving a location or
attempting to terminate a potentially dangerous process before doing so. In the event of power failure a
minimum of 1 LUX level is to be maintained at floor level for duration of 3 hours. The emergency
escape lighting is to be provided by maintained emergency luminaires that shall have their lamps
energized during normal use or in the event of power failure. The battery backup shall be permanently
connected to a circuit supply via a temper proof test switch, without interruption by local functional
switching.

b) Emergency escape route lighting:


The emergency escape route lighting shall ensure that the means of escape can be effectively identified
and safety used when the premises are occupied. The emergency escape route lighting is to be
provided by non-maintained emergency luminaires with pictogram and shall energize their lamps
during the event of a power failure. The battery backup shall be permanently connected to a circuit
supply, via a tamper proof test switch, without any functional switching. Fluorescent Emergency Exit
signs are to be located over each external access doors. The area immediately external of the door is to
be illuminated to a distance of 10m at a level of 1 Lux.

9.7 Switches:
Switches shall comply with the relevant British Standard for the type of switch indicated. Switches shall
be single pole for single phase circuits and the current rating shall be the room. All other areas are to be
in PVC and store in metal clad fittings. Switches are to be mounted at 1400mm above FFL.

13
10.0 Cable containment
10.1 General:
The size of the containment shall be calculated in accordance with BS 7671+A2:2013. Conduit, including
flexible and pliable conduits shall be non-metallic and comply with the relevant British Standards. When
circuits are run in containment the following shall apply:
a) Trucking shall comply with BS 4678-4; 1982 and be 50 x50mm in size
b) PVC Conduit shall comply with BS EN 50086-2-1:1996 and BS 4568-1; 1970 and be 20mm and
50mm in diameter.

10.2 Trunking general:


Where trunking is required to pass through wall fabrics it shall be fitted with suitable and approved flame
proof fire barriers.

10.3 Supports and joints:


The trunking shall be installed in the ceiling void and secured to the trusses and in vertical service ducts
and secured to the wall surface. Expansion couplings shall be protective where trunking crosses any
expansion joints within the building fabric.

10.4 Bonding:
The metallic trunking must be bonded to earth and tested for continuity but must not be used as a means
of providing the protective conductor

10.5 Access and covers:


Trunking and fittings shall have removable lids along its entire length. The lids shall be of the same
material, thickness and finish as that of the trunking.

10.6 Conduit general:


Metallic conduit shall have screw threads for jointing length to length and for the attachment of
accessories, PVC conduit shall use female couplers. Conduit and fittings shall be screwed to the building
fabric unless indicated and approved by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer. High impact areas shall
have galvanized steel conduit and all other areas shall be PVC. Adequate protection against corrosion
shall be provided to steel conduit.
a) Supports, Junction boxes and back boxes installed in conduit runs needs to be separately fixed to
underlying surface and not rely on the efficient saddling of conduit for their support. A spacer bar
saddle shall be fixed 150mm adjacent to any junction or back box. Fixing saddles shall be positioned
at a maximum of 1200mm apart or 300mm from conduit outlet boxes or changes in direction.
b) Bends. Steel conduit shall be bent on site to the required shape to allow the conduit to run around
obstacles and corners. All conduit bends shall be achieved without distorting the diameter of the
conduit. Conduit bending shall be by means of a good quality conduit bending machine, in good
condition and any poor or damaged conduit bends shall be rejected.
c) Couplers, bushes ad glands. Bushes and glands used in conjunction with conduits and conduit
accessories shall be appropriate to the type used. Conduit connected to galvanize steel trunking, back
boxes and fluorescent fittings shall utilize a coupler and male brass bush. The male bush is to be fitted
by the appropriate methods.
d) Saddles, Spacer bar saddles shall be used for fixing conduits to surface walls and ceilings. In all cases
the conduit is to be run parallel to the building lines and shall be fixed in position at intervals of not
more than 120mm by means of spacer bar saddles and these saddles shall be fixed by the appropriate
methods.
e) Access and covers. Covers for conduit boxes shall be appropriate to the type used.

14
11.0 Cable
11.1 General:
All cable types shall be certified and marked in accordance with the British Approvals Services for
Electrical Cables (BASEC) or equivalent. Cables shall be segregated from other services and shall
comply with IEE Specification 034.

11.3 Cable routes:


Cables installed on the surface shall be parallel with the lines of the building construction and properly
aligned. Cables buried below ground shall, as far as is practicable, follow the features of the site such as
building lines.

11.4 Cable segregation:


A minimum clearance in accordance with IEE Specification 034 shall be allowed from any equipment,
pipework or ductwork. In the event of difficulty in achieving these requirements the M& Engineer shall
be consulted. Adequate space shall be left between cable runs building fabric and other services to allow
for the future removal or installation of cables.

11.5 Cable Cleats:


Cable cleats shall be made from materials that are resistant to corrosion without the need for treatment or
special finish. Plastic materials shall be non-brittle. Cable cleats shall be of a suitable size such that they
can be tightened down to grip the cables without exerting undue pressure. The spacing of cable cleats
shall comply with BS7671+A2:2013. On each side of a bend, cable cleats shall be used to secure the
cable.

12.0 Protective conductors and bonding


12.1 General:
Automatic disconnection of the supply is the method of protection utilized for basic and fault protection.
Therefore, all protective conductors and supplementary bonding is to ensure that, in the event of a fault,
sufficient current flows to operate the protective devices i.e. MCBs or RCD/RCBOs

12.2 Earth conductor:


In accordance with BS 7671+A2:2013, the minimum cross sectional area of the protective conductor
shall be half the cross sectional area of the line conductors.

12.3 Supplementary bonding:


Supplementary bonding conductors shall be installed to all exposed metal conductive parts. In any part of
the installation where the earthed metalwork of the electrical system comes into contact with the
metalwork of any other services, structure or equipment a permanent earth bond shall be formed as close
as is practicable to the point of contact.

13.0 Inspection testing and commissioning


13.1 General:
During erection, on completion and before being put into services the electrical installation shall be
inspected, tested and verified, so far as is reasonable practicable that the requirement of BS 7671 + A2
:2013 have been met. The verification shall be made by a competent person and shall include comparison
of the results with the relevant criteria and regulations. On completion of the verification all relevant
documentation shall be prepared.

13.2 Inspection:
The inspection shall precede any testing of the installation and shall be carried out by a competent person
with that part of the installation being disconnected from the electrical supply

15
13.3 Live testing:
Live testing shall only be undertaken once suitable precautions have been put in place. Calibrated
equipment and suitable personnel protective equipment must be used.
Although live testing is a recognized method, under no circumstances is any rectification to be carried out
live.

13.4 Safety:
It is the responsibility of the test engineer to ensure their own safety and the safety of others whilst
working through the test procedure. Prior to testing the installation the test engineer is to ensure the
following precaution, are taken:
a. Equipment.
The tester must have knowledge and experience of the correct application and use of the test
instrumentation, leads, probes and accessories.
b. Standards.
All test equipment must meet the safety measures and procedures laid out in Health and Safety
Executive Guidance Note GS 38 for all instruments, leads, probes and accessories.

13.5 Inspection and test procedure.


The inspection and testing of the new installation shall include the following:
a. Prior to energizing. Before energizing the following procedure is to be followed:
(1) Visual inspection as laid down within the current edition of BS 7671 +A2:2013
(2) Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary bonding
(3) Continuity of ring final circuit conductors, including protective conductors
(4) Insulation resistance
(5) Polarity (by continuity method)

b. During energizing. With the supply connected and energized the following procedure is to take
place:
i) Check polarity of the supply, using an approved voltage indicator
ii) Earth fault impedance
iii) Prospective fault current measurement

14.0 Certification and forms of completion


14.1 General:
The Contractor is to prepare all forms of completion. Current editions of forms are to be used from BS
7671+A2:2013

14.2 Commissioning:
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all inspection and testing of the installation in
accordance with BS 7671+A2:2013. The Contractor is to complete their requirement sections of the
commission forms and present them to the Project Architect/Engineer for submission to the Bank.

14.3 Results.
All results obtained during the test procedure are to be recorded on the Schedule of Test Results for the
distribution board for future reference and checked for acceptability against the prescribed criteria. All
failed measurements are to be highlighted to the Engineer/Bank at the earliest prepared to accompany the
Schedule of Test Results. All documents are to be included in the Health and Safety File and issued to the
Bank during the handover board.

14.4 Emergency lighting.


All emergency lighting is to be tested and certified in accordance with BS 5266-1:2011. All test results
are to be presented as part of the H&S File. The emergency lighting system is to have the following
certificates completed and presented as part of the Health &Safety File:

16
a. Emergency lighting completion certificate:
To BS 5266-1:2011 Annex C emergency lighting completion certificated by the Contractor’s
Engineer

b. Design declaration of conformity:


To BS5266-1:2011 Annex C declaration of conformity to be completed by the Contractor’s Engineer

c. Installation declaration of conformity:


To BS 5266-1:2011 Annex C installation declaration of conformity to be completed by Contractor’s
Engineer

d. Verification- declaration of conformity:


To BS 5266-1:2011 Annex C verification of conformity to be completed by the Contractor’s
Engineer

e. Periodic inspection and test certificate:


To BS 5266-1:2011 Annex D periodic inspection and test certificate to be completed by the
Contractor’s Engineer with assistance from the Bank Facility Manager.

17
3.0 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION

3.1 Incoming Electrical Power supply

3.2 Low Voltage Panelboard

3.3 Low Voltage Distribution Boards

3.4 Lightning Protection System

3.5 Earthing + Bonding

3.6 Structured Cable Management System (SCMS)

18
3.1 Incoming Electrical Power Supply
System Description
System Drawings + Data

SL/ELD/E-1: Block Schematic Layout Power Supply & Distribution Network


SL/ELD/E-2: Line Schematic Layout Primary / Secondary LV Distribution Network

Appendix 1: Schedule of Incoming Electrical Power Supply from the 800A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV
Panelboard located in Panelboard Switch Room (MCCB-1, MCCB-2, MCCB-3, MCCB-4, MCCB-5,
MCCB-6, MCCB-7, MCCB-8)

MCCB-1 Raw Power 250A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard (Main Raw Power Intake) –
Training Centre
(i) MCCB-1 Raw Power Distribution Board-1 – Training Centre
(ii) MCCB-2 Raw Power Distribution Board-2 - Training Centre
(iii) MCCB-3 UPS 63A, TP&N Fuse Switch Disconnector (UPS Distribution
Board 1 for all UPS Socket outlets - Training Centre
(vi) MCCB-4 Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-1
(v) MCCB-5 Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-2
(vi) MCCB-6 Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-3
(vii) MCCB 7 SPARE
(vii) MCCB 8 SPARE

MCCB-2 Raw Power Distribution Board 3 – Main Dining Hall Building

MCCB-3 Raw Power 250A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard (Main Raw Power Intake) –
Junior Staff Resident
(i) MCCB-1 Raw Power Distribution Board-1 – Ground Floor
(ii) MCCB-2 Raw Power Distribution Board-2 - Ground Floor
(iii) MCCB-3 Raw Power Distribution Board-1 – First Floor
(iv) MCCB-4 Raw Power Distribution Board-2 – First Floor
(v) MCCB-5 Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-1
(vi) MCCB-6 Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-2
(vii) MCCB-7 Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-3
(viii) MCCB 8 SPARE

MCCB-4 Raw Power 250A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard (Main Raw Power Intake) –
Senior Staff Resident
(i) MCCB-1 Raw Power Distribution Board-1 – Ground Floor
(ii) MCCB-2 Raw Power Distribution Board-2 - Ground Floor
(iii) MCCB-3 Raw Power Distribution Board-1 – First Floor
(iv) MCCB-4 Raw Power Distribution Board-2 – First Floor
(v) MCCB-5 Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-1
(vi) MCCB-6 Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-2
(vii) MCCB-7 Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-3
(viii) MCCB 8 SPARE

MCCB-5 Raw Power - SPARE


MCCB-6 Raw Power – SPARE
MCCB-7 Raw Power – SPARE
MCCB-8 Raw Power – SPARE

19
System Plant, Equipment + Materials
3.2 Low Voltage Panelboard:
The Low Voltage Panelboard shall be located in the Main LV Panelboard room.
The Panelboard shall be arranged for bottom entry of supply cable. Include for all necessary cable
termination glands required to support the cable and shall incorporate all the MCCB switches, meters,
time switches and instruments as indicated on the drawings.

The 8 Way 800A Triple Pole and Neutral MCCB Panel board Complete with 800A Four Pole MCCB
Incomer Fitted shall be designed to operate on 400 Volt, 50Hz, three phase, 4 wire TN-C or TN-C-S
systems

3.2.1 General Characteristics


Cable Entry Top and Bottom Endplates Removable For Ease of Cutting
Current Rating 800A
Depth 200 mm
Height 2,000 mm
Width 1,000 mm
Incoming Terminal Capacity M8 Bolts 120mm Square Cable and Earth M10 Bolt
Mounting Wall Mounted
Number of Outgoing Ways 8 Way
Product Range MC Range MCCB Panelboard
Standards BS EN 61439 pt 1&2
Switchgear Fitted Four Pole MCCB Incomer 1,000A
Equipment Type Fixed Stationary
Covers/Door Screw fixed covers. Side hinged door (removable) c/w plastic turn
catches.
Enclosure 1.6mm Cold rolled steel with an epoxy paint finish to RAL7035
matt grey. Bolted construction giving Form2B type 2 and Form3B
type 2 group mounted segregation to BS EN 61439:Pt1 and 2:2011
Frequency 50HZ
Breaking Capacity 36kA Icc
Rated Operating Voltage 230/400V ac
Protection Class IP Rating IP3X
Operating Ambient Temperature -5 to +40 C
Terminal Tightening Torque M8 Bolt 20Nm max, M10 Bolt 40Nm max
Short Circuit Making Capacity 36kA Icc
Number of Ways 8 Way
Number of Poles Triple Pole and Neutral

3.2.2 Fault Rating


The Panelboard shall be constructed and type tested to withstand a fault level of 50KA for 1 second in
accordance with BSEN 60439-1

3.2.3 Construction General


The Panelboard shall be modular sheet steel, minimum 2mm thickness, cubicle built on a rigid, self-
supporting framework with compartments separated by barriers of a minimum 1.6mm thickness

Overall external Ingress Protection (IP) rating for the Panelboard shall not be less than IP31 as defined in
BSEN60529.
All internal live parts shall be protected to IP2X.
All parts of the Panelboard both internal and external shall be free of sharp edges and sharp corners.

20
3.2.4 Construction Form Type
The Panelboard shall be Form 4, Type 2 as defined in BS 60439.
Busbars shall be separated from functional units.
Terminations to functional units shall be separated from each other.
Busbar separation shall be achieved by metallic or non-metallic rigid barriers or partitions.

3.2.5 Busbars and Cabling


The busbar system shall comply with BS 159 and shall be:-
1. HDHC copper bar.
2. Fully rated allowing for any reduction in CSA where bars are drilled.
3 Inaccessible from equipment compartments and protected by sheet steel barriers or shutters.
4. Clearly and indelibly colour identified as red, yellow, blue and black respectively.
5. Tested in accordance with BS 7767

Connections between the busbars and the connected components shall have a current rating not less than
the nominal rating of the component and shall be of adequate cross section for the specified fault level.
Connections to functional units from the main busbars shall be suitably rated copper busbars to a
minimum of 1,000 Amps and below this rating shall be in appropriately sized single core black PVC
insulated, tri rated, copper stranded cable.

All connections shall be marked with the requisite colour identification.


All connections from busbars to control and instrumentation equipment shall be protected by fuses. The
fuses shall be mounted on or as close as possible to the busbars. Further fusing within the equipment’s
compartment shall be provided if necessary to ensure adequate discrimination.
Neutrals shall be full size for all busbars and cabling.

3.2.6 Earth Bar


A continuous, horizontally mounted earth bar shall be provided throughout the length of the Panelboard
of minimum size 50mm x 6mm, suitable for extension and with provision for bonding all metalwork with
bolted connections. A minimum of two connections shall be provided to the Panelboard framework.
A minimum of two earth connections shall be provided for connection to the external main earth ring.

Earthing shall comply with BS 7430, Code of Practice for Earthing.


Vertical earth bars shall be provided in each of the wiring chambers linked to the main earth bar drilled
out and fitted with suitable fixings for the appropriate number of functional unit earth connections.

All earth bars shall be clearly identified within each wiring chamber.
Bolted copper links shall be provided to enable the switchboard earth system to be isolated from the main
earth ring for testing.

3.2.7 Wiring and Cabling


All internal wiring and cabling shall be:-
1 Terminated with suitable copper tube lugs, insulated end sleeves or PVC insulated crimp
terminals.
2. Fully insulated, PVC tri-rated grade cable to BS 6231.
3. Protected by grommets, bushes or glands where it passes through metal enclosures.
4. Protected against heat and mechanical damage.
5. Labelled at both terminations. These reference numbers shall appear on the wiring diagrams.

All power cabling shall be securely clamped to remain in place under the worst fault conditions, and they
shall not be supported by their terminations.
Small wiring shall be enclosed in trunking or other cable management system and shall be numbered at
both ends with the terminal number and wire number shown on circuit drawings.
21
Cable terminations at 230VAC shall be fitted with a suitable removable shroud or barrier to IP2X.
Panelboard to comply with BS 5486: Part 1, Form 4 with IP 54 degree of protection, cable mounted.
Circuit details as indicated in Appendices-1

System Plant, Equipment + Materials


3.3 Distribution Boards
Distribution Boards to be of totally enclosed type (IP 31) to provide protection in compliance with BS
5420 IEC 144. The location of distribution boards to be as recorded within Appendices 1a &b, 2a & b, 3a
& b, 4a &b, 5a &b, and 6a & b
A multi-terminal Earthing bar shall be provided for circuit protective conductors of the insulated metal
cased boards, with one terminal for each outgoing circuit. These will be connected directly to Earthing
terminal without dependence on exposed conductive parts of enclosure.

Distribution Boards and Panelboard shall be labelled showing the area and services which are to be fed
from them, and where not otherwise immediately obvious, their source of supply. The engraving to be in
white 10mm high letters on red plastic sheet or equal and fixed external to the lids of apparatus by screw
or rivets.

Low voltage Switchgear:


(i) Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB’s)
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker ratings shall be as stated within Appendix -1. They are to be of the
500V totally enclosed metal clad type, complying with BS 4752 (IEC 157-1) ASTA Certified P1
or P2 rating (50/35KV, 415V).

(ii) Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB’s)


Miniature circuit breakers for incorporation in distribution boards to comply with the
requirements of BS 3871 (IEC 898)

(iii) Switch Fuses and Isolators


Switch fuses to be of the 500V totally enclosed metal clad type, complying with BS 5414 (IEC
408) AC22 and AC23 rating. All switch fuses to be fitted with HRC fuse cartridges and to be
SP + N / TP + N, as required and as rated in Appendix 12.

(iv) Residual Current-Operated Circuit Breakers


Residual current-operated circuit breakers to comply with BS 4293 (IEC 755)

(v) Isolators
Local isolator shall be supplied and installed for the control of each power consuming fixed
appliance which is solidly connected. It is necessary to ensure that the means of isolation and the
appliance are in the same room and in direct line of vision and not more than 6 meters apart.

(vi) PVC Insulated Armoured Cables


These cables shall be of 600/1000V grade in compliance with BS 6346. The conductors to be
insulated with PVC or XLPE insulated, PVC bedded, armoured with a single layer of galvanized
steel wire or tape, and sheathed overall with PVC.

Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all cables shall have copper conductors.
Where cables enter switchgear and other apparatus, they are to be made off with suitable brass
glands which shall incorporate both a cone grip armour clamp with positive armour locking and a
resilient compression gland to firmly grip the outer PVC Sheath of the cable. A brass earth tag to
be fitted between the gland and the apparatus. A secure earthing connection to be made between
the earth tag and the main earthing terminal of the apparatus, using a suitable copper conductor

22
(vii) PVC Insulated Single Core Cables
These cable to be of 600/1000V grade to BS 6004 and, unless specifically indicated otherwise, to
have copper conductors. Cable for all services shall be in accordance with the Appendix 11 and
the latest IEE Regulations. Cables to be coloured in accordance with Table: 52A of the IEE
Regulations.

(viii) Wiring Installation


PVC Conduit (Concealed)
PVC conduit and fittings to be high impact type, heavy gauge, BS 4607 Compliant, AH grade.
No conduit to be less than 20mm dia.
PVC conduit to be concealed within walls

(ix) Flexible Metallic Conduit (Plant)


Flexible metallic conduit to be of the overlapping helically wound flexible steel type, with a PVC
outer cover in accordance with BS 731. The conduit to be fitted with heavy duty couplers and
connections and to include a bush to protect cables when drawn-in Flexible metallic conduits on
Plant and Equipment final connections
(x) Cable Trunking
Cable Trunking to be installed in floor ducts and plant rooms on routes as shown on drawings.

(xi) Cable Trunking Plastics


The cable Trunking to be constructed of heavy gauge extruded high impact PVC.

(xii) Cable trays


Cable trays to be galvanized punched metal.
Cable trays to be installed in ground floor ducts, service risers, plant room and switch rooms.

3.4 Lightning Protection System


System description
BS 6651, CP 1013 compliant Lightning Protection System, comprising air terminals to be located at apex
of roof above Bank Building, with copper, PVC covered down tapes to be installed on the outer walls of
the building and linked to the Bank Lightning Protection System Earth Point.

3.5 Earthing + Bonding


System Description
Earthing and Bonding to be undertaken in compliance with IEE Wiring Regulations and BS 7430.

Equipotential bonding to be applied to all exposed metal parts and in particular:-


Metal cable trunking and trays

3.6 Structured Cable Management System (SCMS)


System Description
A fully integrated / coordinated SCMS to be supplied / installed, arranged to accommodate cabling
system in the vertical service ducts

System Plant, Equipment + Materials


(i) Vertical Service Ducts
400mm wide x 25mm deep, galvanized, punched metal cable trays, fixed to the building structure
with support brackets.

(ii) Ceiling Voids (Basement Floor, Ground Floor and First Floor
Type A – 400mm wide x 50mm deep,
Type B – 300mm wide x 50mm deep,
Type C – 2mm wide x 50mm deep, high strength, electro-plated zinc, galvanized
23
Steel rod wire basket cable tray, fixed to ceiling with support brackets.
Wire baskets and fittings to be as manufactured / supplied by Wiremould
Cables to be secured within cable trays / baskets employing “VELCRO” type quick release
fasteners.

Dado/Skirting Trunking (Conference Room, Server Room, UPS Room, Meeting Room, and
Offices.

Type D – 135mm x 50mm deep, white finished chamfered high impact PVC manufactured in
accordance with BS 4678. Part 4 (1982)

Floor Boxes (Conference Room only)


3 module (multiple outlet) recessed floor boxes, fitted with 2Nr. twin 13 Amp switched socket
outlets, 2 x 4 Nr. RJ45 Data / Telecom outlet points, incorporating quick release reversible lid,
cable retainers. Floor Box Type ‘Cable-link Rapide’, as manufactured by Ackermann

Tender Drawings/Figure Nos


Drawing System Drawing Type Detail
Number
SL/ELD/E-1 Low Voltage Block Schematic Incoming Power Supply and Low Voltage
Distribution Layout Distribution
Panelboard locations, Incoming/Outgoing LV
Low Voltage Line Schematic
SL/ELD/E-2 Cable Routing, Fire Alarm, Door Access Control
Distribution Diagram
and CCTV Camera Locations
Structured Cable
Cabling Systems in vertical service duct
Management System
TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING
DRAWINGS

Contract Works: Named Plant, Equipment + Materials.


The Contractor shall enter below the names of the Manufacturers / Suppliers of the Plant, Equipment and
Materials included within his Tender Price, either by confirming his use of the ‘As Named’
Manufacturer/Supplier or by defining his proposed alternative.

Proposed Alternative
As Named Manufacturer/Supplier
Plant, Equipment, Materials Manufacturer/Supplier
in this Document
(Country of Origin)
1. 800A, 8-way TP&N LV MCCB Panelboard PROTEUS OR EQUIVALENT
2. 250A, 8-way TP&N LV MCCB Panelboard PROTEUS OR EQUIVALENT
3. 125A, 8-way TP&N LV MCB Distribution Boards PROTEUS OR EQUIVALENT
4. 125A, 8-way TP&N LV MCB Distribution Boards PROTEUS OR EQUIVALENT
5. 200A, TP&N LV Fused Switch Disconnectors PROTEUS OR EQUIVALENT
6. 63A, TP&N LV Fused Switch Disconnectors PROTEUS OR EQUIVALENT
7. Luminaries Thorn Lighting Ltd +DESIGNPLAN
8. Small Power Accessories MK Ltd Legrand
9. Structured Cable Management System Wiremould Ackermann Centaur

24
4.0 SCHEDULE OF APPENDICES:
Appendix DETAIL
Incoming Electrical Power Supply: Schedule of 800A, 8-wat TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard located in
1 Panelboard Switch Room (MCCB-1, MCCB-2, MCCB-3, MCCB-4, MCCB-5, MCCB-6, MCCB-7,
MCCB-8)
MCCB-1 Raw Power 250A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard - Training Centre
(i) MCCB-1 - Raw Power Distribution Board 1 – Training Centre
(ii) MCCB-2 - Raw Power Distribution Board 2 – Training Centre
(iii) MCCB-3 - UPS 63A, TP&N Fuse Switch Disconnector (UPS Distribution Board 1 – Training Centre
(iv) MCCB-4 - Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-1
(v) MCCB-5 - Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-2
(vi) MCCB-6 - Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-3
(vii) MCCB 7 - SPARE
(viii) MCCB 8 - SPARE
MCCB-2 Raw Power 200A, TP&N Fuse Switch Disconnector – Main Dining Hall Building
MCCB-3 Raw Power 250A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard – Junior Staff Resident
(i) MCCB-1 - Raw Power Distribution Board-1 – Ground Floor
(ii) MCCB-2 - Raw Power Distribution Board-2 - Ground Floor
(iii) MCCB-3 - Raw Power Distribution Board-1 – First Floor
(iv) MCCB-4 - Raw Power Distribution Board-2 – First Floor
(v) MCCB-5 - Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-1
(vi) MCCB-6 - Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-2
(vii) MCCB-7 - Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-3
(viii) MCCB 8 - SPARE
MCCB-4 Raw Power 250A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard – Senior Staff Resident
(i) MCCB-1 - Raw Power Distribution Board-1 – Ground Floor
(ii) MCCB-2 - Raw Power Distribution Board-2 - Ground Floor
(iii) MCCB-3 - Raw Power Distribution Board-1 – First Floor
(iv) MCCB-4 - Raw Power Distribution Board-2 – First Floor
(v) MCCB-5 - Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-1
(vi) MCCB-6 - Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-2
(vii) MCCB-7 - Raw Power VRV Outdoor Unit-3
(viii) MCCB 8 - SPARE
MCCB-5 Raw Power - SPARE
MCCB-6 Raw Power - SPARE
MCCB-7 Raw Power - SPARE
MCCB-8 Raw Power - SPARE
2 Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – Small Power Requirements
3 Schedule of Light Fittings
4 Incoming Electrical Power Supply: Schedule of Cables
5 Technical Specification - 500kVA, 400/230V, 3-Phase, 50Hz Voltage Stabilizer
6 Technical Specification - 400kVA Power Transformer
7 Technical Specification - 350kVA Power Transformer
8 Technical Specification - 30kVA EH9115 Series, 3-Phase Low Frequency Online UPS
9 Technical Specification - 350kVA, 400/230V, 3-Phase, 50Hz Generator Set
10 Technical Specification – Compound Security Solar Lights
11 Technical Specification – 2 x Fire Hydrant Booster Pumps
12 Technical Specification – Solar Powered Borehole with Submersible Pump
13 Technical Specification – In-Ceiling Mounted VRV & Wall Mounted Air Conditioning Systems
14 Technical Specification – 25kW Roof Mounted PV Solar System
25
SCHEDULE OF LV MCCB PANELBOARD:
INCOMING ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY
APPENDIX 1 – SCHEDULE OF 800A, 8way TP+N MCCB LV PANELBOARD:

1. MCCB SWITCH - 1: Reference: MCCB - 1


Location: Main LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 250A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 800A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 95mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power 250A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard – Training
Centre Building

2. MCCB SWITCH - 4: Reference: MCCB - 4


Location: Main LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 200A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 800A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 95mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 6mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power 125A Distribution Board-1 – Main Dining Hall
Building

3. MCCB SWITCH - 5: Reference: MCCB – 5


Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 250A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 1,0000A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 120mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power 250A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard – Junior
Staff Resident

4. MCCB SWITCH - 6: Reference: MCCB – 6


Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 250A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 1,000A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 95mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 16mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power 250A, 8-way TP&N MCCB LV Panelboard – Senior
Staff Resident

5. MCCB SWITCH - 7: Reference: MCCB – 7


Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 16mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: SPARE

6. MCCB SWITCH - 8: Reference: MCCB – 8


Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
26
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 25mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 16mmsq cpc
Feed to: SPARE

7. MCCB SWITCH - 8: Reference: MCCB – 8


Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 25mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 16mmsq cpc
Feed to: SPARE

8. MCCB SWITCH - 8: Reference: MCCB – 8


Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 25mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 16mmsq cpc
Feed to: SPARE

27
PROPOSED ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEARS

1. 250Amps, 12way Energy Management Panelboard with increasing emphasis on


energy conservation, we have offers the Proteus Switchgear range of intrinsic
energy management, varying from time switch and relay logic to electronic
microprocessor control*of lighting, heating and ventilation and fire/security
systems.
To meet these changing requirements in commercial and industrial applications,
Proteus Switchgear manufactures custom-designed energy management panels,
typically incorporating the following options:
1. Main incoming isolation / protection up to 800 amps
2. 24 hour essential services distribution•
3. Point of entry / exit key switch controlled services
4. Fire alarm interlocking•
5. Signage control / extended hours manual override
6. Emergency lighting test / battery discharge facility
7. Panels built to specification or in conjunction with Proteus Technical Department.

2. 3 Pole MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO IEC/EN 60947-2’ for


use as outgoing devices within and Panelboard.

3. THREE PHASE POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD


TO 10kA, MCB’s up to 63A (17.5mm Module) 10kA MCB’s 10 amps to 125A
(26.3mm Module) Unique busbar arrangement to accept MCB’s up to 125A maximum outgoing*

10kA MCB’s 125 amps (26.3mm Module)


Unique busbar arrangement to accept MCB’s up to 125 amps maximum outgoing

4. THREE PHASE SWITCH DISCONNECTORS WITH FUSES

FEATURES
Specification as Switch Disconnectors above, plus:
Internal switching mechanism also padlockable in off position
Maximum rated fuses fitted
Fully rated at AC23A category of duty (inductive load)
Screened terminals

28
5. OUTDOOR PLUG AND RECEPTACLES FOR HARSH ENVIRONMENTS

29
PV SOLAR ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION

30
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
25kVA ROOF TOP PV SOLAR PV SERVICES ENGINEERING FOR COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENTS AND CRITICAL EQUIPMENT’S AT THE ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) AT
LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

31
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PROPOSED SOLAR PV ROOF TOPSYSTEM FOR
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENTS AND CRITICAL EQUIPMENT’S AT THE ECOWAS
LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) AT LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

A. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
1.0. Introduction
2.0 Scope
3.0 Standards
4.0 Solar Panels
5.0 Solar Inverters
6.0 Charge Controller
7.0 Batteries
8.0 Equivalency of Standards and Codes:

B. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOLAR PV SYSTEM COMPONENTS


1. SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOLAR PANELS, INVERTERS & BATTERY BANK
(i) Solar Panels
(ii) Solar Inverter
(iii) Charge Controller
(iii) Batteries

C. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PEOPOSED SOLAR PV ROOFTOP SYSTEM

D. GRID / GENERATOR CONNECT SOLAR POWER GENERATING SYSTEM

32
A. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Introduction:
Nowadays many issues appear due to the fact of using fossil fuel as a primary resource in generating
electricity. The solution to such issues can be eliminated or reduced by means of using a renewable energy
such as a solar power system proposed for the Communication Equipment’s and Critical Equipment’s at
the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD)Lungi, Sierra Leone.

The first issue that is related to use of fossil fuels is the global warming, where the increase of using fossil
fuels such as oil and natural gas in generating electricity resulted several health and environmental
problems. Natural gas gives off 50% of the carbon dioxide, the principal greenhouse gas, released by coal
and 25% less carbon dioxide than oil, for the same amount of energy produced. Coal contains about 80%
more carbon per unit of energy than gas does, and oil contains about 40 percent more. Global warming has
many effects such as earth temperature increase, sea level rise.

Second issue is the air pollution. A lot of pollutants are produced by fossil fuel combustion that is used to
produce electricity such as Sulphur oxides, and hydrocarbons. In addition, suspended particles contribute
to air pollution and combine in the atmosphere to form tropospheric ozone, the major constituent of smog.

Third issue is the cost of the fossil fuel. The electricity that is produced by the fossil fuel process is more
expensive than the electricity produced by the renewable energy such as solar power.

Another issue that is noticeable nowadays is the water and land pollution. Water spills causes harm to
plants and animals life. Coal mining also contributes to water pollution. Coal contains pyrite that is a
Sulphur compound. On the other hand, Photovoltaic offers consumers the ability to generate electricity in
a clean, quiet and reliable way. To increase the PV utility, dozens of individual PV cells are
interconnected together in a sealed, weather proof package called a module. Modules are connected either
in series or parallel. The flexibility of the modular PV system allows designers to create solar power
systems that can meet a wide variety of electrical needs.

There are two broad categories of PV system namely:


(i) Grid-tied systems which are connected to the public electricity grid.
The grid-tied PV connected to the power grid at all times and do not require battery storage. A solar
PV system can provide power to a home or business, reducing the amount of power required from
the utility; when the solar PV system power generation exceeds the power needs, then the surplus
power automatically will be pumped back into the grid. A solar PV system will not operate during a
power outage unless it has battery backup.

(ii) Solar Stand-alone systems which are isolated system.


Standalone systems are totally self-sufficient with no connection to the utility grid system. They
generate electricity during daylight hours, and store excess for night time use.

(iii) Solar Hybrid Systems connected to Diesel Generator Set / Public Electricity Grid
In this project proposal, a design of a 25kVA Hybrid Solar PV System to the rooftop for the
Communication Equipment’s and Critical Equipment’s at Lungi International Airport, Freetown for
the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) is introduced where necessary components between the PV
system and the load for the required design are identified.
The proposed system integrates with the standby generator(s) for battery charging when there is no
sun light and for powering the excess load beyond what the Solar PV can power since its capacity is
less than the required capacity for the Communication Equipment’s and Critical Equipment’s at
Lungi International Airport, Freetown For The Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) loads
33
2.0 Scope:
The scope of the specifications is to cover the requirement of the design, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of Solar Panels and Inverters/ Charge Controllers and Battery banks with all components,
instruments, fittings and accessories for efficient operation without any trouble.

3.0 Standards:
PV Modules shall be manufactured to any of the International Specifications and shall comply with any of
IEEE1262 (“Recommended Practice for Qualifications of Photovoltaic Modules”), IEC 61215/ IEC 61730
and CE Certification. The Panels shall be tested based on 1000w/s ft. irradiance at site conditions.
Inverters shall comply with IEEE 929-2000 “Recommended Practice for Utility Interface of Photovoltaic
Systems”. The Modules also shall pass Salt Mist corrosion testing as per IEC 61701

4.0 Solar Panels:


The Solar panels shall be of polysilicon type of 250W rating as required. The panels shall employ the
required PV cells and suitable for Grid Connectivity/Off grid applications. The Cells shall lay embedded
in transparent EVA behind tempered glass. The glass is inset deep in an aluminium frame, there by
offering maximum protection. The back of the module shall be sealed with a high quality back sheet. The
Wiring shall be terminated in box backside of panel and shall have no cavities and completely water tight
and is resistant to Temperature and UV radiation. The efficiency of PV panels at standard irradiance shall
be minimum 85%
The broad operational parameters for Solar panels shall be as follows. However the system parameters
with any approved product shall be in the similar lines. The Modules shall be protected against surges and
also provided with Low voltage drop bypass diodes. Module junction boxes shall be weather protected
and made out of FRP/ Thermoplastic The Solar modules shall be guaranteed for 25Years for performance
(First 10years @100%, next 15years @90% and at the end of 25years @80% Efficiency) through a
corporate guarantee and supported by Insurance is preferable

Solar Modules Basic Specs:


(i) Description: 250W
(ii) Panel Peak power: 250W
(iii) Power Tolerance: +/-3%
(iv) Max. Power Voltage: 30.8V
(v) Max. Power Current: 7.8A
(vi) Open Circuit Voltage: 37.69V
(vii) Short Circuit Current: 8.34A
(viii) Module Efficiency: 14-15%
(ix) Approx. Weight: 29Kgs
(x) Operating Conditions: -40-+55deg.C
(xi) Maximum System Voltage: 1000/600V
(xii) Cable suitability: 4sq.mm
(xiii) Junction Box: IP 65 (with Surge protection device)

Each PV Module shall be provided with a RFID tag, provided inside Module laminate specifying the
following information
a) Name of manufacturer of Solar Module
b) Name of manufacturer of Solar Cell
c) Unique serial number and Model no of Module
d) Month and Year of manufacture
e) Country of Origin
f) I-V Characteristic
34
g) Peak Wattage, Im, Vm, FF of Module
h) Date and Year of Obtaining PV Module IEC qualification certificate
i) Name of Test lab issued certificate
j) Other information to trace PV module as per ISO9000

Photo Voltaic Input:


(i) Nominal Input Voltage: 700V
(ii) Input Voltage Range: 500-800V
(iii) Max PV Recommended: 80KW

MPPT Charge Controller:


(i) Switching Element: IGMT/MOSFET
(ii) Type of Charger: MPPT
(iii) Input Voltage Range: 500-700V
(iv) MPPT Voltage Range: 550-600V
(v) Efficiency: 95%
(vi)

Input:
(i) Voltage range: 900V, +10%, -15%, 3phase. 4wire
(ii) Nominal Frequency: 50HZ+/-3HZ
(iii) Nominal Power: 20KW

Battery:
(i) Recommenced no of Cells: 72Nr.
(ii) Float Voltage for VRLA: 2.25V
(iii) Boost Voltage: 2.60V
(iv) End cell Voltage: 1.75V
(v) Float Voltage stability: <1%
(vi) DC Ripple: <1%

5.0 Solar Inverters:


Solar Inverter:
The Inverter shall be suitable for indoor application and suitable for Generator/Grid Connectivity with
Input voltage and current to suit the capacity of Inverter as specified below. The Inverters shall be with
MOSFET/ IGBT/ Power transistors and with min. 92% Efficiency. It shall be possible to synchronize
number of modules to get the required output of 80KW net output „full sine wave‟ Inverter(s) having
specified DC input and 415 V, 3-ph, 50 Hz AC output to convert the solar energy in DC form to AC along
with all protection and controlling arrangement as per specification.

The efficiency of the Inverter shall be min. of 92%. (Based on availability 80KW or marginally higher
rating inverters shall be acceptable). The Inverter shall be suitable to receive EB supply, DG supply
(Through a changeover) and MPPT Charge Controller suitable to charge 250AH VRLA Batteries to
control charge the batteries and also to use the Battery power in case of non-availability of solar energy
along with all protection and controlling arrangement as per specification.

The Broad Specifications of Inverters are given below:


Inverter
(i) Nominal Output Voltage: 900V 3Phase, 50HZ
(ii) Voltage stability in steady state for input
35
(AC & DC) variations & step load 0 to nominal load): +/-1%, Based on IEC 62040-3
(iii) Voltage stability in dynamic state for input
(AC & DC) variations & step load (0 to nominal load & Vice Versa): complies with IEC 62040-3
(iv) Voltage stability in steady state for 00% load imbalance: +/- 3%
(v) Output Frequency: 50HZ+/-3HZ
(vi) Wave Form: Pure Sine wave
(vii) Technology: MOS FET Based/ IGBC Based
(viii) Duty: Continuous
(ix) Efficiency: More than 92%
(x) Protection: IP 55
(xi) Cable entry: Bottom
(xii) Temperature& RH: 50Deg.C, Up to 95% (Non Condensing)
(xiii) Noise Level: Not more than 55dB at 1mtr distance
(xiv) Control: MCB
(xv) Indications: Array ON\ Inverter ON/ Grid ON/ Input Surge/
Input UV/OV, Low/ High Frequency/ Inverter UV/ OV/ any
other as required.

6.0 Charge Controller


The proposed Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-85A) shall be a current-regulating
device that is placed between the solar array output and the batteries. The device is designed to prevent the
batteries from being overcharged or overly discharged. It unit shall work to slowly reduce the amount of
charge that follow into the battery as the battery approach it’s fully charge stage.

7.0 Solar Batteries


A range of batteries is available. HOPPECKE VR L 1700 (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) batteries that is
completely sealed and do not require topping up with distilled water, spill proof, leak proof and can be
used upside down or on their side and specifically designed for solar & green energy systems and can be
used in confined or poorly ventilated spaces is proposed. Battery installations are installed to comply with
AS4509 and AS5003 and Clean Energy Council requirements.

8.0 Equivalency of Standards and Codes:


Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods and
materials to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of the latest current edition or
revision of the relevant standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the
Contract document. Where such standards and codes are notional, or relate to a particular country or
region, other authoritative standards that ensure a substantially equal or higher quality than the standards
and codes specified will be accepted subject to the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) Project Manager’s prior
review and written consent. Differences between the standards specified and the proposed alternative
standards shall be fully described in writing by the Vendor and submitted to the Ecowas Logistic Deport
(ELD) Project Manager at least 15 days prior to the date when the Vendor desires the Project Manager’s
consent.

B. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOLAR PV SYSTEM COMPONENTS


1. SOLAR PANELS, AND OTHER COMPONENTS, TO BE INCLUDE IN THE PROPOSED KITS
a) OVERVIEW:
The solar panel industry has been going through radical changes in the last couple years. The price per
watt for solar panels has decreased more than 60% during this period. Hence, the Ecowas Logistic Deport
(ELD) is looking for best prices for the best panels to be installed at its premises at the Lungi International
Airport, Freetown.
36
The Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) notes that Solar Companies have significantly raised the standard of
module efficiency in the solar industry. They introduced innovative four busbar cell technology, which
demonstrates higher power output and higher system reliability and the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD)
have embraced this next generation of modules for their excellent performance, superior reliability and
enhanced.

b) WARRANTIES
Solar panels are a semiconductor product so their reliability and stability are very high. Manufacturing
defects usually show up very quickly and after that point they seldom experience problems. The point is
that if the initial quality is good then you should have a long and trouble-free experience.

The panels provided shall come from tier-1 manufacturers that carry a 25yrs. linear warranty. This means
they are guaranteed to generate 97.5% of rated power in year 1 and 80% in year 25.

1. SOLAR PANEL SPECIFICATION SHEETS:


a) New Technology:
(i) Reduces cell series resistance
(ii) Reduces stress between cell interconnectors
(iii) Improves module conversion efficiency
(iv) Improves product reliability

b) Management System Certificates:


(i) ISO 9001: 2008 / Quality management system
(ii) ISO/TS 16949:2009 / The automotive industry quality management system
(iii) ISO 14001:2004 / Standards for environmental management system
(iv) OHSAS 18001:2007 / International standards for occupational health & safety

c) Product Certificates:
(i) IEC 61215 / IEC 61730: VDE / MCS / CE / JET / SII / CEC AU / INMETRO / CQC
(ii) UL 1703 / IEC 61215 performance: CEC listed (US) / FSEC (US Florida)
(iii) UL 1703: CSA / IEC 61701 ED2: VDE / IEC 62716: TUV / IEC 60068-2-68: SGS
(iv) PV CYCLE (EU) / UNI 9177 Reaction to Fire: Class 1
Note: Vendors shall be committed to providing high quality solar products, solar system solutions and services

d) Key Features:
a) Higher energy yield:
(i) Outstanding performance at low irradiance
(ii) Maximum energy yield at low NOCT
(iii) Improved energy production through reduced cell series resistance
b) Increased system reliability:
(i) Long term system reliability with IP67 junction box
(ii) Enhanced system reliability in extreme temperature environment with special cell level stress release
technology
c) Extra value to customers:
(i) Positive power tolerance up to 5W
(ii) Stronger 40mm robust frame to hold wind load up to 2400 Pa
(iii) Anti-glare project evaluation
(iv) Salt mist, ammonia and blowing sand resistance apply to seaside, farm and desert environments

37
250W Solar Polycrystalline Panels

Solar Polycrystalline 250W (1650 x 992 x 40mm)


• Low voltage-temperature coefficient enhances high-temperature operation.
• Exceptional low-light performance and high sensitivity to light across the entire solar spectrum.
• 25-Year limited warranty on power output and performance.
• 5-Year limited warranty on materials and workmanship.
• Sealed, waterproof, multi-functional junction box gives high level of safety.
• High performance bypass diodes minimize the power drop caused by shade.
• Advanced EVA (Ethylene Vinyl Acetate) encapsulation system with triple-layer back sheet meets the most
stringent safety requirements for high-voltage operation.
• A sturdy, anodized aluminium frame allows modules to be easily roof-mounted with a variety of standard
mounting systems.
• Highest quality, high-transmission tempered glass provides enhanced stiffness and impact resistance.
• High power models with pre wired quickly-connect system with MC4 (PV-ST01) connectors.

Solar Polycrystalline Panels


Electrical data under STC (1)
Description Net weight Nominal Max Power Max Power Open-Circuit Short-Circuit
Power Voltage Current Current
PMPP VMPP IMPP Voc Isc
Kg W V A V A
250W-20V Poly 1650 x
18 250 30 8.33 36.01 9.40
992 x 40mm series 3a

Module SPP (032502400)


Nominal Power (± 3% tolerance): 250W
Cell type: Polycrystalline
Number of cells in series: 60
Maximum system voltage (V) 1000V
Temperature coefficient of PMPP (%): -0.47/°C
Temperature coefficient of Voc (%): -0.34/°C
Temperature coefficient of Isc (%): +0.045/°C
Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°C
Surface Maximum Load Capacity: 200 kg/m²
Allowable Hail Load: 23m/s, 7.53 g
Junction Box Type: PV-JB002
Length of Cable / connector: 900mm / MC4
Output tolerance: +/-3%
Frame: Aluminium
Product warranty: 5years
Warranty on electrical performance: 10years 90% + 25years 80% of power output
1) STC (Standard Test Conditions): 1000 W/m 2, 25ºC, AM (Air Mass) 1.5

38
e) Electrical Data / STC*:
Electrical Data CS6P 250P
Nominal Max Power (Pmax) 250W
Opt. Operating Voltage (Vmp) 30.0V
Opt. Operating Current (Imp) 8.33A
Open Circuit Voltage (Voc) 36.01V
Short Circuit Current (Isc) 9.40A
Module Efficiency 15.54 %
Operating Temperature +15°C ~ +45°C
Max. System Voltage 1000 V (IEC) or 1000V (UL) or 600 V (UL)
Module Fire Performance TYPE 1 (UL 1703) or CLASS C (IEC61730)
Max. Series Fuse Rating 15A
Application Classification Class A
Power Tolerance 0 ~ + 5W
*Under Standard Test Conditions (STC) of irradiance of 1000 W/m 2, spectrum AM 1.5 and cell temperature of 25°C

f) Electrical Data / NOCT*:


Electrical Data CS6P 250P
Nominal Max Power (Pmax) 181W
Opt. Operating Voltage (Vmp) 27.5V
Opt. Operating Current (Imp) 6.60A
Open Circuit Voltage (Voc) 34.2V
Short Circuit Current (Isc) 7.19A
*Under Nominal Operating Cell Temperature (NOCT), irradiance of 800 W/m 2, spectrum AM 1.5, ambient temperature
20°C, wind speed 1 m/s.

g) Performance at Low Irradiance:


Industry leading performance at low irradiation, +96.5% module efficiency from an irradiance of 1000
W/m2 to 200 W/m2 (AM 1.5, 25°C).

h) Module / Mechanical Data:


Specification Data
Cell Type Poly-crystalline, 6 inch
Cell Arrangement 60 (6 ˣ 10)
Dimensions 1650 ˣ 992 ˣ 40mm
Weight 18kg (39.7lbs.)
Front Cover 3.2mm tempered glass
Frame Material Anodized aluminium alloy
J-BOX IP67, 3 diodes
Cable 4mm2 (IEC) or 4mm2 & 12 AWG 1000 V (UL 1000 V) or 12 AWG
(UL 600 V), 1000 mm (650 mm is optional)
Connectors MC4 or MC4 comparable
Stand. Packaging 24 pcs, 480kg (quantity & weight per pallet)

i) Temperature Characteristics:
Specification Data
Temperature Coefficient (Pmax) -0.43% / °C
Temperature Coefficient (Voc) -0.34 % / °C
Temperature Coefficient (Isc) 0.065 % /
Nominal Operating Cell Temperature 45±2°C
39
As there are different certification requirements in different markets, please contact your sales
representative for the specific certificates applicable to your products. The specification and key features
described in this Datasheet may deviate slightly and are not guaranteed. Due to on-going innovation,
research and product enhancement, Manufacture’s reserves the right to make any adjustment to the
information described herein at any time without notice. Please always obtain the most recent version of
the datasheet which shall be duly incorporated into the binding contract made by the Sierra Leone Field
Office of the African Development Bank (ADB) and parties governing all transactions related to the
purchase and sale of the products described herein.

j) Shadow Analysis:
The shadow analysis of site has to be carried out by bidder and shall be submitted to Sierra Leone Field
Office of the African Development Bank (ADB), after placement of work order.

2. Quattro 48/10000/140-100/100 Inverter/Charger (Lithium Ion battery compatible):

Quattro 48/10000/140-100/100 Inverter/Charger

Quattro 48/10000/140-100/100 Inverter/Charger Unit Description:


1. Two AC inputs with integrated transfer switch
The Quattro can be connected to two independent AC sources, for example the public grid and a
generator, or two generators. The Quattro will automatically connect to the active source.

2. Two AC Outputs
The main output has no-break functionality. The Quattro takes over the supply to the connected loads in
the event of a grid failure or when shore/generator power is disconnected. This happens so fast (less than
20 milliseconds) that computers and other electronic equipment will continue to operate without
disruption. The second output is live only when AC is available on one of the inputs of the Quattro. Loads
that should not discharge the battery, like a water heater for example can be connected to this output.

3 Virtually unlimited power thanks to parallel operation


Up to 6 Quattro units can operate in parallel. Six units 48/10000/140, for example, will provide 54kW /
60kVA output power and 840 Amps charging capacity.

40
4 Three phase capability
Three units can be configured for three phase output. But that’s not all: up to 6 sets of three units can be
parallel connected to provide 162kW / 180kVA inverter power and more than 2500A charging capacity.

5 PowerControl – Dealing with limited generator, shore-side or grid power


The Quattro is a very powerful battery charger. It will therefore draw a lot of current from the generator or
shore-side supply (16A per 5kVA Quattro at 230VAC). A current limit can be set on each AC input. The
Quattro will then take account of other AC loads and use whatever is spare for charging, thus preventing
the generator or mains supply from being overloaded.

6 PowerAssist – Boosting shore or generator power


This feature takes the principle of PowerControl to a further dimension allowing the Quattro to
supplement the capacity of the alternative source. Where peak power is so often required only for a
limited period, the Quattro will make sure that insufficient mains or generator power is immediately
compensated for by power from the battery. When the load reduces, the spare power is used to recharge
the battery.

7 Solar energy: AC power available even during a grid failure


The Quattro can be used in off grid as well as grid connected PV and other alternative energy systems.
Loss of mains detection software is available.

8 System configuring
(i) In case of a stand-alone application, if settings have to be changed, this can be done in a matter of
minutes with a DIP switch setting procedure.
(ii) Parallel and three phase applications can be configured with VE.Bus Quick Configure and VE.Bus
System Configurator software.
(iii) Off grid, grid interactive and self-consumption applications, involving grid-tie inverters and/or
MPPT Solar Chargers can be configured with Assistants (dedicated software for specific
applications).

9 On-site Monitoring and control


Several options are available: Battery Monitor, Multi Control Panel, Ve.Net Blue Power panel, Colour
Control panel, smartphone or tablet (Bluetooth Smart), laptop or computer (USB or RS232).
10 Remote Monitoring and control
Victron Ethernet Remote, Victron Global Remote and the Colour Control Panel
Data can be stored and displayed on our VRM (Victron Remote Management) website, free of charge.

11 Remote configuring
When connected to the Ethernet, systems with a Colour Control panel can be accessed and settings can be
changed.

Technical Specifications Quattro 48/10000/140-100/100 Inverter/Charger


Power Control / Power Assist: Yes
Integrated Transfer switch: Yes
AC inputs (2x)
Input voltage range: 187-265VAC
Input frequency: 45 – 65Hz
Power factor: 1
Maximum feed through current (A): 2x100

41
A. INVERTER
Input voltage range (V DC): 9.5 – 17V, 19 – 33V, 38 – 66V
Output (1):
Output voltage: 230 VAC ± 2%
Frequency: 50 Hz ± 0.1%
Cont. output power at 25°C (VA) (3): 10000
Cont. output power at 25°C (W): 8000
Cont. output power at 40°C (W): 6500
Cont. output power at 65°C (W): 4500
Peak power (W): 20000
Maximum efficiency (%): 96
Zero load power (W): 55
Zero load power in AES mode (W): 35
Zero load power in Search mode (W): 20

B. CHARGER
Charge voltage 'absorption' (V DC): 57.6
Charge voltage 'float' (V DC): 55.2
Storage mode (V DC): 52.8
Charge current house battery (A) (4): 140
Charge current starter battery (A) 4: (12V and 24V models only)
Battery temperature sensor: Yes

C. GENERAL
Auxiliary output (A) (5): 50
Programmable relay (6): 3x
Protection (2): a-g
VE. Bus communication port: For parallel and three phase operation, remote monitoring and system
integration
General purpose com. Port: 2x
Remote on-off: Yes
Common Characteristics:
Operating temp.: -40 to +65˚C
Humidity (non-condensing): max. 95%

D. ENCLOSURE
Common Characteristics Material & Colour: Aluminium (blue RAL 5012)
Protection category: IP 21
Battery-connection: Four M8 bolts (2 plus and 2 minus connections)
230 V AC-connection: Bolts M6
Weight (kg): 45
Dimensions (H x W x D in mm): 470 x 350 x 280

E. STANDARDS
Safety: EN-IEC 60335-1, EN-IEC 60335-2-29, IEC 62109-1
Emission, Immunity: EN 55014-1, EN 55014-2, EN 61000-3-3,EN 61000-6-3,
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-1
Automotive Directive: 2004/104/EC

42
3. Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-85A)

Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-85A)

Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-85A) Unit Description:


1. PV voltage up to 150V
The Solar MPPT 150/70 and 150/85 charge controllers will charge a lower nominal-voltage battery
from a higher nominal voltage PV array.
The controller will automatically adjust to a 12, 24, 36, or 48V nominal battery voltage.

2. Ultra-fast Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT)


Especially in case of a clouded sky, when light intensity is changing continuously, an ultra-fast
MPPT controller will improve energy harvest by up to 30% compared to PWM charge controllers
and by up to 10% compared to slower MPPT controllers.

3. Advanced Maximum Power Point Detection in case of partial shading conditions


If partial shading occurs, two or more maximum power points may be present on the power-voltage
curve. Conventional MPPT’s tend to lock to a local MPP, which may not be the optimum MPP.
The innovative BlueSolar algorithm will always maximize energy harvest by locking to the optimum
MPP.

4. Outstanding conversion efficiency


Maximum efficiency exceeds 98%. Full output current up to 40°C (104°F)

5. Flexible charge algorithm


Several preconfigured algorithms. One user programmable algorithm
Manual or automatic equalization
Battery temperature sensor
Battery voltage sense option

6. Programmable auxiliary relay


For alarm or generator start purposes

7. Extensive electronic protection


Over-temperature protection and power derating when temperature is high
PV short circuit and PV reverse polarity protection.
Reverse current protection.

8. CAN bus
To parallel up to 25 units, to connect to a ColorControl panel or to connect to a CAN bus network

Technical Specifications Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-35A)


Nominal battery voltage: 12 / 24 / 36 / 48V Auto Select
Rated charge current 85A @ 40°C (104°F)
Maximum solar array input power 1): 12V: 1200W / 24V: 2400W / 36V: 3600W / 48V: 4850W
43
Maximum PV open circuit voltage: 150V absolute maximum coldest conditions
145V start-up and operating maximum
Minimum PV voltage Battery voltage plus 7 Volt to start
Battery voltage plus 2 Volt operating
Standby power consumption: 12V: 0,55W / 24V: 0,75W / 36V: 0,90W / 48V: 1,00W
Efficiency at full load: 12V: 95% / 24V: 96,5% / 36V: 97% / 48V: 97,5%
Absorption charge: 14.4 / 28.8 / 43.2 / 57.6V
Float charge: 13.7 / 27.4 / 41.1 / 54.8V
Equalization charge: 15.0 / 30.0 / 45 / 60V
Remote battery temperature sensor: Yes
Default temperature compensation setting: -2.7 mV/°C per 2V battery cell
Remote on/off: Yes
Programmable relay: DPST AC rating: 240VAC / 4A
DC rating: 4A up to 35VDC, 1A up to 60VDC
Communication port VE.Can: Two paralleled RJ45 connectors, NMEA2000 protocol
Parallel operation: Yes, through VE.Can. Max 25 units in parallel
Operating temperature: -40°C to 60°C with output current derating above 40°C
Cooling: Low noise fan assisted
Humidity (non-condensing): Max. 95%
Terminal size: 35mm² / AWG2
Material & colour: Aluminium, blue RAL 5012
Protection class: IP20
Weight: 4,2kg
Dimensions (H x W x D): 350 x 160 x 135mm
Mounting: Vertical wall mount Indoor only
Safety: EN 60335-1
EMC: EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3
4. Colour Control GX ((Firmware version v1.20)
1. Colour Control GX
The Colour Control (CCGX) provides intuitive control and monitoring for all products connected to
it. The list of Victron products that can be connected is endless.

2. VRM Online Portal


Besides monitoring and controlling products on the CCGX, the information is also forwarded to
remote monitoring systems (VRM Online Portal).

3. Future functionality
The CCGX has endless possibilities. There are many features that can be added as a firmware
update. Firmware updates are free of charge, as with all updates of Victron products. Updating the
product is easy: the CCGX will update itself automatically, as long as it is connected to the internet.
Manual updates can be done with a USB stick and microSD cards.

4. Supported products
(i) Multis and Quattros, including split-phase and three-phase systems. Monitoring and control (on/off
and current limiter)
(ii) Solar MPPT 150/70 and the MPPT 150/85. Current solar output is visible on the overview screen,
and all parameters are logged to the VRM online portal. Note that the VRM App has a nice overview
showing data of the Solar MPPT 150/70 as well. When multiple Solar MPPTs with VE.Can are used
in parallel; the Colour Control will show all information as one.

44
(iii) Solar MPPT Solar Chargers with a VE. Direct port (70/15, 75/15, 100/15, 100/30, 75/50, 100/50,
150/35) can be connected to the VE. Direct ports on the CCGX. Connecting multiple at the same
time is possible. They will all appear as a separate Solar Charger in the device list.
(iv) BMV-700 family can be connected directly to the VE. Direct ports on the CCGX. Use the VE.
Direct Cable for this.
(v) BMV-600 family can be connected to the VE. Direct ports on the CCGX. Use the VE. Direct to
BMV60xS cable for that.
(vi) Lynx Ion + Shunt
(vii) Lynx Shunt VE.Can
(viii) Skylla-i
(ix) NMEA2000 tank sensors
(x) A USB GPS can be connected to the USB port. Location and speed will be visible on the display,
and the data is sent to the VRM Portal for tracking purposes. The map on VRM will show the latest
position.
(xi) Wi-Fi USB.
Note that there are more options for products which use the VE.Direct ports, such as BMVs and small
MPPTs. They can also be connected through USB, useful when more than two products need to be
connected. Use an off-the-shelf USB-hub and the VE.Direct to USB interface, ASS030530000.

5. Other highlights
(i) When connected to the internet, the CCGX will update itself automatically when there is a new
software version available.
(ii) Multiple languages: English, Chinese, German, Italian, Spanish, French, Swedish and Dutch.
(iii) Use the CCGX as a Modbus-TCP gateway to all connected Victron products.

Technical Specifications Colour Control GX


Power supply voltage range: 9 – 70VDC
Current draw: 12VDC 24VDC 48VDC
Switched off: 0mA, 0mA 0mA
Display off: 140mA 80mA 40mA
Display at minimum intensity: 160mA 90mA 45mA
Display at maximum intensity: 245mA 125mA 65mA
Potential free contact: 3A / 30VDC / 250VAC (Normally open)

Communication ports
VE. Direct: 2 separate VE. Direct ports – isolated
VE.Can: 2 paralleled RJ45 sockets – isolated
VE. Bus: 2 paralleled RJ45 sockets – isolated
USB: 2 USB Host ports – not isolated
Ethernet: 10/100/1000MB RJ45 socket – isolated except shield

3rd party interfacing


Modbus-TCP: Use Modbus-TCP to monitor and control all products connected to the Color Control GX
JSON: Use the VRM JSON API to retrieve data from the VRM Portal

Other
Outer dimensions (H x W x D): 130 x 120 x 28mm
Operating temperature range: -20 to +50°C

5. HOPPECKE VR L 1700 Batteries:


45
Sun I Power VR L 1700 Valve regulated lead-acid batteries

a) Design Parameters:
(i) Design Life: >20 Years
(ii) Voltage: 2Volts
(iii) Capacity: 100Ah to 1700Ah

b) Typical applications:
(i) Village power supplies
(ii) Hybrid systems
(iii) Peak Shaving/voltage stabilization
(iv) Stations of mobile communications
(v) Sustainable tourism
(vi) Cathodic corrosion protection
(vii) Pumping systems

c) Benefits:
(i) Maintenance-free regarding water refilling – due to innovative Gel-technology
(ii) Very high cycle stability during PSoC1 operation – due to tubular plate design with efficient
charge current acceptance
(iii) Maximum compatibility – dimensions according to DIN 40742
(iv) Optimal space utilization – due to possibility of horizontal arrangement
(v) Higher short-circuit safety even during the installation – based on HOPPECKE system connectors
(vi) Proven long service life
(vii) Spill proof and leak proof with triple seal terminal design

Specifications:
Max. Max. Max. Max.
C100/1.85V C50/1.85V C24/1.83V C10/1.80V C5/1.77V
Series OPzV Weight Length Width Height
Ah Ah Ah Ah Ah
kg mm mm mm
Sun I power
1955 1870 1785 1545 1372 110.0 215 277 855
VR L 1700

d) Certificate of Compliance:
BS 6290: Part 4 & IEC 60896-21/22:2004
This is a British / European standard specification for sealed type valve regulated lead acid
batteries prepared under the direction of the Light Electrical Engineering Standards Committee.
This standard is of a series of standards, specifications and requirements for all types of stationary
Lead Acid Cells or Monobloc Batteries.

46
e) Accessories:
All equipment required for the correct and safe installation and maintenance of each battery is
provided, and include clear terminal covers, terminal grease, interconnects, cell numbers and
installation and operation manual

f) Guarantee:
All cells are supplied with a full replacement, ex-factory, 60 months warranty, against faulty
manufacturing and workmanship, when installed and operated in accordance with SEC’s
published Installation and Operating Instructions.

ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS REQUIRED:


The electrical safety of the array installation is of the utmost importance. Array electrical configuration
shall be in such a way that, the MPPT shall operate with maximum efficiency, between the low and high
temperature of the site. Maximal Current ripple 5% PP Power Factor 0.95 inductive to 0.95 capacitive
ambient room temperature 5 to 55 degree C

Housing Cabinet:
a) PCU is housed in suitable switch cabinet, with min IP 21 degree of Ingress Protection.
b) Weatherproof, rodents & insect proof
c) Components and circuit boards mounted inside the enclosures clearly identified with appropriate
permanent designations, which shall also serve to identify the items on the supplied drawings.
d) All doors, covers, panels and cable exists shall be gasketed or otherwise designed to limit the entry
of dust and moisture. All doors shall be equipped with locks. All openings shall be provided with
grills or screens with openings no larger than 0.95 cm (about 3x8 inch).

Other important features Electrical safety Protections:


a) General
b) Over/under voltage The PCU shall include appropriate self-protective and self-diagnostic feature to
protect itself and the PV array from damage in the event of PCU component failure or from
parameters beyond the PCU’s safe operating range due to internal or external causes.

The self-protective features shall not allow signals from the PCU front panel to cause the PCU to be
operated in a manner which may be unsafe or damaging. Faults due to malfunctioning within the
PCU, including commutation failure, shall be cleared by the PCU protective devices and not by the
existing site utility grid service circuit breaker.
a) Generator/Utility (Grid) over-under voltage protection.
b) Frequency protection.
c) Fool Proof Protection
d) Accidental open circuit
e) Internal Faults
f) Galvanic Isolation

c) Over voltage protection against atmospheric lightning


d) Protection against voltage fluctuations in the grid itself and internal faults in the power
conditioner, operational errors and switching transients.

e) Against ISLANDING:
Note: (i) MOV type surge arrestors on AC and DC terminals for over voltage protection
from lightning-induced surges
(ii) Full protection against accidental open circuit and reverse polarity at the input.

47
(iii) Inbuilt protection for internal faults including excess temperature, commutation
failure, overload and cooling fan failure is obligatory
(iv) Galvanic isolation shall be provided to avoid any DC component being injected
into the grid and the potential for AC components appearing at the array.
Galvanic isolation shall be provided between the inverter/ PCU and generator/grid
to avoid any DC component being injected into the grid and the potential for AC
components appearing at the array.

The specification of the isolation transformer shall be as follows:


 Capacity: 125% of capacity of the PV modules (i.e. a 12.5 kVA transformer
shall be used for a 10kW PV system, and so on)
 System: 3-phase, 4-wire
 Input voltage range: 320-480 V AC
 Output voltage range: 380-435 V AC
 Output voltage for single phase: 220-240 V AC
 Tap change: Manual, V+/-20%, V+/-10%, V+/-0%
 Operating frequency: 48-52 Hz
 Efficiency; >98.5%
 Impedance: 4-10%
 Output waveform: Zero distortion
 Insulation class: Class F
 Leakage current: <20 mA
 Cooling: AN

f) Earth Fault Supervision

g) Disconnection & Islanding


 Enclosure: IP 21 (if indoors) IP 54 (if outdoors)
 Operating Temperature: 0-60°C
 Cable entry: Separate input/ output enclosed cable entry
 Standard: IS 2026 - Further, it is also observed at various locations throughout the distribution grid
that the grid voltage would consistently be greater or less than the acceptable voltage window of
many inverters and PCUs.

Moreover, this variation may be only for particular days of a week, seasonal, or for a limited time. - In
such a case, the Contractor shall study/ measure the point of interconnection of the PV system consistently
for at least one week to identify the voltage range experienced at the interconnection point of the
distribution grid. Consequently, the Contractor shall adjust the input/ output of the isolation transformer to
appropriate tap settings so that the voltage on the inverter side of the transformer is always within the
acceptable voltage window of the inverter.

The appropriate tap setting shall be conveyed to the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD by the contractor. An
integrated earth fault detection device is provided to detect eventual earth fault on DC side and shall send
message to the supervisory system Disconnection of the PV generator in the event of loss of the main grid
supply is achieved by in built protection within the power conditioner. This may be achieved through rate
of change of current, phase angle, unbalanced voltages, or reactive load variants. Operation outside the
limits of power quality as described in technical data sheet shall cause the power conditioner to disconnect
the grid.

48
h) Codes & Standards
The quality of equipment supplied shall be controlled to meet the guidelines for engineering design
included in the standards and codes listed in the relevant ISI and other standards, such as:
a) IEEE 928: Recommended Criteria for terrestrial PV power systems.
b) IEEE 929 Recommended practice for utility interface of residential and intermediate PV
systems.
c) IEEE 519 Guide for harmonic control and reactive compensation of Static Power Controllers.
d) National Electrical NFPA 70-1990 (USA) or equipment national standard.
e) National Electrical Safety Code ANSI C2 (USA) or equipment national standard. Inverter /
Array Size ratio

The ratio of the Inverter continuous power rating and the array peak power rating shall be between 80 to
90% or any other value found suitable. This is because better overall annual yield can be obtained by
allowing the Inverter to operate for longer periods closer to optimal efficiency. Inverter efficiency should
exceed 90% except when operating at less than 10% of maximum output. MPPT Maximum power point
tracker is integrated in the power conditioner unit to maximize energy drawn from the array. The MPPT
shall be microprocessor based to minimize power losses. The MPPT shall have provision (manual setting)
for constant voltage operation.
i) Metering
(i) PV array energy production: Meter to log the actual amount of AC energy generated / consumed by
the PV system shall have to be provided.
(ii) Solar irradiance:
An integrating pyranometer (Class II or better) to be provided, with the sensor mounted in the plane of
the array. Readout shall be integrated with data logging, Data Logging System

a) All major parameters available on the digital bus and logging facility for energy auditing through the
internal microprocessor and can be read on the digital front panel at any time the current values,
previous values for up to a month and the average values.
The following parameters shall be accessible via the operating interface display:
• AC voltage
• AC output current
• Output power
• DC input voltage
• DC input current
• Time active
• Time disabled
• Time Idle
• Temperatures (C)
• Converter status Protective function limits (VIZ-AC over voltage, AC under voltage, Over
frequency, under frequency, ground fault, PV starting voltage, PV stopping voltage, over voltage
delay, under voltage delay over frequency, ground fault delay, PV starting delay, PV stopping
delay. Remote Monitoring System - A remote monitoring system shall be included with each
photovoltaic system. - Usually such monitoring systems are connected and synchronized with the
inverters. - Such monitoring services are provided by many leading inverter manufacturers and
also third party service providers. - The monitoring system should transmit the following data in
real-time to a central server and store it:
• DC currents, voltages and power
• AC currents, voltages and power
• Irradiation, ambient temperature, module temperature and wind speed.
• Error logs.

This data may be transmitted either using the available LAN or GSM/ GPRS, or any other mode of
connectivity available at the site. - The contractor shall be responsible for data connectivity for
monitoring up to the warranty/ O&M period of the PV system, after which, the Contractor shall
transfer all ownership rights, SIM card, account information, instructions, etc. to the Ecowas Logistic
Deport (ELD). - The contractor shall ensure that the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) is aware of the
contracts required to maintain connectivity post-warranty/ O&M period. - This data shall be accessible
49
by the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) through a secure login account. - The stored data should be
represented through hourly, daily, monthly, etc. graphs and easily downloadable in .csv or xls format.

j) Cables & accessories


For Cables & Accessories following certificates are mandatory: (Copy to be provided with tender)
General Test and Measuring Methods PVC insulated cables for working Voltages up to and including
1100 and UV resistant for outdoor installation IEC 60189 IS 694/ IS 1554 IS/IEC 69947
All the cables which shall be supplied shall be conforming to IS 1554 / 694 Part 1 of 1988 & shall be
of 650V/ 1.1kV grade as per requirement. Only PVC copper cables shall be used. The size of the
cables between array interconnections, array to junction boxes, junction boxes to PCU etc. shall be so
selected to keep the voltage drop and losses to the minimum. Certification of cables should be
submitted in the tender.

k) Control room
The required control room shall be constructed at additional cost if required. Otherwise, PCU/ Solar
Inverter should be placed/ mounted in suitable housing.

l) Spare parts
One set of essential spares for the PCU shall be provided and made available at the plant.
m) Documentation
The Vendor shall endeavour to supply sufficient information with the systems so the client can get a
comprehensive overview of all the components, their function, interaction and the potential
challenges of an off-grid solution.

All documentations shall comply with AS5033 and Clean Energy Council

Two sets of installation manual / user manual shall be supplied along with the Vendor’s submission.

The manual shall include complete system details such as array lay out, schematic of the system,
inverter details, working principle etc. Step by step maintenance and troubleshooting procedures shall
be given in the manuals. Module layout drawing has to be submitted to the Ecowas Logistic Deport
(ELD) 2 nos. set of line diagram and licensed electrical contractors’ certificate has to be submitted to
the Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD)

50
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
COMPOUND SOLAR LIGHTING SERVICES ENGINEERING FOR OFFICE BUILDINGS AT THE
ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) LUNGI, SIERRA LIONE

51
STANDALONE PV SOLAR COMPOUND SECURITY LIGHTING SYSTEM

1. Definition:
A standalone solar photovoltaic compound lighting system comprises a compact fluorescent lamp, lead
acid battery, PV module(s), control electronics, inter-connecting wires/cables, module mounting
hardware, battery box, operation instruction and maintenance manual.

2. Duty Cycle:
The system should be designed to automatically switch ON at dusk, operate throughout the night and
automatically switch OFF at the dawn, under average daily insolation of 5kWh/sq. m. on a horizontal
surface.

3. Lamp:
The lamp shall have following features:
a) 62W LED
(i) Power: 62W
(ii) Light Intensity: 5,000 lm
(i) Middle Lifespan: 50.000 hr.
(iv) Thread: E-40
(v) Providing quick and save re-lamping!
b) The light output from the lamp should be around 1800 +/- 5% lumens. Also please see (iii) of V
given below.
c) The lamp should be housed in a weather proof assembly suitable for outdoor use, with a reflector on
its back. While fixing the assembly, the lamp should be held in a base up configuration. OR 3 LED
fixtures -Specifications for 62W LED Compound Light: (Supporting Documents Required)
1. LED Type: High power of 1W each
2. Power Consumption: 62W ± 10%, maximum 1.35 W per LED with 85% driver efficiency.
3. Luminous flux efficacy ≥ 110 lm/Watt
4. Colour Rendering Index ≥ 75
5. Colour Temperature: 5500 K- 7500K (White)
6. Circuit Efficiency: ≥ 85%
7. Life expectancy/Lumen maintenance: 50000 burning hours at ambient temperature with 70%
Lumen maintenance
8. Construction: IP 65
9. Control Circuit: Compatible with LED
10. Operating temperature: - 40 0 C to 59 0 C. Following testing parameters shall be carried out at
National/NABL accredited laboratory (For luminaries):
1. Marking
2. Luminaire Power
3. Circuit Efficiency
4. Polar Curve
5. Chromaticity co-ordinates and correlated colour temperature
6. Colour Rendering Index
Note: Polar curve is a lux distribution pattern which shows whether the luminaire matches
Pole height and pole span.

4. Battery:
Following IEC/IS certificates are mandatory for the battery: (Copy to be provided with tender.) General
Requirements & Methods of Test - IEC 61427 Tubular Lead Acid- IS 1651/IS 13369
(i) Flooded electrolyte type, positive tubular plate, low maintenance lead acid battery.
52
(ii) The battery will have a minimum rating of 12V, 100 Ah/ 100Ah (at C/10) discharge rate.
iii) 75% of the rated capacity of the battery should be between fully charged and load cut off conditions.

5. Electronics:
(i) The inverter should be of quasi sine wave/sine wave type, with frequency in the range of
20-35 KHz-Half-wave operation is not acceptable.
(ii) The total electronic efficiency should be at least 85%
(ii) No blackening or reduction in the lumen output by more than 10% should be observed after 1000
ON/OFF cycles (two minutes ON followed by four minutes OFF is one cycle.
(iv) The idle current consumption should not be more than 10mA.
(iii) Electronics should operate at 12 V and should have temperature compensation for proper charging of
the battery throughout the year.
(iv) Necessary lengths of wires/cables and fuses should be provided and wiring of cables should be
through the pole with no open access to cables.
(v) The PV module will be used to sense the ambient light level for switching ON and OFF the lamp.

6. Electronic Protections:
(i) Adequate protection is to be incorporated under no load conditions e.g. when the lamp is removed
and the system is switched ON.
(ii) The system should have protection against battery overcharge and deep discharge conditions.
(iii) Fuses should be provided to protect against short circuit conditions.
(iv) A blocking diode should be provided as part of the electronics, to prevent reverse flow of current
through the PV module (s), in case such a diode is not provided with the solar module (s).
(v) Full protection against open circuit accident, short circuit and reverse polarity should be provided.

7. PV Module (s):
a. The PV module (s) shall contain crystalline silicon solar cells.
b. The PV module bidder should have IEC 61215-2nd Edition and IEC 61730-2 qualification
certification for PV modules. Copy to be provided with tender
c. The power output of the module (s) under STC should be a minimum of 120W.
d. The operating voltage corresponding to the power output mentioned above should be 16.4V
e. The open circuit voltage of the PV modules under STC should be at least 21.0 Volts.
f. The terminal box on the module should have a provision for opening for replacing the cable, if
required.
g. A strip containing the following details should be laminated inside the module as to be clearly
visible from the front side.
1. Name of the Bidder or distinctive Logo
2. Model or Type No.
3. Serial No.
4. Year of make.

8. Mechanical Hardware:
(i) Metallic frame structure (with corrosion resistance paint) with 25mm X 25mm X 3mm MS angle to
be fixed on the top of the poll to hold the SPV module (s). The frame structure should have provision
to adjust its angle of inclination to the horizontal between 0 and 45, so that it can be installed at the
specified tilt angle in the desired direction.

(ii) The pole should be made of GI medium class pipe with a height of minimum 7meters & 6mtrs above
the ground level after grouting (details shall be furnished in the offer) and final installation.

53
The pole, will be consisting of three portions with lower portion (length 4m) of 114.3mm dia. with
wall thickness of 3.65mm, and middle portion (length 1.5m) of 88.9mm diameter with wall thickness
of 3.25mm and top portion (length 1.5m) of 76.1mm dia. with wall thickness of 3.25mm and base
plate of 175mm X 175mm X 6mm. The 1 ½ inch dia. bend pipe for fixing up the lamp assembly
with suitable clamps to mount on the pole should be G.I. medium class pipe and should be
adjustable. The pole should have the provision to hold the weather proof lamp housing. It should be
painted with a corrosion resistant paint.

(iii) The battery box provided should be of a vented metallic with acid proof corrosion resistance paint
(epoxy paint) for housing the storage battery outdoors with locking arrangement. The battery box
should be tightly clamped with the pole. The thickness of MS Sheet of battery box shall be of
minimum 18 SWG. All hardware, nuts, bolts should be cadmium passivated.

(iv) The grouting of the pole should be done by PCC 1:2:3, pit must be 0.3 X 0.3 X 1 m deep below
ground level and a collar of 0.3m above ground level must be of 0.3m diameter.

(vi) Detailed drawings with specifications of each component should be submitted with the Technical
Bid.

9. Other Features:
(i) The system should be provided with 2 LED indicators a green light to indicate charging in progress
and a red LED to indicate deep discharge condition of the battery. The green LED should glow only
when the battery is actually being charged.
(ii) There will be a Name Plate on the system which will give
(a) Name of the Supplier or Distinctive Logo
(b) Serial Number
(iii) Components and parts used in the solar street lighting systems should conform to the latest BIS
specifications, whenever such specifications are available and applicable.
(iv) The PV module (s) will be warranted for a minimum period of 10 years from the date of supply and
the street lighting system (including the battery) will be warranted for a period of two years from the
date of supply.

General Conditions: applicable to all the systems:


PV modules used in solar power plants/systems must be warranted for their output peak watt
capacity, which should not be less than 90% at the end of 12 years and 80% at the end of the 25
years.
The BoS items/components of the SPV power plants/systems deployed must confirm to the latest
edition of IEC/equivalent BIS standards as specified below: BoS item/component Applicable
IEC/equivalent BIS Standard Description Standard Number Power Conditioners/Inverters*
Efficiency Measurements Environmental Testing IEC 61683 IEC 60068 2 (6,21,27,30,75,78)
Charge controller/MPPT units*
Design Qualification Environmental Testing IEC 62093 IEC 60068 2 (6, 21, 27, 30, 75, 78)
Storage Batteries General Requirements & Methods of Test Tubular Lead Acid IEC 61427 IS
1651/IS 13369 Cables
General Test and Measuring Methods PVC insulated cables for working Voltages up to and
including 1100 VDo, UV resistant for outdoor installation IEC 60227/IS 694 IEC 60502/ IS
1554(part I & II)
Switches/ Circuit Breakers/Connectors General Requirements Connectors -safety IS/IEC 60947
Part I, II, III EN 50521

54
Junction Boxes/Enclosures for inverter/ charge controller/ luminaries General Requirements
Enclosures IP 54 (for outdoor)/IP 21 (for indoor) as per IEC 529 * Must additionally conform to the
relevant national/international Electrical Safety Standards.

Proposed FAOSL Compound Solar Light

Foundation:
In this version the Batteries are positioned in a special, waterproof and stable plastic subterranean container.

Advantages:
The Batteries are protected against vandalism and high temperature.
In case we are reaching air temperature of 20-25°C around the Batteries (perfect temperature for the Batteries).
The assembly is very simple, pluggable and any chance of incorrect wiring.

The temperatures in the earth will increase hardly more than 25° degrees Celsius; through this the life time of
The batteries will increase by about 100%!
The pole is placed in a concrete pipe of 40cm in diameter and of 1m in length. The storage battery has to be
fitted into a shaft in a distance of abt. 1 meter from the pole

55
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF 1 X
500kVA, 400/230V, 3-PHASE, 50Hz VOLTAGE REGULATOR FOR OFFICE BUILDINGS AT THE
ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

56
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 1 X 500kVA, 400/230V, 3-Phase, 50Hz VOLTAGE
REGULATOR:

Description:
Bad power cost money! Disruptive and often damaging voltage sags and surges can cause unnecessary
downtime, costly equipment repairs, and lost productivity … all of which affect office and business
operations! AC voltage regulators and constant voltage transformers provide clean, stable power, thus
improving your equipment reliability and performance!

Controlled Power Company's line of AC voltage regulators ranges from 500VA to 1MVA, with
regulation tolerances down to 1% of nominal voltage.

To mitigate against disruptive and often damaging voltage sags and surges at the Facilities at the Ecowas
Logistic Depot, Lungi ELD), the proposed 500kVA, 400/230V, 3-Phase, 50Hz voltage regulation product
shall include an integral shielded isolation transformer, providing high harmonic, line and ground noise
attenuation for added power conditioning and regulation tolerances down to 1% of nominal voltage.

Power Processor Series 700F (500kVA)

Description
The Series 700F is a front access, tap switching, power conditioning voltage regulator which features a
small footprint, high efficiency design, triple-shielded isolation transformer, tight output voltage
regulation to +/- 3%, as well as optional power quality monitoring. Digital processing provides fast,
accurate regulation within 1 cycle, without over- or under-shoot. With a unique front access cabinet
design, left, right, and rear access are not required for system installation, operation or service.

The Series 700F has been shake-table tested and meets seismic standards which satisfy the
CBC 2013, and IBC 2015 standards and been recognized and accepted by most countries.

The seismic-rated Series 700F is the perfect power conditioner to meet the power requirements for the
Office Buildings at Lungi International Airport, Freetown for the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) with an
input nominal voltage of 400VAC complete floor-mounting channels.

Features & Benefits:


 Front access only! All installation, operation, maintenance, and testing can occur from the front of
the unit — no side or rear access required.
 7-tap, microprocessor-controlled for tight voltage regulation, accuracy, and stability.
 Precisely maintains correct voltage to ± 3% within 1 cycle, and maintains regulation during extended
brownouts.
 Extended input regulation range options including +10%, -40%; +15%, -25%; and +20%, -30%
 Low output impedance transformer minimizes voltage distortion and sags commonly associated with
high surge currents.
 Triple-shielded isolation transformer provides a noise-free ground, attenuates voltage spikes and
transients, and re-establishes the N-G bond.
 Internal manual bypass option maintains system isolation, voltage transformation, and power
conditioning.
57
 Superior compatibility with dynamic loads.
 Increased surge capability, without the need for automatic bypassing, provides full-time power
conditioning.
 High-efficiency design results in lower operating cost.

Technical Specs
 Input Operating Voltage Range: +10%, - 20% from nominal (Extended regulation range
options available)
 Input Frequency: 60 Hz, ± 3%
 Input Power Factor: > .99 PF with resistive load
 Reflected Harmonics: Triple harmonics are not reflected to the utility under
non-linear loads
 Output Line Voltage Regulation: ± 3% from nominal
 Response Time: < 1/2 cycle
 Correction Time: 1 cycle
 Load Regulation: 2.5% typical, no load to full load
 Overload Rating: 200% for 10 seconds; 1000% for 1 cycle
 Common Mode Noise Attenuation: 146dB
 Transverse Mode: 3 dB down at 1kHz; 40 dB down per decade to below
50 dB with a resistive load
 Transient Voltage Suppression: Meets ANSI C62.41 Category B-3
 Efficiency: 96% - 97% typical, model and load dependent
 UL 1012 Listed, C-UL Listed to CSA C22.2, No. 107.1-01

Applications
 Government / Commercial Buildings
 Broadcast Communications
 Telecommunications
 Refineries / Petro-Chemical
 Aerospace
 Printing Presses
 Food Processing Plants
 UPS Bypass & Power Distribution

SPECIFICATION OF 500kVA SERIES700F VOLTAGE REGULATOR

Power Processor - Series 700F 500KVA Power Conditioning and Regulation for Commercial &
Industrial Equipment General Specifications

1: GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics of the 500kVA Controlled
Power Voltage Regular - Series 700F

Front Access Power Processor, an AC power conditioning system with line voltage regulation.
The system specified includes all the components necessary to provide the electrical power
quality needed for the improved operation, performance and reliability of commercial and
industrial electronic equipment. Power conditioning is accomplished through use of an integral 3
phase, copper wound, triple shielded, low output impedance isolation transformer.

Integral transient voltage surge suppression is included to meet and exceed ANSI/IEEE
recommendations for surge voltages in AC power circuits. Line voltage correction is
accomplished within 1 cycle, preventing undesirable over and under voltage conditions. The

58
regulator incorporates microprocessor control, digital processing, and independent phase
regulation to provide the specified voltage, without any voltage over or under-shoots.

1.2 STANDARDS
The Series 700F Power Processor is designed in accordance with applicable portions of the
following standards:
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
C. National Electric Code (NEC)
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA Article 70)
E. FCC Article 15, Section J, Class A
F. ANSI C62.41 Category B-3
G. UL Listed to Standard 1012
H. C-UL listed to CSA Standard C22.2, No. 107.1-01 Seismic-rated units with an input
nominal voltage of 240VAC, or 480VAC are designed and tested in accordance with
applicable portions of the following additional standards:
I. OSHPD Special Seismic Certification Preapproval (OSP)
J. ICC - AC156: “Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake-Table Testing of
Non-structural Components and Systems”
K. California Building Code – CBC 2013
L. International Building Code – IBC 2015

2: PRODUCTS
2.1 Input Specifications
A. Nominal AC input voltage ratings: 600VAC, 400VAC, 3 Phase.
B. Nominal operating frequency: 50 hertz, +/- 3 hertz.

2.2 Output Specifications


A. Nominal AC output voltage: 400/230VAC, wye derived.
B. Output impedance: 3-4% typical.
C. The main power conditioning transformer includes seven (7) full capacity taps per phase,
allowing for the tight output voltage regulation specified.
D. Continuous duty output power ratings: (500) kVA / kW.

2.3 Performance Specifications


A. Input voltage range: +10, -20% with the output voltage regulated to +/- 3% typical. Extended
input voltage range options of (+10%, -40%) (+15, -25%) or (+20, -30%) are available, with the
output voltage regulated to +5%, -6% typical.
B. Response time: < ½ cycle.
C. Correction time: 1 cycle typical.
D. Output load regulation: 2.5% typical, when stepping from no load to full load.
E. Output voltage THD: < 1% THD added to the output waveform under any dynamic linear loading
conditions.
F. Input power factor: > .99 with a resistive load, and triplen harmonics are not reflected to the
utility under non-linear loads.
G. Overload rating: 200% continuous load rating for 30 seconds, 1,000% for 1 cycle.
H. Common mode noise attenuation: 146 dB minimum.
I. Transverse mode noise attenuation: 3 dB down at 1,000 hertz, 40 dB down per decade below 50
dB with a resistive load.
J. Efficiency: 96-97% typical, excitation losses shall be less than 1.5% of the KVA.
K. MTBF: > 100,000 hours.

59
2.4 Main Input Circuit Breaker
A main input moulded case, thermal magnetic circuit breaker, rated at 125% of the full
continuous load input current at the nominal input voltage, is furnished as an integral part of the
unit.

2.5 Standard Monitoring


A. Alert Light
An indicator light shows if the output has been disabled by one of the following conditions:
1. Transformer over-temperature
2. SCR thermal over-temperature

B. Indicating Lamps
Output ON indicating lamps are provided for each phase.

2.6 Main Transformer Construction


A. The transformer windings are of all copper conductor construction with separate primary and
secondary isolated windings.
B. Fully processed, low carbon, silicon-iron transformer steel is used to minimize losses and provide
maximum efficiency. Flux density does not exceed 14k gauss

C. Class N (200° C) insulation is utilized throughout with a 115° C maximum temperature rise.

D. The transformer has multiple (three) copper shields to minimize inner winding capacitance,
transient and noise coupling between primary and secondary windings. Inner winding capacitance
is limited to .001 pF or less.

2.7 Cabinet Construction


A. Design allows for front access to the status lights, input circuit breaker, serviceable parts, and
optional output circuit breaker(s), bypass switch, and metering. No side or rear access is required
for system installation, operation or service.

B. Input and output terminations are front access. Input terminations are made directly to the main
input circuit breaker and the input ground terminal provided. Output terminations are made to the
copper bus connections provided, 3 phase, neutral and ground, or the optional output circuit
breaker(s) and neutral & ground copper bus provided.

C. Conduit landing plates are provided to permit top and/or bottom entry for input and output power
connections.

D. Ventilation originates from the front of the cabinet and exhausts through the top of the cabinet.

E. The electronic control section is isolated from transformer section and power terminations.

F. Transformer section is designed for natural convection cooling.

G. The cabinet is NEMA 1 rated and constructed using a 12 gauge steel frame with 10 gauge steel
floor mounting channels. Optional locking casters, together with mounting brackets to
permanently secure the cabinet to the floor, are available.

H. Exterior panels are pre-treated and powder-coat painted with Controlled Power Company’s
standard colour

60
2.8 BTU’s / Hour, Weight and Dimensions
Output Full Load Weight (lbs) Dimensions
kVA BTU’s / Hour
Rating
500 11,883 2014 34.5”W x 36”D x 76”H

2.9 Environmental
A. Operating temperature: -20°C to +40°C.
B. Relative humidity: 0-95% non-condensing.
C. Altitude: 5,000 feet above sea level without de-rating.
D. Audible noise: < 50 dba at 1 meter distance.

2.10 Optional Equipment


A. Remote emergency power off options includes:
1. Input breaker provided with a 24VDC or 400VAC under voltage trip relay to interface with an
on-site emergency power off circuit. An external 24VDC or 400VAC power source is supplied by
others and required to energize the breaker.
2. Input breaker provided with a 24VDC or 400VAC shunt trip coil solenoid to interface with an on-
site emergency power off circuit. An external 24VDC or 400VAC power source is supplied by
others and required to shunt trip the breaker.
3. Shunt trip input breaker provided to interface with a Remote Emergency Power Off push button
station, provided on a 50 ft. cable, which terminates within the power conditioner/regulator
enclosure.

B. Manually operated rotary switch provided to bypass the regulator portion of the system. The
regulator is either on-line or bypassed with one turn of the switch. The transformer, high
frequency filtering, and electrical noise suppression remain in the circuit when in the bypass
mode.

C. Digital input and/or output meters, flush-mounted on the front of the unit for ease of operation
and viewing. Options include:
1. Shark100V4 digital meter to measure and display voltage, current, kVA, kVAh, kW, kWh,
kVARs, kVARh, power factor, frequency, and % THD. Includes a % load bar, limits exceeded
alarms, and RS485 communication using MODBUS or DNP 3.0 protocols.

2. Shark200V4 digital meter to measure and display voltage, current, kVA, kVAh, kW, kWh,
kVARs, kVARh, power factor, frequency, and % THD. Includes a % load bar, data-logging with
time stamp, programmable limit alarms on all measured parameters, a waveform scope feature to
view the real-time voltage and current waveform, and RS485 communication using MODBUS or
DNP 3.0 protocols.

3. Shark200V6 digital meter to measure and display voltage, current, kVA, kVAh, kW, kWh,
kVARs, kVARh, power factor, frequency, and % THD. Includes a % load bar, data-logging with
time stamp, programmable limit alarms on all measured parameters, a waveform scope feature to
view the real-time voltage and current waveform, and RS485 communication using MODBUS or
DNP 3.0 protocols. The meter provides power quality monitoring with event logging, advanced
harmonic analysis, and a 512 samples per cycle waveform recorder.

D. Shark200V4 or V6 digital meter provided with up to two (2) of the following options:
1. Ethernet TCP and MODBUS TCP web card.
2. Two form C relay contacts to trigger on user-set alarms.
3. Four channel 4-20mA outputs, assignable to any parameter.

61
E. Up to two (2) output circuit breakers can be selected, ranging from 15 amps, 3-pole, to the
maximum circuit breaker rating listed below. If only one (1) output circuit breaker is selected at
208VAC on units rated 75kVA and above, a higher amperage rating can be selected as indicated
below. KVA and voltage are output ratings.
KVA 400/415V
500 830A

F. Red LEDs (one per phase) provided to indicate if the source voltage exceeds the specified input
range of the regulator.

G. Output under/over voltage shutoff options included:


1. Output is electronically shut off if the output voltage exceeds adjustable limits. The system is
reset by cycling the input breaker.
2. Input breaker is shunt tripped if the output voltage exceeds adjustable limits, or a loss of power is
detected. A manual resetting of the input breaker is required.

2.11 Warranty
Controlled Power Company guarantees all systems to be free from defects in material and
workmanship for a period of (1) year following shipment from the factory.

62
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
OF A 30kVA, 3-PHASE, 50Hz, UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES (UPS) FOR THE
TRAINING CENTRE AND COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE BUILDING AT THE ECOWAS
LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

63
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION:

CONTENTS

SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

SECTION 2 SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS OF 30kVA EH9115 SERIES, 3-PHASE


LOW FREQUENCY ONLINE UPS

64
SECTION 1:

DESCRIPTION OF WORKS:

1.01 General
1.02 The Site
1.03 The Building
1.04 Site Working
1.05 Site Visit
1.06 Extent of Works
1.07 Statutory Requirements and Standards
1.08 Maintenance of Services
1.09 Site Clearance

65
A. INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

Equivalency of Standards and Codes


Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods and
materials to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of the latest current edition or
revision of the relevant standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the
Contract document.
Where such standards and codes are notional, or relate to a particular country or region, other
authoritative standards that ensure a substantially equal or higher quality than the standards and codes
specified will be accepted subject to the Project Manager’s prior review and written consent. Differences
between the standards specified and the proposed alternative standards shall be fully described in writing
by the Contractor and submitted to the Bank Project Manager at least 5 days prior to the date when the
Contractor desires the Bank Project Manager’s consent.

1. Requirement:-
To supply, install, test and commission 1 x 30kVA EH9115 Series, 3-Phase Low Frequency online UPS
complete with all installation materials and accessories at Ecowas Logistic Centre, Lungi, Sierra Leone.

1.01 General:
This Particular Specification details the requirements for the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of 2 x 30kVA EH9115 Series, 3-Phase Low Frequency Online UPS and shall be read in
conjunction with the Conditions of Contract, Tender Forms and Equipment Specifications.

1.02 The Site:


The site is the Ecowas Logistic Centre, Lungi, Sierra Leone. The buildings are Single-Story Sandcrete
Structure located within the Secure Perimeter Fence of the Establishment.

1.03 Site Working:


The installation works shall be carried out under the control and supervision of the Project M&E
Consultant Engineer.

1.04 Extent of Works:


The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission 1 x 30kVA EH9115 Series, 3-Phase Low
Frequency Online UPS at SLCB Wilkinson Road Branch Office, Freetown.

The Scope of Works shall comprise the following:


1 Supply and installation of 1 x 30kVA EH9115 Series, 3-Phase Low Frequency Online UPS including
cabling and accessories

2. Testing and commissioning of 2 x 30kVA EH9115 Series, 3-Phase Low Frequency Online UPS at
SLCB Wilkinson Road Branch Office, Freetown

1.05 Statutory Requirements and Standards:


The Works shall include for all costs to complete the installation in accordance with this Particular
Specification as scheduled.

The following Statutory Requirements and Standards shall also be adhered to by the Vendor:
a) The Regulations for Electrical Installations 17th Edition 2000. (BS 7671: 1992 - The Requirements
for Wiring Installations)
b) The relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice where applicable.
c) Health & Safety at Work Act.
d) The Electricity at Work Regulations.
e) Any other special requirements of the Electrical and Distribution Supply Authority (EDSA)

1.06 Maintenance of Services:


Any works necessitating interruption or termination of any services required to be maintained or serving
areas outside of the designated works area shall be thoroughly coordinated and not be initiated until a

66
Programme of Works indicating disruption time scales and/or temporary arrangements has been
submitted and agreed fully by all concerned.

1.07 Site Clearance:


At the end of the project, all empty packages, rubbish and unused materials and plant shall be removed
and the site left in a clean and tidy condition.

B. SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS OF 30kVA EH9115 SERIES, 3-PHASE LOW


FREQUENCY ONLINE UPS:

2. Product Description:

30kVA EH9115 SERIES, 3-PHASE LOW FREQUENCY ONLINE UPS

EH9115 Series, 3-Phase Low Frequency Online UPS advanced battery charging system enables the UPS
to supply a long backup time while the charging time is rather short, and its temperature compensation
system can help to prolong the service life of the battery. Also, its circuit is simple, which reduces the
number of components and makes the machine more compact and more reliable. Its true double-
conversion online technology provides pure and safe power supply to all appliances, communication
equipment and important loads connected to the internet, and the DSP technology responds quickly to
different power supply problems, making sure its load will work uninterruptedly. It is compatible to all
kinds of loads and widely used in the fields of energy sources, transportation, office, medical equipment,
engine-room, data center, toll station and so on.

2.01 Features:
 30kva EH9115 Series, 3-Phase Low Frequency Online UPS
 Ture double-conversion online technology;
 DSP 100% micro controlled;
 N+1 parallel redundant connection;
 High efficiency >92%;
 Dual power supply (selectable);
 Accept 100% unbalanced load;
 Cold start;
 Intelligent battery control;
 Compatible with generators;
 Powerful communication system (RS232. SNMP. GPRS);

2.02 Quality Assurance:


Qualifications:
Manufacturer Qualifications:
Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of solid State UPS of types and sizes required,
and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of 15 years.
The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall be designed to internationally accepted standards.

Installer Qualifications:
Installer shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of five years of successful installation experience with
projects utilizing solid state UPS similar in type and scope to that required for this Project.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of State and Local
Authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.
The UPS shall meet the requirements of the following standards:
67
(i) UL listed under UL 1778.
(ii) IEC 1000 4, Level 4.
The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable sections of the documents published by:
(i) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NEC
(ii) International Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
(iii) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

Factory Testing:
Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a documented test procedure to test functions of the
UPS module and batteries (via a discharge test), when supplied by the UPS manufacturer, and warrant
compliance with this Section. The manufacturer shall provide a copy of the test report.

Source Responsibility:
Materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall not have been in
prior service, except as required during factory testing.
Active electronic devices shall be solid state and shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended
tolerances for temperature or current to ensure maximum reliability. Semiconductor devices shall be
sealed. Relays shall be provided with dust covers. The manufacturer shall conduct inspections on
incoming parts, modular assemblies, and final products.

2.03 Delivery, Storage and Handling:


Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original wrappings and containers,
labeled with supplier’s or manufacturer’s name, material or product brand name, and lot number, if any.
Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area
protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
Products shall be packaged in a manner to prevent penetration by debris and to allow safe delivery by
modes of ground transportation and air transportation where specified.
Prior to shipping, products shall be inspected at the factory for damage.
Equipment shall be protected against extreme temperature and humidity and shall be stored in a
conditioned or protected environment. Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period
exceeding three months without powering up the equipment for a period of eight hours to recharge the
batteries.

2.04 Project Conditions:


Environmental Requirements:
Do not install solid state UPS until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed
and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions
are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.

The UPS shall operate under the following environmental conditions:


(i) Temperature:
UPS Module Operating: 32°F (0°C) to 104°F (40°C).
Non-Operating: 4°F (20°C) to 113°F (4°C).

(ii) Relative Humidity (Operating and Storage):


0 percent to 95 percent non-condensing

68
(iii) Barometric Pressure:
Up to 3281 feet (1000 meters) above sea level (up to 6562 feet [2000 meters] with ambient
temperature less than 82 °F [28 °C]) / up to 39,370 feet (12,000 meters) above sea level non-
operating.

(iv) Audible Noise: 69 dBA at 3 feet (914 mm).

2.05 Warranty:
Special Warranty:
The Contractor shall warrant the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract Documents
and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for period indicated below. This special
warranty shall extend the one year period of limitations contained in the General Conditions. The special
warranty shall be countersigned by the Installer and the manufacturer.

UPS Module:
The UPS shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty from the manufacturer for a period of 12
months from date of installation or acceptance by the Owner or 18 months from date of shipment from
the manufacturer, whichever occurs first.

Battery:
The battery manufacturer’s warranty shall be passed through to the final Owner and shall have a
minimum period of one year.

Additional Owner Rights:


The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

2.06 Maintenance:
The manufacturer shall, upon request, provide spare parts kits for the UPS module in a timely manner as
well as provide access to qualified factory trained first party service personnel to provide preventative
maintenance and service on the UPS module when required.

UPS subassemblies, as well as the battery, shall be accessible from the front. UPS design shall provide
maximum reliability and minimum MTTR (mean time to repair). To that end, the UPS shall be equipped
with a self-test function to verify correct system operation. The self-test function shall identify the
subassembly requiring repair in the event of a fault. The electronic UPS control and monitoring
assembly shall therefore be fully microprocessor based, thus doing away with potentiometer settings.
This shall allow:
(i) Auto compensation of component drift
(ii) Self-adjustment of replaced subassemblies
(iii) Extensive acquisition of information vital for computer aided diagnostics (local or remote).
(iv) Socket connection to interface with computer aided diagnostics system.

The UPS shall be repairable by replacing standard subassemblies requiring no adjustments.


Communication via a modem with a remote maintenance system shall be possible.
The manufacturer shall offer additional preventative maintenance and service contracts covering both the
UPS and the battery bank. Accredited professional service engineers employed exclusively in the field of
critical power systems service shall perform maintenance and service. The manufacturer shall also offer
extended warranty contracts.

69
2.07 Modes of Operation
UPS module shall be designed to operate as a double conversion, on line reverse transfer system in the
following modes.

Normal:
The inverter shall continuously supply power to the critical load. The PFC rectifier shall derive power
from the utility AC source and supply DC power to the inverter while simultaneously floats charging the
battery.

Emergency:
Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall be supplied by the inverter, which,
without any interruption, shall obtain its power from the battery.

Recharge:
Upon restoration of the utility AC power source (prior to complete battery discharge), the PFC rectifier
shall power the inverter and simultaneously recharge the battery.

Bypass Mode:
The static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the load to the bypass without interruption to
the critical power load. This shall be accomplished by turning the inverter off. Automatic retransfer or
forward transfer of the load shall be accomplished by turning the inverter on.

2.8 System Controls and Indicators:


Front Panel LCD Display:
The UPS control panel shall provide a backlit, color graphic display with choice of over 15 operating
languages for indication of UPS status, metering, battery status, alarm/event log, and advanced
operational features.

Access:
The display shall provide access to:
(i) An animated, color mimic diagram indicating UPS power flow
(ii) Measurements, status indications and events.
(iii) Bar graphs and waveforms of the measured values.
(iv) Personalization menu protected by a password, used to make specific settings.
(v) Event log with time stamping.
(vi) Access to measurements.

System Parameters Monitored:


The visual display shall display the following system parameters based on true RMS metering:

Measurements:
(i) Input voltage (Ph-Ph).
(ii) Input current per phase.
(iii) Bypass voltage.
(iv) Bypass input frequency.
(v) UPS output voltage (Ph-Ph and Ph-N) (three phase simultaneously).
(vi) UPS output current per phase (three phase simultaneously).
(vii) UPS output frequency.
(viii) UPS output percent load.
(ix) UPS output kVA.

70
(x) UPS output power factor.
(xi) Battery voltage.
(xii) Crest factor.
(xiii) Battery current.
(xiv) Battery backup time and remaining service life.
(xv) Battery temperature.

Status Indications and Events:


(i) Load on battery.
(ii) Load on UPS.
(iii) Load on automatic bypass.
(iv) Low battery warning.
(v) General alarm.
(vi) Battery fault.
(vii) Remaining back up time during operation on battery power.
(viii) Bypass source outside tolerances.
(ix) Battery temperature.
Additional indications shall provide maintenance assistance.

Display of Operating Curves:


The graphical display shall be capable of displaying curves and bar graphs of the above mentioned
measured values for significant periods.

Time Stamped Historical Events:


This function shall time stamp and store important status changes, anomalies, and faults and make this
information available for automatic or Owner requested consultation.

LED Status Indicators:


The UPS control panel shall provide three LEDs that shall signal the following status conditions:
Green LED: Load protected.
Yellow LED: Minor fault.
Red LED: Major fault, load not protected.

On/Off Switch:
The UPS shall provide the on and off buttons to start and stop the inverter. The switch shall provide a
built in time delay to eliminate the risk of inadvertent operation (additional confirmation shall be
requested). It shall be possible to remotely activate the off function via an isolated dry contact to create
an emergency power off function, resulting in:
(i) Inverter shutdown.
(ii) Opening of the automatic bypass.
(iii) Opening of the input, bypass, output, and battery switches/circuit breakers.
(v) Opening of the isolated dry contact on the programmable relay card.

Audible Alarm Reset:


The UPS shall provide an audible alarm that can be stopped using the Owner’s interface. If a new alarm
is sensed after the original alarm has been silenced, it shall reactivate the audible alarm.

71
Emergency Power Off (EPO):
The UPS shall be equipped with a local emergency power off button and dry contact input that shall be
used to command UPS shutdown remotely. Activation of this command shall lead to the following
actions:
(i) Inverter shutdown.
(ii) Opening of the static bypass switch and the battery circuit breaker.
(iii) Opening of input and output switch/circuit breaker.
(iv) Opening of an isolated dry contact on the programmable relay board.

DB 9 Connector:
One DB 9 connector with serial output shall be provided for field diagnostics.

Dry Contacts:
The UPS shall be provided standard with a programmable input/output relay board. This board shall
have eight dry contacts (i.e., six for input signals and two for output signals).
Contacts shall be programmed as:
(i) UPS on line.
(ii) Load on bypass.
(iii) UPS on battery.
(iv) UPS battery low.
(v) General alarm.
(vi) Remote UPS on (input).
(vii) Remote UPS off (input).
The contacts shall be normally open and shall change state to indicate the operating status. The contacts
shall be rated at 2.0 amperes (250 volts AC/30 volts DC).

2.9 Battery:
General:
The UPS module shall use a valve regulated sealed lead acid heavy duty industrial battery, designed for
auxiliary power service in an UPS application. The primary battery shall be furnished with impact
resistant plastic cases and housed in a matching cabinet(s) next to the UPS module.

Protection against Deep Discharge and Self Discharge:


The UPS shall be equipped with a device designed to protect the battery against deep discharge,
depending on discharge conditions, with isolation of the battery by a circuit breaker. In particular, a
monitoring device shall adjust the battery shutdown voltage as a function of a discharge coefficient to
avoid excessive discharge at less than the rated output. A second device shall avoid self-discharge of the
battery into the UPS control circuits during an extended shutdown of the UPS (over two hours).

Battery Self Tests:


The battery monitoring system shall be able to perform the following automatic functions:
(i) Battery circuit checks every 12 hours.
(ii) Open circuit battery test once a month.
(iii) Partial discharge test every three months
This self-test system shall signal faults via LEDs on the front panel or a message to remote supervision
systems.

72
2.10 Examination:
Verification of Conditions:
Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in
writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, of any conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as
satisfactory by the Installer.

2.11 Installation:
Preparation and installation shall be in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop drawings,
manufacturer’s written recommendations, and as indicated on the Drawings.

2.12 Field Quality Control:


Field Service Engineer Qualifications:
The Contractor shall employ a field service Engineer, factory trained with an accredited and proven
competence to install and service three phase UPS.

Spare Parts:
Contractor / Field Engineer shall have immediate access to recommended spare parts with additional
parts storage located in the country. Additional spare parts shall be accessible on a 7 x 24 basis from the
national depot and shall be expedited on a next available flight basis or via direct courier (whichever
mode is quickest).

2.13 Demonstration:
The Contractor shall provide the services of a train Engineer to provide start up service and to
demonstrate and train the Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD) personnel.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Train the Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD) maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
start up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
Review data in operation and maintenance manuals with the Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD) personnel.
The manufacturer shall make available to the Owner various levels of training ranging from basic UPS
operation to UPS maintenance.

2.14 Protection:
Contractor shall provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Installer
that shall ensure that the solid state UPS shall be without damage at time of Substantial Completion.

73
2.15 Technical specifications

MODEL(EH9115-) 30K3/3
General
Capacity 30KVA
Design technology True online double conversion, inverter based on igbt’s, 6 pulses rectifier, dry
ISO transformer inverter side.
Features 100% digital with last DSP technology / compatible with worldwide UPS
monitoring system, immune to phase rotation input (for rectifier ) / dual input
(optional)/LCD display / thermomagnetic protection for input, output, bypass
and battery / UPS parallel ready with other UPS of the same capacity for
redundancy /
Estimated useful life > 20 years
Efficiency ac / ac ECOMODE >98%, inverter> 92%, AC-AC 91%
Input
Voltage (*) 3×380/220 vac ± 25% (165v to 275v)
Thermomagnetic protection Thermomagnetic breaker
Lead wires (*) 3 phases + neutral + ground
Frequency (*) 50hz ± 25% (42.5hz to 62.5hz)
Power factor 0.8 typ at full load
Technology Rectifier 6 PULSES, immune to phase rotation for rectifier input.
Inverter
Voltage (selectable) (*) 3×380/220 vac ± 1%
Lead wires (*) 5 wires ( 3 phases +neutral + ground )
Thermomagnetic protection Thermomagnetic breaker for output
Frequency 50hz ± 0.1%
Waveform type Sine wave generated by the inverter with high frequency pwm
Harmonic voltage distortion t.h.d <2% for linear load / <5% for non-linear load
Crest factor 2.8 to 3.2
Power factor 0.9
Overload recovery. Automatic
Isolation transformer Dry type for inverter – voltage 380v/220v
Voltage regulation ± 1% for balanced load.
Overload capacity (*) 125% for 12 minutes. / 150% for one minute / 200% one cycle
Short circuit protection Transfer to bypass
Bypass
Voltage 3×380/220 vac +-25% (adjustable)
lead wires (*) 5 wires ( 3 phases +neutral + ground )
Static, solid state, 0 mseg for standard transfer, < than half cycle for failure
Automatic Bypass
transfer.
Thermomagnetic breaker for manual bypass, uninterrupted operation in normal
Manual bypass
transfers.
Emergency Power Off local EPO and / or remote
Fast fuse and thermomagnetic input breaker (different of manual bypass
Protection and short circuit
breaker).
Battery
Breaker protection. Turn the system off when the battery is low. Battery test.
Thermomagnetic protection
Smart charger.
Cold start Yes
Quantity 32 pcs (29 to 32 pcs adjustable) ***
Voltage Nominal 384 V, Float 435 (Adjustable)
Type (*) Sealed and maintenance free. technology VRLA (valve regulated lead acid)
Backup time at full load (*) Customize

74
MODEL(EH9115-) 30K3/3
Typical recharge time. 4 hours 90%
Battery management. Auto-test, adjustable battery transfer point and settings of alarm.
Charger Soft start to full load. Adjustable current for charge batteries.
General
Capacity 30KVA
Protections and Standards
Thermomagnetic breaker for input, thermomagnetic breaker for output,
thermomagnetic breaker for battery and thermomagnetic breaker for manual
hardware protection bypass, surge protection, fast acting bypass fuse, fast-acting fuses in dc and
bypass, fan, redundant power supply, 5 zones temperature sensors, on-off
switch, audible alarms.
Discharge batteries, manual shutdown Inverter, manual bypass switch active,
emergency power off , manual shutdown, SCR failure, bypass rotation failure,
bypass out of range, overload, low battery, low output voltage, high output
Software protection and warning voltage, DC fuse open, power supply 5v , power supply 14v, inverter
overvoltage, overload greater than 200% , transfer failure, inverter voltage out
of range, ground and neutral high, SCR inverter fail, UPS in bypass mode, low
frequency, charger ON, inverter ON and others.
Standards EN 62040-1 safety , EN 62040-2 EMC/EMI , C62.41 surge protection
Monitoring and
Communications
GPRS Compatible with Global UPS monitoring system **
Standard: LCD display 240 * 128 reading electrical parameters. Touchscreen.
LED mimic. Input voltage, bypass voltage, output voltage , inverter voltage,
output current, ground to neutral voltage, input frequency, output frequency,
Front panel
bypass frequency, active power, reactive power, total power, ISO transformer
temperature, IGBT temperature, DSP temperature, battery or environment
temperature, battery voltage, battery current, two power supply voltage etc.
Alarms Audible and visual alarms for non-normal conditions.
RS232 serial port. Dry contacts, snmp-rj45 for remote monitoring (optional).
Communications
GPRS module for remote monitoring via GPRS network (optional).
UPS Conditions
Temperature 0°c to 40°c
Relative humidity. 0 to 95% noncondensing
Audible noise <65 db
Dimensions and Weight
UPS dimensions in mm
540*622*1125
(Front *Height * Deep)
UPS weight in kg 273

75
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING OF 400 & 350kVA 11 KV / 0.433 KV DEDICATED GROUND-MOUNTED POWER
TRANSFORMER (ANSI/IEC STANDARDS) COMPLETE WITH ALL INSTALLATION MATERIALS
AND ACCESSORIES AT THE ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD), LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

76
INDEX
1. SCOPE OF JOB
2. SERVICES & EQUIPMENT TO BE EXCLUDED
3. PRE-QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR SUPPLIER
4. CODES AND STANDARDS
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6. AMBIENT CONDITIONS
7. TANK CONSTRUCTION
8. CORE AND WINDINGS
9. LOADING CAPABILITY
10. RADIATORS
11. INSULATING OIL
12. TERMINALS AND MARSHALLING BOX
13. COOLING
14. TAPPINGS AND CONTROLS
15. NOISE
16. PAINTING:
17. TERMINAL MARKINGS
18. ACCESSORIES
19. O&M SPARES
20. QUALITY ASSURANCE, TESTING & INSPECTION
21. TOLERANCES
22. GUARANTEE
23. DELIVERY
24. COMMISSIONING
25. DRAWINGS, DATA & DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
26. DATA SHEET -1
27. DATA SHEET -2

77
Equivalency of Standards and Codes
Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods and materials
to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of the latest current edition or revision of the
relevant standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract document.
Where such standards and codes are notional, or relate to a particular country or region, other authoritative
standards that ensure a substantially equal or higher quality than the standards and codes specified will be
accepted subject to Bank Project Manager’s prior review and written consent. Differences between the
standards specified and the proposed alternative standards shall be fully described in writing by the Contractor
and submitted to the Bank Project Manager at least 5 days prior to the date when the Contractor desires the
Bank Project Manager’s consent.

1. REQUIREMENT:
To provide a dedicated 400 & 350kVA 11 KV / 0.433 KV Ground-Mounted Power Transformer EDSA
Supply to the Ecowas Logistic Depot, Lungi, Sierra Leone

2. SCOPE OF JOB
a) This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection & testing at manufacturer's works, proper
packing, safe delivery, commissioning, pre & post commissioning test at site of one no. of 400kVA,
11 KV / 0.433 KV transformers (oil filled) suitable for outdoor installation.

b) 10% spare oil quantity for transformer and spares as indicated in the other section of the specification
shall also the part of supply. The transformer shall be provided with all fittings & accessories
(including foundation hardware) & shall be complete in all aspects, for satisfactory operation, in
accordance with this specification & technical particulars. Design ambient temperature shall be 50deg.
C

c) It is not the intent to specify herein all the details of design & manufacture. However, the equipment
shall conform in all respect to high standards of design engineering and workmanship and shall be
capable of performing in continuous efficient operation and confirming to all relevant standards.

d) Supplier/Contractor shall confirm total compliance to the specification without any deviation from the
technical/ quality assurance requirements stipulated.

3. SERVICES & EQUIPMENT TO BE EXCLUDED


a) Shifting of transformer from department’s store to site.
b) Installation and erection of transformer.
c) Civil work such as transformer foundation, cable trenches etc.
d) External power connection for HV & LV side of transformer.
e) HV/LV termination kits.
f) Connection to station earth.

4. QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR BIDDER


a) Only transformer manufacturer or their authorized dealer can supply this Transformers .In case of
authorized dealers, they should submit the latest authorization certificate from the respective Transformer
manufacturer on behalf of whom they are suppling.

b) The supplier should submit the documentary evidence for designed, manufactured and supplied at least ten
numbers of similar or higher rating oil type transformers during the last five years
In case of authorized dealer the documentary evidence of OEM will be considered.

c) Following details for minimum three transformer of similar or higher rating working satisfactorily for more
than two year after commissioning supplied in last five years.
1. Name of the customer / company where the Transformer is installed.
2. Complete postal address of the customer.
3. Year of commissioning.
4. KVA Rating of the Transformer.
5. Name and designation of the contact person of the customer

78
6. Phone and email address of the contact person of the customer.
7. Performance certificate from the customers regarding satisfactory performance of Transformer supplied
to them

Offered transformer will be out rightly rejected if fail to meet above all the three conditions (3 (a), (b) & (c))

5. CODES AND STANDARDS


The transformer shall comply with the latest edition for the following and other relevant standards/Manual
for:
a) Insulating oil
b) Thermal evaluation and Classification of electrical insulation.
c) Power transformers
d) Bushing for Alternative voltages above1000V.
e) Current transformers.
f) Dimensions for porcelain Transformer Bushings
g) Gas operated relays.
h) Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers
i) Fitting & accessories for power transformers
j) Application guide for CTs.
k) Application guide for ON-load tap changers
l) On-load tap changers (Amendment 1)
m) LV switchgear and control gear - Part 1 General rules.
n) Neutral Grounding Devices- Standard Requirements, Terminology and Test Procedure
o) ASTM standard A240-304
p) CBIP Manual on Transformers

Transformer shall also conform to the provisions of the latest revisions of the Standard Electricity rules and
any other statutory regulations currently in force.

6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a) The offered equipment shall be brand new with a proven field track record. No prototype equipment
shall be offered.

b) The supplier shall be responsible for design, engineering and manufacturing of the equipment to fully
meet the intent and requirements of this specification and attached data sheets.

c) The transformer and accessories shall be designed to facilitate operations, inspection, maintenance and
repairs. All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under such sudden
variations of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system, including
those due to short circuit.

d) All material used shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working, under the
conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperatures and atmospheric conditions
arising under working conditions without undue distortion or deterioration or the setting up of undue
stresses in any part, and also without affecting the strength and suitability of the various parts for the
work which they have to perform.

e) The transformer should be a rectifier duty of suitable K factor.

7. AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Transformer and all its accessories and allied systems shall be suitable for operating satisfactorily in humid
and corrosive atmospheres found in Freetown, Sierra Leone. The design temperature of 50°C and an altitude
not exceeding 1000m above mean sea level shall be considered.

8. TANK CONSTRUCTION:
a) The transformer tank and cover shall be fabricated from high grade low carbon steel suitable for
welding and of adequate thickness. The tank of transformer shall be complete with all accessories and

79
shall be designed so as to allow the complete transformer in the tank and filled with oil, to be lifted by
crane or jacks, transportation by road without over straining any joints and without causing leakage of
oil.

b) The main tank body excluding radiator, cooler etc. shall be capable of withstanding vacuum
34.7 KN / sq. m (250 mm of Hg).

c) The base of the tank shall be so designed that it shall be possible to move the complete transformer unit
by skidding in any direction without any damage when using plates or rails.

d) All covers and seals shall be oil and airtight and shall not be affected by mineral or synthetic oil action.
Detachable radiators equipped with air vent, drain plug and lifting lugs shall be provided with shut-off
valves to permit removal of any radiator unit without emptying the tank. Radiators shall be securely
braced to prevent undue vibration.

e) All fasteners and bolts etc. shall be cadmium plated. All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly
cleaned, de-scaled, made free from rust and transformer shall be epoxy painted. Paint shall be suitable
to withstand specified atmospheric conditions.

f) Different parts of transformers shall be connected by copper flexible for earth continuity purpose.

g) Transformer tank shall be mounted on bi-directional rollers. Suitable locking arrangement shall be
provided to prevent accidental movement of transformer.
Tank shall also be provided with lifting lugs. Preferably 4Nr. and 2Nr. lifting lugs for tank and top
cover respectively.

h) Conservator tank of adequate capacity for expansion of oil from minimum ambient to 100oC shall be
provided. The transformers shall be provided with conventional conservator with dry air filling of the
space above oil and connected to silica gel breather.

i) The transformer shall be provided with riveted rating plate of min. 8 SWG aluminum anodized material
sheet in a visible position; the entries of the rating plate shall be marked by “etching of engraving”.

9. CORE AND WINDINGS


a) Transformer shall be double wound, core type with high grade prime cold rolled non-aging grain
oriented low loss, high permeability silicon steel laminations perfectly insulated and clamped to
minimize vibration and noise. Care shall be taken to insulate core fastening bolts to reduce losses and
avoid hot spots. All parts of magnetic circuit shall be bonded to earth system.

b) Windings shall be of high grade electrolytic copper and shall be designed to withstand the applicable
thermal and dynamic short circuit stresses.

c) Adequate lifting lugs shall be provided to enable the core and winding to be lifted.

d) Adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of the core and winding relative to the tank
during transportation, installation or while in service.

e) Maximum flux density in any part of the core & yoke on any tap position with ±10% voltage variation
from voltage corresponding to the tap shall not exceed 1.9 Wb/sq. mtr. However under normal
condition it should be around 1.5 Wb / sq. mtr.

10. LOADING CAPABILITY:


Transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation at rated kVA on any tap with voltage variation of +
10 % corresponding to voltage of the tap and shall be engineered, manufactured and tested according to IEC
/ BS 60076 Standard.

11. RADIATORS
a) Tank mounted radiator with shut off valves shall be provided.
80
b) All valves shall be of gun metal or cast steel or may have cast iron bodies with gun metal fittings.

12. INSULATING OIL


As per IEC/BS Standards. No external inhibitors are permitted.

13. TERMINALS AND MARSHALLING BOX


a) Cable box, with D.O.P. of IP: 55 shall be provided for terminating the cables directly

b) Handles for lifting cable box shall be provided.

c) Windings shall be brought out on suitable nickel-plated copper terminals forcible termination. Wherever
specified in the data sheet, suitable arrangement shall be made for bus duct connection to the LV
terminals. Unless otherwise specified, the HV side termination shall be from the bottom.

d) Terminal chamber for Cable termination shall have a gasket cover plate, bolted to it. Separate inspection
covers shall be provided to facilitate connection and inspection.

e) Gland plate shall be of non-magnetic material. The head-room available between cable gland plate and
terminals shall not be less than 600mm and cable box and disconnecting chamber shall be air insulated.

f) LV terminals are specified to be connected by means of a bus duct for this purpose a flanged throat or
equivalent connection shall be provided to suit purchaser’s bus duct. Details of bus duct shall be
furnished during detail engineering stage.

g) Marshaling box shall be IP 55.

h) All protection, alarm and indication devices and neutral CTs shall be wired by means of PVC insulated
cables up to the marshaling box. The marshaling box shall be fabricated out of minimum 3mm thick
cold rolled sheet steel. There shall be two gland plates, one for internal wiring to the marshaling box
from various devices which shall be glanded and pre-wired, while the second gland plate shall be
removable and undrilled for glanding outgoing cables.

i) The terminal blocks shall be complete with insulating barriers and clip-on type terminals suitable for
2.5 sq.mm stranded copper wires. At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided.

j) CT terminals shall be with shorting and disconnecting facility.

k) The marshaling box shall be provided with thermostatically controlled space heaters and shall have IP:
55 degree of protection.

l) One neutral terminal shall be part of phase connection arrangement bus duct throat and a separate
neutral terminal outside shall be provided for earthing of transformer winding neutral on the secondary
side. The neutral terminal shall be complete with connector block assembly for easy termination of GI
earth strip. Neutral CTs shall be mounted before the bifurcation point for earthing of the neutral. One
suitably sized GI strip shall be extended from the earthing neutral terminal up to a bushing at grade level
for connection to plant earthing system.

14. COOLING
The transformers shall be natural air-cooled (ONAN)

15. TAPPINGS AND CONTROLS


a) Primary off-circuit tap changing links shall be provided and shall have ranges specified in the data sheet.
Under conditions of external short circuit, the tap changing device shall be capable of carrying the same
current as the windings.
b) The handle shall be metallic and adequately sized in order to allow operation without the need of tools and
be located in a directly accessible position.
c) The handle shall be provided with padlock facilities to lock the tap changer in the desired position.

81
16. NOISE
Audible Noise level shall not exceed the limits indicated in CBIP manual.

17. PAINTING:
Paint shade shall be considered during detail engineering however the type / quality of paint should be as
per relevant standard or as specified in CBIP manual and should be suitable for chemical atmosphere & for
places very near to the sea coast. Successful supplier shall furnish painting specification/ procedure to be
used for purchaser approval during detailed engineering.
Adequate quantity of touchup paint shall also be supplied. There shall be no commercial or delivery
implication to purchaser on account of paint shade, paint specification/procedure.

18. TERMINAL MARKINGS:


High voltage phase windings shall be marked both in the terminal boards inside the tank and on the outside
with capital letter 1U, 1V, 1W and low voltage winding for the same phase marked by corresponding small
letter 2u, 2v, 2w. The neutral point terminal shall be indicated by the letter 2n. Neutral terminal is to be
brought out and connected to local grounding terminal by an earthing strip.

19. ACCESSORIES
The following accessories shall be provided as a minimum:
a) Rating Plate
b) Terminal marking Plate
c) Two body earthing terminals
d) Neutral CT
e) De-hydrating breather
f) Conventional type conservator with drain plug and oil filling hole.
g) Air release Device (for transformers with conservator)
h) Oil Level indicator with minimum marking
i) Digital / Dial type OTI & WTI with alarm and trip contact
j) Pressure relief valve with contact
k) Sampling valve
l) Conservator drain valve
m)Top oil filter valve
n) Drain cum bottom filter valve
o) Double float Buchholz relay with alarm and trip contact
p) Terminal box
q) Marshalling box (IP-55)
r) Conservator with oil filling plug and cap, oil drain valve, oil level gauge in addition to magnetic /
electronic oil level gauge

20. O&M SPARES:


O & M spares are those which are required for satisfactory & trouble free operation of equipment.
List of O&M spares which are to be supplied as a one lot are as follows (price deemed to be included in the
total price)
Item. Item Net Qty.
No.
1 HV bushing with metal parts & gaskets 1no.
2 LV bushing with metal parts & gaskets 1no.
3 WTI with alarm & trip contacts 1no.
4 OTI with alarm & trip contacts 1no.
5 Magnetic oil level gauge 1no.
6 Diaphragm of explosion vent 1no.
7 Buchholz relay 1no.
8 Silica gel charge Three charge 1no.
9 Pressure relief device 1no.

82
21. QUALITY ASSURANCE, TESTING & INSPECTION
a) The successful Supplier and Contractor shall submit the QAP for purchaser’s approval. There shall be
noncommercial implication to purchaser on account of QAP approval.

b) All materials, components and accessories of the transformers shall be procured, manufactured, inspected
and tested by Supplier/Contractor asper approved quality plan.

c) All routine tests on each transformer as per relevant IEC/BS standards and specification shall be carried
out in presence of supplier’s representative and heat run test on the offered transformer are to be carried
out in presence of Contractor’s representative. Charges for all these tests for all the equipment &
components shall be deemed to be included in the price.

d) Supplier shall furnish valid type Test certificates already carried out on similar transformers from a
reputed institute (other than bidder) along with offer. This Test Certificates shall not be older than 5
years. In absence of this certificate the offer is liable to be rejected.

22. TOLERANCES:
The tolerances in various parameters during test shall be applicable as per IEC/BS approved standards

23. GUARANTEE
The manufacturers of the transformer shall provide a guarantee of 18 months from the date of receipt at the
stores of the Utility or 12 months from the date of commissioning, whichever is earlier. In case the
distribution transformer fails within the guarantee period the purchaser will immediately inform the
Supplier/Contractor who shall take back the failed Distribution Transformer within 15 days from the date of
the intimation at his own cost and replace/repair the transformer within forty five days of date of intimation
with a roll over guarantee.

24. DELIVERY
The transformer to be delivered and installed at:
The Ecowas Logistic Depot
Lungi, Sierra Leone

The project is located at the Ecowas Logistic Depot Lungi, Sierra Leone

25. COMMISSIONING:
a) The installation, erection and commissioning shall be done as per manufacturer’s guidelines and all
installation shall comply with the requirements of Standard Electricity Act, Rules and relevant standards.
b) The installation and erection of the transformer will be carried out by Contractor on site. However while
commissioning the OEM’s engineer should present for commissioning. Necessary manpower support
will be provided by Contractor
c) The civil foundation work shall be done by Contractor but supplier has to submit the foundation details.
d) Any special tools, tackles required for commissioning of the transformer shall be in the scope of
Supplier/Contractor.
26. DRAWINGS, DATA & DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED:
The following shall be submitted along with the offer:
a) The enclosed Data Sheet filled up completely
b) Clause – wise deviation, if any other wise nil deviation statement to be submitted.
c) Outline General Arrangement Drawings
d) Type Test certificates

The following documents shall be submitted after placement of order for purchaser’s approval:
a) Vendor drawing submission schedule.
b) Technical data sheet, overall General Arrangement Drawing clearly showing accessories, termination
details, foundation details with roller arrangement, BOM etc..

83
c) Original equipment manufacturer certificate for core and winding material
d) General Arrangement of Marshaling Box.
e) Rating & Diagram Plate Drawing.
f) Valve Schedule Plate Drawing.
g) Cable Box Arrangement Drawing.
h) Loss flux density, heat dissipation calculation sheet
i) GA drawing for tap changer.
j) Bushing/ Insulator Drawings.
k) Quality Plan.
l) Routine and heat run test procedure
m)Wiring Diagrams.
n) Recommended Field Quality Plan
o) Routine test reports
p) O & M manuals which broadly includes following minimum information:
I. General description of equipment
II. Approved Technical Data Sheet
III. Salient constructional features
IV. Technical leaflets of fittings/ important parts
V. All drawings
VI. Type and routine test certificates
VII. Instructions to be followed on receipt of equipment at site &for storage
VIII. Instructions for foundation arrangement
IX. Erection procedures and checks
X. Pre-commissioning checks
XI. Commissioning procedures
XII. Withdrawal arrangement/ material handling instructions
XIII. Operation instructions
XIV. Maintenance instructions.
XV. Trouble-shooting.
XVI. Safety instructions.
XVII. Maintenance schedule
The final set of various drawings/ documents shall be submitted in triplicate.

84
27. DATA SHEET -1
Item
Description Particulars
No.
1 Application For distribution to Assorted loads
2 Equipment Oil immersed transformer
3 Quantity 1
4 Power rating(continuous) 400 & 350kVA
5 No. of phases 3
6 Frequency 50 Hz + / - 3%
7 Voltage HV 11KV
8 Voltage LV (full load) 0.415 KV
9 No load transformation ratio 1 KV / 0.433 KV
10 Vector group Dyn 11
11 Efficiency >98.5%
12 Type of cooling ONAN
Impedance voltage at rated voltage and frequency
13 Impedance voltage at rated current and frequency should be given along with the offer meeting the
requirement of system fault level and voltage regulation
Off circuit tap changer with a tapping range of +5% to -
14 Type of tap changer
5% in steps of 2.5%
15 Temperature rise
16 Winding (by resistance method) 55o C temp rise over 50o ambient
17 Top oil (by thermometer) 50o C temp rise over 50o ambient
18 Type of installation Out door
19 System highest voltage 12 KV (HV)
0.433 KV (LV)
20 Insulation level
A One minute power frequency withstand voltage 8 KV (HV winding)
3 KV (LV winding)
B Impulse withstand voltage 75 KV (HV winding)
21 Terminal details
A HV line Cable box (XLPE cable)

B HV neutral NA
LV line Cable box suitable for terminating 9nos. of single core
C
1000sqmm. Aluminium PVC cable
LV neutral One neutral as part of LV cable and second neutral for
D
system earthing
System fault level
22 HV side 4.6 KA
LV side 50 KA
23 Details of cooling system Detachable tank mounted radiators
CT is to be provided for protection. The details of CT
24 Provision / accommodation of CTs LV neutral
for protection system to be given along with offer.

85
28. DATA SHEET -2
GUARANTEED AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR TRANSFORMERS
(To be furnished by the Manufacturer)
Item
Description Details
No.
1 Make
2 Place of Manufacture
3 Voltage Ratio
4 Rating in kVA
5 Vector group
Full load current
6 HV
LV
NO load current
7 HV
LV
8 Type of cooling
9 Percentage impedance at 75o C
10 Core Material used and Grade
11a Flux density
11b Over fluxing without saturation (Curve to be furnished by the
Manufacturer in support of his claim)
12 Maximum temperature rise of
12a Windings by resistance method
12b Oil by thermometer
13a. 90% Voltage
13b 100% Voltage
13b. 110% Voltage
No load loss in watts (Wi)* No load loss in watts (Wi)*
14
Wi = Wi =
15 Resistance of windings at 20o C (with 5% tolerance)
15a HV Winding (ohms)
15b LV Winding (ohms)
16 Full load losses (watts) at 75o C
17 Total Losses at 50% load at 75o C
18 Clearances : (mm)
18a Core and LV
18b LV and HV
18c HV Phase to Phase
18d End insulation clearance to earth
19 Efficiency at 75o C at unity p.f
19a 125% load
19b 100% load
19c 75% load
19d 50% load
19e 25% load
20 Efficiency at 75o C at 0.8 p.f.
20a 125% load
20b 100% load
20c 75% load

86
Item Description Details
No.
20d 50% load

20e 25% load


21 Mass of : (kg)
21a Core lamination (minimum)
21b Windings (minimum)
21c Tank and fittings
22 Oil quantity (minimum) (litre)
23 Dimension of transformer
23a Overall length x breadth x height (mm x mm x mm)
23b Tank length x breadth x height
24 Thickness of plates for
24a Side plate (min)
24b Top and bottom plate (min)
25 Conservator Dimensions
26 Inter layer insulation provided in design for
26a Top and bottom layer
26b In between all layer
26c Details of end insulation
27 Insulation materials provided
27a For Conductors
HV
LV
27b For Core
28 Insulation level
One minute power frequency withstand voltage
28a HV
LV
Impulse withstand voltage
28b HV
LV
29 Terminal details
29a HV line
29b LV line
30 Current density of winding conductor
*This figure shall be considered as guaranteed losses and shall be used for computing total owing cost.
If bidder failing to furnish this information then, offer will be out rightly rejected

87
ANNEX-I:
1. STANDARD FITTINGS:
 3Nr. porcelain bushings for H.V.
 4Nr. porcelain bushings for L.V. and neutral
 H.V. off-load tapping switch
 Lifting Lugs
 Bursting valve type over – pressure valve
 Oil drain valve
 Skids
 High quality mineral oil first filling with certification
 Earthing terminal
 Rating plate

2. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
- Drawings shall be issued 7 – 10 days after confirmed order.
- Test certificates shall be issued before transformers are shipped
Testing included on Transformer Unit
(a) Measurement of winding resistance,
(b) Ratio, polarity and phase relationships,
(c) Impedance voltage (Principal Tapping),
(d) Load losses,
(e) No load losses and no load current,
(f) Applied potential and induced potential (Induced overvoltage withstand),
(g) Separate source voltage withstand

ANNEX-2:
OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS
1) ELIGIBILITY;
Reputed Transformer manufacturer or their authorized dealer can quote for this Transformers .In case
of authorized dealers they should submit the latest authorization certificate from the respective
Transformer manufacturer on behalf of whom they are quoting.

2) TRANSPORTATION AND PACKING;


The transformer to be delivered and installed at:
The Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD)
Lungi, Freetown
Sierra Leone

The project is located at the Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD), Lungi, Freetown, Sierra Leone
The quoted rates should be inclusive of packing, forwarding and transportation to this site.

3) PROOF OF CAPABILITY:
The party should have manufactured and supplied at least 20
Transformers of similar rating and above in last 5 years. The party should enclose the copy of above
particulars along with the quotation.

4) GUARANTEE:
The Contractor should give a guarantee of eighteen months from the date of dispatch or 12months from
the date of commissioning of the transformers at site.

88
5) INSPECTION AND TESTING:
The Transformers will be tested at the Contractor’s works before the delivery to site of the
Transformers in presence of Contractor’s engineer. The Contractor should conduct routine and type
tests as per IEC/BS Standards.
The charges for the above testing should be included in the cost offered.

6) CATALOGUES, DRAWINGS, CERTIFICATES AND MANUALS:


While quoting the Contractor should attach detailed catalogues, drawings, certificates and manuals so
that it is possible to evaluate their offers.

7) COMMISSIONING:
The erection of the transformers will be carried out by Contractor at the site. However while
commissioning the party’s engineer should be present and he should carry out the commissioning.
Necessary man power support will provided by the Contractor.
The charge for commissioning is to be included in the offer.

89
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION

90
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSYALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
CONFORT COOLING VRV / VRF AND SINGLE SPLIT WALL MOUNTED AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS AND CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION FOR OFFICE BUILDINGS AT THE ECOWAS
LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE.

91
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION THE SUPPLY, INSYALLATION, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING OF CONFORT COOLING AIR-CONDITIONING AND CONTROL SYSTEM FOR
OFFICE BUILDINGS AT THE ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

A. SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


1 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION
1.1 Installation to Comply with this Specification
1.2 Scope of the Work

2. STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REGULATIONS


2.1 Statutory Obligations and Other Requirements
2.2 Case of Conflict

3 EXECUTION OF WORKS
3.1 International System of Units (SI)
3.2 Programme of Works
3.3 Builder’s Work
3.4 Coordination of Contract Works
3.5 Cooperation with Other Contractors
3.6 Site Supervision
3.7 Advice of Order Placed
3.8 Record of Materials Delivery
3.9 Protection of Materials and Equipment
3.10 Service Condition
3.11 Voltage Covered by this Specification
3.12 Labels and Related Instruction
3.13 Materials and Equipment
3.14 Workmanship
3.15 Surveys and Measurements
3.16 Submission of Testing and Commissioning Procedure

A4 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS


4.1 Standard Drawings
4.2 Drawings in Electronic Format
4.3 Installation Drawings
4.4 As-built Drawings
4.5 Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual and User Manual

B GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (INSTALLATION METHODOLOGY)


1 AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT
1.1 General
1.2 Washable Panel Filter

2 AIR HANDLING AND TREATMENT


2.1 General
2.2 Fan Coil Units
2.3 Cassette Type Fan Coil Units

3 CONTROL
3.1 Control System (CS)

4 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


4.1 Low Voltage - General
4.2 Low Voltage - Electric Motors
4.3 Low Voltage - Motor Switchgear, Starter and Control Panel

92
5 REFRIGERATION MACHINE
5.1 General
5.2 Positioning and Isolation/Removal of Equipment
5.3 Delivery of Equipment
5.4 Refrigeration Pipework and Fittings
5.5 Air-Cooled Condenser
5.6 Vibration Isolation
5.6 Electrical Work

6 PIPEWORK
6.1 General
6.2 Air Venting
6.3 Changes in Pipe Size
6.4 Connections in Pipework
6.5 Joints and Fittings for Copper Tubes
6.6 Pipework General Details
6.7 Pipework Layout
6.8 Plastic Pipework
6.9 Supports for Pipework
6.10 Brazing

7 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL


7.1 General
7.2 Equipment Bases
7.3 Vibration Isolators
7.4 Plant/Equipment Vibration Isolation
7.5 Pipework Vibration Isolation
7.6 Inspection

8 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONER
8.1 General
8.2 Installation and Servicing
8.3 Anti-Vibration Mounting
8.4 Casing
8.5 Compressor
8.6 Supply Air Fan and Motor
8.7 Cooling and Heating Coils
8.8 Air Filter
8.9 Air-cooled Condensers
8.10 Refrigerant Piping
8.11 Condensate Drain Pipe
8.12 Minimum Installation Requirements of Safety and Operational Control for Unitary Air Conditioners
8.13 Split Condensing Unit and AHU
8.14 Variable Refrigerant Volume System
8.15 Maintenance Servicing Platform

C GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT


SPECIFICATION)
1 AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT
1.1 General
1.2 Standards
1.3 Washable Panel Filter
1.4 Additional Requirements (Spare Filter Media)

93
2. FAN COIL UNIT (FCU) AND TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
2.1 General
2.2 Cassette Type Fan Coil Unit
2.3 Energy Efficiency and Performance

3 REFRIGERATION MACHINE
3.1 General
3.2 Compressor-Rotary Type
3.3 Condenser-Air Cool
3.4 Refrigerant Pipework

4. CONTROL
4.1 Electrical Wiring
4.2 Air Cooler Control
4.3 Electrical/Electronic (Localized) Control System
4.4 Standalone Direct Digital Controllers/Outstation (DDC/O)
4.5 Digital Temperature Display

4 CENTRAL REFRIGERATION MACHINE, DIRECT EXPANSION EVAPORATOR AND HEAT


REJECTION PLANT
4.1 General
4.2 Absorption Units
4.3 Cold Storage Refrigeration
4.4 Compressors, Reciprocating Type
4.5 Compressors, Centrifugal Type
4.6 Compressors, Screw Type
4.7 Compressors, Scroll Type
4.8 Condensers, Shell and Tube-General Requirement
4.9 Condensers, Air-Cooled
4.10 Condensers, Evaporative
4.11 Evaporators, Air Cooling
4.12 Liquid Receivers
4.13 Pressure Testing
4.14 Pump Down of System
4.15 Refrigerant Pipework
4.16 Energy Efficiency Performance

5 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


5.1 Low Voltage - General
5.2 Low Voltage - Wiring for Refrigerated Situations
5.3 Low Voltage - Electric Equipment

6 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL


6.1 General
6.2 Equipment Bases

7 PIPE MATERIAL
7.1 Pipework Applications

8 THERMAL INSULATION
8.1 General
8.2 Types of Thermal Insulation Materials
8.3 Measure to Prevent Smoke, Noxious & Toxic Fumes Propagation in Event of Fire
8.4 Vapour Barriers
8.5 Insulation Thickness

94
9 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONER
9.1 General
9.2 Equipment Suitable for Local Electricity Supply
9.3 Selection of Air-cooled Condensers and Condensing Units
9.4 Casing
9.5 Compressor
9.6 Supply Air Fan and Motor
9.7 Cooling and Heating Coils
9.8 Air Filter
9.9 Air-cooled Condensers
9.10 Refrigerant Piping
9.11 Condensate Drain Pipe
9.12 Safety Control
9.13 Operational Control
9.14 Split Condensing Unit and AHU
9.15 Variable Refrigerant Volume System
9.16 Energy Efficiency Performance

D. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING


1.1 General
1.2 Testing and Commissioning – Definitions
1.3 Testing and Commissioning – General
1.4 Off-Site Tests
1.5 Site Tests
1.6 Inspection and Testing during Construction Period
1.7 Documents and Data required for Hand-over Meeting
1.8 Testing and Commissioning Procedures

E. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE


I.1 General
I.2 Level One Services - Mandatory Responsibilities during Maintenance Period
I.2.1 Requirement for Training
I.2.2 Requirement during Maintenance Period
I.3 Level Two Services - Specified Contractor’s Maintenance Responsibilities during Maintenance Period
I.3.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the following within the Maintenance Period
I.3.2 The Contractor shall provide Labour, Minor Spare Parts, Components and Consumable Materials in the
following Services during the Maintenance Period
I.3.3 Contractor’s Responsibilities for Breakdown Call-Out
I.3.4 Maintenance Programme and Schedule
I.3.5 Co-ordination
I.3.6 Plant Log and Breakdown/Fault Call Report
I.3.7 Monthly Works
I.3.8 Half-Yearly Works
I.3.9 Annual Works
EI.4 Spare Parts and Special Tools

F. TYPICAL VRV SYSTEM INSTALLATION LAYOUT

G. SCHEDULE OF PROPOSED CONFORT COOLING VRV IN CEILING MOUNTED AND


SINGLE SPLIT WALL MOUNTED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

95
1 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION
1.1 INSTALLATION TO COMPLY WITH THIS SPECIFICATION
The air-conditioning and control system installation shall comply with this Specification which details
the intrinsic properties (including materials and workmanship) of the installation in so far as it is not
overridden by the Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, and Particular Specification for
the Works, Drawings and/or written instructions of the Project Architect.

1.2 SCOPE OF THE WORKS


This Specification, Particular Specification, Tender Equipment Schedule and Drawings detail the
performance requirements of the Works. The Works to be carried out in accordance with this
Specification shall include the installation and supply of all materials necessary to form a complete
installation including any necessary tests, adjustments, commissioning and maintenance as prescribed
and all other incidental sundry components together with the necessary labour for installing such
components, for the proper operation of the installation.

2 STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REGULATIONS


2.1 Statutory Obligations and Other Requirements
The Air-Conditioning and Control System installation shall comply with the followings:-

2.1.1 Statutory Obligations


a) Building (Ventilating System) Regulation under Buildings legislations - Sierra Leone);
(b) Electricity legislation made under the EDSA Codes;
(c) Fire Service (Installations and Equipment) Regulations, Fire Services legislations;
(d) Noise Control legislation - Sierra Leone;
(e) Air Pollution legislations – Sierra Leone;
(f) Ozone Layer Protection, and other subsidiary legislation – Sierra Leone;
(g) Environmental Impact Assessment legislations – Sierra Leone;
(h) Places of work Public Law of Sierra Leone and other subsidiary legislations

2.1.2 Other Requirements


(a) Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations published by Electrical Distribution and
Services Authority (EDSA) and Mechanical Services Department, Ministry of Works, Government
of Sierra Leone;
(b) Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Electrical Services Installations and Air Conditioning
Services Installations issued by Electrical & Mechanical Services Department, Government of Sierra
Leone;
(c) Codes of Practice issued by the following international institutions:-
- American National Standard Institute
- Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
- American Society of Mechanical Engineers
- American Society of Testing and Materials
- The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
- International Organization for Standardization
- National Fire Protection Association
- Codes of Practice on Prevention of Legionnaires’ disease;
(d) Technical Memorandum to issue Air Pollution Abatement Notice to control Air Pollution from
Stationary Processes and the Assessment of Noise from Places other than Domestic Premises and
Public Places;
(e) Technical Memorandum on Environmental Impact Assessment Process.

2.1.3 Safety Requirements


(a) Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance and others made under the Ordinance;
(b) Construction Site (Safety) Regulations

96
2.1.4 Technical Standards
BS, BS EN, ISO Standards, IEC Standards and Codes of Practice, etc. shall be deemed to include all
amendments, revisions and standards superseding the standards listed herein, which are current at the
closing date of the tender of the Contract unless otherwise specified.

2.2 CASE OF CONFLICT


The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one another but in case of
ambiguities or discrepancies the same shall be explained by the Project Architect who shall issue to the
Contractor instructions clarifying such ambiguities or discrepancies.

3 EXECUTION OF WORKS:
3.1 INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI)
The International System of Units (System International Unites) of weights and measures shall be used
for all materials, equipment and measurements.

3.2 PROGRAMME OF WORKS


The Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect a detailed programme of the Works within
4 weeks from the acceptance of his tender showing the intended method, stages and order of work
execution in coordination with the building construction programme, together with the duration he
estimated for each and every stage of the Works. The programme shall include at least the following:-
(a) Dates for the placement of orders for equipment and materials;
(b) Expected completion dates for builder’s work requirements, i.e. when work site needs to be ready;
(c) Delivery dates of equipment and materials to Site;
(d) Dates of commencement and completion of every stage of the Works in line with the building
construction programme, i.e. each floor level and/or zone area;
(e) Dates of documents/drawings submissions to Project Architect to obtain the necessary approvals;
(f) Dates of requirement of temporary facilities necessary for testing & commissioning, e.g. electricity
supply and town gas;
(g) Dates of completion, testing and commissioning; and
(h) Short term programme showing the detailed work schedules of coming weeks and months shall also
be provided to the Project Architect. Programme shall be regularly updated to reflect the actual
progress and to meet the Contractors’ obligations under the Contract.

In addition, detailed submission schedules for installation drawings, equipment and testing and
commissioning shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
The formats and information to be included in the schedules shall be as required by the Project Architect.

3.3 BUILDER’S WORK


All builder’s work including openings or holes through building structure or partition walls; trenches,
ducts and cutting; and all plinths, concrete bases, supports, ducts, etc. required for the installation will be
carried out as part of the building works by the building contractor at the expense of the Employer
provided that the Contractor has submitted full details of such requirements within a reasonable time to
the Project Architect for approval, so that due consideration may be given before the building contractor
commences the building works in accordance with the building programme in the areas concerned. After
obtaining the said approval of the Project Architect, the Contractor is required to mark out at the relevant
locations of the Site the exact positions and sizes of all such works and to provide detailed information of
such works to the building contractor to facilitate him to carry out the builder’s works as the works
proceed.

All "cutting-away" and "making-good" as required to facilitate the Contractor’s works will be carried out
by the building contractor, except for minor provisions required for the fixing of screws, raw plugs,
redhead bolts, etc. which shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor shall mark out on Site
and/or supply drawings of all "cutting-away" to the building contractor within a reasonable time.
All expenses properly incurred and losses suffered by the Employer as a result of the Contractor’s failure
to comply with the above requirements are recoverable by the Employer from the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure that such works are essential for the execution of the Works. In the event that
any of such works is proved to be non-essential, unnecessary and/or abortive, the Contractor shall bear
97
the full cost of such works including but not limited to any unnecessary or incorrect cutting-away and
making-good and shall reimburse the Employer for all cost incurred in this connection.

Upon completion of the builder’s works by the building contractor, the Contractor shall forthwith check
and examine that all builder’s works so executed have been completed in accordance with his
requirements. If at any time it becomes apparent to the Contractor that any builder’s works completed by
the building contractor does not comply with his requirements in any respect whatsoever, the Contractor
shall forthwith give notice in writing to the Project Architect and specify in details the extents and effects
of such non-compliance in that notice. The Contractor is deemed to have satisfied with the builder’s
works after a period of 7 days from the date of completion of the builder’s works if the above notice is
not served to the Project Architect within such period. All additional expenditure properly incurred and
all loss suffered in this connection by the Employer in having such works re-executed and rectified shall
be recoverable by the Employer from the Contractor.

3.4 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT WORKS


The Contractor shall coordinate the Works with those works of the building contractor and any other
contractors and sub-contractors.

The Contractor shall note that the Drawings supplied to him only indicate the approximate locations of
the works. He shall make any modification reasonably required of his programme, work sequence and
physical deployment of his work to suit the outcome of work coordination or as necessary and ensure that
all cleaning, adjustment, test and control points are readily accessible while keeping the number of loops,
cross-overs and the like to a minimum.

The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the building works programme and shall plan, coordinate
and programme his works to suit and adhere to the building works in accordance with the building
programme. Any significant problems encountered during the coordination work, which are beyond the
Contractor’s control, shall promptly be reported to the Architect.

3.5 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS


The Contractor shall cooperate at all times with the building contractor and all other contractors and sub-
contractors in order to achieve efficient workflow on Site.
Any significant problems beyond the Contractor’s control shall promptly be reported to the Project
Architect.

3.6 SITE SUPERVISION


The Contractor shall keep on the Site a competent and technically qualified site supervisor to control,
supervise and manage all his Works on Site. The supervisor shall be vested with suitable powers to
receive instructions from the Project Architect.
The site supervisor shall be technically competent and have adequate site experience for the Works. The
qualified and competent Supervisor shall have minimum 5 years on site experience for similar type of
installation works. The Contractor shall also refer to the Particular Specification for other specific
requirements, if any, on site supervision.
Approval by the Project Architect shall be obtained prior to the posting of the supervisor on Site. The
Contractor shall immediately replace the Site supervisor whose experience, skill or competency is, in the
opinion of the Project Architect/M&E Engineer, found to be inadequate for the particular work.

All tradesmen must be experienced in the trade and the work carried out shall be consistent with good
practice in Sierra Leone and to the satisfaction of the Project Architect.
The Contractor shall also employ a full time competent foreman on site for each trade. All trade foremen
shall be registered tradesmen of the relevant trade.

98
3.7 ADVICE OF ORDER PLACED
The Contractor shall submit copies of all orders placed for major items of equipment and materials to the
Project Architect for record.

3.8 RECORD OF MATERIALS DELIVERY


All materials and equipment delivered to Site shall be accurately listed and recorded in the site record
books maintained by the representatives of the Project Architect on Site.

Materials and equipment delivered to Site and paid for in interim payment shall be the Employer’s
property. Such materials and equipment shall not be removed from Site without the approval of the
Project Architect in writing and appropriate deduction shall be made in the next interim payment in
accordance with the Contract.
Where the building contractor is in overall control of the Site, the building contractor may also be
required to record details of all incoming/outgoing materials. In this case, the Contractor shall comply
with the building contractor’s arrangements.

3.9 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT


Unless the responsibility is clearly defined in the Contract that the protection on Site for delivered
equipment, materials and installation is solely by other contractors, the Contractor shall be responsible
for the safe custody of all materials and equipment as stored or installed by him until finally inspected,
tested and accepted. In addition, the Contractor shall protect all work against theft, fire, damage or
inclement weather and carefully store all materials and equipment received on Site but not yet installed in
a safe and secure place unless otherwise specified.
All cases of theft and fire must immediately be reported to the police, the building contractor, the Project
Architect and the representatives on Site with full details.

Where necessary the Contractor shall provide lockable steel container or other equally secure enclosures
placed within a securely fenced-in compound provided by the Building Contractor on Site for the storage
of materials and equipment.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate and arrange with the Building Contractor who shall provide clean,
reasonably finished and lockable secure accommodation for the storage of sensitive and/or expensive
items before installation.

If there is no Building Contractor, all the storage facilities and spaces shall be provided by the Contractor.

3.10 SERVICE CONDITION


The following service conditions shall apply to materials and equipment’s:
Building Location
Freetown, Sierra Leone
08030’N, 13014’W, Altitude 11m

Design Criteria
1. External Environmental Conditions
High temperatures, high humidity, saline atmosphere, presence of airborne dust particles during
Harmatan, periods of high precipitation
2. External Ambient Design Conditions
330 C db. 270C wb. Average max/min daytime temperatures 300C.db / 240C.wb (Diurnal Range 60C)
References: CIGSE Design Guide
BBC Weather Data, based on readings at location for 14 years
3. Internal Environmental Design Conditions
Refer Schedules 1-3 for internal temperatures, occupancy levels and fresh air requirements.
4. Internal Noise Criteria
5. IEE Wiring Regulations
6. CIBSE Commissioning Codes

99
3.11 VOLTAGE COVERED BY THIS SPECIFICATION
Unless otherwise specified, all apparatus, equipment, materials and wiring shall be suitable for use with a
3-phase and neutral, 4-wire, 400/230 V ±6%, 50 Hz ±2%.

3.12 LABELS AND RELATED INSTRUCTION


3.12.1 Labels and Related Instruction
In order to make cross reference to the Operation/Maintenance/Service Manuals and Schematic
Drawings, etc., the Contractor shall provide labels for marking all pipework, switches and other
equipment, etc. and elsewhere to facilitate maintenance or as directed by the Project Architect/M&E
Engineer with engraved multi-layer formica or similar material. Wording shall be submitted to the
Project Architect for approval before manufacture.

All labels shall be of adequate size as to give clearance between lettering and fixings to ensure an
aesthetic arrangement on completion.

All English lettering used on labels shall be "Bold" capitals (except otherwise directed) with black letters
on white labels for normal purposes. Where special colours or details are required these shall be as
specified or directed.

3.12.2 Manufacturers’ Technical Support in Sierra Leone


All equipment listed in the Equipment Schedule shall be supplied through authorised agencies of the
manufacturers in Sierra Leone or through the Sierra Leone office of the manufacturers.

These local agencies or offices shall have adequate technical staff to provide presale and after-sale
services to the Contractor. Unless otherwise specified in this Specification, equipment’s supplied
directly by the manufacturers which do not have local agent or office in Sierra Leone will not be
accepted. Spare parts should also be available in the local market easily.

3.12.3 Guard for Rotating Parts of Equipment


All rotating parts of equipment shall be provided with an approved guard complying with the Factories
& Industrial Undertakings (Guarding an Operation of Machinery) Regulations, published by the Labour
Department, Ministry of Works together with any amendments made thereto.

Guards shall be rigid and of substantial construction and shall consist of heavy mild steel angle frames,
hinged and latched with either heavy galvanized mild steel wire crimped mesh securely fastened to
frames or galvanized sheet metal of 1.2 mm minimum thickness.

All apertures shall be such that finger access to dangerous part is not possible. All sections shall be
bolted or riveted.
(a) Temporary Guards
During the execution of work, the Contractor shall ensure that all moving parts are adequately
guarded by temporary guards.

Adequate temporary guard railings etc. around dangerous floor/wall openings in the vicinity of any
work for the protection shall be provided.

For the safety of workers, guard railings etc. are to be provided by the building contractor, but in
case they are not provided, the Contractor shall immediately report the matter to the Project
Architect.

(b) Permanent Guards on Plant


Unless specified otherwise in the Particular Specification, the Contractor shall provide removable
guards or railing for protection from moving or rotating parts. The design and construction of safety
guards for moving parts such as belt drives shall conform to the requirements laid down in the
Factories & Industrial Undertakings (Guarding an Operation of Machinery) Regulations.

100
3.13 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
3.13.1 Material and Equipment Standards
All materials, equipment and installation work shall be carried out by adoption of the best available
quality materials and workmanship and shall, where applicable, comply with the latest edition of the
appropriate standards and/or codes of practice issued by the relevant international Institutes and
Standards and as specified in this Specification. This requirement shall be deemed to include all
amendments to these standards and codes up to the date of tendering.

3.13.2 Compatibility of Materials and Equipment


Where different components of equipment are interconnected to form a complete system, their
characteristics of performance and capacities shall be matched in order to ensure efficient, economical,
safe and sound operation of the complete system.

3.13.3 Equipment Catalogues and Manufacturer’s Specifications


Equipment catalogue and manufacturer's specification related to proposed items of equipment shall be
specific and shall include all information necessary for the Project Architect to ascertain that the
equipment complies with this Specification and/or the Particular Specification and Drawings. Data and
sales catalogue of a general nature are not acceptable. Unless agreed to by the Project Architect in
writing, all data and catalogues submitted must be in English and in pure SI units i.e. mm, m, kPa, m/s,
Hz, kW, l/s, etc.

Contractor shall submit catalogues and manufacturer's specification of the proposed equipment for the
examination and approval of the Project Architect in writing before any equipment is ordered.

3.13.4 Equipment Deviations


Subsequent to the award of the Contract, and only in exceptional circumstances where it is
demonstrated in writing by the Contractor that the original equipment offered cannot be obtained, the
Project Architect may consider and accept, in writing, alternative equipment and materials proposed by
the Contractor provided always that these are fully in compliance with the relevant Specifications and
Drawings and do not impose any additional contractual or financial liabilities onto the Employer. The
Contractor shall bear in mind that submission of alternatives usually causes delay because of additional
time required by the Project Architect to process further approval. The consequences of such delay
shall be borne by the Contractor.

Subject as always to the Project Architect's approval, where the Contractor proposes to use items of
equipment other than those specified and dimensionally different from the Contract Drawings, the
installation of which items requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring
or any other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, then drawings showing the layout
of the proposed equipment and any redesign involved shall be prepared by the Contractor at the
Contractor’s own expenses and be submitted to the Project Architect for approval.

Where the equipment deviation involves significant changes to the building, e.g. a larger equipment,
this will unlikely be agreed unless the enlargement presents no significant problem and the Contractor
is prepared to pay for the building alterations involved.

Where such approved deviation necessitates a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping,
structural supports, insulation, controls, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduits, and any other
additional materials together with all necessary accessories from that originally specified or indicated in
the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall supply and install such ductwork, piping, structural
supports, insulation, controls, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduits, and any other additional
materials together with all necessary accessories required by the system at no additional cost to the
Employer. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all other expenses by other contractors in view
of the change. Any deduction of cost due to the change shall be deducted from the contract.

The responsibility and detailed arrangement for abortive work and cost different for alternative
equipment and material shall be in accordance with the Preliminaries of the Contract.

101
3.13.5 Selection of Equipment
Selection of equipment shall be based on this Specification, the Particular Specification, and the
technical data contained in the Drawings for this particular installation.

Where items of equipment are interconnected to form an integral part of the complete air conditioning
installation, their characteristics of performance and capacities shall be so matched as to give safe,
reliable, efficient and economical operation of the complete air conditioning installation.

3.14 WORKMANSHIP
3.14.1 Safety on Site
Work shall be carried out in such a manner as to comply with all the regulations, standards, etc., as
listed in the ‘’Safety Requirements’’ of this Specification together with any amendments made thereto.

3.14.2 Tools and Instruments


Proper tools shall be used for the works. Adequate and accurate testing/measuring instruments shall be
used to demonstrate compliance of the installations with the relevant specifications and regulations.
The Project Architect has the right to stop any work in which the correct tools and/or instruments are
not used.
Instruments used for acceptance tests shall be calibrated at an interval time of one year unless otherwise
as required in the Contract for this particular project.

3.14.3 Workmanship Standard


The installation works shall be in line with the good practice accepted by the international/local
industry and verified by commissioning and testing results.

The installation works shall be in compliance with this Specification, Particular Specification and
drawings of the project.

The installation shall be in compliance with the statutory requirements as specified in this Specification
in respect of labour safety, fire safety, structural safety, electrical safety and environmental protection.

Apart from those requirements as stipulated in this Specification and other statutory requirements, due
care shall be taken to secure public safety and health both during the execution of the works and in the
selection of equipment and materials for the Air Conditioning installation contract.

3.14.4 Warning Notice


Warning notices shall be provided as required by the Electricity Ordinance and the Code of Practice for
the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations. In addition, the following warning notices in English shall be
provided at the appropriate positions:-
(a) A label having minimum size of 65 x 50mm marked with the words ‘DANGER – HIGH
VOLTAGE’ in red lettering not less than 5mm high to be fixed on every container or enclosure
of equipment for operating at voltages exceeding "Low voltage"; and
(b) A label to be fixed in such a position that any person may gain access to any moving parts of an
item of equipment or enclosure will notice or be warned of such a danger.

3.14.5 Space for Equipment/Plant


The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment/plants, material and equipment supplied by him can be
accommodated and installed within the spaces as generally shown on the Contract Drawings with
adequate access and space for maintenance of all items supplied.
The Contractor shall also ensure that access to plant is adequate to allow for its removal and/or ultimate
replacement. Where this is considered not possible or necessary the Project Architect shall be consulted
for alternative arrangements.

3.14.6 Water Proofing


Where any work requires piercing waterproofing layers or structures, the method of installation must
have prior approval, in writing, from the Project Architect.

102
Unless otherwise specified or instructed, the Contractor shall provide all necessary sleeves, caulking
and flashing as appropriate to make these penetrations absolutely watertight.

3.14.7 Quality Assurance Standards


All materials and equipment shall be manufactured by factories with acceptable quality assurance
procedures. Factories having ISO 9001:2000 certification are deemed to have acceptable quality
assurance procedures. Other similar quality assurance standards may be accepted by the Project
Architect on their individual merits. Details of such other quality assurance standards shall be
submitted with the Equipment Schedule.

3.15 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS


The Contractor shall relate all horizontal and vertical measurements taken and/or applied, to establish
bench marks such as design drawing grid lines, finished floor levels, etc. and shall thus establish
satisfactory lines and levels for all work.
All works shall be installed to these established lines and levels and the Contractor shall verify all
measurements on site and check the correctness thereof as related to the work.

Primary bench base line, datum level, horizontal reference grid, secondary grid and transferred bench
mark on each structural level will be provided by the building contractor. The Contractor shall co-
ordinate with the building contractor to obtain all necessary datum and reference grids prior to their
surveys and measurements.

3.16 SUBMISSION OF TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE


Upon completion of the installation but prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Project
Architect in good time a schedule showing the appropriate testing and commissioning procedures to be
carried out. The schedule shall be agreed by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer before any testing and
commissioning work is carried out.
Detailed requirements for testing and commissioning shall be in accordance with the relevant Sections of
this Specification.

4.0 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS

4.1 STANDARD DRAWINGS


There are standard abbreviations, symbols and standard drawings prepared by the M&E Engineer to
show details of the common standard installations. The Contractor shall refer to these standards and
drawings whenever such are mentioned or specified in the Drawings or the Particular Specification. The
same standards shall also be used in the Contractor's "as-built" drawings, etc., whenever applicable.

4.2 DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT


The Contractor shall provide drawings in electronic format as required in the following clauses. These
drawings shall conform to the latest version of CAD Standard of Works Projects (CSWP) and in
accordance with the latest version of CAD Manual for Architectural Services Department Projects.
Should any technical conflict between the CSWP and the CAD Manual arise, the CSWP shall take
precedence.

4.3 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS


4.3.1 Drawing Submission Schedule
The Contractor shall submit a detailed installation drawing and programme to the Project Architect. The
Contractor shall allow reasonable time in the programme for vetting of the installation drawings by the
Project M&E Engineer and for drawing resubmissions as necessary.

The Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect a comprehensive “Submission Schedule” of
installation drawings and builders work drawings within 2 weeks after the acceptance of ‘’Tender’’,
taking into account of the overall programme of the Works including any Specialist Works to be
undertakings. No equipment shall be delivered to the Site and no work shall be executed until the
installation drawings have been approved by the Project Architect.
The Contractor shall ensure that the installation drawings and builder’s work drawings are progressively
submitted in accordance with the approved “Submission Schedule”. The Contractor shall provide at least
103
4 hard copies and one electronic copy, unless otherwise specified in the Contract, of the approved
installation drawings to the Project Architect for distribution.

Unless otherwise indicated or instructed, the Contractor shall, in the stated or in adequate time before
each section of the work proceeds, prepare, and submit for acceptance by the Project Architect/M&E
Engineer, detailed installation drawings and/or shop drawings (which may also be referred to as working
drawings) to demonstrate how they propose to install the works both in ‘Detail’ and ‘Form’ to facilitate
the practical installation. These drawings shall be fully dimensioned and shall be based on the basic
intentions of the ‘Contract Drawings’ but shall not be simply a copy of them.

Installation drawings and shop drawings in this context shall mean the drawings of items to be
constructed by the Contractor at a workshop away from the site

4.3.2 Size of Installation Drawings


Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall only be of standard sizes A3 as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999
and for this Particular Project.
Contractor’s ‘Installation Drawings’ and/or ‘Shop Drawings’ shall be prepared to such scales that will
clearly show all necessary details.

The drawings shall be prepared to the same sheet sizes and scales as to be used for the ultimate ’As-
Installed’ record drawings.

4.3.3 Contents of Installation Drawings


In accordance with the provisions of this Specification and as stated elsewhere in the Contract
Documents, the installation drawings must incorporate details of the actual plant and equipment items as
approved by the Project Architect.

The Contractor shall ensure all installation drawings are accurate representation of the Works, before
submitting them to the Project Architect.

All installation drawings shall be fully dimensioned and suitably scaled showing construction, sizes,
weights, arrangements, operating clearances and performance characteristics.

(a) "Installation Drawings" shall generally include, but not limited to, the following:-
- Symbols and notations same as and compatible with the Employer’s own Contract Drawing
standard;
- Complete layout/assemblies including all necessary minor items and accessories;
- Positions of all fixings, hangers and supports;
- Maintenance spaces for all withdrawable items, such as coils and fan blowers, cleaning and
replacement of tubes, removal of guards, etc.
- Positions & sizes of all test holes, bends and fittings, clearances to allow for the removal of
inserted equipment where applicable;
- Lifting points and safe working weights of each item.

Note: These may be shown on separate drawings, if necessary, to avoid confusion.

(b) Fan Coil Unit (FCU) Installation Drawings


All Fan Coil Unit (FCU) installation drawings shall include details of all equipment to be installed
therein including Wall Mounted and In-Ceiling Units with withdrawal clearances; cleaning spaces
for coils; filter; detail of hinges with manufacturers type and numbers for proprietary items;
details of drains, drain traps, cleanouts, and as well as provisions made and the necessary
clearance spaces for in-situ servicing or removal.

These drawings shall also show, in outline form only, any significant adjacent building structure
and the clearances from and other equipment and/or known services no matter whether these
elements are provided by the Contractor or others. All such known positions and/or clearances
shall be dimensioned wherever possible.

104
(c) Pipework Installation Drawings
Prior to the commencement of any installation, the Contractor shall submit to the Project
Architect for technical appraisal installation drawings for the pipework installation. Generally, the
drawings shall be drawn to a scale of not less than 1:50. Subject to the Architect’s approval a
scale of 1:100 may be adopted where the installation is a simple one.

The drawings shall indicate the location, with dimensions given of all pipework in relation to the
building structure and other pipework and equipment, etc.
Details and outline of insulation shall be shown including clearances and all hangers and supports
shall be shown and the positions dimensioned.
.
(e) Control and Wiring Installation Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit schematic diagrams showing the control layout with each
item clearly identified with all interlocking and related facilities.

These drawings shall include wiring diagrams showing full details including terminal and wire
numbers, colour code, etc. for all items of electrical/electronic equipment.
Installation Drawings shall also be prepared and submitted for all physical wiring and piping
systems detailing positions, fixings, support, protection, sizes and number of cores/pipes for all
runs.

The Installation Drawings shall show positions in relation to the building structure and other
plant, equipment and/or installations. In the context, the equipment and/or installations will mean
to include the Contractor’s own installed services and those installed by others. For those services
installed by others, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining sufficient details of relevant
information from them in order to complete the drawings.

(f) Switchgear, Starter, Control/Instrumentation/Motor Control Installation Drawings


Shop/Installation Drawings shall show the physical construction and layout, internally and
externally, of all panels/cabinets/cubicles including the physical arrangement of all major and
important components, bus-bars, phase separation barriers, interconnecting wiring, piping, labels,
etc.

Wiring diagrams and schematic diagrams shall show all internal & external wiring/piping
including all interlocks and connections from the panels to external equipment.

Operation and control philosophy shall also be included in the submission. The drawings shall
include proposed full wording of all labels to be installed in English.

4.3.4 Builder’s Work Drawings


Unless otherwise approved by the Project Architect, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect
in accordance with the approved “Submission Schedule”, 4 copies of drawings showing details of all
builders’ work required e.g. the weight and the load on each support of equipment.

Such drawings shall clearly indicate the details and positions of all openings, trenches, ducts, drain and
cutting required and construction details for plinths and equipment bases.

4.3.5 Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings


The manufacturer’s shop drawings are drawings for equipment to be manufactured by a specialist
manufacturing supplier in their own workshops and places away from the Site.

The drawings shall show detailed construction, principal dimensions, weights and clearances for
maintenance, etc. Immediately after placing of any order or at any event within 4 weeks unless otherwise
approved in writing by the Architect, the Contractor shall forward to the Project Architect for comment, 4
copies of manufacturer’s shop drawings indicating detailed construction, principal dimensions and
weights, clearances for withdrawals and/or cleaning, etc. No work shall proceed on or off Site unless
drawings requiring approval are so approved in writing by the Project Architect.

105
4.3.6 Drawings for Submission to Other Authority
4.3.6.1 Checking Drawings of Other Trades
The Contractor shall follow the design intent of the Contract Drawings in planning and carrying out the
work and shall cross check with other trades in order to verify the line, level, space and sequence in
which the work is to be installed.

If directed by the Project Architect, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable
adjustments to the proposed installation drawing layouts as are necessary to prevent conflicts with the
work of other trades or for the proper sequence of and execution of work.

Where such modifications are of a nature and of such unforeseen complexity that they involve
unreasonably extra work not covered by the Contract, they may be covered by variation order to be
issued by the Project Architect wherever such a requirement is justified.

4.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS


4.4.1 Submission of As–built Drawings
The Contractor shall submit 4 sets of the first draft prints of as-built drawings within 21 days of the
issuance of the certification of completion to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer for checking. The
Project Architect/M&E Engineer after checking the draft prints shall return one set of the marked up
copies of these as-built drawings to the Contractor within 14 days from the date of submission of the
Contractor’s draft prints with comments. The Contractor shall within a further 7 days from the date of
receiving the Project Architect’s comments on the draft as-built drawings re-submit to the Project
Architect for his approval another 4 sets of the second draft prints of as-built drawings with the Project
Architect’s comments incorporated. This process of submission and approval shall continue until the
final approval of the Project Architect on these as-built drawing is obtained.

The final approved as-built drawings shall be in 4 sets of hard copy and 2 sets of electronic copies. These
shall be submitted within 7 days from the date of final approval. Each electronic copy shall be in the form
of CD-ROM, labelled, with cross reference to a printed list of files explaining the contents and purpose of
each file and supplied in sturdy plastic encases.

4.4.2 Size of As-built Drawings


As-built drawings shall only be of standard sizes of A3 size as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999.

4.4.3 Content of As-built Drawings


The Contractor shall ensure all as-built drawings are accurate representation of the Works, before
submitting them to the Project Architect.

The as-built drawings required to be provided by the Contractor for various types of BS/M&E
installations shall include, but not limited to the following:-
(a) Building services layout plans such as trunking arrangement, piping arrangement, etc.
(b) System schematic diagrams, control diagrams and wiring diagrams;
(c) Concealed work layout plan such as concealed conduit routing, etc.; and
(d) Installation details drawings such as LV cubicle switchboards layout and remote control position
etc. "As-built" drawings complete with all details such as design air to be used for commissioning
purposes. Any amendments noted on these drawings during the commissioning and test stage
shall subsequently be transferred to the original "As-built" drawings once the amendments have
been accepted by the Project Architect.

4.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUAL AND USER MANUAL


4.5.1 General
The Contractor shall provide two types of manuals to the Project Architect with all changes made to the
installation during the course of the Contract suitably incorporated.

The O&M Manual is for use by the maintenance agent of the completed installation. It shall contain
detailed technical information covering both operation and maintenance aspects of the installation.

106
The User Manual seeks to give users of the completed installation an overview of the essential
information of the installation. The contents of the manual should be concise and succinct for ease of
comprehension by people with a non-technical background.

4.5.2 Presentation
All manuals shall be written in English, unless otherwise specified.
The text of descriptive parts shall be kept concise while at the same time ensure completeness.
Diagrammatic materials shall also be supported by comprehensive descriptions.

The manuals shall comprise A4 size loose-leaf, where necessary, A3 size folded loose-leaves. The loose-
leaf shall be of good quality paper that is sufficiently opaque to avoid "show-through". Unless otherwise
specified in the Contract, the manuals shall be bound in durable loose-leaf 4 ring binders with hard
covers. The manuals shall have labels or lettering on the front cover and spine.
The Architect’s approval shall be obtained on this at the draft manual stage. The electronic copy of
manuals including the technical literatures shall be in PDF format readable by Acrobat Reader Freeware.

4.5.3 Checking and Approval


The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of the first draft of O&M Manuals together with a list of
recommended spare parts for one year’s operation and a list of special tools, both complete with prices to
the Project Architect for comment within 21 days of the issuance of the certificate of completion.

The Contractor shall submit 2 sets of the first draft of the User Manual to the Project Architect for
comment at least 15 calendar days before the date of completion.
The Project Architect will check the drafts and return them to the Contractor within 14 days from the date
of submission with comments necessary for a final and approved set of document. The Contractor shall
then make all necessary amendments to the documents and resubmit them to the Project Architect within
7 days from the date of receipt of comments.

The Contractor shall submit 4 sets of hard copies (one of which shall be the original) and one set of
electronic copy of the final approved O&M Manuals in CD-ROM within 14 days from the date of
approval by the Project Architect.
The Contractor shall submit 2 sets of hard copies and one electronic copy of the final approved User
Manuals in CD-ROM within 7 days from the date of approval by the Project Architect.

4.5.4 Structure and Contents of O&M Manual


The detailed requirements, structure and contents of the O&M Manual shall be as specified in elsewhere
in the Contract and shall include the following information under separate sections where appropriate:-
(a) Project Information
This shall include:-
Project title, site address, contract no., contract title, contractor/sub-contractor name, address,
contact persons and their telephone/email, contract commencement date, substantial completion
date and end date of maintenance period.

(b) System Description


- Type(s) of system(s) and equipment installed;
- Design criteria, design data and parameters;
- Locations of the system and major equipment, and what they serve;
- Description of operation and functions of the system and equipment; and
- General operating conditions, expected performance and energy and resources
consumption where applicable.
107
(c) List of Installed Equipment
Schedule of all items of equipment, stating the location, name, model no. manufacturer's serial or
reference no., manufacturer’s design duties and data

(d) Spare Parts and Special Tools Lists


- List of Spare Parts supplied by the Contractor:
Item descriptions, supplied quantities, model nos., manufacturer’s serial or reference nos. and
storage locations; and
- Recommended Spare Parts List and Special Tools List:
Manufacturers’/suppliers’ recommendations for spare parts and special tools with item
description, unit rate, recommended stock quantities as well as the agents for the spare parts
and special tools.

(e) Manufacturers’ Certificates/Guarantees


- Manufacturers’ certificates such as factory test certificates and guarantees and any others
where required for the equipment, etc.; and
- Originals of Statutory Inspection Certificate for various installations, including:-
- Other equipment such as surveyor’s test certificates for high pressure vessel; and
- Electrical installations (Work Completion Certificate).
[Note: Testing records & commissioning data (other than the types prescribed above), which
are required under the Contract such as the Testing & Commissioning (T&C) procedures, etc.
to verify the compliance of the BS/M&E system’s/equipment’s performance with the Contract
requirements, are checked and endorsed separately by the Project Architect and do not form
part of the O&M manuals.]

(f) Safety Precautions for Operation & Maintenance State, where applicable, hazard warnings and
safety precautions of which the operation and maintenance staff need to be aware:-
- Mandatory requirements relating to safety;
- Known hazards against which protection measures shall be taken; and
- Known features or operational characteristics of the installed equipment or systems which
may cause hazard and the related safety precautions.

(g) Operation Instructions


Instructions for the safe and efficient operation, under both normal and emergency conditions, of
the installed system which shall comprise:-
- An outline of the operating mode;
- Procedures and sequences for start-up and shut-down;
- Interlocks between equipment/system;
- Calling on of stand-by equipment;
- Precautions necessary to overcome known hazards;
- Means by which any potentially hazardous equipment can be made safe;
- Forms for recording plant running hours, energy consumption and energy costs; and
- Operating data such as running current, operating pressure, etc.

(h) Maintenance
a) Maintenance Instructions
The Manufacturer’ and the Contractor's recommendations and instructions for the maintenance of
the installed equipment should give a clear distinction between planned tasks (preventive
maintenance) and fault repair tasks (corrective maintenance). Instructions shall be given on each
of the following, as appropriate:-
108
(i) Nature of deterioration and the defects to be looked for;
- Isolation and return to service of equipment;
- Dismantling and reassembly;
- Replacement of components and assemblies;
- Adjustments and testing; and
- Special tools, test equipment and ancillary services.
- Maintenance Schedules

Proposed maintenance schedules for all the preventive maintenance tasks identified above. The
schedules shall be based on both manufacturers' recommendations and other authoritative sources
(e.g. statutory or mandatory requirements) and should include:-
- Routine servicing;
- Inspections;
- Tests and examinations; and
- Adjustments;

The frequency of each task may be expressed as specific time intervals, running hours or number
of completed operations as appropriate. Collectively, the schedules will form a complete
maintenance cycle, repeated throughout the whole working life of the installation.

(i) Drawing Lists


- A complete list of as-built drawings identified with drawing number/reference;
- A complete list of manufacturers’ shop drawings with drawing number/reference, where
applicable.

(j) Technical Literatures


A complete set of manufacturers' literatures for all the plants and equipment’s installed in the
system. The contents of these literatures shall cover the following areas where applicable:-
- Description of equipment with model numbers highlighted;
- Performance - behavioural characteristics of the equipment;
- Applications - suitability for use;
- Factory/laboratory test reports, detailed drawings, circuit diagrams;
- Methods of operation and control;
- Operation instructions;
- Cleaning and maintenance requirements;
- Protective measures and safety precautions for operation and maintenance; and;
- Part lists.

4.5.5 Structure and Contents of User Manual


The detailed requirements, structure and contents of the User Manual shall include, where applicable, the
following information:-
(a) Project Information
This shall include:-
Project title, site address, contract no., contract title, contract commencement date, substantial
completion date and end date of Maintenance Period

(b) System Description


i Type(s) of system(s) and equipment installed, and their purposes;
ii Locations of equipment;
iii Brief description of the operation and functions of the systems and equipment; and
109
iv Listing of set points which can be adjusted by the user to suit their operation needs.

(c) Schedule of equipment location and Installed Equipment


(a) Schedule of major equipment including their locations and serving areas.

(d) Safety Precautions for Operation


Any safety precautions and warnings signals that the users shall be aware of in the daily operation of
the various systems and equipment in the installation including:-
(a) Mandatory requirements relating to safety;
(b) Features or operational characteristics of the installed systems or equipment which may cause
hazard and the related safety precautions;
(c) Protective measures and safety precautions for operation; and
(d) List of warning signals and the related meanings that the user shall be aware of and the actions
to be taken.

(e) Operation Instructions


Instructions for the safe and efficient operation, under both normal and emergency conditions, of the
installed system which shall comprise:-
(a) An outline of the operating mode;
(b) Step by step operation instructions for systems and equipment that are to be operated by the
user, including at least procedures for start-up and shutdown;
(c) Means by which any potentially hazardous situation can be made safe; and
(d) Cleaning and basic maintenance procedures.

(f) List of Statutory Periodic Inspections and Tests


A schedule of periodic inspections and tests that owner and/or user of the installation have to arrange
to achieve compliance with the requirements stipulated in the relevant Laws of Sierra Leone. The
frequency of such inspections and tests shall be expressed in specific time intervals.

(g) Drawings
A set of selected as-built drawings shall be able to illustrate to the user the general layout of the
completed installation.

(h) Photographs
A set of photographs with suitable caption’s to illustrate to the user the appearance and locations of
devices which require their setting and operation.

4.5.6 Intellectual Property Rights


The Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD), Lungi, Sierra Leone shall become the absolute and exclusive owner
of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and the User Manual and all intellectual property rights
subsisting therein free from all encumbrances.
In the event that the beneficial ownership of any intellectual property rights subsisting in the above
Manuals are vested in anyone other than the Contractor, the Contactor shall procure that the beneficial
owner shall grant to the Employer a transferable, non-exclusive, royalty-free and irrevocable license
(carrying the right to grant sub-licenses) to utilize the intellectual property rights in the manuals for the
purposes contemplated in the Contract. For the avoidance of doubt such purposes shall, but not limited to,
include providing free copying of the materials in the manuals by any subsequent owner or user of the
installation, and/or any party responsible for the operation and maintenance of the installation in
connection with any subsequent alteration, extension, operation and maintenance of the installation.

110
B GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (INSTALLATION METHODOLOGY)

1 AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT


1.1 GENERAL
The complete air filter shall be of heavy-duty airtight factory fabrication designed to ensure a positive
seal against leakage of unfiltered air. Generally, it shall be complete with robust enclosure, holding
frames and housing, all supplied by the same manufacturer, as below:-
1.1.1 The robust enclosure shall be factory assembled in such a manner that a rigid and durable enclosure for
the filters is ensured. The periphery of the filter shall be continuously bonded to the inside of the
enclosing frame to eliminate air bypass and to ensure the optimum filtration efficiency.

1.1.2 The holding frames, which are designed to accommodate standard sized filters of the specified efficiency,
shall be factory assembled and manufactured by the filter manufacturer. It shall be constructed and
equipped with positive gasket seals at the entire length of the holding frames. The gaskets are provided to
stop the air bypass between the filter cell and the frames, between the adjacent frames, and also between
the frames and the housing. To firmly hold the filter cells against sealing gaskets, fixtures shall be
provided adequately. The above elements are to be fully supported against the direction of airflow and
become totally rigid when installed.

1.1.3 The Contractor shall provide all required new filters for all air handling equipment (FCU’s) at the time of
practical completion.

For cleanable filters, the Contractor shall provide at least 1 extra set of each type of installed filters for
spare and be responsible for the cleaning of filters when necessary during the maintenance period. This
set of filters shall be handled over to the Project Architect at the end of the maintenance period.

1.2 WASHABLE PANEL FILTER


The holding frames shall be equipped with fixtures for easy removal of the filter cells without the use of
any special tools. For filter cells installed inside air handling units (FCU’s) separate housing is not
required.
However, the holding frames shall be factory mounted in the air handling unit casing and installed to
provide service from the air side.

2 AIR HANDLING AND TREATMENT


2.1 GENERAL
Fans shall be installed using galvanized steel plate, supports, bolts, nuts and washers with all "as cast"
bearing surfaces for bolt heads and washers counterfaced. Anti-vibration mountings shall be in
accordance with Sections in this specification.
Fan guards shall be provided for all open unprotected intakes to centrifugal fans; for unprotected intakes
to and exhausts from axial flow fans; for open unprotected and easily accessible intakes to and exhausts
from propeller and elsewhere as indicated.
2.2 FAN COIL UNITS
2.2.1 The fan coil unit shall be of integrated wall mounted type which combines the supply air slot, return air
grille, fan, casing, cooling coil etc. into a single unit.

2.2.2 Remote control unit shall be provided as specified.

2.2.3 Flexible joints shall be installed for drainage pipe, conduit and other services connection to the unit to
isolate vibration generated by the unit.

2.2.4 Power supply will be provided by electrical contractor and terminated at fused connector unit adjacent to
each fan coil unit, all cabling from the power source (e.g. connector unit) to the control box of the fan
coil unit and fan coil room remote control and accessories at convenient position including the
termination shall be carried out by the Contractor.

2.2.5 The location of the local control box shall be within 600 mm from the terminal box of the fan coil unit.

111
2.2.6 All units shall be selected for wall mount to suit the space within the Server and UPS Rooms, with due
consideration to access for maintenance and servicing.

2.2.7 All blowers and motors of fan coil units shall be within the unit assembly for maintenance purpose
without causing damage to the associated pipework and insulation.

2.2.8 Insulated drain pan shall be provided for those fan coil units installed in Server and UPS Rooms and
other essential areas sensible to water damage.

Fan coil unit and its associated piping should not be mounted above essential electrical and control
equipment such as switchboard, lift machine, control panel, UPS, etc.

2.3 CASSETTE TYPE FAN COIL UNITS


2.3.1 Generally, the cassette fan coil units shall comply with of this Specification.

2.3.2 The fan coil unit shall be of integrated cassette type which combines the supply air slot, return air grille,
fan, casing, cooling coil etc. into a single unit.

2.3.3 Fan coil units shall be selected at design duty and specified noise level with fan running at medium
speed.

2.3.4 Remote control unit shall be provided as specified.

1. Cooling coil shall be constructed with copper tubes and shall be arranged horizontally.

Fins shall have smooth drawn collars of length equal to fin spacing and mechanically bonded to tubes.
Fins shall be of the plate type, corrugated to ensure maximum air contact. Working pressure of coil shall
be as manufactured to suit system pressure design.

2.3.6 Each fan coil unit shall be provided with a high grade AISI 316 stainless steel drain pan situated beneath
the cooling coil and arranged so that all moisture will collect in and drain from the pan. Drain pans shall
be insulated externally with a minimum of 25 mm approved type foamed plastic. Each drain pan shall be
fitted with a drain pipe which shall be connected via suitable runs (correctly laid to fall) to the drainage
system. Drain pans shall have copper male connectors for connection to the condensate drain. The
connector shall be positioned to ensure rapid discharge of moisture from the pan.

2.3.7 Built-in condensate pump shall be provided for the removal of condensate. A water sensing system with
low, high and warning limits shall be provided which actuates the running of condensate pump at high
water limit and trigger the alarm system at warning level.
When water level reaches the warning limit, the sensing system shall cut off the unit operation. An alarm
signal shall be triggered. The signal shall be connected to a remote indication system as design.
Condensate pump shall be designed to run and sense water level in the drain pan after the unit is switched
off as specified. The power source for condensate pump and the associated control system shall be
independent from that of the fan coil unit such that the pump can still be operated after the units have
been switched off.

2.3.8 The filter media shall be of the washable type and shall be enclosed in a one-piece formed frame.

2.3.9 Fan shall be of the quiet running direct driven centrifugal type with aluminium blades mounted to a solid
steel shaft. Fan motors shall be of the "split capacitor" type suitable for single phase electrical supply.
The motor shall be resiliently mounted to the fan tray or scrolls. The motor/fan tray assembly itself shall
also be resiliently mounted to the casing structure.

2.3.10 Adjustable louvres for directional airflow shall be provided for supply air slot in each fan coil unit.
Options shall be given to choose the 4-way supply air discharge.

112
3 CONTROL
3.1 CONTROL SYSTEM (CS)
The Control System (CS) is the Control located within the room that controls the proper, effective and
efficient operation of the Air Conditioning System (s) within the room(s).

The CS shall be as simple as an electronic controller with built-in features for scheduling controls.

The appropriate CS shall be so designed to meet the requirements and operation needs of the end users.
The main function of the CS is for on/off controls, monitoring of operation status and alarms generation
of the connected systems in room(s). Comprehensive system controls of each individual system shall be
carried out by the system controller of each individual air conditioning in the room.

The CS shall be so designed to achieve a reliable control in performing the functions set in the design
criteria and shall be of electronic or direct digital control type as specified. Unless otherwise specified,
the CS controller shall be located inside the office were the Fan Coil Unit is installed.

3.1.2 Direct Digital Controller (DDC)


(a) Each controller shall operate as a standalone unit capable of performing its specified control
responsibilities independently of other controllers.
(b) Local keypad and display shall be provided for local viewing and operation.
(c) Power Fail Protection
All system set point, control algorithm and other parameter should be stored such that power
failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the DDC controller.

3.1.3 Control of Fan Coil Unit (FCU)


Micro-processor based electronic controller or DDC as specified shall be used for the control of the FCU
and its associated equipment. The following functions shall be provided as specified:-
(a) Start-Stop Control
(i) (Manual On/Off Control (maintenance/manual mode);
(ii) On/Off Control by the CS as scheduled;
(iv) On/Off Controls by special demand overriding the pre-set schedule for dehumidification and/or cooling
during night for special duty cycles in the Server & UPS Rooms as specified;
(v) Demand On/Off Control. The operation of any FCU served by the unit shall energize the PAU.
Unit will only be cut-out when all associated FCUs are turned off by the CS as scheduled.

(b) Capacity Control


(i) Temperature Display
LCD or 7-bit segment (self-illuminated) digital display of the room temperature thermostat within
readable size from three metres apart at the appropriate locations inside the air-conditioned areas shall be
provided. Temperature display shall be setting up in steps not coarser than 0.5K.

3.1.4 Control of Zone Air Distribution Units


(a) Fan Coil Unit (FCU)
Unless otherwise specified, controller for FCU shall be of micro-processor based electronic type or DDC
type as specified. Backup battery shall be provided for all controllers.

Unless otherwise specified, the control functions listed below shall be performed by the controller:-
(i) Start-stop control
- Manual on/off control by the three-speed controller; c/w space temperature sensor

(ii) Temperature Control


- Cooling
Unit on/off control valve shall be turned on and off to maintain the room temperatures pre-set in the
controller.

113
- Temperature Display
LCD or 7-bit segment (self-illuminated) digital display of the room temperature thermostat within
readable size from three metres apart inside the air conditioned areas shall be provided. Temperature
display shall be setting up in steps not coarser than 0.5K.

4 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


4.1 LOW VOLTAGE - GENERAL
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and install all low voltage electrical equipment
necessary for the complete installation under the Contract and shall carry out all necessary wiring from
the points of power supply provided by others as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all installation and shop drawings and wiring
diagram and for the correct internal wiring of all pre-wired equipment supplied under the Contract.

All electrical equipment, wiring and installation work, and materials shall comply with the provisions of
the relevant parts of the Electrical Specification.

4.2 LOW VOLTAGE - ELECTRIC MOTORS


The low voltage electric motors shall comply with the latest IEE Regulations for low voltage
equipment’s.

4.3 LOW VOLTAGE - MOTOR SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL PANELS


The low voltage motor switchgear, starter and control panels shall comply with the latest IEE
Regulations for low voltage equipment’s.

5 REFRIGERATION MACHINE
5.1 GENERAL
All necessary refrigerants shall be supplied by the Contractor during testing and commissioning and plant
operation stages until the plant is accepted and end of maintenance period is certified complete by the
Project Architect. Each unit shall have an electronic/microcomputer control PC board factory installed
and tested.
The plant shall be so selected and installed with sufficient space allowed for effective heat dissipation to
surrounding air, and for easy maintenance and servicing.
Appropriate corrosion resistant materials shall be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against
galvanic interaction, etc.

Mounting and fixing details including details and dimensions of equipment bases, fixing bolts, supporting
steelwork, flexible connections, vibration isolators and any special builder’s work requirements, etc. shall
be provided by the Contractor to meet the contract programme.
Any damage to finishes of the equipment which may have occurred during transit, storage, installation or
other causes shall be made good in the manner recommended by the manufacturer and to the satisfaction
of the Project Architect.
Same type of paint shall be used for making good the damages.

All mounting and fixing supports shall be of galvanized steel and exposed metal surface after cutting
shall be treated against corrosion and painted in with anti-corrosion paint as specified in Sections of the
Specification.

5.2 POSITIONING AND ISOLATION/REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT


The equipment position shall be so arranged that equipment may be isolated for servicing without
completely draining the refrigerant of the whole plant and shall follow the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-
2004 or BS EN 378-2:2000 to BS EN 378-3:2000.
All equipment shall be located within safe area indicated on the Tender Drawings and approved by the
Project Architect.

Remote control shall be installed inside the office which is free from water pipes with glazing window
for equipment provided by the building contractor.

114
5.3 DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT
All equipment delivered to site shall be properly protected as detailed in Sections of this Specification
The Contractor shall take into account the site constraints when planning the delivery of the equipment.
The delivery of equipment shall be communicated with the Project Architect and Main Contractor to
coordinate the site security requirement before delivery.

Written approval for delivery of equipment to site is required from the Project Architect prior to the
transportation of the equipment to site Any temporary hoisting or handling facilities and installations to
facilitate the delivery of the equipment shall be provided and removed after use by the Contractor.

5.4 REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS


Joints in copper pipe shall be flared (up to 20mm OD only), or brazed with or without capillary fittings.
Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of the HVCA Code of Practice - Brazing and Bronze
Welding of Copper Pipe.

Screwed joints will not be accepted in refrigerant pipes.


Plastics pipe will not be accepted for any other refrigerant pipework.

Compression fittings will not be accepted on refrigerant pipework.

The pipework shall be so install that oil in the refrigerant leaving the compressor shall be carried through
the system and back to the compressor at the lowest stage of capacity unloading.
Pipework shall be firmly supported and secured to minimize vibration.
Vibration eliminators shall be fitted to the compressor suction and discharge pipes to minimize
transmission of vibration or noise. Where indicated, a gas pulsation damper shall be fitted at the
refrigerant discharge pipe, as close as possible to the refrigeration compressor.

After completion, the refrigerant pipe work shall be pressure tested as detailed in T&C Procedure.

All parts and components containing refrigerant shall be clean and dry before they are connected to the
system. No mill scale shall be permitted in pipes and all pipes shall be capped on site until welded in.
Prior to charging refrigerant to the refrigeration system, field pressure tests shall be carried out in
accordance with Part H. Any leak found shall be repaired before the system can be considered tight.

Hangers, clips and other hanging or clamping studs shall be galvanized and they shall not be welded to
pipes containing refrigerant. Pipework and other parts shall be erected and clamped so that vibration and
noise are kept to minimum.

The Contractor shall pay particular attention and precaution when handling the refrigerant pipework’s
installation. For charging of refrigerant to the system, the recommendations from the supplier and the
procedures stipulated in the Testing and Commissioning Procedure for Air-conditioning and Control
Systems Installation shall be followed. The work shall also be carried out by trained and qualified
persons approved by the Project Architect.
5.5 AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
Air cooled condensers mounted outside buildings shall have weather proof fan motors. The units shall
discharge air vertically upwards.
The unit shall be installed on vibration isolation devices as specified in Sections B8 and C8. The
Contractor shall, according to the manufacturer’s recommendation, advise the requirements on strength
of the roof curb structure for supporting the unit. Selection of the vibration isolators shall be submitted to
the Architect for approval prior to execution of work.

The unit shall be installed so that air can circulate through the condenser coils without any hindrance, and
the air discharged from the condenser fans is not recycled. If the unit has to be placed near a wall or an
obstacle that may prevent satisfactory air circulation, sufficient distance as recommended by the
manufacturer shall be maintained between the unit and the obstacle.

115
5.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION
All equipment offered shall have minimum vibration and noise levels during operation, with particular
attention to the requirement that the sound pressure level measured at one meter from the equipment with
all fully operated shall not be more than 5 dB higher than the ambient sound level at any time, and shall
comply with any other requirements of Environmental Protection Department or other statutory noise
control requirements issued prior to tendering, whichever is more stringent.

The Contractor shall be responsible for provision of adequate vibration isolation and/or sound attenuation
measures for the refrigeration plant to meet the requirements as detailed in Sections of this Specification
and to the satisfaction and acceptance of the Project Architect.

5.6 ELECTRICAL WORK


The Contractor shall supply and install suitable power cables, cable trays, G.I. supports, starters/motor
drives, isolators, control, safety earth bonding and all necessary accessories to connect power from the
isolator to each electricity driven equipment. The Contractor shall allow for adequate cable size and
protection devices to meet the current demand and voltage drop requirements of the equipment offered.

6 PIPEWORK
6.1 JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBES
Fittings for copper pipework shall be as follows:-
B9.9.1 Size up to and including 65 mm shall be of the capillary or compression type to ISO 2016:1981.

6.1.1 Pipework shall be arranged with adequate connection points to allow easy dismantling. Connection
points in copper pipework size up to and including 65 mm size shall be unions and for pipework of size
76 mm and above shall be flanged.

6.2 PIPEWORK GENERAL DETAILS


6.2.1 Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be suitably graded not less than 1 in 500 to ensure
proper draining.
Generally, the clearance between pipework (or the lagging) and the wall and any other fixtures shall be
not less than 25 mm. Pipework shall not run near to or above electrical appliances, cables, trunking and
conduits.

6.2.2 Where two or more pipe runs follow the same route, all pipes shall run parallel with one another and to
the building structure without prejudice to the necessary allowances for drainage or other reasonable
restrictions. Any pipework which requires subsequent insulation shall be adequately spaced to allow for
individual finish.

6.2.3 Tubes shall be reamed after cutting and shall be free from burrs, rust, scale and other defects and shall
be thoroughly cleaned before erection. Pipe ends left open during the progress of work shall be
temporarily closed with purpose-made plastic plugs or caps and protect from corrosion.

6.2.4 Joints shall not be made in the thickness of any wall, floor or ceiling and pipework shall not be
embedded in the structure of floors unless otherwise instructed by the Project Architect. Where
pipework passes through walls, floors or ceilings, sleeves shall be provided. Pipework passing through
floors shall, where specified, be provided with approved type floor and ceiling plates and fastened
securely to the sleeve. Sleeves shall be of the same material as the pipe. The space between pipework
and sleeve shall be sealed with an approved fire resisting material having FRP of not less than that of the
wall and floor and in compliance with relevant regulations and code of practices.

6.2.5 All entry and exit holes to or from a building for a pipework services shall be sealed and plugged. The
sealant shall be a mastic compound or silicone rubber. Where the pipework enters the building through a
large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking plate not less than 6mm thick shall be built into the wall of the
hole or duct. The service pipes shall pass through clearance sockets welded to the plate. The space
between pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged with waterproof material or sealant
having an FRP of not less than that of the wall and in compliance with the relevant regulations and code
of practices, all to the approval of the Project Architect.

116
6.2.6 All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the tubes and pipes connected to them. Bushed
outlets will only be accepted if the required outlet size of a fitting is not of standard manufacture.

6.2.7 Elbows shall be used, where practicable, in preference to bends.


However, square elbows will not be permitted. Unless otherwise specified, long radius elbows shall be
used in order to minimize hydraulic resistance.

6.3 PIPEWORK LAYOUT


The Tender/Contract Drawings indicate the size and general layout of the required pipework. The exact
position may not be indicated on the drawings as for the purpose of clarity, they are generally shown as
separately spaced out from one another as if they were at the same plan level. The Contractor shall
accurately set out the various pipelines in the installation in compliance with the provisions of Clause
A3.15 and A4.3 of this specification.

6.4 PIPEWORK SUPPORTS, EXPANSION JOINTS AND ANCHOR POINTS


6.4.1 Where the Employer’s Guide Drawings & Details for pipework supports and brackets, are issued with
the specific Contract Documents or have previously been issued to Approved Contractors for general
application on the Employer’s projects, these standard details shall be followed "In-Principle" but
adjusted as to the detail in order to suit the particular circumstances.
Such adjustments shall be indicated on the Contractor’s own Installation/Shop Drawing and loading
calculation Submissions and be approved by the Project Architect before work commences.

6.4.2 Pipework shall be supported so as to permit movement due to expansion and contraction. Pipework
supports shall be installed as near as practicably possible to joints and changes in direction. Each
support shall take its due proportion of the load. The spacing of the supports shall not exceed the
canters given in Tables B6.8-(1) and B6.8-(2). Where there are two or more pipes, the spacing shall be
based on the canters required by the smallest bore pipework.

6.4.3 Vertical rising pipework shall be managed on cable trays within the riser.

6.4.4 Where pipework up to 50 mm size is fixed to solid wall, brackets may be of the screw-on or long
shank built-in type in case the walls are plastered; only the long shank built-in type shall be used. For
fixing to woodwork and lightweight partitions or walls, brackets shall be of the screw-on pattern of
adjustable two-piece type. Brackets for mild steel and plastic pipework shall be mild steel or malleable
iron; brackets for copper pipework shall be brass or gunmetal. The upper half of the pipe clip shall be
detachable without disturbing the fixing.

6.4.5 Brackets screwed to walls shall be secured by expanding plugs. Other purpose designed fixing devices
or softwood plugs will not be permitted.

6.4.6 Unless otherwise specified, hangers for horizontal pipework at high level shall be supported from
galvanized mild steel angle or channel sections or approved proprietary devices supplied by the
Contractor, suitable for building-in or otherwise securing to the structure by the building contractor.
Adjustable mild steel hangers shall be used. Pipe rings shall be of malleable cast iron or fabricated
steel, made in halves and secured by bolts or screws. Alternatively, malleable iron hinged pipe rings
may be used. Calliper type hooks will not be permitted.

6.4.7 Where pipework is fitted in service duct or trenches and supported from walls, the design of the pipe
supports, guides and anchors shall be in accordance with the Contract Drawings. Otherwise, the
Contractor shall submit details and proposal to the Project Architect for approval. Where roller
supports are required, they shall be of an approved type. The performed insulation shall be kept free of
the rolling surface. Load-bearing insulation at supports, where required, shall be fitted by the
Contractor at the time of erecting the pipework.

6.4.8 For copper pipework, the anchors shall be provided by wide copper straps secured to the pipework in
such a manner that the pipe is not damaged.

117
6.4.9 The Contractor shall supply, and fix in position ready for building-in, all cleats, brackets and steelwork
required for anchor points. Anchor steelwork secured to the bottoms of ducts or trenches shall be
coated with hot-poured bitumen to inhibit future corrosion.

6.4.10 Supports for plastics pipework may be of any approved pattern that prevents free axial movement of
pipe at all temperatures and have radial edges to prevent cutting into the pipe. The entire bearing
surface must be sufficiently wide to prevent indentation.
Valves, meters and other heavy "in-line" equipment must be supported independently.
Supports for pipes carrying water at a maximum temperature of 150C and covered with lightweight
insulation shall be spaced in accordance with Table B6.8-(2) under Clause B6.8. Alternatively, the
pipework may be continuously supported, provided that the thermal insulation covering the pipework
is sufficiently rigid to ensure that no compression or deformation of the insulation occurs.

6.4.11 Provision for movement due to expansion and contraction shall be generally as indicated and/or shall
be by changes in direction of the pipework, by loops or by other approved expansion devices.

6.4.12 Supports and guides shall be arranged to ensure that all movement is taken up by the change in
direction of the pipework or by the loop or device.

6.4.13 The spacing of supports for copper and plastic pipework shall be in accordance with Tables 6.8-(1)
and 6.8-(2)

6.4.14 Cold Bridge should be prevented between the insulated pipework and the associated hangers and
pipework supports.

6.5 PLASTIC PIPEWORK


Fittings for plastics pipework shall be as follows:-
6.6.1 Fittings shall be of the same material as the pipework to which they are joined. They shall be made or
approved for the solvent welding process.
As a general rule PVC pipe should only be made threaded and screwed into metal "Female" threaded
fittings.

6.6.2 Joints between pipe and pipe fittings shall be made by the solvent welding process. No cleaning fluid or
solvent cement other than that supplied or recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall be used.

6.6.3 Where it is required to form a spring in the pipe run, the pipe shall be softened by immersion in (or by
pouring on) heated brine, glycerine oil or water as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. The use of a
naked flame on the pipe surface will not be accepted.

6.6.4 Where uPVC is used for condenser cooling circuits and for the inlet and outlet to pumps, it must be
effectively isolated from the vibration of the machine. This shall be achieved by the insertion of flanged
synthetic rubber vibration de-couplers installed between uPVC pipework and plant on all connections.

6.7 'T' AND 'Y' FITTINGS


Except at vent and drain points, all tees and 'Y' fittings shall be of the swept type.
The sweep radius being at least equal to that of the medium bend but where specified as a long sweep it
shall then be equal in radius to the long bend.

6.8 SUPPORTS FOR PIPEWORK


Table 6.8 – (1) Supports for Copper Pipework
Size of tube Intervals for horizontal runs Intervals for Vertical Runs
Bare Lagged Bare and Lagged
mm m m m
15 1.2 1.2 1.8
12 1,2 1.2 1.8
18 1.8 1.5 2.4
35 2.4 1.8 3.0
118
Table 6.8 – (2) Supports for Plastics Pipework
Nominal Bore of Pipe Intervals for horizontal runs Intervals for Vertical Runs
mm m m
15 0.75 1.5
22-28 1 1.8
28-35 1 2
42 1.2 2.5

6.9 BRAZING
The procedure and the competence of the operative shall be in accordance with the recommendations
contained in the following HVCA publications:-

6.9.1 "Code of Practice - Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipework"


Welding operations which are beyond the scope of (a) and (b) shall comply in particular with:-

6.9.2 ISO 5187:1985 and ISO 10564:1993 - Brazing (copper pipe)


Where the visual inspection and tests reveal those brazing joints which are reasonably believed to be
unacceptable, the Project Architect/M&E Engineer shall be entitled to have such brazing examined by
approved inspection method and independently assessed. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost
of the tests and subsequently remedy the work to the satisfaction of the Project Architect/M&E Engineer
if tests prove the brazing joints to be non-compliance with the specification.

7 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL


7.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall install sufficient noise and vibration control measures on the plant/equipment, the
interconnected piping, so that when the installed plant/equipment are put into operation, the resulting
noise and vibration levels at locations within the building and at adjacent or nearby buildings shall not
exceed the acceptable limits.

Unless otherwise specified in the Specification, the total noise level in occupied areas within the building,
whether it be airborne, structure-borne or ductwork-borne, shall not exceed the following limits when all
the plant/equipment installed by the Contractor are put into operation:-
Table 8.1 Noise Control Criteria
Private offices, libraries, meeting and conference rooms NC 35
General offices NC 40

The specified noise criteria shall apply to all areas as measured at a level of 1.5m above the floor and the
measuring points shall be 1.5m away from the walls or doors of the rooms.

The Corrected Noise Level at potential Noise Sensitive Receiver in the adjacent or nearby building, if so
identified in the Contract Documents, shall not exceed the Acceptable Noise Level stipulated in the
Technical Memorandum for the Assessment of Noise from Places other than Domestic Premises or
Public Places issued by Environmental Protection Department when the plant/equipment installed by the
Contractor are put into operation.

7.2 EQUIPMENT BASES


7.2.1 General
Floor mounted equipment shall be installed on 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads provided by the
building contractor covering the whole floor area requirements of the equipment bases plus a minimum
of 150 mm further on each side or on inverted beams at roof.
Vibration isolators are then mounted on this concrete pad or inverted beams.
Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification, plant/equipment to be isolated shall either be
supported by structural steel bases or concrete inertia bases.

7.2.2 Wall Mounted Welded Structural Steel Brackets


Detailed design calculation of the base and its anti-vibration isolator arrangements plus shop drawings for
each base shall be provided for approval by the Architect before manufacture.
119
7.2.3 Concrete Inertia Bases
Detailed design calculation of the base and its anti-vibration arrangements plus shop drawings for each
base shall be provided for approval of the Project Architect before construction/manufacture.

7.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS


The following types of vibration isolation mountings or suspensions are not exhaustive but serve to cover
the main types that shall be applied as appropriate unless otherwise stated in the Particular Specification.

7.3.1 Double Deflection Neoprene Mounts


These mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 8.5mm.
Bolt holes shall be provided for applications where bolting down is required. They shall be carefully
positioned such that all supporting mounts would be properly loaded and the weight load on each mount
would be evenly distributed over the entire surface.

7.3.4 'D' - Neoprene Pads


Where necessary, pads may be bolted through with bolts isolated from the machine by neoprene
grommets. Alternatively "waffled" neoprene pads can be used without holding down bolts where the
vibration is minimal and the weight of machine is such that the resultant friction is adequate and the
machine is unlikely ever to move.

They shall be carefully positioned such that all supporting pads will be properly loaded and the weight
load on each pad will be evenly distributed over the entire surface.

7.4 PLANT/EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION


7.4.1 General
All rotating or reciprocating equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolation mountings or suspended
from vibration isolation hangers. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no rigid connection in whatever
form between the isolated equipment and the building structure which will otherwise short-circuit the
vibration isolation system and degrade its performance. This includes the necessary coordination with
other trades by the Contractor.
All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. The load versus
deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer, and must be linear over a deflection range of
not less than 50% above the design deflection.

All vibration isolators shall have their known undefeated heights or calibration markings so that, after
adjustment when carrying their loads, the deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that the
load is within the proper range of the device and that correct degree of vibration isolation is achieved
according to the design. The installation of all vibration isolators, hangers and associated equipment
bases shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the approved manufacturer’s written instructions.

7.4.2 Method of Installation


The equipment structural steel or concrete inertia base shall be placed in position and supported
temporarily by blocks or shims. The machinery shall then be installed on the base and when that is
complete, the isolators are to be installed without raising the machine and frame assembly.

After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, the isolators shall be adjusted
such that the load, are transferred from the blocks to the isolators. When all isolators are properly
adjusted, the blocks or shims will become slightly free and can then be removed.
Prior to start-up, remove all foreign matter underneath the equipment base and verify that the vibration
isolation system is not short circuited. Electrical circuit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped
to allow free motion of isolated equipment.

7.5 PIPEWORK VIBRATION ISOLATION


7.5.1 General
Unless otherwise indicated, all piping having connection to vibrating equipment shall be isolated by
means of noise and vibration isolation materials. All piping to be isolated shall neatly managed on cable
trays installed within the false ceiling and freely pass through walls without rigid connections.

120
Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of piping, with adequate
clearance around the outside of the piping shall be maintained. The clearance space shall be tightly
packed with glass fibre or rock wool and caulked airtight after installation of piping.

7.5.2 Horizontal Pipe Isolation


Where horizontal pipe isolation is required, the pipes shall be secured with cable ties on the cable tray.

7.5.3 Pipe Riser Isolation


Where pipe riser isolation is required, the pipe risers to be isolated shall be secured on cable trays
installed in the riser and anchored with pipe anchors or pipe guides.

7.6 INSPECTION
On completion of the installation of all noise and vibration control devices, the Contractor’s engineer
shall inspect the completed system and report in writing to the Main Contractor concerning any
installation errors, improperly selected isolation devices, and/or other faults that could adversely affect
the overall performance of the system. The Main Contractor shall then submit a report to the Project
Architect in which the report shall include all findings of the Contractor’s engineer and confirmation of
the satisfaction completion of all isolation work together with any remedial actions proposal.
Where remedial action has to be taken by the Contractor, further inspections shall be carried out until all
faults are rectified.

8 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONER
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Unitary air-conditioners shall include
(a) Condensing unit and blower coils;
(b) Condensing unit with variable refrigerant volume control and indoor fan coil units;

8.1.2 Unitary air-conditioners shall be factory fabricated and assembled.


The equipment shall be rated and tested in the same country of manufacture and meet with the
requirements of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Standards 5151:1994 (non-
ducted air-conditioners and heat pumps) or 13253:1995 (ducted air conditioners and air-to-air heat
pumps) or 13256-1 & -2:1998 (water to- air and water-to-water heat pumps) or other internationally
recognized quality assurance standards approved by the Architect.

8.1.3 The most energy efficient model in the series shall be selected for submission and shall be referred to
Clause C12.19 of this General Specification.

8.2 INSTALLATION AND SERVICING


Installation and servicing of unitary air-conditioners shall comply with the practice set out in the ISO
13261-1:1998 & ISO 13261-2:1998 and the manufacturer’s recommendation.

8.3 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTING


Vibration mounting shall be installed in accordance with relevant clauses of Section B8.

8.4 CASING
Removable panel for casings shall be provided to give access to all working components, parts, and
connections for installation and service. The casing shall be rigid G.I. Sheets and painted.
The compartment housing for the direct-expansion coil and blower shall be adequately insulated to
prevent sweating and shall contain a suitable drip pan with a drain connection. The compartment housing
for the compressor shall be treated for effective sound insulation to ensure that the noise emitted is within
the limits as specified in the Specification.

8.5 COMPRESSOR
Each compressor shall form a separate refrigerant circuit with its own condenser, evaporator and controls.

121
8.6 SUPPLY AIR FAN AND MOTOR
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be equipped with self-aligning bearings
suitable for the installed altitude of the fan.

8.7 COOLING COILS


Adequate water collecting tray for run off and removal of the condensation shall be provided.

8.8 AIR FILTER


Air filters shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation

8.9 AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS


Condenser fan shall be of propeller type arranged for either horizontal discharge.

8.10 REFRIGERANT PIPING


Refrigerant piping and insulation shall be installed in accordance with relevant Sections in this
Specification.

8.11 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE


Condensate drain pipe shall lead to the nearest convenient drain in the building or as indicated on the
Contract Drawings or as directed by the Architect on site.

8.12 MINIMUM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS OF SAFETY AND OPERATIONAL


CONTROL FOR UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONERS

Table: 12.12 Standard Provisions


Item Associated Components/Facilities Unit Cooling Capacity
Up to 7 kW 7 kW-14 kW
1 Self-contained safety and operational components of factory standard Yes Yes
2 Pressure gauges c/w stop valves, sight glass - Yes
3 Renewable filter-drier c/w accessories - Yes
4 Externally mounted adjustable Hi-Lo pressure cut-out with hand reset for High - Yes
side
5 Anti-recycling device Yes Yes
6 Emergency Stop Switch Yes Yes
7 Crankcase Heater - Yes
8 Pump down function and facilities - -
9 Refrigerant R410a R410a
10 Mechanical and weather protection to thermal insulation which exposed to view

8.13 SPLIT CONDENSING UNIT AND FAN COIL UNIT (FCU)


The Split Condensing Unit shall be air-cooled and installed outside the building. The interconnecting
refrigerant piping between condensing unit and fan coil unit (FCU) shall be field connected.

8.14 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME SYSTEM (VRV)


The refrigerant piping shall be capable of extending up to 100 metres equivalent length with 50 metres
level difference without any oil trap. The entire system completed with all necessary piping and
accessories shall be supplied and designed by a single proprietary manufacturer who has proven record
for its product.

8.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICING PLATFORM


Where unitary air-conditioners are installed at levels that are normally inaccessible from ground these
shall be provided with an adequately sized service platform complete with railings and steel cat ladder
with safety wings.
Such platforms shall be of reasonable substantial rigid galvanized metal construction and shall be well
protected against corrosion. The design must be approved by the Project Architect before installation.
Under Labour Department Ordinance, it is required to provide working platform for activity over 3
metres. This maintenance servicing platform requirement shall apply to all equipment and installation.

122
123
C GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATION)

1 AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT


1.1 GENERAL
Filters shall be of proprietary product and have the specified performance and fire property in accordance
with the test methods of one or more of the standards stated hereinafter.

To improve indoor air quality and protect air conditioning equipment, outdoor air and re-circulated
indoor air shall be filtered to remove dust, bacteria, pollens, insects, soot and dirt particles before it enters
the air conditioning system. The following air cleaning devices, dependent on their compatibility with the
general air conditioning system, shall be incorporated into the system as in-duct devices or stand-alone
devices.

1.1.1 Particulate Filter


Particulate filters are the most commonly used air cleaning devices in buildings. The filter shall be
selected depending on the physical characteristics and levels of the dust to be removed, the capacity of
the system to overcome the associated pressure drop across the filter and the degree of indoor air
cleanliness required:-

The filters shall be cleaned or replaced on a regular basis according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations or when the specified maximum pressure drop is reached.

1.2 STANDARDS
1.2.1 Performance of Air Filter
The performance of air filters shall comply with one or more of the following standards:-
(a) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.1-1992 – Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-
Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter;
(b) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 – Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Device
for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size;
(c) European Standard BS EN-779:2002 - Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation;
(d) European Standard BS EN 1822-1:1998 to BS EN 1822-3:1998 and BS EN 1822-4:2000 to BS EN
1822-5:2000 –High Efficiency Air Filters (HEPA and ULPA); or
(e) Any other standards equivalent to the standards above and approved by the Architect to suit particular
project requirements.

1.2.2 Fire Property of Air Filter


The fire property of air filters and its associated accessories shall comply with one of the following
standards as well as the requirements of Fire Services Department:-
(a) British Standard Institution BS 476-4:1970 - Non-Combustibility Test for Materials;
(b) British Standard Institution BS 476-6:1989 - Method of Test for Fire Propagation for Products,
with Indices "I" ≤ 12 and "i1" ≤ 6;
(c) European Standard DIN 53438-3:1984 - Response to Ignition by A Small Flame, Surface
Ignition, Class F1.

1.3 WASHABLE PANEL FILTER


This type of filter shall be constructed to withstand washing by water or steam. The filter panel shall be
constructed from multiple layers of expanded aluminium mesh or glass, natural or synthetic fibre, with
the layers being corrugated or plain and arranged alternately at right angle at one another.

1.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS (SPARE FILTER MEDIA)


The Contractor shall replace all filters used during testing and commissioning stage and in addition
provide the following to the Architect for use by Client’s operation staff during maintenance period:-

(a) For washable type filters, 20% in number of each size of filter cells provided. These shall be new and
in good condition. Besides, 10 litres of the approved cleaning detergent per filter installation shall be
provided. Regarding filters of viscous type, a drum or drums of fluid

124
Within one month before end of the maintenance period, all the filter cells/media shall be replaced
with new ones. In addition, 10 litres of the approved cleaning detergent per washable filter
installation shall be provided..

2 AIR HANDLING AND TREATMENT EQUIPMENT


2.1.1 GENERAL
Fan coil units shall comply with the manufacturer’s own ISO 9001:2000 quality standard in respect of
design and manufacturing and be type-tested to BS 4856-2:1975 for thermal volumetric and acoustic
performance. The Contractor shall submit the make and type of each fan together with the "type" test
certificate for the Architect’s approval. The origin of the fan shall be from the country where the "type"
test was conducted.

Fans, filters, cooling coils, motors, thermal and acoustic insulation shall comply with the appropriate
sections of this Specification and the following requirements:-
(a) Fans shall be of tangential flow types and shall be of mild steel, aluminium, reinforced glass fibers or
rigid plastic material as specified in Particular Specification;

(b) Air filters shall be as indicated in the relevant content of Section but with an efficiency of not less
than 50% when tested in accordance with BS EN 779:2002;

(c) Motors shall be quiet running and have sleeve or ball bearings factory lubricated for life. Motor
windings and electrical components shall be impregnated or protected to avoid trouble from
condensation. The fan motor shall be of the single phase permanent split capacitor type provided with
three speed tapped windings;

(d) All fan coil units capacity and air flow rate shall be selected based on the performance of the units at
medium fan speed; and

(e) In selecting the fan coil units, allowance shall be made for the actual resistance imposed on the air
flow of the units. The added resistance is to be applied to all fan coil units and shall be taken as not
less than 50 Pa external to the unit.

2.1.2 Casings
Casings shall be of factory treaded plastic with thickness not less than 1.0 mm suitably stiffened to
minimize drumming and vibration and shall be protected against corrosion and finished inside and
outside with stove primer. All corners shall be rounded off without sharp edges. Casings shall include
space for pipework connections, and there shall be ready access to the fan and motor, filter, drain pan and
pipework connections, for maintenance purposes.
The motor and fan shall be mounted on a detachable mounting chassis that can be removed from the fan
coil enclosure as one assembly (with extended cables) to facilitate fan and motor cleaning. It shall then
also be possible to remove the fan impeller scroll casing in order to properly clean the fan blades. Fan
and motor assemblies shall be completed with neoprene rubber anti-vibration mountings.

2.1.3 Coils
(a) Cooling coils shall be minimum two-row and shall include an air vent cock and drain valve.
(b) The chilled water cooling coil shall be rated in accordance with ARI 410:2001 and constructed from
seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminium fins.

(c) Each coil shall be provided with motorized 2-way solenoid control valve and isolation valves. Flexible
pipe connectors completed with union joints to facilitate removal of the (d) Working pressure of coils
shall suit specific requirements.

2.1.4 Components
(a) All units shall include an easily removable filter capable of treating the total air volume. Filters shall,
unless otherwise specified, be washable. It shall be supported in a stiff aluminium/stainless steel
detachable frame.

125
(b) Drain pans shall be made of plastics or reinforced glass fibre materials insulated with a minimum of 13
mm thick flexible closed cell elastomeric insulation. Drain pans shall be large and deep enough to collect
all condensate from the coil, return bends and pipework connections. The pan shall be removable and
have a slight fall to the drain connection to deal with the condensed moisture.

2.1.5 Controls
Fan coil units shall have a combined room temperature sensor completed with 3-speed controller and
cooling mode selector as specified.

2.1.6 Noise level


The noise data provided shall include an octave band analysis of the sound power level of each unit when
operating at its full or the stated design speed.

2.1.7 Remote control unit shall be provided as specified

2.2. CASSETTE TYPE FAN COIL UNITS


2.1.1 Generally, the cassette fan coil units shall comply with the requirements Clause of this Specification.

2.1.2 The fan coil unit shall be of integrated cassette type which combines the supply air slot, fan, casing and
cooling coil into a single unit.

2.1.3 Fan coil units shall be selected at design duty and specified noise level with fan running at medium
speed.

2.1.4 Remote control unit shall be provided as specified.

2.1.5 Cooling coil shall be constructed with copper tubes and shall be arranged horizontally. Tubes shall have
brazed copper return bends. Fins shall have smooth drawn collars of length equal to fin spacing and
mechanically bonded to tubes. Fins shall be of the plate type, corrugated to ensure maximum air contact.
Working pressure of coil shall be of a minimum of 1200 kPa and to suit system pressure design.
Connection of water piping shall be with flexible pipe connectors completed with union joints to
facilitate removal of the entire unit shall be provided. The connector shall be stainless steel braided
polymer tubing limited to 300 mm long and suitable for the system pressure.

2.1.6 Each fan coil unit shall be provided with a high grade AISI 316 stainless steel drain pan situated beneath
the cooling coil and arranged so that all moisture will collect in and drain from the pan. Drain pans shall
be insulated externally with a minimum of 25mm approved type foamed plastic. Each drain pan shall be
fitted with a drain pipe which shall be connected via suitable runs (correctly laid to fall) to the drainage
system. Drain pans shall have copper male connectors for connection to the condensate drain. The
connector shall be positioned to ensure rapid discharge of moisture from the pan.

2.1.7 Built-in condensate pump shall be provided for the removal of condensate. A water sensing system with
low, high and warning limits shall be provided which actuates the running of condensate pump at high
water limit and trigger the alarm system at warning level.
When water level reaches the warning limit, the sensing system shall cut off the unit operation.
Condensate pump shall be designed to run continuously. The power source for condensate pump and the
associated control system shall be independent from that of the fan coil unit such that the pump can still
be operated after the units have been switched off.

2.1.8 The air filter media shall be of the washable type.

2.1.9 Fan shall be of the quiet running direct driven centrifugal type with aluminium blades mounted to a solid
steel shaft. Fan motors shall be of the "split capacitor" type suitable for single phase electrical supply.
The motor shall be resiliently mounted to the fan tray or scrolls. The motor/fan tray assembly itself shall
also be resiliently mounted to the casing structure.

2.1.10 Adjustable louvres for directional airflow shall be provided for supply air slot in each fan coil unit.
Options shall be given to choose from 4-way supply air discharge.
126
2.3 ENERGY EFFICIENCY AND PERFORMANCE
(a) The efficiency of fan and motor used for all air treatment equipment shall be in accordance with
Section detailed in this Specification and Fan System under the Code of Practice for Energy
Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installation issued by the Electrical & Mechanical Services
Department in the General Air Conditioning, Refrigeration and Ventilation specification manual as
certified
(b) The type of insulation used shall have optimized thermal conductivity, and the design of the
insulation thickness for pipe, drain pan, etc. of the air handling equipment shall be in accordance with
Section as detailed in this General Specification.

(c) The Contractor shall submit relevant factory test certificates and field test records for calculation and
assessment by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer

3 REFRIGERATION MACHINE
3.1 GENERAL
The refrigeration plant for air conditioning purposes shall generally be of the mechanical, vapour
compression type using environmental friendly refrigerants.
The refrigeration machine shall be factory assembled and tested complete "packaged" units which may
have rotary type compressors and as specified in the Particular Specification. The testing of the cooling
capacity of the refrigeration machine shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 14511-1:2004 to BS
EN 14511-4:2004 or other international recognized standards.

The plant shall include any accessories necessary to ensure continuous and reliable operation.
Each unit shall be capable of running continuously at the lowest step of cooling capacity provided
without any adverse effect.
Compressor and motor speeds shall not exceed 50 revolutions per second for rotary type. Energy efficient
motor to optimize the system coefficient of performance shall be required. The noise level of the
refrigeration machine shall comply with the requirements as specified in the Particular Specification or
the relevant environmental protection ordinances whichever is more stringent.

Each compressor shall form a separate independent oil circuit with its own oil separator, oil filter and
positive lubrication oil safety control circuit equipped to ensure proper functioning of each compressor
and accessories.
All units shall comply, where applicable, with the following codes: ISO 5149:1993, ANSI ASHRAE
Standard 15 -2004; ARI Standard 550/590:2003 Testing and Ratings; BS EN 14511-1:2004 to BS EN
14511-4:2004 Testing and Ratings and Code of Practice for Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.

Characteristic curves shall show the energy consumption in kilowatts, pressure drop through the
evaporator, condenser fan speeds, etc., for each unit at 15%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of full capacity.
Sound pressure level characteristic curves shall be in dB measured in accordance with ARI standard
575:1994 for 15%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of full capacity.

3.2 COMPRESSORS, ROTARY TYPE


3.2.1 Rotary compressors will be acceptable where either:-
(a) The entire refrigeration system is completed and charged with refrigerant at the manufacturer’s
works; or
(b) The condensing unit incorporating the rotary compressor has a hold charge of refrigerant or inert
gas on arrival at site.

3.3 CONDENSERS, AIR-COOLED


4.3.1 Air cooled condensers shall have copper tubes with:-
- Aluminium fin coated with corrosion protection coating;
- Electro-tinned copper fins; or
- As otherwise indicated in the Particular Specification.
Corrosion protection coating of the condenser fins shall be applied in factory by the chiller manufacturer.
Fins with minor damage shall be combed straight. Units with extensive damage to fins will not be
accepted. Provision shall be made for the purging of non-condensable from the condenser.
127
3.3.2 Air cooled condensers mounted outside buildings shall have weatherproof fan motors. The units shall
discharge air vertically upwards.

3.3.3 Automatic control of the condensing pressure shall be incorporated.


Where modulation of air flow is by outlet dampers only, the fan motor shall be selected for this
application and arranged so that it is de-energized on complete closure of the dampers.

3.3.4 Fans shall comply with limitations on permitted noise levels where indicated in the Particular
Specification. Fans shall have sufficient static pressure to cater for the additional acoustic treatment such
as silencer, if any, in order to meet the noise requirements set out in Section C8 and the Particular
Specification.

3.3.5 The complete condenser coil shall be pressure tested at the manufacturer’s work.

3.4 REFRIGERANT PIPEWORK


3.4.1 Pipework for refrigerant systems shall be of copper or steel, which shall be internally degreased and
cleaned. Copper pipe shall be of refrigeration quality (i.e. material to BS EN 1057:2006).

3.4.2 For all chlorofluoro-methane or ethane compounds:-


(a) All pipes up to 18 mm OD shall be of fully annealed copper.
(b) All pipes from 22 mm to 108 mm OD shall be of hard drawn copper.
(c) All pipes over 108 mm OD shall be of black extra heavy seamless steel pipe to BS EN 10216-
1:2002 grade 1.0255.
(d) On fully packaged refrigeration machine, pipework other than copper, i.e. steel fitted and tested in
the factory as standard production for the units, will be acceptable subject to notification and
written approval by the Architect.

3.4.3 Size of Refrigerant Piping:-


Refrigerant piping shall be sized to avoid excessive pressure drop of the fluids or gases they carry. The
recommendations of the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (UK) and/or the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers/or other reputable/factory standards
approved by the Architect on the sizing of refrigerant piping shall be complied with.

4.0 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC (LOCALISED) CONTROL SYSTEM


The systems shall be operated at single phase mains voltage or at extra low voltage such as 12 V or
24 V as indicated in the Particular Specification.
Where a particular manufacturer’s system is offered and accepted, the installation shall be installed to
comply with that manufacturer’s recommended technical details and methods of installation.

4.4.1 Standalone Direct Digital Controller (DDC) unless otherwise specified, the direct digital controller shall
have sufficient memory to support its own operating system.
(a) Each controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system including:-
- Control Processes;
- Energy Management Applications;
- Alarm Management;
- Maintenance Support Applications;
- Operator I/O; and
- Manual Override Monitoring.

(b) Battery Backup


Battery shall be able to support programme
When the battery replacement is necessary, the open processor shall illuminate a "battery low"
status LED and replaced.

128
5 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
5.1 LOW VOLTAGE - GENERAL
The mains for the low voltage electrical motors and equipment shall be suitable for a supply as specified
in Sections of the Specification.
Unless otherwise indicated, all electrical equipment shall be tropicalized and suitable for use in service
conditions as specified in Sections of the Specification. Equipment shall be protected against atmospheric
corrosion, including that caused by salt-laden air. Materials used shall not be susceptible to mold growth
or attack by vermin.
Cables for power circuits shall not be less than 2.5mm2 copper conductors and cables for control circuit
shall not be less than 1.5mm2 copper conductors.

5.2 LOW VOLTAGE - WIRING FOR REFRIGERATED SITUATIONS


All electric wiring to be installed into refrigerated situations where the temperature is to be maintained at
or below 0oC shall be either MICS or elastomeric cables that are applicable for the designed operating
environment.

5.3 LOW VOLTAGE - ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT


The low voltage electric equipment shall comply with the relevant sections of the Electrical
Specification.

6 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL


6.1 GENERAL
This section of the Specification intends to direct the Contractor to select the appropriate and sufficient
noise and vibration control measures on the plant/equipment, the interconnected piping, so that when the
installed plant/equipment are put into operation, the resulting noise and vibration levels at locations
within the building and at the adjacent or nearby buildings shall not exceed the acceptable limits as
promulgated by the statutory requirements of the Environmental Protection Department.

The Corrected Noise Level at potential Noise Sensitive Receiver in the adjacent or nearby building, if so
identified in the Particular Specification and/or Drawings, shall not exceed the Acceptable Noise Level
stipulated in the Technical Memorandum for the Assessment of Noise from Places other than Domestic
Premises, Public Places or Construction Sites issued by the Environmental Protection Department when
the plant/equipment installed by the Contractor are put into operation.

6.2 EQUIPMENT BASES


6.2.1 General
Floor mounted equipment shall be installed on 100mm high concrete housekeeping pads provided by the
building contractor covering the whole floor area requirements of the equipment bases plus a minimum
of 150 mm further on each side or on inverted beams at the roof.
Vibration isolators shall be mounted on this concrete pad or inverted beams.

6.2.2 Welded Structural Steel Bases


Bases shall be constructed of adequate "I" or channel hot dipped galvanized steel members reinforced as
required to prevent the bases from flexing at start-up and from misalignment of drive and driven units.

All perimeter members shall be of steel sections with a minimum depth equal to 1/10th of the longest
dimension of the base but need not exceed 350 mm provided that the deflection and misalignment are
kept within acceptable limits as determined by the equipment manufacturer.
Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 50
mm.

6.2.3 Concrete Inertia Bases


Concrete inertia bases shall be formed within a structural steel beam or channel frame reinforced as
required to prevent flexing, misalignment of the drive and driven units or transferal of stresses into
equipment. The base shall be completed with height saving brackets, concrete reinforcement and
equipment bolting down provisions.

129
In general the thickness of concrete inertia bases shall be of a minimum of 1/12th of the longest
dimension of the base but never be less than 150 mm. The base depth needs not exceed 300 mm unless
specifically required.
As an indication of the standards required, minimum thickness of the inertia base shall generally comply
with the following table or be 1/12th of the longest dimension of the base, whichever is the larger:-

Table .6.2.3 Minimum Thickness of Inertia Base


Motor Size (kW) Minimum Thickness
3.7 - 11 150 mm
15 - 37 200 mm
45 - 55 250 mm

Base forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of 13 mm bars or angles welded in
place on 150mm centres running both ways in a layer of 40 mm above the bottom, or additional steel as
is required by the structural conditions.

Unless otherwise specified, concrete inertia bases shall weigh from 2 to 3 times the combined weight of
the equipment/plant to be installed thereon.
Base forms shall be furnished with drilled steel members and with anchor-bolt sleeves welded below the
holes where the anchor bolts fall in concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be provided in all
mounting locations to maintain a base clearance of 50 mm.

7 THERMAL INSULATION
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Thermal insulation shall comply with the requirements of BS 5422:2001 and BS 5970:2001 or other
statutory standards such as IEC, ISO and etc. or equivalent.

7.1.2 Unless otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used within any building shall, when tested in
accordance with BS 476-6:1989, BS 476-7:1997, BS 476-12:1991, shall comply with the following:-
(a) BS 476-12:1991: Ignitable T (Ignition Source A);
(b) BS 476-6:1989: Fire propagation I < 12, i1 < 6; and
(c) BS 476-7:1997: Surface spread of Flame Class 1 or comply with Clause C11.1.2 (a) as mentioned
above and conform to Class 'O' to UK Building Regulation 2000 certified by the "Warrington Fire
Test Laboratory" or approving organizations and standards recognized by the Fire Services
Department.

7.1.3 The insulation used for the air conditioning installation is "air" insulation which shall satisfy the
following:-
(a) Adequate strength and rigidity to maintain the thickness of air;
(b) Creating adequate number of closed air cells within the material to minimize heat loss due to
convection and conduction; and
(c) Covered on exposed surface with good quality foil to stop heat loss from radiation.

7.1.4 Insulation materials and their finishes shall be free from asbestos.
Where any work is carried out on existing insulation material or finish which contains asbestos in any
form the Contractor’s attention is drawn to the responsibilities under the provisions of the Asbestos
Regulations current in the Sierra Leone at the time of the works.
The Contractor shall also notify the Project Architect should the presence of asbestos be suspected.

7.1.5 Insulation materials and finishes shall be inherently proof against rotting, mold and fungal growth and
attack by vermin, be non-hygroscopic and in all respects be suitable for continuous use throughout the
range of operating temperatures and for the environment indicated.

7.1.6 The Contractor shall bear the cost and provide relevant certificates from an approved testing laboratory
in order to prove the physical properties of the insulation to be used in the project are conforming to the
specification.

130
7.2 TYPES OF THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS
The type of insulation required for a particular installation will generally be indicated in the Particular
Specification. Where this is not so the Contractor shall include for the types described herein:-

7.2.1 Type "A" - CFC & HCFC Free Phenolic Foam Insulation
(a) Temperature range: sub-zero to 120°C;
(b) Density: 40 kg/m3;
Except at pipe and other support points where a higher density load bearing quality insulation shall be
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations. In general, phenolic foam sections
with 80 kg/m3 for pipe sizes of up to 125mm and 120 kg/m3 for pipe sizes of 150mm or above and
made to the same thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation;
(c) Compressive Strength: 140 kN/m2 (BS 4370-1:1988, method 3 or ISO 844:2004)
(d) Thermal Conductivity: 0.022 W/m°C at 20°C mean temperature (BS 4370-2:1993, method
7 or ISO 8302:1991);
(e) Closed Cell Content: 90% minimum (BS 4370-2:1993, method 10 or ISO 4590:2002);
(f) Vapour Transmission: 10 micron gram meter/Nh at 38°C 88% RH (BS 4370-2:1993, method 8
or ISO 1663:1999); and
(g) Fire Rating: shall have class "O" fire rating and test certificate

The above properties shall be tested independent of facings which shall be factory applied Class "O"
double sided reinforced foil vapour barrier for both condensation control and mechanical protection. The
external side shall be of white antiglare coating and the internal side shall be of aluminium foil fully
adhered to the phenolic foam. Facing with all service jackets on the outside is also acceptable.

The surface emittance of the all service jackets shall be 0.7 or greater when tested with ASTM E-408-
71:2002. In addition, the performance of both vapour barriers and all service jackets shall comply with
the requirement stipulated at Clause C11.4.2.
The manufacturer shall provide proof if required by the Architect, that the above properties of the
material supplied remains constant or are stable enough throughout the working life.
7.2.2 Type "B" - Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation
Flexible closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation shall be CFC free, in continuous lengths, with factory applied
talc coating on inner surface.

Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation shall comply with the following requirements:-
(a) Thermal Conductivity (at 20oC mean temperature): <0.04 W/moC;
(b) Density: 65 kg/m3 ±5%;
(c) Water Vapour Permeability (without additional vapour barrier foil): 0.28 micron gram meter/Nh;
(d) Maximum Operating Temperature: > 80oC;
(e) No putrefaction and mildew shall form on the insulation material. The water absorption properties
of the insulation shall be of not more than 1.5% after 28 days;

(f) The material, including adhesives and all accessories shall have fire properties to Class 'O' comply
with the requirements of the Building Regulation in UK. The insulation material shall be a "built-in"
vapour barrier and achieve condensation control without any additional vapour barrier foil;

(g) Smoke Visibility (ISO 5659-2:2006); and


The mean specific optical density, Dm shall be less than 500 under all test conditions. The thickness
of the test specimen shall be 25 mm and the Dm shall be the maximum value of the specific optical
density (Ds10) of the three tests computed at 10 minutes time interval.

(h) Smoke Toxicity:


The results shall comply and in accordance with either of the following standards or equivalent:-
- International Maritime Organization (IMO) – International Code for Application of Fire Test
Procedure: Part 2 – Smoke and Toxicity Test, IMO MSC 61(67); or
- Naval Engineering Specification (NES) 713 (Issue 3) – Determination of the Toxicity Index of the
Products of Combustion from Small Specimens of Material

131
7.3 INSULATION THICKNESSES

7.3.1 Refrigerant Pipe


All refrigerant pipes except pipes on high pressure side of refrigeration cycle should be insulated with
minimum insulation thickness in accordance with Table C11.5.2-(1), C11.5.2-(2) or C11.5.2-(3).

Table 7.3.1 – (1): Minimum Insulation Thickness for Indoor Refrigerant Pipe (Case 1)
Minimum Thickness of Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe Installations (mm)
Indoor Condition at 28oC, 80% RH; still air; h(3) = 10
Fluid Operating Temperature
(1) o
Outer Diameter of Pipe(mm) 0C -10oC -20oC
Thermal Thermal Thermal
Conductivity (2) Conductivity (2) Conductivity(2)
λ λ λ
0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04
6 8 10 13 10 13 16 12 16 20
8 8 11 14 10 14 18 13 17 21
10 8 11 14 11 15 18 13 18 22
12 9 12 15 11 15 19 14 19 23
15 9 12 15 13 16 20 14 20 25
22 10 13 17 13 18 22 16 22 27
28 10 14 18 13 18 23 16 28
35 10 15 18 14 19 24 17 23 29
42 11 15 19 14 20 25 18 24 30
Note: (i) The above table assumes pipes to be copper pipe of BS EN 1057:2006.
For other metal pipes, same insulation thickness is applied to comparable outer diameters.
(2) The insulation thickness in above table is based on thermal conductivity rated at 20oC mean.
(3) The surface coefficient, h = 10 is assumed for cement or black matt surfaces at indoor still air
condition.

Table 7.3.2 – (2): Minimum Insulation Thickness for Indoor Refrigerant Pipe (Case 2)
Minimum Thickness of Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe Installations (mm)
Indoor Condition at 30oC, 95% RH; still air; h(3) = 10
Fluid Operating Temperature
Outer Diameter of Pipe(mm) (1) 0oC -10oC -20oC
Thermal Thermal Thermal
Conductivity (2) Conductivity (2) Conductivity(2)
λ λ λ
0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04
6 26 36 44 33 45 56 39 53 67
8 28 38 47 35 48 60 42 57 71
10 29 40 50 37 50 62 44 60 75
12 31 42 52 38 52 65 45 62 78
15 32 44 54 40 55 68 48 65 81
22 35 48 59 44 60 74 52 71 89
28 37 50 63 46 63 79 55 75 94
35 39 53 66 49 66 83 58 79 99
Note: (1) The above table assumes pipes to be copper pipe of BS EN 1057:2006.
For other metal pipes, same insulation thickness is applied to comparable outer diameters.
(2) The insulation thickness in above table is based on thermal conductivity rated at 20oC mean.
(3) The surface coefficient h = 10 is assumed for cement or black matt surfaces at indoor still air
condition.

132
Table 7.3.3 – (3): Minimum Insulation Thickness for Outdoor Refrigerant Pipe
Minimum Thickness of Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe Installations (mm)
Outdoor Condition at 35oC, 95% RH; wind speed = 1 m/s; h(3) = 13.5
Outer Diameter of Pipe(mm)(1) Fluid Operating Temperature
0oC -10oC -20oC
Thermal Thermal Thermal
Conductivity(2) Conductivity(2) Conductivity(2)
λ λ λ
0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04
6 23 32 40 29 39 49 33 46 57
8 25 34 42 30 41 52 36 49 61
10 26 36 45 32 44 54 38 51 64
12 27 37 46 33 45 57 39 53 66
15 29 39 49 35 48 59 41 56 70
22 31 43 53 38 52 65 45 61 76 76
28 33 45 56 40 55 69 48 64 80
35 35 48 59 42 58 72 50 68 85

Note: (1) The above table assumes pipes to be copper pipe of BS EN 1057:2006.
For other metal pipes, same insulation thickness is applied to comparable outer diameters.
(2) The insulation thickness in above table is based on thermal conductivity rated at 20oC mean.
(3) The surface coefficient h = 13.5 is assumed for cement or black matt surfaces at outdoor condition
with a wind speed of 1 m/s.

8 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONER
8.1 GENERAL
Unitary air-conditioners shall include:-
(a) Inverter Condensing unit and Single split Wall Mounted fan coil units;
(b) Condensing unit with variable refrigerant volume (VRV) control and In-Ceiling Mounted
Cassette indoor fan coil units;

Unitary air-conditioners shall be factory fabricated and assembled. The equipment shall be rated and
tested in the same country of manufacture and meet with the requirements of the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) Standards 5151:1994 (non-ducted air-conditioners and heat
pumps) or 13253:1995 or other internationally recognized quality assurance standards approved by the
Project Architect.

The most energy efficient model in the series shall be selected for submission and shall be referred to
Sections in Clause this Specification.

8.1.1 Equipment Suitable for Local Electricity Supply


Unless otherwise specified, the electrical equipment’s of the unitary air-conditioners shall be suitable
for use with 3-phase and neutral, 4-wire, 400/230 V, 50 Hz source for neutral earthed system with
provision of bonding.

8.1.2 Selection of Air-Cooled Condensers and Condensing Units


Air-cooled condensers and condensing units of unitary air-conditioners shall be selected to give rated
capacity with condensing temperature not exceeding 50°C for the ambient condition as specified under
Clause 3.11 of this Specification.

8.1.3 Casing
Casings of unitary air-conditioners shall be constructed of rigid galvanized sheet steel and painted in
accordance with Part G, suitably reinforced with channels and sections to form a robust cabinet. Casing
for outdoor installation shall be of weatherproof finish, preferably galvanized, painted or anodized
aluminium.

133
8.1.4 Compressor
Compressors shall be rotary of the hermetically sealed type. Compressor shall be complete with
internal motor protection, positive lubrication, mufflers, crankcase heater, and internal and external
vibration isolation.

8.1.5 Supply Air Fan and Motor


Supply air fans shall be of the double width, double inlet, centrifugal type of ample sized for operation
against the specified static pressure. Fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have adequate
power so as to be non-overloading throughout the range of the fan characteristic. The motor shall be
high efficiency motor.

8.1.6 Cooling Coils


Cooling coils shall be of the direct expansion type and constructed with copper tubes and aluminium fins
to give high heat transfer performance. The coils shall have sufficient number of rows of tubes to provide
efficient dehumidification of the air in addition to its cooling.

Heating coil shall be constructed with copper tubes and aluminium fins to give high heat transfer
performance.

8.1.7 Air Filter


Air filters shall unless otherwise specified be of the washable panel type. The filter performance shall
be referred to Clause 1. Higher filter efficiency shall be adopted to meet with the IAQ objective
designed.

8.1.8 Air-Cooled Condensers


Air-cooled condensers shall unless otherwise specified be suitable for outdoor installation with ample
capacity to dispose of the rejected heat from the air conditioning system. Condenser coils shall be
constructed with copper tube and aluminium fins. Special corrosion resistant treatment for the
condenser coils and fins shall be considered for the equipment to be located on corrosive environment.

8.1.9 Refrigerant Piping


External refrigerant piping shall include all necessary fitting and amerflex insulation. Size of the
refrigerant pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the recommended standards as stated in this
Specification

8.1.10 Condensate Drain Pipe


Condensate drain pipe shall be PVC and adequately insulated and mechanical protected in accordance
with the recommended standards as stated in this Specification

8.1.11 Safety Control


Controls shall be factory wired. Field wiring in conduit or trunking shall be limited to interconnections
between separate pieces of equipment and power wiring. Each unit shall be protected and controlled by
a factory built control panel incorporating all necessary devices, switches, indicator, etc. Functions
required shall include those such as interlock with lubricating oil pump and other auxiliary components
for unit starting, control circuit for compressor stop with pump down and crankcase heaters, automatic
unloading, isolating switches and emergency stop facilities.

Safety protections shall include low lubricating oil pressure cut-out, low evaporating pressure cut-out,
high condensing pressure cut-out, low refrigerant temperature cut-out, high motor coil temperature cut-
out and other protections necessary for the proper and safe operation of the unit. Overload and motor
burnout protections shall be provided as well.

8.1.12 Operational Control


For a conventional split type A/C unit, a wired or wireless remote controller shall be provided for the
selection of room temperature setting, fan speed and timer setting. For an advance multi-zone modular
split type, the remote controller shall be of the liquid crystal display (LCD) type with an on-off switch
for operational features such as speed selection, timer setting, temperature setting, self-diagnosis
function and auto restart function.
134
8.1.13 Split Condensing Unit and AHU
The condensing unit shall include rotary compressors, air-cooled condensing coils, fans and motors
control and safety devices, piping and all necessary accessories factory assembled in a weatherproof
painted G.I. casing. The refrigerant circuit shall be field connected to the matched AHU or fan coil
units each completed with direct expansion cooling coil, expansion valve, blower with motor and the
necessary number of air filters in a well-insulated, sturdy G.I. metal casing with paint to an attractive
appearance.

8.1.14 Variable Refrigerant Volume System


The air conditioning system shall be of the multi-zone modular split type. Each zone shall consist of
one air-cooled outdoor condensing unit connected to a group of indoor fan coil units in one single
refrigerant circuit. The outdoor unit shall not comprise more than three compressors. For multi
compressors outdoor unit, one shall be inverter control compressor. The inverter compressor shall be
incorporated with a frequency inverter control to achieve the optimum flow of refrigerant in response to
the actual load.

The multi-zone modular split type unit shall be provided with heating (Heat Recovery) and cooling
output simultaneously.

8.1.15 Energy Efficiency Performance


All unitary air conditioners shall be selected aiming for the highest operation efficiency. The minimum
Coefficient of Performance (COP) for Air-Cooled Unitary Air Conditioner and Water-Cooled Unitary
Air Conditioner excluding room coolers shall be as shown in the Tables below:-

Table 8.1.15(a): Minimum COP for Air-Cooled Unitary Air Conditioner

Capacity Range Above 10 40 to 200


(kW) and
Below 40
Minimum COP (Cooling Mode) 2.4 2.4
3 for VRV 2.9 for VRV
Minimum COP Heat Pump
2.7 2.8
(Heating Mode)
VRV: Air Conditioner with capacity control through variation of refrigerant volume flow

8.1.16 Energy Efficiency and Energy Conservation


All equipment provided by the Contractor for the air conditioning installation shall conform to the
highest efficient rating of energy efficiency and energy conservation requirement as stipulated in this
Specification, and/or the Codes of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations and
of Electrical Installations issued by Electrical and Mechanical Services Department.

In case of any non-compliance, the Contractor shall submit full justification with technical data
supporting the deviation from the requirements as specified in this Specification and the Codes of
Practice for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations and Electrical Installations issued by
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department.

D INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING


1.1 GENERAL
Throughout the execution of the installation, the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring compliance
with the Regulations included in clause 2 and shall notify the Project Architect of any infringement
which directly or indirectly detracts from the safe and satisfactory operation of the installation(s) whether
or not such infringement relates to the works covered in the Contract or to those associated with others.

1.12 Standards and requirements for the testing and commissioning works are listed should be in accordance
to:-
(a) Statutory Obligations and other requirements, Specifications and Standards specified in this
Specification;
135
(b) Building Services Branch Testing and Commissioning Procedure for Air-conditioning,
Refrigeration, Ventilation & Control System Installation
(c) Manufacturers’ recommendations and specifications.

1.1,3 The Contractor is required to appoint a competent and experienced testing and commissioning engineer
responsible for the overall planning, organizing, coordinating, supervising and monitoring of the testing
and commissioning works and also certifying all results and reports from the testing and commissioning
works. The Contractor shall submit, at the commencement of the Contract, information detailing
qualification and experience of the testing and commissioning engineer for the Project Architect’s
approval.

1.1.4 It is necessary to require the Contractor to provide, at no cost to the Employer, all necessary equipment,
apparatus, tools and materials for carrying out of testing and commissioning works.
(a) Master Programmed of Testing and Commissioning Works
The Contractor is required to submit a programme for testing and commissioning works shall be
submitted at the commencement of the Contract, usually within the first three months. The
programme shall indicate the tentative dates of all tests and commissioning works that will be carried
out throughout the whole contract and all necessary submissions and approval relating to testing and
commissioning and ensure that the testing and commissioning programme matches the master
programme for construction and that all testing and commissioning works are complete before the
completion date of the Contract.

(b) Inspection, Testing and Commissioning Methods and Procedures


The Contractor is required to submit detailed inspection, testing and commissioning methods and
procedures together with report formats for reporting inspection, testing and commissioning results
for the Project Architect’s approval at least three months before commencement of testing and
commissioning works, or four months after the commencement of the Contract, whichever is earlier.

(c) Labor and Materials


The Contractor is required to be responsible for provision of all labour and both consumable and
non-consumable materials for carrying out testing and commissioning works at their expenses.
Electricity supply, water and LP gas and town gas for carrying out of testing and commissioning
works shall also be arranged and provided by the Contractor at no cost to the Employer.

(d) Supply of Inspection, Measuring and Testing Equipment


The Contractor is required to supply the calibrated equipment and instrument for testing and
commissioning works in accordance with the requirements as specified in the Particular
Specification.

(e) Readiness for Commissioning and Testing


The Contractor is required to check the completion of the works to be tested or commissioned, the
associated builder’s works and the associated building services installations to ensure that testing
and commissioning can be preceded in a safe and satisfactory manner without obstruction.

(f) "Type-test" Certificate


"Type-test" for equipment shall be carried out at the manufacturers’ works or elsewhere appropriate
in order to demonstrate their compliance with the Regulation or requirements. "Type-test"
certificates together with the corresponding drawings, sketches, reports and any other necessary
documents shall be submitted to the Project Architect for approval before delivery of the
equipment.

1.1.5 The Contractor is required to provide advanced notice for inspection, testing and commissioning works
as follows:-
(a) Off-site Inspection and Testing
An advanced notice of at least one week before commencement of the inspection or test shall be
provided.

136
(b) On-site Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
An advanced notice of at least 4 calendar days before commencement of inspection, testing or
commissioning shall be provided.

1.1.6 Documentation and Deliverables


The Contractor shall record all commissioning information and testing results at the witness of the
Project Architect or his representatives.

Commissioning and testing record shall be properly checked and certified by contractor‘s Testing and
Commissioning Engineer and signed by the Project Architect or his representative who has witnessed the
testing or commissioning before submission to the Project Architect. The Contractor shall submit full
commissioning and testing report to the Project Architect within 14 calendar days after completion of
commissioning and testing of the installation.

1.2 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING – DEFINITIONS


For the purpose of this General Specification the following definitions shall apply:-

1.2.1 Commissioning:
The advancement of an installation from the stage of static completion to full working conditions to meet
the specified requirements. This will include setting into operation and regulation of the installation.

1.2.2 Setting to work:


The process of setting a static system into motion

1.2.3 Off-site Tests:


Tests carried out on items of equipment at manufacturer’s works or elsewhere to ensure compliance with
the requirements of Specifications and/or relevant Standards or Codes of Practice (or other standards
specified).

1.2.4 Site Tests:


Tests on static plant and systems (e.g. inspection and testing of welds, hydraulic testing of pipe work,
etc.) to ensure correct and safe installation and operation

1.2.5 Regulation:
The process of adjusting the rates of fluid flow and heat transfer in a distribution system within specified
tolerances as stated in the relevant CIBSE Commissioning Code.

1.2.6 Performance Testing:


The measuring and recording of the performance of the commissioned installation

1.3 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING – GENERAL


1.3.1 Any defects of workmanship, materials and performance, maladjustments or other irregularities which
become apparent during commissioning or testing shall be rectified by the Contractor at no cost to the
Employer and the relevant part of the commissioning or testing procedure shall be repeated at the
Contractor’s expenses.

1.3.2 The entire testing and commissioning procedure shall be undertaken by the Contractor’s own competent
specialist staff or by a competent Independent Commissioning Specialist nominated by and acting for the
Contractor and approved by the Project Architect.

1.3.3 Where specified in the Particular Specification, the Contractor shall nominate a competent independent
Specialist to conduct commissioning work.

1.3.4 Where specified in the Particular Specification, the Contractor shall employ an approved specialist testing
and commissioning firm who shall be named in the returned Tender Documents.

137
1.3.5 At the appropriate time in the Contract, usually within the first two months, the Contractor shall furnish
the Provisional Testing and Commissioning Programme, methods, procedures and formats of test records
to the Project Architect. This shall be updated as the work progresses towards completion.

1.3.6 Unless otherwise indicated, all electricity, main water and other fuels, such as town gas, necessary for the
operation of the plant during preliminary runs and for full adjustments and commissioning tests will be
provided at no cost by the Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Contract.

1.3.7 If considered appropriate, the Contractor shall be required to carry out demonstration to dismantle those
parts/components of the installation which are considered difficult/impossible for maintenance access.
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all necessary modification work at no extra charge to
the Employer to alleviate the difficulties associated with dismantling or maintenance access.

1.4 OFF-SITE TESTS


Where the specified Standards or Codes of Practice stipulate, "type-tests" on items of equipment to
demonstrate compliance shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works or elsewhere as appropriate. In
all cases, "type-tests" Certificates shall be submitted in duplicate to the Project Architect. Cases where
appropriate, "type-tests" Certificates will be accepted are as follows:-

1.4.1 Fans:
"type-tests" Certificates showing fan characteristic curves (ISO 5801:1997), "type-tests" Certificates for
sound power levels (ISO 5136:2003), fan dynamic balancing test Certificates completed with a method of
statement from manufacturer on testing to Grade 2.5, 4 & 6.3 on appropriate fan types in accordance with
ISO 1940-1:2003 and ISO 1940-2:1997.

1.4.2 Pumps:
"type-tests" Certificates for head, discharge, speed and power input (BS EN ISO 9906:2000 as
appropriate).

1.4.3 Electric motors:


"type-tests" Certificates in accordance with BS EN 60034-1:2004 and/or IEC 60072-1:1991, IEC 60072-
2:1990 & IEC 60072-3:1994.

1.4.4 Low voltage starter switchgear and control gear assembly:


"Type-tests" Certificates for starter (e.g. auto-transformer) and control panels assembly as a whole in
accordance with BS EN 60439-1:1999.

1.5 SITE TESTS


F1.5.1 The Contractor shall carry out "on-site" tests in respect of all static systems to ensure safe and proper
operation as conforming to the design intent. Such tests shall include test of welds and pressure tests on
the hydraulic systems.

1.5.2 On completion of cleaning operations described in the T&C Procedure for Air-conditioning,
Refrigeration, Ventilation and Control Systems Installation, each installed unit shall be re-charged and
then subjected to gas pressure test as required.
Any items of equipment set to operate at or below the test pressure shall be isolated or removed prior to
applying this test.

1.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD


1.6.1 Periodic Site Tests
Site inspections of "work in progress" will be made by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer or the
representative from time to time. The Contractor shall keep such inspection record for checking from
time to time. Works to be permanently covered up shall be subjected to inspection and test before cover
up. During the inspection, if the Project Architect/M&E Engineer discovers any work that has been
covered up before inspection and testing, this work shall be uncovered for inspection and testing to the
Project Architect’s/M&E Engineer’s satisfaction. The cost involved in uncovering the work, inspecting,

138
testing and re-concealing the work together with any consequential losses shall be paid by the Contractor
at no additional cost to the Employer.

1.6.2 Tests at Works yard


The Contractor shall note that the Project Architect/M&E Engineer may require witnessing tests and
inspections of locally and manufactured equipment during construction at the contractor’s works yard.
Where this requirement is indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall allow for making the
necessary arrangements; including and indicating the Project Architect’s /M&E Engineer’s time and
subsistence expenses in the Bill of Quantities.

1.6.3 Factory Test Certificates


Certificates of all unit pressure and other manufacturers" tests carried out at the manufacturers" works
shall be forwarded in duplicate to the Project Architect for approval. This approval shall normally be
required before the materials or apparatus are dispatched from the manufacturer’s works.

Where specified, the Contractor shall subject certain materials and equipment to be tested by the
recognized institutions or laboratories and submit the type test certificates to the Project Architect for
approval.

1.7 DOCUMENTS AND DATA REQUIRED FOR HAND-OVER MEETING


1.7.1 General
The Contractor shall note that the system cannot be handed over until all the foregoing requirements
(where applicable) have been carried out to the satisfaction of the Project Architect.

1.7.2 Test Certificates


Before the handover inspection, the Contractor shall provide the follow test/record certificates where
applicable:-
(a) Copies of manufacturer’s works tests/record certificates on plant items comprising air conditioning
units including motors, fans, pumps, etc.;
(b) Copies of pressure test/record certificates for works carried out on site;
(c) Copies of refrigeration plant efficiency test/record certificates;
(d) Copies of all performance test/record certificates including room conditions, etc. These certificates
shall be accompanied with all appropriate charts and diagrams; and
(e) Copies of all noise test/survey records on every noise emitting plant and machineries, individual
room/space and a statement of compliance with the statutory requirements under the current Noise
Control Ordinance.

1.7.3 "As-built" Drawings


All necessary copies of "As-built" drawings as detailed in the Contract Documents and this Specification.
(*settings of all the sensors are to be indicated)

1.7.4 Operation Maintenance and Services Manuals


All necessary copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals as detailed in the Contract Documents and
this Specification.
The Contractor shall include functional spare parts and contact lists of the suppliers in the manual.
(*settings of all the sensors are to be indicated)

1.7.5 Manufacturer’s Name Plate


Every item of plant supplied by a manufacturer shall be fitted with a clearly engraved, stamped or cast
manufacturer’s name plate properly secured to the plant item and showing:-
- Manufacturer’s Name;
- Serial and/or Model No.;
- Date of Supply;
- Rating/Capacity; and
- Test and Working Pressure (where applicable)

139
1.8 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
For Testing and Commissioning Procedures, please refer to:-
Testing and Commissioning Procedure for Air-Conditioning, Refrigeration Ventilation and Control
System Installation as specified and detailed in the latest editions of the American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) and the Heating and Ventilation
Contractor Association, U.K (HVCA)

E OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE


1.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide all the Level One Services as specified in this Specification for all
installation works.

Level Two Services detailed in this Specification shall only be carried out if specified in the Particular
Specification of the Contract. The specified Level Two maintenance responsibilities shall be priced
separately in the tender with cost for each individual item.

1.2 LEVEL ONE SERVICES – MANDATORY RESPONSIBILITIES DURING MAINTENANCE


PERIOD

1.2.1 Requirement for Training


Training and familiarization for the operation and maintenance of sophisticated equipment shall be
provided and arranged by the Contractor. The training shall include all training facilities, material and
handouts, etc. The Contractor shall submit a "Training Schedule" at least two months prior to completion
of installation for the Project Architect’s Approval. The schedule shall consist of the following
requirements:-
(a) General Requirement
(i) The Contractor shall provide facilities and training programme to ensure that the Employer’s
operation and maintenance staff acquire full knowledge and operation, breakdown and routine
maintenance, diagnosis and hence operate and maintain reasonably effectively and efficiently the
system/equipment including Control and Monitoring System offered. The training proposal shall
be submitted at least two months prior to completion of the Contract and shall include all aspects
of operation and maintenance of the plant including the use of special tools. Besides, equipment
portfolio for Air-Conditioning, Refrigeration, Ventilation and Control System offered shall be
submitted together with the training proposal. The equipment portfolio shall include quantity of
equipment, equipment cost, recommended serviceable life by the manufacturer and cycle of major
overhaul;
(ii) A training proposal together with a detailed breakdown unit price for such service shall be
submitted at the time of tendering;
(iii) The training proposal shall also include details and duration of the training course(s),
qualifications of the instructor and the qualification requirements for the trainee(s);
(iv) Whenever possible, the training courses shall be held before or during the commissioning period
and shall be in Freetown.
Within two months after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit full details of the
training syllabus for approval of the Project Architect;
(v) To reach the required depth of appreciation, the principles and theory and practical "hands-on"
demonstration shall be lectured; and
(vi) The operation and maintenance training of the Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) equipment shall also be
included in the training programme. Any manual for the IAQ equipment shall be prepared by
qualified personnel.

(b) Particular Requirement


The training course shall contain, but not limited to, the following:-
(i) General description of the system and its associated equipment as a whole;
(ii) Start-up and shut-down procedures;
(iii) Safety precautions during start-up and shut-down;
(iv) A detailed description of the functions of all switches and indicators on control console;
(v) Trouble shooting procedures;
140
(vi) Preventive and corrective maintenance requirements to ensure proper operation of a system or
equipment under the maintenance programme;
(vii) Identification of all the operating parameters which affects the performance of the plant;
(viii) Adjustment of the operating parameters to achieve optimum operating conditions;
(ix) Check-list of all the periodic inspection and servicing of the plant;
(x) Illustration of the construction of major components of the plant by sectional views;
(xi) Dismantling and reassembling procedures during a major repair;
(xii) The use of special tools;
(xiii) Calibration for testing equipment, measurement, record and performance assessment; and
(ix) Any other items as found necessary.

1.2.2 Requirement during Maintenance Period


The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the following within the maintenance period:-
(a) Instruction to Employer’s Operation and Maintenance Staff
After the installation has been successfully handed over and put into operation, the Contractor
shall provide full time attendance for a period of at least 20 consecutive days or as stated in the
Specifications, by a qualified operator(s) who shall be fully conversant with the operation and
maintenance of the equipment. Their duties shall be to operate the systems and to guide and
instruct the Employer’s Operation Staff such that they will become fully conversant with the
operation of the complete air conditioning installation.

Note: This commitment shall be carried out where the operational responsibilities are to be immediately
transferred to the Employer’s own staff or at the end of Levels Two Service operational
arrangements.

(b) Completion of Any Outstanding Work


Within one month of receiving the Project Architect’s substantial completion certificate, the
Contractor shall complete all minor outstanding works listed thereon and rectify any defects that
have arisen up to that time.

(c) Faults and Complaints


The Contractor shall attend to faults and complaints arising from defective work materials and/or
system operation within one hour at any time during the maintenance period.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for attending emergency calls and rectifying all defects
leading to fault or breakdown of the equipment and/or system within reasonable time or specified.
The Contractor shall keep records of all the faults/breakdowns calls for submission to the Project
Architect. The costs for the attendance, labour, materials and spare parts for repair, submission of
fault/breakdown reports, etc. are deemed to have been allowed for in the submitted tender price.
(d) Inspection during Maintenance Period
The Contractor shall, in addition to the periodic visits as stipulated in the Conditions of Contract,
make further working visit to the site one month before the end of the maintenance period to
check and, if necessary, re-adjust the systems to meet the actual operation conditions.

(e) Joint inspection at the end of Maintenance Period


The Contractor shall include for making visit(s) to the installation at the end of the maintenance
period in order to facilitate the acceptance and handing over of the installation to the Employer’s
Representatives.

Note (1): If the installation is proved to be unacceptable by the Project Architect, (d) and (e) may have
to be repeated at the Contractor’s expenses and with the effect of extending the contractual
defect liability period.
Note (2): When the installation is accepted and handed over to the Employer’s authorized
representative(s) at the end of maintenance period, the maintenance certificate will then be
issued by the Project Architect.

141
(f) Servicing, Replacement and Replenishment
During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall supply and install, without additional charge
to the Employer, replacements for all and any equipment or parts thereof or liquids or gases,
which may, in the opinion of the Project Architect, became unserviceable, especially where the
causes are attributable to faulty materials, workmanship, or inadequate performance. The liability
of the Contractor shall cover replacement of liquids or gases, oils and refrigerant which may be
lost by leakage or become contaminated or in other respects unserviceable.

(g) Record "Log Book"


For all Contract works under the maintenance period or ongoing Contract Maintenance, the
Contractor shall have maintenance staff complete the site/installation record "Log-Book" after
each visit/installation. The Log-Book may be completed in English. The Log-Book will be
supplied by the Contractor and kept in the Bank or location as agreed. Every attendance and
details of work done for the installation shall be entered into the Log-Book so as to form a
comprehensive maintenance record.

(h) Project Architect to be informed


No replacement of plant or parts of plant shall be carried out at any time unless the Project
Architect has previously been notified and approved.

(i) Annual inspection and submission of maintenance certificate


During the end of the maintenance period, the Contractor shall carry out and submit the annual
inspection and submission of maintenance certificate for the ventilation system as required under
Building (Ventilation Systems) Regulations to the ADB Resident Representative and the Project
Architect of the completed installation.

I.3 LEVEL TWO SERVICES – SPECIFIED CONTRACTOR’S MAINTENANCE


RESPONSIBILITIES DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

Where specifically required in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall allow for and carry out full
and comprehensive maintenance of the installation for 12 months (or for a period as stated). The works
shall in addition to those required under the LEVEL ONE SERVICE include also the followings:-

1.3.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the following within the maintenance period:-
(a) Inspection, checking, servicing, maintenance and repair including replacement of parts and
components due to normal tears and wears;
(b) Emergency inspection, checking and servicing, repair and rectification work;
(c) Provide skilled craftsmen to assistant the start-up, control, performance monitoring and shut-
down of the plant;
(d) Test and commissioning of the installation after the completion of services, maintenance and
repair; and
(e) Submission of services record and test report.

1.3.2 The Contractor shall provide labour, minor spare parts, components and consumable materials in the
following services during the maintenance period:-
(a) Consumable materials such as re-filling of refrigerant and lubricant, renewal of for blower motor
as and when required/necessary;
(b) All cutting and waste, packing, carriage, risk, moving, hoisting and fixing at the required position;
(c) Repairs including first line attendance, emergency and miscellaneous repairs, plants, tools,
vehicles for transportation of material for purposes of execution of work; and
(d) Preparation and submission of records/reports, compliance with miscellaneous requirements.
Upon practical completion of the construction work is certified by the Project Architect, the
Contractor shall provide competent, experienced and qualified staff and workshop facilities to
undertake the Level Two maintenance works during the maintenance period. Detailed information
of the organization, workshop facilities and list of contact persons of the Contractor’s
maintenance team shall be submitted to the Project Architect one month before the
commencement date of the maintenance period.

142
1.3.3 Contractor’s Responsibilities for Breakdown Call-out
(a) The Contractor shall offer efficient and prompt response to breakdown call-out for the
installation/equipment failure.

The expedition of response shall be in accordance with the following categories:-


(i) VERY URGENT for installation breakdown including failure of compressor, pipe burst, water
dripping, fire alarm and electricity power failure, the Contractor shall respond and attend to the
Very Urgent calls immediately of not more than 30 minutes;
(ii) URGENT for abnormality of equipment operation, the Contractor shall respond and attend to the
Urgent calls within 1 hour from the receipt of the calls; or
(iii) NON URGENT for inadequate of room condition, the Contractor shall respond and attend the
fault within 4 hours.
Investigation report and proposal for repair/improvement/modification shall be submitted.

(b) The Contractor shall promptly complete any repair necessary for resuming the breakdown installation. In
case immediate permanent repair is not possible due to safety related reason, the following "time for
repair" targets counted from the receipt of breakdown or fault call shall be complied with:-
(i) Complete temporary repair for resumption of the suspended or breakdown services to a safe
operating condition within 24 hours; and
(ii) Complete permanent rectification works within 3 and 7 working days unless long component and
parts delivery time is required.

1.3.4 Maintenance Programme and Schedule


The Contractor shall prepare, submit and seek endorsement on the maintenance program before the
commencement of the Contract maintenance period. The maintenance programme should include
Monthly Routine Service, Half-Yearly Service and Annual Maintenance.

Upon the approval of the above maintenance program, the Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive
maintenance schedule for all installations and indicate dates for routine maintenance of the installations
before the commencement of the Contract maintenance period.

1.3.5 Co-ordination
The Contractor shall co-operate and co-ordinate with the Project Architect’s Representatives, user
department for the smooth execution of maintenance works.

1.3.6 Plant Log and Breakdown/Fault Call Report


The Contractor shall submit daily record of the following documentation and reports at three months
intervals:-
(a) Record of current status of plant and major equipment, all services, maintenance and
repair/replacement carried out for the plant and equipment including the following details:-
(i) Refrigerant pressure gauge readings;
(ii) Refrigerant compressor suction and discharge pressure;
(iii) Dry and wet bulb temperature of supply air at designed offices, meeting and conference rooms
and that of return air at system return and outdoor air condition; and
(iv) IAQ audit report with monthly measurements of all IAQ parameters.

(b) Equipment Breakdown Report


Equipment breakdown report shall be submitted after the rectification work and shall have full
details of findings during investigation/examination on cause of breakdown, account of
repair/replacement work needed, suggested precaution and/or action required to prevent the
recurrence of similar incident.

1.3.7 Monthly Works


(a) General
(i) To check the general condition of the plant and equipment such as compressors, condensers, heat
recovery equipment, heat pumps, IAQ equipment, fan coil units and the associated electrical,

143
electronic, mechanical controls and circuit boards. To ensure that the plant and equipment are
satisfactorily operating within design conditions;
(ii) To drain and clean the pre-filter and after-filter of the pneumatic control system, and clean the
refrigerated drier and after-cooler, if any;
(iii) To check the lubricating system of all fan blowers, compressors, control mechanisms and any
other running parts; cleaning, greasing and oiling where necessary;
(iv) To check any water leakage from the pipework and to repair if required;
(v) To keep all supply and return grilles and louvers clean;
(vi) To check the corrosion of metal surface, framework and support/mounting brackets, etc., and to
reinstate the surface by removing rust and repaint if necessary;

(b) Refrigerant Compressors, Condensers and Heat Pumps


(i) To check for proper operation of the refrigeration machines and related controls, control circuit,
and detect any abnormal noise and vibration, repair or adjust as necessary;
(ii) To check and record on log sheets and where appropriate on system performance sheet the
refrigerant compressor suction and discharge pressures, condenser air inlet and outlet temperature
and motor current;
(iii) To check condition of operating refrigerant, liquid level and lubrication level, refill or renew as
necessary;
(iv) To examine the condition of joints and seals for leaks, repair as necessary;
(v) To remove debris and maintain the condenser in clean and tidy condition;
(vi) To check the vibration of machines as compare to the recommendations by the manufacturer for
future baseline monitoring and maintenance.

(c) Motors for All motorized Devices and Equipment


(i) To clean motor casing, grease and lubricate;
(ii) To check and report any abnormal running noise and vibration. Replace the bearings, perform
megger test on motor and repair as necessary; and
(iii) To check, adjust and rectify/repair defect on circuit protective devices such as starters, control
relay and indicators.

(d) Fan Coil Units


(i) To check that the fan coil units and its control/sensing devices are functioning properly and
inspect drain pipes to ensure no clogging and flooding. Rectify if necessary;
(ii) To check and clean the condensing water drain pan, drain pipes to ensure no clogging and
flooding.
Rectify if necessary;
(iii) To clean the supply and return air grilles and filters; and
(iv) To check the control/protective devices for proper operation. Rectify if necessary.

(g) Heat Exchanger


(i) To check on all joints for leak. Rectify if necessary;
(ii) To check the temperature settings and functioning of the controls and ensure compliance with
manufacturers’ standards.

(h) Mechanical Ventilation System


(i) To clean fan blade and blades for wear and damage;
(ii) To check and if necessary to lubricate fan and motor bearings;
(iii) To check flexible connections and that anti-vibration mountings are free to move, and function
properly
(iv) To clean the air filters, supply and return air grilles and to renew air filters if necessary;
(v) To check the operation and function of the control devices;
(vi) To check all electrical wiring and connections and circuit protection devices including
switchgears and starters. Rectify if required

144
(i) Equipment
(i) To check and service all IAQ equipment including air cleaner and other filtration and sterilizing
system and equipment for IAQ; and
(ii) The Contractor shall take measurements of IAQ parameters and submit records to the Project
Architect.

1.3.8 Half-Yearly Works


Half-yearly service and maintenance shall include the following items:-
(a) To inspect the condition of pipe fittings, supports, hangers, etc., for sign of corrosion. Remove the
rust and repaint with primer and finish coating as necessary;
(b) To check the performance of controls and safety cut-outs and check all control panel indication
lamps, rectify as required;
(c) To clean electrical panels including wiring terminals and connection points;
(d) To touch up with finish-coating where there is any rust or sign of corrosion of the equipment by
first removing the rust/corrosion;
(e) To clean all the air-cooled condenser coils by high-pressure water or steam jet with approved
cleaning detergent to ensure that high heat transfer efficiency is maintained;
(d) To clean the cooling/heating coils (excluding fan coil units) by high-pressure water or steam jet
with approved cleaning detergent to ensure that high heat transfer efficiency is maintained;
(h) To check and serve all IAQ control and sensing equipment including CO2 sensors, air movement
sensors, thermostat, humidifiers, dehumidifiers, humidistat, pressure stat and
(i) To inspect all components of ventilation system for cleanliness and microbial growth and clean
them as necessary.

1.3.9 Annual Works


(a) To inspect the condition of pipe fittings, supports, hangers, etc., for sign of corrosion. Remove the
rust and repaint with primer and finish coating as necessary;
(b) To examine, check and maintain the proper operation of associated electrical panels in the plant
room. Repair and renew as appropriate;
(c) To check, test and recalibrate or replace as necessary, all control and safety devices;
(d) To check, test, adjust, clean and repair/rectify defects if required for all electronic circuit boards
and control/ sensing/detection devices including building automation system if available in the
system; The Contractor shall arrange the cleaning work after the building office hour;
(e) To check and re-tighten any loose bolts and nuts in proper sequence.

I.4 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS


For plant and/or equipment included in the tender, the Contractor shall provide the types of spare parts
generally wherever these are appropriate to the plant and/or equipment involved plus any additional items
for the particular plant and/or equipment.

Unless otherwise specified, within two months of signing the Contract, or in such period of time as has
been agreed by the Project Architect in writing, the Contractor shall submit in respect of the proposed
plant and/or equipment a list of the manufacturer’s recommended spare parts that are likely to prove
necessary to service the plant and/or equipment during the first year’s operation and parts required
immediately following the completion of the Contract maintenance period.

The spare parts submission shall include diagrams or catalogue details of the parts concerned and bona-
fide manufacturer’s published price lists. The Contractor may add the net shipping costs for each item
plus a 15% margin to cover overheads and profit. Where appropriate, the prevailing exchange rate must
be stated. The Contractor should note that an unacceptable or inadequate response to this requirement
may result in their installation not being accepted.

Unless specified in detail, the criteria by which the Contractor shall judge the need for spare parts to be
included in the Schedule shall be any part or component of the plant or equipment that is subject to
frictional wear, vibration or temperature fatigue, rupturable to safety (or otherwise), corrosion, erosion,
unacceptable deposits and/or saturation by contaminants (such as for filters), normal fair wear and tear
and is likely to fail or reach an unacceptably low performance level within a period of three years or less

145
from its installation and/or commencement of operation excluding the Contract Testing and
Commissioning Periods.

The schedule shall include at least the following items where they are part of the installation concerned:-
- Standard replaceable type air filters media;
- Rupturable safety devices;
- Plug in relays;
- Indicator light lamps;
- Non-standard fuse cartridges; and

Any of the above spare parts and/or disposable items which are required to replace defective or
prematurely worn out parts that arise during the free maintenance period and/or defects liability shall be
replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Employer before the Maintenance Certificate is issued. The
above items shall not be exhaustive. The Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement of other
parts and components for normal operation of the installation.

Additionally the Contractor shall submit within the same period a priced schedule for the supply of any
special tools necessary for servicing and maintenance of any part of the installation.

Instructions for purchase of any special tool shall be issued separately but the basis for charging shall be
similar to that for the Contractor’s equipment manufacturer’s recommended spare parts.

The purchase of the needed spare parts and tools shall be secured by the Project Architect’s Instruction
for which a provisional sum shall be provided in the Contract.

The exact types and quantities shall be determined by the Project Architect based on the Contractor’s best
advice and at the most appropriate time during the Contract Period when requirements can be most
realistically assessed taking account of the installation as installed or still being installed.

146
F TYPICAL VRV SYSTEM INSTALLATION LAYOUT

147
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING OF 2 x 350KVA, 280kW, 400V, 50Hz. 3-PHASE PRIME RATED DIESEL
GENERATOR SET COMPLETE WITH SET MOUNTED CONTROLLER TYPE DSE7310
CONTINUOUS RATED VOLVO GENERATOR SETS DESIGN FOR AUTOMATIC MODE
OPERATION FOR THE ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) AT LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

148
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION

CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

2.0 SPECIFICATION OF 400kVA, 280kW, 400/230V~, 50Hz, 1500RPM, MODEL TYPE COMPLETE
WITH SET MOUNTED CONTROLLER TYPE DSE7310 GENERATOR SET

3.0 SPECIFICATION OF 250A AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)

149
Equivalency of Standards and Codes
Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods and materials
to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of the latest current edition or revision of the
relevant standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract document.
Where such standards and codes are notional, or relate to a particular country or region, other authoritative
standards that ensure a substantially equal or higher quality than the standards and codes specified will be
accepted subject to Bank Project Manager’s prior review and written consent. Differences between the standards
specified and the proposed alternative standards shall be fully described in writing by the Contractor and
submitted to the Bank Project Manager at least 5 days prior to the date when the Contractor desires the Bank
Project Manager’s consent.

1. Requirement:-
To provide a 2 x 350kVA, 400/230V, 50Hz. 3-Phase Prime Rated Diesel Generator Set for the Ecowas
Logistic Centre Project, Lungi, Sierra Leone

2. General and Scope of Supply:


This section specifies the design, manufacture, supply to the site, install, testing and commissioning of
350kVA, 280kW, three phase, low voltage silenced type Prime rated diesel generator with auto start feature
and enclosed in a factory fitted canopy at the generator manufactures work
Note: The generator set should be provided with main failure automatic starter, automatic change over
switch which will start on failure of the Mains (EDSA) supply
Note: The Work should be carried out by a firm specialised in this kind of work and having an
accredited agency in Sierra Leone. The generator set shall be new, using approved and reliable
known makes of diesel engine and alternator. They shall also be a make already in operations in
Sierra Leone for which maintenance facilities are already available during last five years.

The diesel generator set shall be supplied complete with all ancillary equipment necessary for starting and
running of the set, including cooling systems, fuel storage and supply system, instrumentation, control and
protection arrangements, spares and special tools. The generator set and the ancillary equipment shall be
installed on a purposed constructed concrete plinth as indicated in the drawings. Diesel generator metal part
shall be earthed. Generator Neutral shall be solidly earthed.

The set is to be reasonably self-contained to minimize the work of installation at site. The engine, alternator
and cooling radiator should be mounted on a combined under base of stress relieved fabricated steel and
engine accessories shall also be mounted on the under base where appropriate, provided that this does not
result in difficulty of access for maintenance.

The set is to be mounted on suitable arrangement of anti-vibration mounting designed to minimize the
transmission of vibration but without resulting in excessive amplitudes of movement of any parts of the set.
If rubber is employed in the mounts, their design should incorporate means of preventing deterioration due
oil leakages.

The generator set shall be provided with sound attenuated canopy fitted at the generators manufactures
work, so that the noise level shall not exceed 80dB at 1m distance and 60 dB at 10m distance from the
machine at full load operating condition at any direction.
Flexible connection shall be provided to all exhaust, water, air, fuel and oil piping that leave the engine to
prevent the transmission of vibration and the fracture of the piping due to movement of the set. The choice
of connections and their installation is to be such as to give long life under normal operating condition of
the set.

2. STANDARDS:
The following Standards apply:
BS 5000 Part 3 - Generators to be driven by Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines
150
BS 5514 (ISO3046) - Specification for Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines Part 1-6
BS 5486 (IEC 439) - Factory Built assemblies of Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear
BS 4999(IEC34-1) - General requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines

3. DESIGN DATA:
3.1 ENGINE:
Rated continuous output:
As specified by the designer at 0.8pf at generator output terminals. (Based on 35oC ambient temperature
and a relative humidity of 90%)
The unit should be capable of delivering the rated output for continuous period of not less than 12 hours at
a time. Overload capacity of 110% for one hour during a period of 12 hours.
Number of strokes - 6
Speed - 1500 rpm
Cooling - fan-cooled closed cooling water circuit
Loading - Asynchronous motor loads of up to 100% may be switched on with a
maximum admissible speed drop of twelve (12) percent

3.2 GENERATOR:
Rated Output - 350kVA, 280kW as specified by the designer
Power Factor - 0.8
Frequency - 50 ± 2% Hz
Voltage - 400/230 V ± 5% 3 phase & neutral
Speed - 1500 rpm
Deviation Factor of - 5%
voltage wave form
Insulation Class for - H
rotor and stator windings
Protection class of enclosure - IP 23

3.3 ENGINE:
Diesel engine shall be of a well-proven ‘’VOLVO’’ make, complying with the requirements of BS 5514
(ISO 3046). The engine shall meet all the performance requirements of the set under the specified operating
conditions and shall be suitable for operation on light distillate fuel oil marketed by the Sierra Leone
Petroleum Corporation as `NP’’, ‘’Safecom’’ Diesel Oil.

A sturdy elastic coupling shall connect the engine and the generator, and both shall be mounted on a
common base plate forming part of the supply, Proven and highly effective anti-vibrating mountings shall
be provided between base plate and concrete foundation.
The engine shall be started by 24V starter motor engaging with the fly wheel ring gear and disengaging
automatically when the engine starts. The equipment shall include an adequately rated lead/acid battery
together with an automatic mains energized battery charger. The charger shall have a continuous output
rating sufficient to recharge the battery from 1.8V/cell to a fully charged condition in a period of 8 hours.
The battery shall be capable of providing at least six starting cycles within a period of 5 minutes.

The engine shall be water cooled. A sectional radiator shall be provided and mounted on the combined
under base and arranged to cool the engine jacket water, lubricating oil and charge air as appropriate.
Circulation of cooling water through the engine and radiator shall be by means of engine driven pump. The
water circuits shall be fitted with an easily accessible drain point.
The cooling fan shall be arranged to drive directly by the engine and the hot air shall ducted to suitable
openings in the sound attenuated canopy. The duct shall be incorporated with a suitable flexible section to
151
prevent the transmission of vibration from the engine and the discharge end shall be provided with louvers
and an insect screen.

Lubrication of the engine shall be by means of an engine driven integral pump. The pump shall have on the
suction side a coarse strainer and on the delivery side a duplex `full flow' fine filter complete with
changeover cock incorporating pressure by-passes to facilitate oil flow to the engine should the filter
become blocked. The lubricating oil system capacity shall be sufficient to enable the engine to run
continuously for 12 hours at any load without replenishment.

The governor of the engine shall be electronic type and be capable of fine governing of speed to Class A2
of BSS 5514/1977, ISO 3046/IV.
The engine shall be efficiently silenced with suitable noise attenuators provided at cooling/combustion air
inlets and outlets and residential exhaust silencers complete with interconnecting pipe and fittings.
Supports for each complete system shall be of the anti-vibration type and due allowance for expansion of
the exhaust system shall be made by the inclusion of expansion bellows.

Exhaust pipe shall be lagged with a removable Aluminium cladding. Exhaust pipe outlet point shall be 4m
above ground level and path of the exhaust pipe as permissible on site bearing in mind exhaust smoke
always directed away from surrounding buildings.
The engine shall be provided with following protection devices for alarm and shutting down the engine
automatically.
- Low lubricating oil pressure - two stage
- Engine over speed
- High cooling water temperature - two stage
- Over crank

3.4 GENERATOR:
Generator shall comply with BS 5000 (IEC 34-1) and shall be brushless, self-exciting and self-regulating
type. The exciter shall be with rotating silicon rectifiers, auxiliary exciter of permanent magnet type,
damper cage, static voltage regulator and compounding equipment.

The voltage regulator shall maintain its setting for long periods without adjustment. Means shall be
provided for a limited degree of manual adjustment of the output voltage setting.
Generator shall be directly coupled to and share a common high bedplate with the prime mover. The degree
of protection for the generator and exciter shall be not less than IP 23.
Cooling of the generator shall be by a radial-flow fan. Generator bearings shall be of the ball or roller type,
rated for long life and prepacked with sufficient grease for operating over long periods without
replenishment.
The stator and field windings shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with
Class H materials as defined in IEC 85. A generator winding temperature detector (thermistor) installed at
the hottest spot and wired to give alarm and shutdown.

Thermostatically controlled tubular low-temperature heaters of sufficient rating to maintain the windings in
dry condition during long periods of standstill shall be fitted in the stator casing and wired out to a terminal
box on the bed plate, which in-turn shall be connected to the 230- volt single-phase supply.
Voltage regulation should be maintained within ± 2½% from no load to full load including cold to hot
variation at any power factor from 0.8 to unity.
Neutral shall be solidly earthed.

152
3.5 SPECIFICATIONS OF AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)
The Power-Command transfer switches shall include unique features that provide flexibility for the intended
applications. The microprocessor-based controls shall optimize performance while simplifying operation
and service.

For the Golden Tulip Essential Kimbima Hotel in Freetown having three (3) standby generator sets (triple standby)
and a utility feed, when the utility fails, the standby generators transfer switch and auto-synchronized panel,
controls the feeds from the 3 x 300kVA Generators based on an established priority (load demand), send a start
signal to the slave-2 standby generator and transfers the load. If the load exceeds the slave-2 standby generator, a
start signal is sent to the slave -2 Generator set to start transfers and accept the load.
If the Standby Generators feeds fail, the utility transfer switch sends a signal to the utility contactor to transfers the
load. The transfer switches shall give a range of controls for safe, dependable and easy-to-use power transfers for
these modes. It must be noted that the applications for which these generators are operated determines the nature of
the load demand control parameters. The signals are determined when the pre-established priority (load demand)
parameters on site have been established and agreed upon by the Hotel.

Open-transition transfer:
Break-before-make switching action: Independent break-before-make action is used for both
4-pole/switched neutral switches
For the most basic type of transfer; the connection to one source is opened before the connection to the
second source is closed to allow the open-transition transfer control monitors both sources and initiates the
transfer — avoiding out-of-phase closing.
For open-transition operation, transfer switches system shall incorporate Power Command microprocessor
control and a reliable High-Endurance Mechanism and shall be ideal for utility-to-genset and genset-to-
genset applications

Programmed-transition transfer:
Similar to open-transition transfer: The switch opens the connection to one source, pauses for an adjustable delay
time, and then closes the connection to the second source. The adjustable time between sources allows the decay of
residual voltage before connecting to the second source.

Bypass-isolation transfer switches:


Shall be ideal for critical-need applications where any disruption of supply power, even for routine maintenance, is
unacceptable. The bypass-isolation automatic transfer switch shall combine features of our advanced automatic
transfer switch with a closed- door draw out isolation mechanism, a two-source bypass switch and exclusive
microprocessor-based controls. The switches allow maintenance, service and testing of the automatic transfer
switch without disrupting power to critical loads. The resulting power transfer redundancy helps ensure constant,
reliable power for critical applications

3.5.1 ATS Minimum Requirements:


ATS shall be built to withstand thousands of switching cycles, ensuring reliable operation and meets the
following minimum requirements:
(i) Microprocessor control:
Fully-featured microprocessor control is standard with all settings and adjustments designed for easy
operator use via the front display panel for ease of setup and accuracy

(ii) Easy manual operation and Manual operation handle (standard):


Allows manual operation of the switch after proper disconnection of power sources and also allows
manual transfer to any available source at any time.
Plug connections, door-mounted controls, and ample access space, compatible terminal markings
simplify access.
Manual operating handles, shielded termination and over-center type contact mechanisms allow
effective, manual operation under de-energized conditions

153
(iii) Easy service/access:
Door-mounted controls, ample access space and compatible terminal markings allow for easy
access:

(iv) Positive interlocking:


Mechanical interlocking prevents source-to-source connection through the power contacts or control
wiring. Also prevents simultaneous closing of normal and emergency contacts

(v) Solenoid:
A powerful and economical solenoid power transfer switches

(vi) Advanced transfers switch mechanism:


True transfer switch mechanism with break-before-make action with Bi-directional linear motor
actuator that provides virtually friction-free, constant-force, straight-line transfer switch action with
no complex gears or linkages

(vii) Continuously rated:


Can be used in applications up to their nameplate rating

(vii) Main contacts:


Heavy-duty long-life, high-pressure silver alloy contacts with separate arcing surfaces and multi-leaf
arc chutes rated for the total system transfer including overload interruption to withstand thousands
of switching cycles without burning, pitting or welding and provide 100% continuous current ratings

(viii) Permanently mounted instructions:


Allows easy step-by-step operation

(ix) Robust control system design:


Optically-isolated logic inputs and high-isolation transformers for AC power inputs provide
high-voltage surge protection

3.5.2 ATS Command controls


(ATS command controls optimize the reliability and performance of the power generation system while
keeping costs competitive and providing unique capabilities for the entire system)
Note: The automatic transfer switches shall incorporate Power Command microprocessor control and a reliable
High-Endurance Mechanism ideal for Utility (EDSA) – to - Genset and Genset – to - Genset applications.

S — standard features O — optional features


Sensing
3-Phase voltage-sensing utility S
3-Phase voltage-sensing generator S
Electrical isolation from AC mains S, transformer
Voltage-sensing accuracy +/-1%
O/U voltage-sensing utility S
O/U voltage-sensing generator S
O/U frequency-sensing utility S
Voltage imbalance S
Phase rotation S
Loss of phase S
General features/serviceability
Door-mounted S
Controls isolated from switch during service S
Single control package for sensing/timing S
Voltage surge immunity S
Optically isolated customer I/O S
Method(s) for sensor/timer adjustments Front panel, LED configuration
Number of time/date-stamped events 50

154
Real-time clock (RTC) S
On-board diagnostics/fault detection S
Field-upgradeable software, PC diagnostics S
Fully adjustable timers, sensors and control parameters S
Mode control key switch interface with control O
Supported voltages
240V; 380-480V S
Transition modes
Programmed transition S
In-phase monitor S
Display/metering/user interface
Display offered/type O, VFD
Front-panel LED status lamps 6-fixed (8 for configuration)
Front-panel test S
Front-panel TD override S
Front-panel lamp test/fault reset S
etN/ASSFront-panel set exerciser S
Color-coded bar graph meters for voltage, current, frequency, kW and O
power factor
Engine-exerciser clock
Calendar-based exerciser with real-time clock S
Once/week exerciser S
Exerciser via external clock module O
Number of exercise programs 1
Exercise exceptions S, 1
Time \delays
Displays timer delay countdown O
Field-adjustable time delays S
Time-delay engine start S
Time-delay transfer (normal to emergency) S
Time-delay retransfer (emergency to normal) S
Time-delay engine cool down S
Time-delay elevator pre-transfer S
Time-delay programmed transition (delayed neutral) S
Time-delay override/bypass feature S
Automatic generator-generator changeover timer S
Customer inputs/outputs
Remote test with load/transfer to generator O
Remote engine start O
Transfer inhibit S
Re-transfer inhibit S
Generator (source-2) common alarm S
Utility (source-1) common alarm S
Panel security lock S
Generator battery charger status input S
Remote time delay override/bypass S
Remote lamp test/fault reset O
Bypass switch position contacts S
Generator interface
Generator (1) start contact (relay) S
Generator (2) start contact S
Relay outputs
Generator Source-1 connected S
Generator Source-2 connected S
Generator Source-1 available S
Generator Source-2 available S
ATS not in auto S
Test/exercise active O
Pre-transfer/load disconnect S, relay drives
Failure to disconnect S
Failure to close/open S
Approval code/standards
UL1008 S
ISO 8528 S
IEC S
155
CSA, NFPA, IEEE S
IBC S
NEMA ICS 10 S

3.6 FUEL STORAGE AND TRANSFER:


The following shall be supplied with the unit.
3.6.1 Base Tank:
- The machine shall have one integral metal fuel tank (capacity sufficient for 08 hours operation at full
load but not less than 450 liters) and shall be installed in a position where any fuel leakage cannot
impinge on exhaust pipe or other hot engine surfaces. The tank shall be provided with all necessary
fittings including fill, vent, drain and overflow line, level indication and access for inspection and
maintenance. Level switches shall be provided for the following services.
(a) Low level alarm
(b) High level alarm
(c) Low level start of transfer pump
(d) High level stop of transfer pump

3.6.2 Fuel Transfer Pumps:


- One electric motor-driven fuel transfer pump and one standby manual pump shall be provided to
enable the integral fuel tank to be filled from the main storage tank. The capacity of the pump shall be
such that the service tank can be completely filled in not more than one hour. All necessary check
valves, by-pass valves, float valves and maintenance valves on piping system are to be provided. The
pump motor starter control panel shall be provided with following features.
(a) Thermal overload protection and earth leakage protection
(b) A selector switch so that a pump may be either started or stopped by manually or automatically
on receipt of signal from the level switches in the base tank.
(c) Pump stop when low level at main storage tank
Indicator lamps for - Common alarm
- Run - Stop
- R, Y, B Phase indicator lamps
- Fuel low level at main storage tank
(e) Audible Alarm and mute push button for fuel low level at main storage tank

3.6.3 Main Storage Tank:


- The main storage fuel tank shall consist of one surface tank of capacity 10,000 liters, including piping
and valves. The tank shall be cylindrical/rectangular, fabricated from 6mm thick high quality black steel
plate welded on internal and external seams, hydro-statically tested at factory to a pressure of one
atmosphere for 24 hours with welds proven sound and supplied complete with inspection manhole
(600mm diameter) with hermetical sealing cover, lifting lugs and reinforcements for supporting the
concrete access hatch. The cover shall be provided with necessary connection for tank filling, fuel
transfer, fuel return, tank emptying and de-sliming, venting and dipstick level control. The fill pipe
couplings shall suit to the Sierra Leone Petroleum Corporation bowser inlet size which is in line with the
BS 799 (Part 5). The main tank shall be provided with low-level alarm and an overfilling safety device.

The tank shall be constructed, delivered and install in the Generator House to serve as a Bulk Fuel
Storage Tank. The design, construction and erection of the tank shall be carried out by a specialist tank
supplier in accordance with the relevant international and local codes and regulations.

156
3.6.4 Fuel Lines:
Fuel lines shall be heavy gauge, black seamless steel, treated internally with corrosion resistant paint and
with joints sealed with PTEE tape. The piping installation shall be complete with all necessary valves,
strainers, supporters and such to provide a complete installation.

All piping connections to the tank shall be standard flanged connections. Piping connection to the
generator shall be provided with flexible couplings.

3.7 CONTROL EQUIPMENT:


A control cubicle fabricated with welded steel panels supported by structural steel frame, shall be
provided and installed for the stand-by plant, together with all necessary inter-connections, anti-
condensation heaters etc. The primary function of the control equipment shall be:
- Automatic starting and stopping of the generator on receipt of signal from main panel board
- Fault indicating and appropriate action
- Manual starts and stops operations in remote and local positions.

Terminal for cable connection shall be made in upstream of the MCCB to connect the power supply
cables for firefighting lift and fire pumps.
The operation of the diesel generator set shall be as follows:
1) When a power failure occurs, this information is available to control panel via main distribution
board. The relays in the control panels will start the generator and power will feed to the main
distribution board. Automatic changeover from EDSA supply to diesel generator supply is done by
auto transfer switch

2) When in a similar manner when the EDSA power returns the machine should be taken off the system
and stopped.

When the mains power is restored, a time delay between 5 to 10 sec. should be introduced before the
removal of generator power and the reintroduction of mains power.
Adjustable timer to protect generator against repeated transient power failures should also be provided.

The starting period for the machine should not exceed 15 sec. should this period be exceeded without
speed sense switch cancelling the starting cycle all starting circuits shall be switched out and an
indication shall be displayed on generator control panel.

Automatic shutdown of the set and lockout of the starting system shall result from any of the following:
- Low lubricating oil pressure
- High cooling water temperature
- Failed to start
- Engine over speed (if speed exceed 20% above normal)
- High stator temperature

The control system shall include the following:


- Overload protection
- Restricted Earth fault protection
- Visual & Audible Fault indication and alarm accept/reset
- All necessary controls needed to prevent starting of machines on momentary fluctuations of main
voltage
- A selector switch for operation of the equipment in automatic and manual mode and off position

157
- A selector switch for operation of the equipment in local and remote position Automatic start
sequence control.

The following equipment shall be included in the control panel


- Voltmeter and selector switch to indicate individual phase and line voltage
- Ammeter and selector switch to indicate the line current
- Frequency meter
- Hour run counter
- Engine 'start' & 'stop' push button and lock switch
- ‘Remote' & 'Local' selector switch with provision for start & stop at main panel board
- 'Auto', 'Manual' & 'Off' selector switch
- 'Emergency Stop' push button
- Mains operated battery charger of the constant potential type with MCCB, ammeter, incorporating
mains failure relay
- Run indicator lamp
- Fault indicator lamp
- Audible Alarm
- Lamp test push buttons, Alarm accept and reset buttons
- Tachometer and Speed indicator
- 3 Pole MCCB with neutral link

The following engine related items shall be mounted separate from the control cubicle.
- Battery charge indicator
- Lubrication oil pressure indicator
- Cooling water temperature indicator
- Engine speed adjustment (speed droop between 0 and 6 %)
- Fuel level in integral fuel tank low
- Fuel level in integral fuel tank high
- Fuel level in main storage fuel tank low

Microprocessor Control Panel with Alphanumerical character digital display is acceptable alternative to
hardwired equipment’s. Microprocessor Control Panel shall incorporate all above mentioned facilities.

The Microprocessor Control Panel shall be able to connect to Standard Personal Computer to download
data and information from module and to programme the Module. The tenderer shall tabulate all
parameters, signals, safety devices and other facilities available in the Microprocessor Control Panel.
It should be noted that control equipment’s should be suitable for tropical climatic conditions so that their
parameters shall not vary due to ambient temperature or aging.

3.8 TESTS:
3.8.1 SHOP TESTS:
The following tests and checks shall be carried out in the manufacturer's shops. Test reports shall be
submitted for Engineer's approval.
- All tests as required by the manufacturer's practice or by applicable standards during the
manufacture stage.
- Performance tests on the assembled diesel generating set with sound proof canopy (with voltage
regulator)
- Check of fuel consumption at different loads
- Functional tests on the fuel transfer pump
- Dielectric and insulation tests
158
- Routine tests on voltage regulator
- Hydrostatic pressure test on fuel tank (at 2 bars)
3.8.2 SITE TESTS:
The following tests shall be carried out after installation at the Site:
- Load tests
50% load 15 minutes
100% load 15 minutes
110% load 15 minutes
Measurement of vibration
All necessary resistive loads shall be provided by the contractor at his own expense.
- Functional testing of all alarm devices
- Checking of the starting time and time up to taking-over full load.
- Testing of noise levels at 1m & 10m distances.
- Load rejection test

3.9 FREE MAINTENANCE AND DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD:


Following are the works shall be carried out during the free maintenance period.
- Emergency call back service
- Inspect, clean, oil and grease where necessary
- Adjustment of machinery
- Replacement of any defective parts

159
TECHNICAL SCHEDULE – PRIME RATED DIESEL GENERATOR
PARTICULARS
REF. UNITS As As
Specified Offered
1 Diesel Engine Clause 3.3
1.1 Manufacturer's Name VOLVO
1.2 Country of Origin
1.3 ISO rating kW brake
1.4 Site rating at 35°C kW brake 333kW
1.5 Brake mean effective pressure at site rating Bar
1.6 Number of cylinders 6
1.7 Bore mm
1.8 Stroke mm
1.9 Speed rpm
Type of Aspiration
1.10 Year this type was put in service
1.11 Drop in frequency/speed when engine response to100% load
injection
Fuel consumption of 100% Prime Rated load is less than L/hrs.
1.12 Turbocharger
Applicable standard BS or Eq.
Manufacturer's Name
Manufacturer's type No.
Pressure ratio (site rating)
Mass Airflow (site rating) kg/s
1.13 Radiator
Applicable standard BS or Eq.
Manufacturer's Name
Manufacturer's type No.
Fan tip speed m/s
Fan power required kW
Cooling airflow m3/min
Cooling surface area - water m2
Cooling surface area - oil m2
1,14 Cooling water system
Applicable standard
Water temperature °C
Water pressure Bar
System capacity litre
Thermostat bypass valve type
Low water level switch type
1.15 Lubricating oil system
Applicable standard
Oil pressure Bar
Oil temperature °C
Grade of oil
Sump capacity litre
Oil consumption/100 hr. litre
Recommended oil change Hrs.
1.16 Engine alarms
Applicable standard
Low oil pressure setting Bar
Low water level setting as % of total cooling water capacity %
Over speed setting rpm

160
UNITS PARTICULARS
REF. As As
Specified Offered
High water temperature setting °C
High oil pressure setting Bar
1.17 Exhaust system
Applicable standard
Silencer manufacturer's name
Type of silencer (residential or critical)
Exhaust temperature gauge range °C
1.18 Sound attenuation system
Whether sound attenuated canopy fitted at generator Yes/No
manufactures work
Country of origin
Sound level dBA at 1m 80 dB
dBA at 60 dB
10m
Materials used for sound attenuation
1.19 Engine governor
Applicable standard BS or Eq.
Manufacturer's name
Class of governing
Clause
1.20 Fuel system
3.5.2
Pump manufacturer's name
Fuel injector manufacturer's name
Pump pressure Bar
Fuel consumption at a) Full load litre/hour
b) 3/4 load litre/hour
c) 1/2 load litre/hour
d) 1/4 load litre/hour
1.21 Base Fuel tank Clause 1.21
3.5.1
Mounted integrally with engine bed plate Yes
Capacity litre Not less
than 450
Fitted with level gauge Yes
1.22 Main Fuel Storage Tank Clause
3.5.3
Length x Weight x Height mxmxm
Capacity litre 9000
Gross weight (dry) kg
Type of level gauge
Transfer pump manufacturer’s name
Type of Transfer pump
Delivery rate of Transfer pumps litre/min.
1.23 Emission Standard
(a) HC (Hydro Carbon) Gr/kWhr.
(b) CO Gr/kWhr.
(c) NOx Gr/kWhr.
2 A.C. Generator Clause 3.4
2.1 Manufacturer's name
2.2 Type
2.3 Country of Origin
2.4 Rated output (At site rating) kVA 350 kVA
161
PARTICULARS
REF. UNITS As As
Specified Offered
2.5 Terminal voltage V
2.6 Power factor Cosφ 0.8
2.7 Frequency Hz 50
2.8 Connection Star
2.9 Weight of complete alternator kg
2.10 Weight of name of heaviest single item for erection kg
2.11 Applicable standard BS or Eq.
2.12 Generator mechanical protection class IP 23
2.13 Reactance’s:-
a) On short circuit when running at normal speed and voltage
Sub-transient reactance %
Transient reactance %
b) Unsaturated synchronous reactance %
2.14 Short circuit ratio
2.15 Stator insulation class
2.16 Stator d.c. resistance per phase at 75°C ohm
2.17 Type of rotor bearings
2.18 Number of rotor bearings
2.19 Method of protection against shaft currents
2.20 Rotor critical speed(s) rpm
2.21 Rotor inertia kg m2
2.22 Weight of rotor kg
2.23 Rotor insulation class
2.24 Rotor winding resistance at 75°C ohm
2.25 Generator response for 100% load change at a low Power factor:-
A. Instantaneous values when at:- (i) Minimum excitation %V
%A
(ii) Maximum excitation %V
%A
B. After 10 Hz when initially at:- (i) Minimum excitation %V
%A
(ii) Maximum excitation %V
%A
2.26 State whether stator windings are protected with embedded Yes
thermistor overloads
2.27 State whether thermostatically controlled anti-condensation Yes
heaters are fitted in the generator
2.28 Wattage of the heaters in item 2.27 W
3 Generator Exciter
3.1 Applicable standard BS or Eq.
3.2 Manufacturer's name
3.3 Field winding insulation
3.4 Field winding resistance at 75°C
3.5 Exciter winding insulation class
3.6 Exciter winding resistance per phase at 75°C ohm
3.7 Number of diodes
3.8 Type of diodes
3.9 Diode rated current A
3.10 Diode rated voltage V
3.11 Exciter full load current in d.c. amp A
PARTICULARS
REF. UNITS
As As
162
Specified Offered
3.12 State what provision has been made to suppress the field when
the main circuit opens under fault conditions
4 Generator Automatic Voltage Regulator
4.1 Applicable standard BS or Eq.
4.2 Manufacturer's name
4.3 Type
4.4 Range of manual voltage control V
5 630 Amps. Generator Circuit Breaker
5.1 Applicable standard BS or Eq.
5.2 Manufacturer's Name
5.3 Type
5.4 Country of origin
5.5 Rated current A 630
5.6 Rated voltage V 400
5.7 Breaking capacity (mini.35kA)
5.8 Inherent protections provided
Short circuit Yes
Overcurrent Yes
Range of adjustment of overcurrent ....% to....%

6 ATS/AMF Facility
Manufacturer's Name
Type
Country of Origin
Details of Operation
7 Battery
7.1 Manufacturer's name
7.2 Type
7.3 Electrolyte
7.4 Voltage V
7.5 Capacity at 10 hour rate Ah
7.6 Number of cells
7.7 Voltage per cell V
7.8 Normal charging rate A
7.9 Maximum charging rate A
7.10 Ampere-hour efficiency at 10 hour rate %
7.11 Ampere-hour efficiency at 1 hour rate %
7.12 Dimensions of cells mm
7.13 Dimensions of battery complete mm
7.14 Weight of cell complete with electrolyte kg
7.15 Total weight of battery complete kg
7.16 Internal resistance per cell when fully charged ohm
7.17 Battery voltage at end of the duty cycle V
8 Charger
8.1 Manufacturer's name
8.2 Type
8.3 AC input to charger kVA
8.4 DC output of charger kW
8.5 Type of d.c. voltage control
8.6 Range of d.c. voltage control V
8.7 Regulation %
8.8 Overall dimensions mm
8.9 Total weight kg

163
9 Control Panels
9.1 Manufacturer's Name
9.2 Type

164
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
OF FUEL STORAGE FACILITY AND GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF UNDERGROUND
TANKS, DISPENSING PUMPS, PIPE NETWORK AND CONTROL VALVES FOR THE
ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) AT LUNGI INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT, SIERRA
LEONE

165
DESIGN OF FUEL STORAGE FACILITY AND GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF
UNDERGROUND TANKS, DISPENSING PUMPS, PIPE NETWORK AND CONTROL
VALVES

A. Technical Specification for Series C Commercial Single Fuel Dispensing Pump

1. Applicable standards:
The dispenser and its accessories shall meet the requirements of (BS7117 and approved by UK Weights
& Measures and the ANSI/UL87 – latest edition).

The pump shall be fully approved for re-sale use, Series C Commercial pumps and dispensers offer the
ultimate in quality commercial fuelling equipment. Built to the same high-standard as the Series C Retail
models, the Series C Commercial pumps offer a new dimension in quality for the modern commercial
truck-stop, where driver facilities and image are all important.

With speed of fuelling and reliability being the major consideration, the Series C Commercials more than
meet these needs. Using the latest electronics, coupled with world-beating hydraulics able to pump both
petrol and diesel fuels fast and offer accurate, repeatable metering of fuel; the equipment is specifically
designed to meet the heavy-duty needs of the truck-stop environment.
Manufactured entirely out of solid stainless steel, with a wide range of interfaces to fuel monitoring and
control systems the Series C Commercial pumps provide a robust and visually attractive range of fuelling
equipment

Series C Commercial Range

2. Standard Features:
All units shall be manufactured to BS7117 and approved by UK Weights & Measures for the re-sale of
fuel either in attendant operated mode, or in conjunction with an automated payment / fuel monitoring
system. Standard features which are part of our all-inclusive package include:
 Solid stainless steel construction
 Styled head with superb 1" illuminated volume only displays both sides
 Integral nozzle locking (no padlocks required)
 Digitally displayed totalizer readings
 Hose break couplings
 Top quality hoses and automatic ZVA nozzles
 Choice of fuel monitoring interface (serial data, 100PPL or 10PPL)
 Pumping unit with integral air separation for use with underground storage tanks
 Commissioning and 12 months on-site warranty

3. Frame & base:


Dimensions and construction details

4. Casing:
This shall be stainless steel except for the lowers front rear doors, to be colored in green, white tableau
with black writing in English.

5. Pump unit:
Self-priming gear or blades type with by pass and check values, with suitable easy dismantled filter, to
deliver not less than 60 liter/min (when the used nozzle spout diameter is 13/16 inch) it is provided with
priming point and test points.

166
6. Meter:
To be positive displacement proofs with adjustable mechanism for calibrating. Its accuracy to be not less
than +/- 0.2% for any rate of flow
The calibrating system to be one of these two cases:
a) Electronic calibration with electromechanical totalizer (if possible with mechanical totalizer).
b) Mechanical calibration with mechanical totalizer.
The calibrating system to be with range of calibration not less than +/- 1.5%

7. Air separator:
The unit shall be efficient enough to prevent any quantity of air and vapor from reaching the meter.

8. Solenoid valve:
This shall be used with the preset electronic system to control the discharged (quantity cash or volume)
from the dispenser.

9. Tensioning device:
An efficient tensioning device it is provided to enable easily retighten the V-belt (which transmit the
power from the motor to the pump)

10. Electrical equipment:


All electrical equipment to be flame and explosion proof as specified in the ANSI UL standard
mentioned before.

a. Motor:
To be continuous duty 0.75HP, 240V 50Hz single phase, tropically wound, with built-in over load
protection.
It is preferable to be in suitable place to prevent reaching gasoline to the motor in case of any leaking
inside the dispenser.

b. Illumination:
Efficient system of illumination,
Type:
Method:
The electric wiring shall be through flame and explosion proof conduit. The dispenser to be provided
with a switch fixed on the external frame to turn on & off the illumination system.

c. The junction box to be in suitable place, the wiring diagram to be posted to the inside face of the junction
box cover.

d. The power supply line to be in four separated connector as follow:


- First line for motor.
- 2nd line for computer.
- 3rd line for illumination.
- 4th line for ground or earth.

11. Electronic computer:


Computer shall have the following features:

a) Indicating device (display)


Dispenser will be installed under direct sun without canopies, so the reading under all conditions is clear,
precise, easy and non-ambiguous, the display to be as follow:
(DINAR) (FILS)
SALE XXX XXX
(LITER)
LITER XXX, XX
(FILS)
PRICE PER LITER XXX, X

167
With electronic totalizer for sale and liters, method of reading these totalizers to be easy and to be
separated from the method of changing the price (price setting) or setting the program (the method of
reading preferable to be by means of a separate switch without using the preset unit).

b) The display to be backlit liquid crystal display 1 (L.C.D), fitted with mounting display socket (shall be
mentioned clearly).
c) The software programmed to give rounding for the last digit of sale.(i.e. to display he sale in he form of
XX,XX0 or XX,XX5 only).
d) All programming procedures of the computing head configuration parameters (options) to be
programmed after turning a toggle switch having metrical relevance.
e) Preset system for sale and volume to be by keypad (protected by membrane).
f) The software programmed to setting a desired time interval (0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 60, etc.) from the nozzle
hang-up (stop of delivery) in which a preset operation is permitted.
g) The electrical motor must be controlled by the electronic computer by means of DC/AC relay (the
DC/AC relay preferable to be solid state) the software must be programmed to switch-off the motor
automatically after programmable time (10, 15, 20,…second) from stopping pulse signal and not from
nozzle rise from its boot (restarting the motor must not be done before resting the display to zero in any
case).
h) The illumination system to be completely separated from the electronic computer.
Type:
Method of illumination:
i) In addition to the electronic totalizer each dispenser to be provided with nonreversible mechanical
totalizer for liters, coupled directly to the meter.

The type of transmitting mechanism: Between the meter and mechanical totalizer.
The type of pulsar used clearly.

j) Resting of the electronic computer (clear of RAM) through very secure system.
k) The electronic computer to be with memory back-up to keep the displayed data alive and storage method.
l) The electronic computer easily upgradeable to have communication port for interfacing to PC link POS,
or any control system with card reader, software, retrofit, for card payment at fuel point ...etc.

These systems separately:


m) Effective protection system for the electronic computer to prevent it from fluctuating in voltage or
current, (which guaranteed for supply main fluctuation of 90 VAC up to 280 VAC), type:
Method of protection details:
n) (i.e. traditional model (kerb-side) or models with two separate units one for the computer, the other for
mechanical system, or for overhead system…)

12. Hose:
4 MT length, 25 mm I.D. to be according to BS 3395/1989 type 1C, with male reusable coupling on both
ends, B.S.P threading.

13. Nozzle:
B.S.P 25mm (1 inch) (or of 19 mm with reducer 19x25 mm) inlet I.D B.S.P threading, 20 mm (13/16
inch) O.D spout, fully automatic nozzle, with internal outlet check valve.
Type and manufacturer of nozzles:

14. Swivel:
a) Single plane swivel to connect between hose and dispenser.
b) Two planes swivel to connect nozzle to the hose.
Type and manufacturer of swivels:

15. Suction flanges & flexible:


Flexible connector with flanges B.S.P threading

168
16. Lock & keys:
Each pump to be provided with lock and two keys (the keys to be the same for all dispensers) for the
front and rear doors, and a lock, two keys for the nozzle.

17. Sight glass & hose extend a mechanism:


Sight glass, hose extend a mechanism and high hose design as optional parts.

B. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

1. Applicable standards:
a. Standard applied
b. Full system requirements specifications for installation and operating them from the remote dispensers.
c. All requirements for safety and reality of using submersible pumps.

2. Frame & base:


a. Specify
b. Design.
c. Material.
d. Dimensions.
e. Construction.
f. Detail.

3. Submersible pump features:


a. Submersible pumps of total flow rate (150- 200) LPM shall be capable to deliver product from
(1-4) underground tanks, connected with at least up to (2) remote dispensers in service stations.

b. Mode of suitable materials for petroleum products (normal and super gasoline (contain lead
components), non-leaded gasoline, kerosene and gasoline).

c. The submersible pumps contain at least the following functional elements:


Check valve, air eliminator, expansion relief valve, pressure test point, siphone tube (nozzle),
siphon check valve.
All the devices require assuring safety performance & convenient access to all elements for
service or replacement.

d. Leak detector indicates leakage in the piping system.

e. Level device that indicate the level of liquid in the tank and prevent the level to reach below the
bottom clearance.

4. Electrical equipment:
All electrical equipment to be flame and explosion proof:
a) Motor:
To be continuous duty of suitable power, 220V 50c/s single phase, tropically wound, with built-in
over load protection.
b) A run light which indicates the submersible pump is running.
c) The control box to be in suitable place, the wiring diagram to be posted to the inside face of the
box cover which allows convenient access to the submersible wiring and the control box includes
the following:
1) The electric motor of the submersible pump controlled by electronic board by means of
DC/AC relay (preferable solid state)
- The software program to switch off motor automatically after program time (10, 20, 30, 40
sec)
- From the time of stopping dispensing product from al remote dispensers connected to the
submersible pump and to start when any of the remote dispensers begin to dispense.
2) 220 Volt line contractor relay to carry full motor current.
3) Starting, running capacitors and overload protection.
4) A lockable on/off toggle switch to electronically “lock” pump power in the off position.
169
5) JOPETROL operation features:
1) The dispensers have 13/16” nozzles and 4 meter, 1” hoses.
2) The dimensions and capacities of JOPETROL Co.’s underground tanks are:
- Capacity (11850) imperial gall, (ID = 2748) mm.
- Theoretical total length of the tank (9000) mm.
- With the following manhole dimensions:
Diameter (C=700mm), Height (E=180mm), cover thick (F=10mm)

C. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR UNDERGROUND FUEL TANK AND LAYOUT:


UNDERGROUND PETROLEUM TANKS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 References
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)


ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2004; 2005 Addenda; 2006 Addenda) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code;
Section VIII, Pressure Vessels Division 1 – Basic Coverage

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)


ASTM D 1751 (2004) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non extruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types)
ASTM D 1752 (2004a) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and
Recycled PVC Expansion
ASTM D 4021 (1992) Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Underground Petroleum Storage
Tanks

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 30 (2003; Errata 2004; Errata 2006) Flammable and Combustible Liquids
Code
NFPA 30A (2003; TIA 2003) Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages
NFPA 31 (2006; Errata 2006) Installation of Oil Burning Equipment
NFPA 70 (2005; TIA 2005) National Electrical Code

STEEL TANK INSTITUTE (STI)


STI P3 (2006) Specification Manual for External Corrosion Protection of
Underground Steel Storage Tanks

THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)


SSPC SP 5 (2000; E 2004) White Metal Blast Cleaning

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)


MIL-PRF-4556 (Rev F; Am 1) Coating Kit, Epoxy, for Interior of Steel Fuel Tanks

U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)


FS A-A-60005 (Basic) Frames. Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)


29 CFR 1910 1200 Hazard Communications

170
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1316 (1994; Rev May 2006) Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Underground
Storage Tanks for Petroleum Products, Alcohols, and Alcohol-Gasoline
Mixtures
UL 1746 (1993; Rev thru Feb 2002) External Corrosion Protection Systems for Steel
Underground Storage Tanks
UL 58 (1996; Rev thru Jul 1998) Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and
Combustible Liquids
UL 674 (2003; Rev thru Apr 2006) Standard for Electric Motors and Generators for
Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations
UL 698 (2006) Industrial Control Equipment for Hazardous (Classified) Locations
UL 886 (1994; Rev thru Nov 2005) Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations

1.2 Quality Assurance:


1.2.1 Permitting:
Contractor shall obtain necessary permits in conjunction with installation of underground petroleum
storage tanks as may be required by Government, or local authority. Submit a copy of permits to the
Project Consultant.

1.2.2 Registration:
Contractor shall obtain required tank registration forms from governing regulatory agencies. Forms shall
be completed and provided to the Project Consultant and installation environmental office 30 days after
contract award for their submission to the regulatory agency.

1.2.3 Licensed Personnel:


Personnel required to install underground fuel storage tanks shall be licensed/certified by the governing
regulatory agencies. Submit a copy of license/certification to the Project Consultant

1.2.4 Manufacturer's Certification:


Tank installers shall be certified by the tank manufacturer on installation procedures. Submit certification
from the tank manufacturer to the Project Consultant

1.2.5 Safety:
Ensure employees are trained in the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and understand the information
contained in the material safety data sheets for their protection against toxic and hazardous chemical
effects.

1.3 Submittals
NOTE: Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not
having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval only.
For information only: when used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government.
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data


Tanks
Accessories
Leak detection system
Material safety data sheets

SD-06 Test Reports:


Delivery tank tightness
Leak monitoring system
Cathodic protection continuity

171
SD-07 Certificates:
Permits
Tank registration forms
Personnel license/certification
Manufacturer's certification

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions:


Tank installation

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data:


Tanks, Data Package 1

Leak detection system, Data Package 2

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

1.4 Quality Assurance:


1.4.1 Required Data:
Provide six copies of material safety data sheets (MSDS) for materials to be used at the job site in
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 Fuel Storage Tanks:
NOTE: Capacity of storage tanks will be indicated on the drawing. Single-wall storage tanks with a
polyester elastomer liner in the excavation are not considered an acceptable substitute due to
difficulty of testing liner system integrity after installation.

Underground fuel storage tanks shall be double-wall horizontal type conforming to NFPA 30, NFPA
30A, and NFPA 31. Capacity as indicated.

Outer tank shall enclose and provide leak containment across the total surface of the inner main storage
tank by being physically separated from the inner primary containment tank by standoffs; where, the
inner tank is completely contained within the outer tank. Provide semi-automatic and manual monitoring
of interstitial or annular space between inner and outer walls of tank to detect unauthorized release of
hydrocarbons or intrusion of water flow from surrounding soil.

A leak at any point on the inner or outer wall shall be detectable. Design and construction of tanks shall
comply with UL 1316, ASTM D 4021, STI P3 Type II, or UL 58 Type II with UL 1746 external
protection. Tanks constructed with lap shell or head joints in accordance with UL 58 shall be continuous
fillet welded; both on the interior and exterior surfaces.

2.2 Tank Accessories:


2.2.1 Manholes:
NOTE: Manholes are not required for tanks with capacities less than 3,780 liters 1,000 gallons.
Select 750 mm 30 inch diameter for tanks with a capacity of 3,780 liters 1,000 gallons to
45,360 liters 12,000 gallons and 900 mm 36 inch diameter for tanks with capacities greater
than 45,360 liters 12,000 gallons. Indicate appropriate design requirements for the manhole
covers in accordance with FS A-A-60005 on the drawing.

Provide a minimum of one [750] [900] mm [30] [36] inch minimum inside diameter size access manhole.
Each manhole shall have a matching flanged watertight cover conforming to FS A-A-60005. Provide
manhole extensions around each manhole of such a length to extend 200 mm 8 inches above grade be
flush with the finished grade. Provide manhole extensions with watertight covers conforming to FS A-A-
60005. Piping manholes shall be the same as access manholes with extensions. Provide manways around
each piping connection on the tank to prevent soil contamination due to a faulty connection. Combination
of piping connections may be grouped in a single manway. Provide piping in accordance with

172
2.2.2 Fill Connection:
Provide fill line with an overfill protection device which automatically shut off fuel supply into the tank
when the tank is 95 percent full to each underground storage tank and shall enter at the top of the tank.
Fill line shall be 100 mm 4 inch minimum diameter and extend to within 150 mm 6 inches of tank
bottom. From top of tank, fill line shall extend vertically or shall slope upward on a uniform grade and
connected to a tight fit fill adapter with a locking type cap. Tight fit fill adapter shall be bronze, fitted
with a fluoroelastomer gasket suitable for fuel being provided.

Adapter shall match the fill elbow on the delivery hose to prevent vapor emissions at the fill connection.
Provide a 11.3 liters 3 gallon minimum fill port containment unit for the fill adapter that allows
differential settlement between tank and ground surface.

2.2.3 Suction Connection:


Provide suction line located at the opposite end of tank from fill line.
Suction line shall be 100 mm 4 inch minimum diameter and extend to within 100 mm 4 inches of the
tank bottom unless indicated otherwise.

2.2.4 Atmospheric Vent:


Provide an atmospheric vent conforming to applicable requirements of NFPA 30 or NFPA 30A. Vent
pipe shall slope back to tank, terminate at least 3.66 m 12 feet above grade or 0.61 m 2 feet above roofs
of adjacent buildings, and located so that discharged vapors will not enter building openings, under
building eaves, or downspouts. Provide each tank storing products having a vapor pressure greater than
6.9 kPag one psig with a vent terminal outlet with a pressure and vacuum relief breather valve to ensure
vapor recirculation between fuel delivery truck and storage tank. Provide dry disconnect adapter to
interconnect tank vent system with the delivery truck vapor space. Size of truck vent line connection shall
match equipment connections on fuel delivery truck. Provide each tank storing products having a vapor
pressure less than 6.9 kPag one psig with a flame arrestor and sized in accordance with NFPA 30.

2.2.5 Clean-Out and Gage Connection:


Provide a combination clean-out and gage connection with each tank and combination shall consist of a
50 mm 2 inch vapor-tight gage box and a 50 mm 2 inch pipe extending downward through top of tank to
within 75 mm 3 inches of tank bottom. Manhole outside gage box shall be cast iron and shall be installed
in a concrete anchor block. Provide quick opening top lid and malleable iron wrench for removing lid.
Provide clean-out and gage pipe assembly with a locking type cap. Provide entire length of pipe inside
the tank with 13 mm 1/2 inch wide by 300 mm 12 inch long slots at alternate locations.

2.2.6 Tank Gages:


NOTE: Select the desired type of gage. Direct reading gages are more economical, but present
fogging problems.

Provide each tank with a remote reading mechanically-actuated float gage.

Provide float gage unit with electrical contacts for high and low level audible alarm settings. High level
setting shall be 90 percent capacity of tank. Provide each tank with a float-operated direct reading tank
gage.
Gage shall fit a 100 mm 4 inch tank opening and terminate with a sealed cap and body assembly located
in a manhole designed to allow for differential settlement of tank and pavement. Gage shall have dual
tapes and floats to allow reading product level and water level independently. Provide means to wipe
condensate (fogging) from viewing glass when reading gage.

2.2.7 Vapor Recovery Connections:


Provide each underground storage tank with vapor recovery connections to receive vapor recovery lines
from fuel dispensing unit and provide vapor discharge to tank truck during filling operations. Vapor
recovery connections are not required on tanks with products having a vapor pressure less than 6.9 kPag
one psig.

173
2.2.8 Sounding Rod:
Provide wood sounding rod of required length, evenly graduated and marked to read level of fuel
remaining in tank in mm inches. Rod shall be seasoned maple or other close grained wood. Tank end of
rod shall have a non-sparking cap. Provide two charts showing tank capacity in liters U.K. gallons in 3
mm 1/8 inch increments.

2.2.9 Sounding Rod Connection:


Weld a 300 by 300 by 6 mm 12 by 12 by 1/4 inch thick striker plate directly below rod opening inside
steel tanks. On fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) tanks provide a 300 by 350 by 6 mm 12 by 14 by 1/4
inch thick aluminum plate laminated on inside bottom surface of tank directly below gauging opening.

2.2.10 Dielectric Bushings:


Provide nylon dielectric bushings on metallic piping connections to steel tanks.

2.2.11 Cathodic Protection:


Provide steel tanks with a cathodic protection system as specified in Section 26 42 13.00 20 CATHODIC
PROTECTION BY GALVANIC ANODES. Cathodic protection is not required for steel tanks with UL
1746 protective coatings.

To prevent leaks, all parts of your UST system that are underground and routinely contain product need
to be protected from corrosion. The UST system includes the tank, piping, and ancillary equipment, such
as flexible connectors, fittings, and pumps. Unprotected metal UST components can deteriorate and leak
when underground electrical currents act upon them.

UST components made from metal, however, that routinely contain product and are in direct contact with
the ground need corrosion protection provided by cathodic protection or (in some cases) lining the
interior of the tank, as described below. These options require O&M.

Note:
Metal tanks or piping installed must have a dielectric coating (a coating that does not conduct
electricity) in addition to the cathodic protection described below.

Cathodic Protection Using Sacrificial Anode Systems:


Sacrificial anodes are buried and attached to UST components for corrosion protection — as illustrated
on the right by an anode attached to a tank. Anodes are pieces of metal that are more electrically active
than steel, and thus they suffer the destructive effects of corrosion rather than the steel they are attached
to.

Cathodic Protection Using Impressed Current Systems:


An impressed current system — as shown below — uses a rectifier to provide direct current through
anodes to the tank or piping to achieve corrosion protection. The steel is protected because the current
going to the steel overcomes the corrosion-causing current flowing away from it. The cathodic
protection rectifier must always be on and operating to protect your UST system from corrosion.

174
2.3 Leak Detection System:
Provide a continuous surveillance leak detection system suitable for operation in a NFPA 70, Class l,
Division l, Group D environment and located in the leak containment space between the interior and
exterior walls of double-wall tanks. System shall detect leakage into containment space by monitoring
interstitial pressure, vacuum, or liquid level variations electronically. A liquid sensor in a dry interstitial
space will not be acceptable. Sensor output and transmission shall be electronic. Liquids used in
containment space shall contain a corrosion inhibitor. Sensors shall be compatible with and detect
leakage of materials stored in the tank at a rate of 0.00001 L/s 0.1 gallons per hour with a 95 percent
probability of detecting this size leak and a five percent probability of declaring the tank leaking at this
rate when, in fact, it may be leaking less as well as ground water which may leak through the outer shell.
Panel shall be in a NEMA enclosure suitable for the environment and an audible and visual alarm for
each zone and battery backup capable of operating the system continuously for a minimum of 48 hours.
Panel shall incorporate a self-test system which permits operator verification of proper operation of leak
detection equipment. Mount panel where shown on the drawings. Enclose underground cable in PVC
coated conduit [isolated from the tanks with a dielectric fitting]. Provide instructions and equipment
required for calibration of the leak detection system and manufacturer's recommended calibration
maintenance schedule.

Leak Detection Methods for Petroleum Underground Storage Tanks and Piping

2.4 Interior Protective Coating for Steel Tanks:


Provide each tank with an interior protective coating conforming to MIL-PRF-4556 from the tank bottom
up to 450 mm 18 inches off the bottom.
Interior coating shall be a two-coat epoxy coating system consisting of a prime coat and a finish coat to
achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 0.15 mm 6 mils. Apply coating system in accordance
with instructions from the coating manufacturer for application, including surface preparation,
application equipment, and appropriate safety precautions. Surface preparation for the area to be coated
shall include the following:

a. Grind rough surfaces on welded seams, sharp edges, and corners to a minimum of a 3 mm 1/8
inch radius.
b. Abrasive blast surfaces to white metal in accordance with SSPC SP 5.
c. Clean blasted surfaces to remove oil, dust, sand, or other blasting residue and moisture.
d. Apply prime coat within eight hours after cleaning. If visible rusting occurs after cleaning,
regardless of the time interval, re-blast rusted surfaces prior to applying primer coat.

Prepare and mix primer and finish coats in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and
apply following manufacturer’s instructions, allowing proper curing time between prime and finish coats.
After completion of finished coat, surfaces shall be inspected by the Contractor for pinholes, skips,
inadequate coating thickness, and other defects. Repair imperfections found in accordance with the
coating manufacturer’s instructions.

Provide the entire interior of steel fuel storage tank, including tank and piping manholes, tank nozzles,
manhole covers, sump, and interior ladders (if provided) shall be given an interior protective coating in
accordance with Section 09 97 13.15 INTERIOR COATING OF WELDED STEEL PETROLEUM
FUEL TANKS.

175
2.5 Nameplates:
Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial
number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTIONS:
3.1 Earthwork:
Excavation and backfilling for tanks shall be as specified in the EARTHWORK Section.

3.2 Delivery Tightness Test:


Pneumatically test the interstitial space of each tank to 20.68 kPag 3 psig.
Maintain this pressure and apply soapsuds or equivalent material to the exterior of the tank. Visually
inspect for leaks. Repair leaks in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 Storage Tank Installation:


NOTE: Site conditions, traffic movement, ground water, and other conditions around the tank will
dictate the design of anchoring, concrete mats, depth of cover, and other surrounding design
features. Provide these design features as site conditions dictate. In all cases, maintain the
minimum backfill depth under and around the tank.
Do not use saddles. If for some specific site conditions saddles are required, then design the tank
with additional structural reinforcement and shell thickness to compensate for the added stress,
and isolate the tank electrically from the saddles with a dielectric material, such as ASTM D 1751
or ASTM D 1752 filler strips. In no case will saddles be used with fiberglass tanks.

Tank installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 30, NFPA 30A, and NFPA 31 and performed by
personnel certified by the tank manufacturer and State Regulations. Install manhole extensions and tank
connection access pits to prevent load transfer from the surface to the tank shell. Position tanks so that
fuel discharge pipes slope up toward fuel outlet. Each tank fill, clean-out and gage connection, and access
manway shall [extend 200 mm 8 inches above finished grade] [be flush with finished grade]. Where
tanks are installed under a paved surface, tank connections shall terminate in manhole extensions with
tops flush with finished paved surface. Position tanks on a 1 mm per 100 mm 1/8 inch per foot slope with
fill port and leak detection sensor located at the low end and vent connection at the high end. Holiday test
steel tank coating. Defects found shall be corrected and the tank re-tested prior to backfill. Provide a
minimum 300 mm 12 inch thickness of fill material between the bottom of tank and top of the concrete
hold-down pad as recommended by the manufacture. Provide fiber glass reinforced plastic hold-down
straps and corrosion resistant accessories as recommended by the FRP or composite tank manufacturer.
Anchor steel tanks to reinforced concrete mats, separated by fill material and held in place with steel
anchor straps. Coat straps, turnbuckles, and anchors to resist corrosion. Provide 25 mm one inch wide
insulating dielectric straps conforming to ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D 1752 between tank shell and metal
straps. Inspect steel tank anodes to ensure integrity during backfill operations.

3.4 Electrical Work:


Provide switches and devices necessary for controlling leak monitoring equipment. Wiring, fittings, and
components shall be explosion-proof in compliance with applicable requirements of UL 674, UL 698,
and UL 886 for Class I, Division l, Group C and D hazardous locations. Electrical installations shall
conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

3.5 Inspection:
Visually inspect the interior of fuel storage tanks that have an accessible manhole to insure it is free of
debris before fuel is placed inside. Prior to entry insure a safe atmosphere exists.

3.6 Hydrocarbon and Water Monitoring System Test:


Activate leak monitoring system and test in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

3.7 Cathodic Protection:


Test to prove continuity of electrical connections prior to backfilling coated steel tanks which do not have
an exterior coating complying to UL 1746.

176
3.8 High Level Alarm Test:
Fill each tank with appropriate product and verify the high level alarm functions. Verify overfill
protection device functions. The Government will provide product.

177
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF BOREHOLE WITH SOLAR POWERED PUMP
COMPLETE WITH PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR OFFICE BUILDINGS AT THE ECOWAS
LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

178
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONSTRUCTION OF BOREHOLES WITH SOLAR POWERED
PUMPS)

[FOR THE BOREHOLE CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUIRE THE SERVICES OF A SOUND AND
EXPERIENCE HYDROGEOLOGIST EQUIPPED WITH THE REQUIRED GADGETS TO ASCERTAIN THE PREFERRED
WELL LOCATION]

1. SUMMARY OF WORKS

1.1 PURPOSE
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes the process of Borehole-well construction for the
Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD), Lungi, Sierra Leone.

1.2 SCOPE
This SOP is a mandatory document and shall be implemented by the Contractor when constructing the
Solar Powered Borehole well for the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) Project.
Note: Subcontractors performing work under the ELD Project shall follow this SOP for constructing the
well or may use their own procedure(s) as long as the substitute meets the requirements
prescribed by the ELD Project Quality Management Plan, and is approved by the Project
Architect before the commencement of the designated activities.

1.3 TRAINING
1.3.1 The Contractor’s personnel shall be trained by reading the procedure and the training shall be
documented in accordance with this specification for borehole construction.

1.3.2 The Contractor’s Field Team Leader (FTL) shall monitor the proper implementation of this procedure
and ensure that relevant team members have completed all applicable training assignments in accordance
with the specification.

1.4 SCOPE AND APPLICATIONS


The specifications in the Works under this Contract cover both general and particular technical
specifications with respect to civil and installation works for
(a) Drilling and testing of deep boreholes including installation of PVC casings and screens,
construction of platform for borehole. The borehole to be drilled shall be fitted with casing and
screens of internal diameter 6 inches (150mm). The borehole shall be drilled within the Office
Buildings at Lungi International Airport, Freetown for the Ecowas Logistic Deport (ELD) where
there is no existing borehole for fitting with submersible pumps.
(b) Supplying of materials and installation of pipes and submersible pump. Armatures and fittings,
supply and installation of water distribution system components (e.g. tower/ water tanks, etc.) and
construction of and pump house for distribution networks will be undertaken by the Main
Contractor.
(c) Any other civil works involved

The quantities of works stated in the Bill of Quantities shall be considered as estimated, while the real
quantities will be the one executed, stated in measurements and approved by the Project Architect or his
representative. Payments will be made based upon measured and actually executed works.
The Contractor is obliged to perform all works in accordance with the technical specifications, the
indicated norms and standards or the instructions of the Employer or his representative.

1.5 CLAUSE NUMBERS


Unless otherwise stated, all clause numbers refer to the clauses in these Specifications.

179
1.6 DEFINITIONS
The below-stated terms used in Technical Specifications or BOQ shall be interpreted as following:
Project Architect: Supervising Officer as defined in the Contract (RBAL)

M&E Engineer Mechanical & Electrical Engineer (RBAL)

Building Contractor The Contractor employed by the Employer for the execution of the
Works as defined in the Contract or the Contractor separately
employed by the Employer to execute the builder’s work associated
with the Works as appropriate

Contractor The Contractor employed by the Employer or the Specialist Sub-


contractor employed by the building contractor or the Nominated
Subcontractor nominated by the Project Architect for the execution
of the Works as appropriate

Annular space or annulus The space between the borehole wall and the well casing, or the
space between a casing pipe and a liner pipe.

Annular seal The material, usually cement grout or bentonite, placed in the space
between the borehole wall and the well casing for zone isolation,
especially used to prevent surface contamination from entering the
borehole.

Bentonite/Bentonite annular seal A hydrous aluminium silicate (clay) in slurry, powder, granular, or
pellet form that, when hydrated, provides an impervious seal
between the well casing and the borehole wall. Bentonite may also
be used in a 2% to 5% mixture with Portland Type I, Type II, or
Type I/II cement to form a pumpable grout seal that expands as the
material hardens.

Filter pack Sand, gravel, or glass beads that are uniform, clean, and well-
rounded and generally siliceous that are placed in the annulus of the
well, between the borehole wall and the well intake in order to
prevent formation material from entering through the well.

Grout Cement or bentonite mixtures used in sealing boreholes and wells


and for zone isolation. Only Portland Type I, Type II, and Type I/II
cement is approved for use at investigative sites.

Monitoring well Any well or borehole constructed for the purpose of monitoring
fluctuations in groundwater levels, quality of groundwater, or the
concentration of contaminants in the vadose zone or groundwater.

Silica Sand Washed and sieved sand of a specified size distribution or gradation
composed primarily of silica (e.g., quartz).

Site-Specific Health and Safety Plan A health and safety plan that is specific to a site or ER-(SSHASP)
related field activity that has been approved by an ER health and
safety representative. This document contains information specific
to the project including scope of work, relevant history, descriptions
180
of hazards by activity associated with the project site(s), and
techniques for exposure mitigation (e.g., personal protective
equipment [PPE]) and hazard mitigation.

Tremie pipe A small-diameter pipe used to carry sand pack, bentonite, or


grouting materials to the bottom of the borehole. Materials are
pumped under pressure or poured to the hole bottom through the
pipe. The pipe is retracted as the annulus is filled.

Turbidity (nephelometric) A measure of the intensity of light scattered by sample particulates


relative to a standard reference suspension. The range of water
turbidity is measured in nephelometric turbidity units (NTU).

Vadose zone A zone between the ground surface and the water table that contains
water below atmospheric pressure and air or gasses at atmospheric
pressure. Also known as the zone of aeration or unsaturated zone

Well casing A solid piece of pipe, typically steel, stainless steel or polyvinyl
chloride (PVC), used to keep a well open in either unconsolidated
materials or unstable rock and as a means to contain zone-isolation
materials such as cement grout or bentonite.

Well screen Perforated casing that allows fluids, while minimizing or


eliminating sediment into the well.

Humus (non-bearing surface layer) Layer of soil, which is to be removed because of the inappropriate
physical, mechanical and chemical characteristics

Lean concrete base Layer of lean concrete MB 10 of 10 cm thickness laid in the


excavations before reinforcement and concreting of the foundations
– isolated footing, continuous footing and the slabs.

Refilling with soil Filling of loose material from the excavation (without humus and
large rocks) used for refilling and compacting to the necessary
degree of compaction

1.7 REQUIREMENTS OF SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND BRAND NAMES


The quality of works shall be in accordance with the Technical Specifications of International Standards
and Manuals of the Material / Equipment. Neither the following Clauses of this Specification, any
descriptions therein nor the quantities shall limit the obligations of the Contractor under the Conditions of
Contract. Where items are not included in the Bill of Quantities (BOQ) for any such requirements or
obligations, the cost of such requirements or obligations shall be deemed to have been spread over all the
items of the Bill of Quantities.

All references to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods, materials and work performed or
tested shall be to the latest edition or revision thereof unless otherwise stated
Where such standards and codes are national, or relate to a particular country or region, other
authoritative standards that ensure a substantially equal or higher quality than the standards and codes
specified will be accepted.
If the Contractor intends to use such alternative Standard, he shall notify the Project Architect/M&E
Engineer thereof, submitting with his notice two (2) copies (in English) of the proposed Standard, and
181
shall not order any material or perform any work unless and until he has obtained the Project Architect’s
approval of such Standard.

Brand names used in the Specification or on the drawings are only intended to define a standard of
quality and performance and the Contractor may use alternative products of at least equal quality and
capacity.

When the Contractor offers alternatives, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect for approval
a statement detailing the alternatives. The Contractor, shall include full technical descriptions, drawings
and specifications, and shall provide such full information as is required to demonstrate to the Project
Architect/M&E Engineer that the alternative is equivalent to the item specified. The Contractor when
called for shall produce any further information that the Project Architect may require.

1.8 RESTRICTIONS TO SPECIFICATION


The technical specifications are giving as a general guideline. Detailed notes and specifications as per
drawings and manufacturers specification as far as applicable will take preference over these technical
specifications and the Contractor shall pay close attention to these details.

The Project Architect on the advice of the M&E Engineer may adjust specifications and details of
drawings during the implementation where found necessary and applicable.

1.9 COORDINATION OF WORKS


The Contractor has to coordinate all works closely with the Main Contractor and the appointed
representative of Project Architect.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim any extra payment, time extension or compensation for
interference and delays caused by the adherence to the requirements of this Clause.

For the borehole drilling, the Sub-Contractor has to select the site and a respective form sheet has to be
signed by the Project Architect and the Main Contractor before drilling activities start. The Project
Architect and the Main Contractor shall also be consulted on alternate sitting in the event of an
unsuccessful borehole.

1.10 NOTICES, PERMITS


Well in advance of the programmed start of any work which may affect traffic or any existing utilities,
the Contractor shall give advance notice to the Project Architect and the Main Contractor indicating the
type, the exact location, the programmed starting time and the expected duration of the works and shall
provide whatever particulars may be required by the Project Architect and the Main Contractor to issue
any required permits and make all necessary arrangements. The Employer will provide whatever
assistance possible to the Contractor to facilitate the permit procedure which, however, will remain the
sole responsibility of the Contractor.

1.11 WITNESSING AND POST-CONSTRUCTION CLEARANCES


It is expected that the issue of these permits will be tied to the requirement that the work may only be
carried out in the presence of authorized inspectors from the authorities concerned i.e. Guma Water
Company (GUMA) and Electrical Distribution and Services Authority (EDSA). Their job will be to
witness and assess any damage or interference with their respective utility. Should such disturbances
occur it will be at their discretion to authorize either the Contractor to correct them or to arrange for
specialized repairs through their own personnel.

182
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs whatever resulting from avoidable damages of or
interferences with other utilities.
As proof that the works in question have been completed to the satisfaction of the authorities concerned
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer upon request official post-construction clearances issued by
the respective authorities.

2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 SKILLED STAFF
The Contractor shall deploy skilled staff with knowledge relating to the Contract Requirements as
detailed and specified in the Contract Document.
The Project Architect reserves the right to have any person removed from the site if in his opinion the
quality of work executed is not satisfactory and the skill of that person are not appropriate.

2.2 ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations shall be used and valid in these documents:
BoQ ........................Bill of Quantities
°C ...........................Centigrade degree
cm ...........................Centimetre
d .............................Depth
DN ..........................Nominal diameter
Hrs...........................Hours
HDPE .....................High Density Polyethylene
Kg.............................kilogram
km............................Kilometre
l ...............................Litre
Ls ............................Lump sum
m .............................Linear meter
m².............................Square meter
m³.............................Cubic meter
mm...........................Millimeter
mm² .........................Square millimetre
No ............................Number
OD ..........................Outer diameter
pcs ............................Pieces
PN ...........................Nominal pressure
t ...............................Thickness
To ...........................Tone (1000 kg)
“ ..............................Inch
% .............................Per cent

Drawings in the document are an integral part of the technical specifications. The Contractor shall revise
all submitted drawings and compare with the methodology foreseen before starting the relevant works.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the possible extra costs.

2.3 DRAWINGS
The Project Architect shall prepare design drawings of the water distribution system network and submit
it to Main Contractor
The Contractor shall prepare accurate as-built drawings and submit them prior to obtaining the Certificate
of Completion. The Contractor shall revise the drawings until approved by the Engineer.
183
The Contractor shall use commercially available PC compatible word processing and adequate graphic
software to produce its as-built deliverable documentation.
The final drawings shall be submitted as 4 hard copies (size as required by the Project Architect
authorized representative) and as electronic version on CD.

Before the Project Architect shall issue the Certificate of Completion, the Contractor shall return to the
Project Architect/M&E Engineer all Drawings, Specifications, Bill of Quantities and any other document,
which may have been supplied to the Contractor for the purpose of the work, if so requested.

2.4 POLLUTION OF POTABLE WATER


Special attention must be given to any aspects concerning a possible contamination of the potable water
caused by the works. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any pollution of the drinking water
facilities as a result of his work.

2.5 DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE CONTRACTOR


The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to public or private property while carrying out
the work. It shall be his solitary responsibility to inform himself thoroughly enough to avoid any damages
to the existing buildings, structures and infrastructures.

2.6 WORK PROGRAM AND TIME SCHEDULE


The Contractor shall provide with his offer a work program according to the contract and bidding data,
including a time schedule to be approved by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer. Seasonal rainfall and
flow of surface water has to be taken into consideration. The program shall fully take into account and
allow, in a methodical manner, for the need to coordinate procedures with other contracts being carried
out on the site.
This approved work program shall not be changed without the written approval of the Project Architect.
In case delays, additional or unforeseen works are coming up the work program shall be updated by the
Contractor and submitted for approval to the Project Architect. A possible extension of the Contract shall
be negotiated with the Contractor.

Before commencement of work the Contractor shall submit a final work program and time schedule for
approval by the Project Architect. Changes may only be approved if they can be justified.
During execution of the works the Contractor shall submit a work program every 14 days containing the
progress, delays and the updated time schedule until the end of the Contract.
The program shall include a detailed time schedule showing the time the contractor has anticipated for
the work, whether works will be done in sequences or parallel, etc. until the completion and handing over
of the works.

All Work programs shall be submitted as hard and softcopy and are subject to written approval by the
Project Architect.

2.7 SITE PROTECTION & REGULATION


The contractor shall deliver, install, maintain and remove all required safety material as warning signs,
traffic signs etc. In addition to the site protection, the Contractor shall install protective guard posts in
areas where human traffic on site might pose a hazard.

The guard posts shown in Attachment E consist of steel posts that are at least 3’’ in diameter. Four guard
posts are radially located around the well vault and placed at least 2ft below the ground’s surface. Each
post will have a minimum of 4ft above the ground surface and, in cases where the borehole/well is
surrounded by high vegetation, will have a flag attached for greater visibility. Each post should be
cemented inside of a hole that has a minimum diameter of 6 in.
184
2.8 WORK IN VICINITY OF POWER LINES
Wherever the Works may cross an electrical power line right of way, the Contractor shall familiarize
himself with the requirements and regulations with regard to work carried out in the vicinity of power
lines. The Contractor shall comply with such requirements and regulations and obtain any permits
required.

Equipment shall not be operated where it is possible to bring such equipment or any part of the
equipment within three (3) meters of any energized electrical conductor unless the utility company has
been notified, and either the line has been de-energized, or effectively guarded against contact, or
displaced or re-routed from the work area. For high-voltage transmission lines, clearance shall be
requested from the Electricity Distribution Services Authority (EDSA) to temporary de-energized the
service line within the working area.
Where practical, metallic pipe sections shall not be stored under overhead high voltage power lines. If
pipe sections must be stored under power lines, the Contractor shall protect personnel from the effects of
induced currents by grounding pipe sections at two (2) locations with a 50mm2 copper ground conductor
and grounding rods.

2.9 CONTRACTOR’S SITE OFFICE AND CONSTRUCTION SITE MANAGEMENT


2.9.1 MOBILIZATION AND ARRANGEMENT OF SITES
The Contractor shall set up and maintain the site office, store and other constructions necessary for his
work. He shall be responsible for all the services in such constructions. Compliance with local
regulations shall be guaranteed in all aspects.
The protection and security of works and equipment of the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and he is responsible to the Employer for any loss or damage caused to third parties‟ property,
within the site boundaries.

2.9.2 WATER SUPPLY


Water will be required for the purpose of construction of the works. The Contractor shall make his own
arrangements for obtaining supplies of water of approved quality, and shall erect and maintain all
required pumps, pipes, cocks, tanks, mobile tanks, hoses and other appliances required to distribute the
water as necessary to the various parts of the Works. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
supply of all water required in the works for whatever purpose and no claim for extra payment or
extension of time based on the lack or insufficient or delayed supply of water will be considered or
entertained.

Where permitted to connect up to existing mains and pipelines for the purpose of obtaining water, the
Contractor shall comply with all regulations and requirements of the competent authority (GUMA). The
Contractor shall obtain all related permits and make all arrangements as may be required for the
performance of the connection. The cost of supplying water for all purposes shall be uniformly spread
over all items of the Bills of Quantities.

2.9.3 ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY


The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for all electric power supply, which will be needed for
the execution of the Works.

If necessary, the Contractor shall provide, erect, operate and maintain in good condition a diesel driven
electric generator, large enough to supply the contractual requirements. Sufficient standby is essential to
ensure the required electric power at all times. Mobile generator set with sufficient capacity for pump
testing is to be provided.

185
The Contractor shall also install, connect and maintain in good condition all cables, conductors and other
electrical plant and equipment required to perform his contractual obligations. All such plant and
installations as described above shall comply with the relevant requirements and regulations in Sierra
Leone. All the electrical facilities shall be erected and be maintained to the full satisfaction of the Project
Architect /M&E Engineer. The cost of providing electric power supply for all purposes shall be
uniformly spread over all items of the Bill of Quantities.

2.9.4 SITE CLEARING AND PREPARATION


The Works under this Clause include site clearance, leaving and erection of fencing that may be required,
protection of any existing structure of element that must remain intact, etc. Prior to commencing the
above Works the Contractor shall obtain all necessary licenses and permits required for their
performance.
The areas of all sites on which work is to be done shall be cleared of all standing or felled trees, stumps,
brush, logs, debris, rubbish and other objectionable matter. All trees outside the area to be cleared and
such other trees that are not to be removed shall be carefully protected from damage during the Works
operations, and no trees shall be removed without the prior consent of the Project Architect. The
Contractor shall not commence clearing any area and/or demolition without having received written
instruction to it from the Project Architect.

2.9.5 DISPOSAL OF TREES, ROOTS, ETC.


All materials required clearing shall be removed from the area during the work progress and on
completion of the Works, burned completely or disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Project
Architect/M&E Engineer. All materials to be burnt shall be piled and all burning shall be so thorough
that the materials will be reduced to ashes. Piling for burning shall be done in such a manner and in such
locations as to cause the least fire hazard and nuisance to inhabitants of the area. The Contractor shall
have available at all time, for use in preventing and suppressing fires, apparatus and fire-fighting
equipment satisfactory to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer. When, in the opinion of the Project
Architect, the fire hazard is great, burning shall be deferred or additional fire-fighting equipment shall be
provided.
All materials not burned to ashes shall be disposed of by removal from the site of the Works, and upon
removal such materials shall become the property of the Contractor who shall dispose of them by burial
in locations and in a manner approved by the Project Architect. The Contractor shall adopt all measures
to ensure that soil erosion is avoided.

2.9.6 MAINTENANCE OF SITES


The Contractor shall maintain the site in clean and hygienic condition during the whole project period.
All staff and labour rooms shall be in suitable working conditions.

2.9.6.1 Release of Sites and Demobilization


Demobilization shall include the removal of all site facilities, temporary installations, equipment,
machinery and surplus materials from site and the reinstatement of all surfaces used, in at least in the
same condition as before its occupation, including all access roads. The site shall be left in a state that
does not negatively affect the environment or destroy the view.

2.9.6.2 Regulation on Safety and Public Health


The Contractor shall make sure that the places of work and the construction sites are maintained with
care and that they comply with safety and hygiene requirements. His equipment shall be cleaned
regularly. Necessary disposals shall be provided. The Contractor shall be responsible for any pollution or
sources of infection inside the area of his premises.

186
The Contractor must take all necessary measures to ensure that his activities, equipment, vehicles, staff,
etc., do not cause undue inconvenience, harassment nor safety or health risks to other workers. The
Contractor shall not cause any damage to agricultural crops or trees outside the site territory, nor shall the
work activities cause flooding or pollution of the environment.

a) First Aid
The Contractor shall provide and maintain on site first aid equipment consisting at least of the
following:
• A complete first aid kit with medicines, bandages, splints, etc.
• A motor car to be always available for emergency transportation

b) Fire Protection
No naked fire shall be used by the Contractor on or about the Site other than in the open air.

The term "naked fire" shall be deemed to include electric arcs and oxyacetylene or other flames used
in welding or cutting metals.
Suitable firefighting equipment shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor on site to deal
with any outbreak of fire. All possible precautions shall be taken to provide for the safe storage of
petroleum, explosives, gas bottles, and all other dangerous goods and items.

2.10 CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT


The Contractor's equipment used in the performance of the works shall be of such type, size and of such
method of working as the Project Architect approves. If for any reason whatsoever the Project Architect
shall be of the opinion that any equipment or appliance employed or proposed to be employed by the
Contractor for the purpose of the works shall not be used, or that any such machine or appliance as
aforesaid is unsuitable for use in the Works or any part of them, then such equipment shall be
immediately withdrawn from use. The Project Architect shall inspect and approve the Contractor's
equipment prior to commencement of drilling operations. If equipment is not satisfactory, the Contractor
shall provide such equipment that meets the Project Architect's approval.

Any change in the method of performing the Works as a consequence of such order shall be at the cost of
the Contractor who shall have no cause for claim against the Employer on account of having to carry out
the work by different methods, or for the idleness or removal of any construction plant.
The cost of providing constructional plant for all purpose shall be uniformly spread over all the items of
the Bill of Quantities.

2.10.1 Descriptions of commonly used pieces of equipment are listed below.


a) Well-Construction Supplies (Some of these items are suggestions only, and the list is not all-
inclusive)
 Silica sand (i.e. 30/70, 20/40, and 8/12 grain size)
 Cement—Portland Type I, Type II or Type I/II only
 Approved water supply, preferably untreated
 Well casing, screen, cap, and bottom plug well, as required
 Mechanical casing centralizers, if required
 Bentonite pellets, crushed bentonite, or bentonite grout
 A 5-ft length of protective steel casing—black iron or galvanized— 6-, 8-, or 10-in. in diameter,
according to needs
 Guard posts
 Locking cap
 Padlocks

187
b) Well-Construction Equipment
 Drill rig and accompanying equipment (augers, drill rods, casing, samplers, etc.)
 Tremie pipe
 Grout-mixing and pressure-pumping unit
 Support equipment for maintaining 24 hr./day operation

2.11 MATERIALS and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR


2.11.1 Materials and Goods to be used for the Works
All materials for execution of Works as appropriate backfill material, concrete, reinforcement steel,
pipes, fittings, armatures, etc. shall be supplied by the Contractor.
All goods to be provided shall be new, unused, of the most recent manufacture and incorporate all recent
improvements in the design and material unless provided otherwise in the Contract.

The Contractor shall take all the measures for the selection, storage and handling of natural material in
conformity with the technical specification some time before this material is used, and inform the Project
Architect accordingly.
Prior to making any order to any private entity or factory for any element / material ordered by the
Employer, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect, costs, names of manufacturers and
suppliers for approval.

The Contractor shall also hand in the relevant technical specifications and parameter for any type of
material before procurement in order to allow the Project Architect to assess the quality of this material.
The Project Architect may ask for testing, which shall be on the expense of the Contractor.
Should the Project Architect/M&E Engineer at any time be dissatisfied with such materials or goods or
with the method or performance of such sub-contractor's work or place of business, the Project Architect
shall be empowered to cancel his previously given approval of such sub-contractor. The Contractor shall
then obtain the said services; materials or goods from such other sub-contractor as may be approved by
the Project Architect and shall bear any additional cost therefore.
If during the Contract, through any reason, a supplier should increase the cost of materials above that of
other equally reputable suppliers, the Project Architect may only authorize payment for materials at the
rates of other suppliers.

2.11.2 Samples
In addition to any special provisions herein from sampling and testing of materials, the Contractor shall
submit to the Project Architect as he may require samples of all materials and goods he proposes to use or
employ in or for the Works. The Project Architect, if approved, will retain such samples, and no materials
or goods of which samples have not been submitted shall be used on the permanent works unless and
until the Project Architect has approved such samples in writing. Notwithstanding the Project Architect’s
approval as provided for herein, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the quantity of all materials
and goods supplied unless specified otherwise.
The cost of supplying all such samples and of conveying the same to such place of inspection or testing
as the Project Architect may designate complying with the requirements of this Clause shall be deemed to
be included in the Bid rates and prices.

2.11.3 Test Certificates


Should the Project Architect not inspect any materials or goods at the place of manufacture, the
Contractor shall obtain certificates of tests performed on such materials or goods by an agency approved
by the Project Architect and shall certify that the materials or goods concerned have been tested in
accordance with the requirements of the Specification and shall give the results of all the tests carried out.

188
The Contractor shall provide adequate means of identifying the materials and goods delivered to the site
with the corresponding certificates.

2.11.4 Packing, Marking and Delivery


Prior to the dispatch from the factory or Contractor's works, equipment and materials shall be thoroughly
protected against corrosion and incidental damage, including the effects of vermin, rough handling and
bumpy land transportation, strong sunlight, rain, high temperature or humid atmosphere.

The equipment and materials shall be packed to withstand rough handling in transit, and packages shall
be suitable for export to and storage in the tropics, including possible delay on exposed quaysides and
field conditions. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the materials and equipment being packed
so that it reaches its destination intact and undamaged. The Contractor shall provide, and include in the
contract price the cost of all necessary packing cases and crates, properly strengthened by battens (which
shall be considered as non-returnable), hoop iron banding, and packing materials to include, but not
limited, to the use of polythene or similar waterproof wrapping, silica, etc. wherever necessary, and
required.
The Contractor shall prepare a list of all items which had been implemented during execution of the
Works. The list of materials implemented shall be handed over to the Project Architect after completion
of Works.

2.11.5 Required Documents to be submitted with Bid Documents


Each Bidder has to submit the following documents with his Bid:
Type / make of and specifications for
• Submersible pump
• Solar system for operating submersible pump
For the main items offered (submersible pump and solar system) the Bidder has to state the nearest agent/
distributor of the type of service to be supplied and service and maintenance possibility in Sierra Leone
or neighbouring countries.
The information submitted with the Bid Documents is binding.

2.11.6 SUBMERSIBLE WATER PUMPS


2.11.6.1 Submersible Water Pump, suitable for solar energy.
The submersible pump should work with solar energy. The submersible pump should be supplied with
the following: 3”suction and 2’’ discharge submersible pump (suitable for 6”borehole) with all safety
devices (e.g. dry-run protection, electric protection to prevent power surge, non-return valve)
3”pump for high heads and moderate flows as shown above, suitable for 6” (150 mm ID) borehole
(explicitly confirmed in the bid). Water-tight flat cable connectors resistant to pressure equal to 2 or
more bars and water resistant flat cables have to be supplied
Pump must be equipped with over and under voltage protection, over temperature and effective dry
running protection.
• 75m rising pipes
• 100m drop cables
• Switch box
• A complete set of solar power generation system mounted on suitable support structure, including
all cables, accessories, etc.

The Contractor shall supply and install the solar powered submersible pump as specified to supply
enough power to operate the submersible pump for the Bank’s daily demand of water. The solar panels
must generate at least 50 % more Watt than the pump requires. Technical specifications for the solar
system components are given below.
189
• All connecting cabling and fittings, drop cable and module support structures with all necessary
components for a complete site installation shall be delivered.
• Including automatic on/off switch to stop pump when water tank is full
• Installation and maintenance manual in English for all components have to be included
• Appropriate documentation, such as technical and performance data for submersible pump and
motor, solar modules and module support structure shall be submitted with the Bid.

Submersible pump, riser pipe and fittings:


Solar powered Submersible pumps, including all equipment and accessories for solar energy supply and
energy supply to the pump, suitable for 6” (150mm) cased internal diameter boreholes
Supply shall include all materials for main pipe work from the well head to the tank and associated
valves and fittings, submersible cable, earth cables, slicing kit, earth rods and other accessories.
The details below are minimum the requirements of the submersible pump guidelines to be installed:

2.11.6.2 Technical Data 6” 50Hz Stainless Steel Submersible Pump for Deep Well

2.11.6.3 Material In Contact With the Liquid


DESCRIPTIONS MATERIAL
Type AISI DIN / EN
Discharge head and screws Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Valve Stainless steel 304 1.4301
O-ring Nitrile Rubber - -
Valve support Resin - -
Outer case Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Suction Strainer Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Cable guard and screws Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Motor adapter Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Pump shaft Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Coupling Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Upper journal sleeve Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Screw and washer Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Lower spacer Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Upper spacer Polycarbonate - -
Diffusers Techno-polymer - -
Secondary bearing bush Resin - -
190
Bearing bush Resin - -
Upper bearing guide Resin - -
Stage housing Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Impeller Polycarbonate - -

2.11.6.4 Applications:
􀁑 Water supply from well
􀁑 Municipal water works
􀁑 Water distribution and pressure boosting
􀁑 Irrigation and sprinkler systems, water treatment plants, filtration and reverse osmosis
􀁑 Industrial cooling and processing
􀁑 Mining industry, drainage and dewatering
􀁑 Fire-fighting equipment
􀁑 Lifting and distribution of a wide range of liquids
􀁑 Autoclave and cistern charge and discharge
􀁑 Greenhouses and nurseries
􀁑 Residential wells and drainage
􀁑 Food industry
􀁑 General industry

2.11.6.5 Features:
􀁑 Compact, reliable and suited to operate in vertical position
􀁑 Built-in check valve to protect the pump against water hammer risk
􀁑 Floating impellers to grant a better performance and longer life for the pump against abrasion
􀁑 Hydraulic design is such to enhance the overall efficiency thus reducing energy consumption and
making the pumping systems more cost effective

2.11.6.6 Specifications:
􀁑 Capacities up to 24m³/h at 50Hz
􀁑 Pumped liquid: chemically and mechanically non aggressive
􀁑 Water temperature range: from 0°C to 40°C
􀁑 Maximum allowable amount of sand 25gr/m³, solid dimension max 2mm
􀁑 Maximum pump diameter (including cable guard): 95mm
􀁑 Outlet diameter: 2"
􀁑 Rotation: counter clockwise when looking into the discharge
􀁑 Motor adapter in compliance with NEMA standard
􀁑 Pump can work continuously in vertical position
􀁑 Motors: see section Submersible Motors Product Overview

(i) Pumps with Encapsulated Motor


Motor Dimensions [mm] Weight [Kg]
Pump
Lt L2 Motor Pump Total
Model Type Type kW HP L1
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
VS 6/26 E4 3 4 1424,5 393,5 1031 15,0 8,7 23,7
The hydraulic characteristics shall be guaranteed, according to ISO standard 9906:2012, grade 3B

(ii) Hydraulic Performances at 50Hz.


Pump Rated Q = Delivery
Type Power m³/h 0 2,7 3,0 3,3
[kW] [HP] l/sec 0 0,75 0,83 0,92
H = Total Head Meters Column Of Water [m]
VS 6/26 3 4 150 143 141 139

(iii) Overview - Submersible Motor


6" Encapsulated Motor
6" Super Stainless 3 Phase SUBMERSIBLE MOTOR
191
The 6" encapsulated three phase motor, manufactured in ISO 9001 certified facilities, are built for
dependable operation in 4" diameter or larger Boreholes. The motor shall offer a maintenance free
long life submersible pump application.
The motor shall be filled with a special FES93 fluid, providing frost protection for lower
temperature. A special diaphragm shall ensure pressure compensation inside the motor.

(iv) Features:
􀁑 Hermetically sealed stator. Anti-track, self-healing stator resin prevents motor burn out
􀁑 High efficiency electrical design (low operation cost, cooler winding temperature)
􀁑 Removable “Water Bloc™” lead connector
􀁑 Cable material according to drinking water regulations (KTW approved)
􀁑 Water lubricated radial and thrust bearings
􀁑 Motor prefilled and 100% tested.
Non contaminating, FES93- filled design

(v) Specifications
􀁑 3kW
􀁑 4" NEMA flange
􀁑 Degree of protection: IP68
􀁑 Insulation: Cl. B
􀁑 Rated ambient temp: 30°C
􀁑 Cooling flow: Motor 2.2 kW and larger: min. 8 cm/s
􀁑 Starts/h: 20
􀁑 Mounting: Vertical
􀁑 Voltage tolerance: 380-415V/50Hz; -10% / +6% UN [380-415V = (380-10%) – (415+6%)]
􀁑 Motor protection: Select thermal overloads according to EN 60947-4-1, Trip time <10s at 5 x
IN
􀁑 Motor complete in AISI 316SS with SiC seal
E
(i) Performance at ~2850 rpm (Three-Phase 4" Encapsulated Motors 400V)
Pump PN Thrust nN IN IA η cos TN TA L Weight
model type φ
[kW] [HP] F [N] [min-1] [A] [A] [%] [%] [Nm] [Nm] [mm] [kg]
VS 6/26 3.0 4 6500* 2845 7,5 42,0 76 0,77 10,06 31,93 477,2 17,0
* High Thrust Version

(vii) Accessories
a) Motor Control:
Sub Monitor Motor Protection
The Sub Monitor is designed to protect 3-phase pumps with horsepower ratings between 3 - 15Hp.
Current, voltage and motor temperature are monitored using three integrated current transformers.
A digital display provides current and voltage readings for all three legs and allows the user to set
up the Sub Monitor quickly and easily. The Sub Monitor is the latest innovation in 3-phase pump
protection from Franklin Electric.

Using state-of-the-art technology, the Sub Monitor provides the ultimate protection for a pump and
motor. There is simply no better way to protect a large 3-phase submersible pump investment than
with a Sub Monitor. It‘s the protection device that can sense overheating straight from the motor
windings! And it is made by the world leader in submersible motors - Franklin Electric.

b) Features
􀁑 Quick setup to monitor a motor, simply enter the Line Frequency (Hz), Line Voltage (volts),
and Motor Service Factor Amp rating
􀁑 Digital display indicates voltage and current on all three legs at the same time, and fault
messages are in easily understandable text

192
􀁑 Monitors - Under/Overload; Under/Overvoltage; Current Unbalance; Overheated Moto; Start
(Chattering); Phase Reversal
􀁑 For motors with service factor amp ratings between 3 and 100 amps
􀁑 The unit covers the entire range from 230 to 415 Volts
􀁑 No need to make additional turns around the CT or add external CTs
􀁑 Password Protection Option
􀁑 DIN Rail Mounting Option
􀁑 Stores fault, setting changes, and pump run-time, that can be accessed through the display
􀁑 Detachable NEMA 3R display unit can be mounted on panel door
􀁑 UL 508 Listed

c) Model number
Premium Package: 586 000 5100
Input Voltage: 400VAC
Frequency: 50Hz
Motor Service Factor Amps: 3 to 100A

d) Maximum Conductor Size through Sensors


Max. Diameter: 0.920 in. (23 mm)

e) Trip Response
Motor
Under / Overload
Under / Overvoltage 3 seconds
Overheat
Unbalance

f) Control Circuit Rating : 1.5 Amp AC, up to 600 volts

g) Signal Circuit Rating: 1 Amp AC, up to 250 volts


(Incandescent: 100 watts max.)

h) Wiring Terminals
Wire Gauge: #12 to #18 AWG
Tighten to: 4.5 in-lbs

i) Weight (Sub Monitor) 3.3 lbs/7,3 kg


j) Termination Kit 6"
This proven, sturdy solution shall be the Contractor’s choice of cable joining in temporary pump
applications or when re-usage if the drop cable is desired as the flexibility and safety it provides for
under field service conditions makes it the preferred choice over conventional, not breakable
splicing kits.

k) Double Plug Lead for Termination Kit


􀁑 3-wire
􀁑 2,5m Lead length
􀁑 With Strain relief
􀁑 Max. Current 16 Amps
􀁑 KTW approved

l) Corrosion Protection 6"


Application:
The sacrificial anode attaches to the bottom end bell of Franklin Electric 6" Super Stainless
submersible motors. Since cast iron is more chemically active than the metals that make up the
motor and pump, it is the cast iron that reacts to the corrosive elements in the water. This results in
longer motor and pump life in aggressive/corrosive water conditions.

193
m) Motor Filling Kit
This kit offers all tools for control the level of the engine filling liquid and to fill up if necessary!

n) Surge Arrestor
Application:
These surge arrestors or their equivalents are highly recommended for protecting submersible
motors from a variety of commonly occurring high voltage spikes which can damage the motor
insulation system and cause motor winding failure. These arrestors will not, as is true of any surge
protection equipment, protect the motor from a direct lightning strike.

o) Riser pipe, fittings


Rising pipe connection: not less than 1”
Riser pipe must have facility for cabling attachments
Stainless steel security cable and fittings have to be supplied
Centralizers have to be supplied and installed at every 6 m of the riser pipe

2.12 Solar modules:


The Solar modules shall be designed for optimal efficiency operation with the pump system:
- The solar modules must generate at least 50 % more Watt than the pump requires.
- Mono- or Poly-crystalline with certified performance and lifespan values;
- Nominal power rating between 85 – 340 Wp per module
- Aluminium or stainless steel frame in weather proof glass enclosure. Must accommodate anti-theft
fittings
- Modules should be dust protected
- Weather-proofed connection boxes with watertight cable entry glands, diode protection and clearly
marked polarity terminals
- Minimum markings must indicate:
• Name or trade mark of manufacturer
• Number or reference of module
• Serial number
• Rated power (Wp)
• Rated Current IMPP
- The documentation submitted with the bid shall include following information:
Country of manufacture and nearest agent / distributor and maintenance possibility

2.12.1 Modules support structure


- Solid, hot-dipped galvanized support structure consisting of on-site assembled prefabricated
components;
- Must withstand wind speeds of up to 150km/h with modules attached
- All connecting and holding-down bolts and other materials to be galvanized or of other suitable,
durable and non-corrosive material;
- The modules are to be mounted with an inclination of 15% in true south direction, or as otherwise
recommended by the supplier with recommended modifications for the conditions in South Sudan;
- All connecting cables should be weather resistant, rubber sheathed; rubber insulated and should have
flexible stranded round conductors;
- The modules shall be fixed to the support structure by means of anti-theft screws, bolts or nuts. The
tenderer is free to offer alternative solutions to enhance security.
- The support structure shall be designed in a manner that will allow an average size local person to
easily clean the modules with a minimum need for arm-extending tools. If necessary, it shall include
steps and safety devices at the higher parts of the structure;
- The modules shall be mounted preferably on top of the water tank.
194
2.11.3 Accessories:
All connecting cabling and fittings, drop cable and module support structures with all necessary
components for a complete site installation shall be delivered.

3.0 BACKGROUND AND PRECAUTIONS


Note: This SOP is to be used in conjunction with an approved SSHASP. Also, consult the SSHASP for
information on and use of all PPE.

3.1 A properly constructed well allows access to formation fluids or gases for the collection of samples and
for determining in situ characteristics. Ideally, the well should not alter the medium that is being sampled.

3.2 The following is a partial list of critical issues involved in well planning, design, and construction:
 Preventing the spread of possible contamination;
 Selecting soil-boring or rock-coring technique and hole sizes;
 Selecting casing and screen materials, including composition and dimensions;
 Determining screen-slot size, screen type, and screen interval;
 determining filter pack composition, gradation, and dimensions; and
 Choosing a grouting plan.

Refer to the site-specific documents for the location and specifications of the well to be installed. Wells
are generally installed as components of monitoring systems in accordance with Hazardous and Solid
Waste

Amendments (HSWA) and Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) guidance (EPA 1991).Well
construction, development of the wells, collection and measurement of samples, and the documentation
of data must be performed as described in this SOP.

The following steps are primarily directed at deep and intermediate depth wells (generally greater than
70m in depth) and are not necessarily requirements for hand borings or shallow boreholes.

3.2.1 Perform a site hydrogeological examination to estimate key parameters (for example, anticipated aquifer
depth and thickness, types of contaminants, geology and grain-size distribution).

3.2.2 Coordinate schedules/actions with the Project Architect (Consultants) Technical Representative (CTR)
and/or Project Leader and appropriate technical team.

3.2.3 The source(s) of any water used on site must be pre-approved by the CTR and/or Project Leader before
field operations begin. A potable, non-chlorinated source is preferred, and the source is to be documented
in the daily logs. At his discretion, the CTR may require analytical samples be collected of the water
source.

3.2.4 Any use of solvents, glues, or cleaners is prohibited unless approved in writing by the CTR and/or
Project Leader. If official permission is granted for their use, describe the material and include the
manufacturer and type (specification) (MSDS sheet must also be included). The on-site use of non-
environmentally safe and/or unapproved pipe-dope, grease, soap, or oil is also prohibited for any purpose
with the exception of machinery fuel and lubricants.

3.2.4 Monitor the borehole opening and the breathing zone as necessary according to the appropriate ER SOPs
and SSHASP. Perform readings as often as necessary to ensure the safety of workers, and record all
measurements on the appropriate data-collection forms.

4.0 RESPONSIBLE PERSONNEL


The following personnel are responsible for activities identified in this procedure.
4.1 Consultant Technical Representative (CTR)
4.2 Driller
4.3 Field Team Leader
4.4 Site Geologist
195
4.5 Contractor’s Representative

5.0 EQUIPMENT
Descriptions of commonly used pieces of equipment are listed below.
5.1 Well-Construction Supplies (Some of these items are suggestions only, and the list is not all-inclusive)
 Silica sand (i.e. 30/70, 20/40, and 8/12 grain size)
 Cement—Portland Type I, Type II or Type I/II only
 Approved water supply, preferably untreated
 Well casing, screen, cap, and bottom plug for each well, as required
 Mechanical casing centralizers, if required
 Bentonite pellets, crushed bentonite, or bentonite grout
 A 5-ft length of protective steel casing—black iron or galvanized--6-, 8-, or 10-in. in
diameter, according to needs
 Guard posts
 Locking cap
 Padlocks

5.2 Well-Construction Equipment


 Drill rig and accompanying equipment (augers, drill rods, casing, samplers, etc.)
 Tremie pipe
 Grout-mixing and pressure-pumping unit
 Support equipment for maintaining 24 hr./day operation

6.0 PROCEDURE
Note: The Contractor’s Project personnel shall be responsibility to ensure that they are trained to and
utilizing the current version of this procedure. The Engineer may be contacted if text is unclear.
Note: Deviations from SOPs are made in accordance with Standard Operating Procedure Development
and documented in accordance with QP- 5.7, Notebook Documentation for Environmental
Restoration Technical Activities.

6.1 General Well Installation Record Keeping

6.1.1 Record all fields measurements and comments on the Borehole/Well Completion Information form
(Attachment A) or the Borehole/Well Construction Field Data Log form (Attachment B). Fill out the
forms as described in the completion instructions included with each form. A Fact Summary Sheet
(Attachment C) should also be completed.

6.1.1.1 The Field Team Leader (FTL) shall consult with the UTR and/or Project Leader before modifying an
existing well design.
Any modification must be recorded in the Borehole/Well Construction Field Data Log form (Attachment
B), the Fact Summary Sheet (Attachment C) and the Daily Activity Log form (Attachment E in ER-SOP-
1.04), or a field notebook.

6.1.2 Record pertinent information on the Borehole/Well Completion Information form (Attachment A) and
the Fact Summary Sheet (Attachment C). At a minimum, record boring/well identification number,
location of boring (coordinates if available), nominal hole diameter and depth at which diameter changes,
screen location, backfill, seals, grout, cave -in, centralizers, and the height of the riser above the ground
surface. Record the actual composition of the grout, seals, and backfill on each Borehole/Well
Construction Field Data Log form (Attachment B). Include the screen slot size (in inches), slot
configuration, and screen manufacturer. Include the protective casing detail on all well sketches.

Typical well construction features for single screen and multi-screen completions are shown in
Attachments D and E. When installed as a piezometer, well point (for water levels only), or gas-vapour
monitor, the well configuration may vary significantly from these drawings.
After well development is complete, indicate the static water level on the well-construction diagram.

196
6.2 Sand Pack
A sand pack helps ensure continuous flow capability from the natural formation to the well bore. The
following is a list of instructions for using a sand pack, if required.

6.2.1 The minimum annular distance between well screen and the borehole wall is 2 inches for the ADB
Project well.

6.2.2 The specifications of the proposed sand-pack material should be approved by the FTL before use. Use
well-sorted (poorly graded) and rounded sand that is clean, inert, and siliceous and compatible with the
screen slot size in-use.

6.2.3 The average grain size of the sand is based on the grain-size distribution of the medium being monitored
in the screened formation. Use sand that has a gradation that will allow less than 10% of filter pack
material to pass through the screen slots (insert Reference).

6.2.4 Record the filter-pack size, the company from which it was purchased, and the lot number (if available)
for each installation. Be prepared to take an airtight pint size sample of filter pack material and furnished
to the UTR upon request to serve as a quality control.

6.2.5 Fill the annulus between the well screen and borehole wall with silica sand to a height 5ft above the
screened interval and 5ft below the screen if above a bentonite seal or as specified in applicable
Title I or II drawings if required. For wells greater than 30ft in depth, a tremied pipe will be used to place
the materials.

6.2.6 Ascertain the depth of the top of the sand with a measuring device with accuracy within 0.5ft and verify
the thickness of the sand pack. Measurements must be repeatable. If necessary, add more sand to bring
the top of the sand pack to the proper elevation.

6.2.7 Under no circumstances should the sand pack extend into any aquifer other than the one to be monitored.
In most cases, the well design can be modified to allow for a sufficient sand pack without the threat of
cross flow between producing zones.

6.2.8 If specified in the project documents, partial development of the sand pack may be required (to help settle
sand pack) before installation of bentonite seal and grout.

6.2.9 In the event that a predominantly fine-grained, water-bearing unit is encountered, it may be desirable to
construct a monitor well that uses a factory-manufactured screen and filter prepacks assembly. Various
sand-pack gradations are available. The prepacked screen subassembly is attached to the solid well casing
(riser) in the same manner as a conventional screen. The fine-grained formation materials are allowed to
collapse against the prepacked well screen.
Prepacked well screens have larger OD’s which must be considered when calculating backfill.

6.2.10 Centralizers will be placed above and below each screen or as specified in Title I design documents.
Generally, no less than one every 50ft for the uniform and complete annular filling by granular backfill,
seal, and grout materials. Centralizers may be required at 10ft intervals or less when installing angle
holes. In some cases, such as very shallow wells and where tremie-pipe placement of materials is done
through pipes or augers, the spacing of centralizers can be expanded or eliminated entirely. Fasten
centralizers to the well casing and radially space them at 120° or 90° intervals.

6.3 INTERMEDIATE BENTONITE SEAL


The following steps outline the use of an intermediate bentonite seal from the top of the sand pack to 2ft
above.
6.3.1 Before placing the bentonite seal, be sure the filter pack has settled by measuring the depth of the top of
the sand with the tremie pipe or a measuring device with accuracy within 0.5ft. The sand pack should rise
to a depth of 5ft above the top of the screen.
6.3.2 In media that will not maintain an open hole, leave the casing or the hollow-stem augers in the hole
during filter-pack placement and bentonite-seal placement to the extent practical. Maintain the bentonite
197
in the casing/auger a small distance (1 to 2ft) above the bottom of the casing/auger for even placement, as
the casing/augers are removed. Special attention should be given to the amount of fill material if this
procedure is followed due to the risk of bridging in saturated conditions.

6.3.3 Visually check the condition of the bentonite backfill material before pumping it into the hole by
pumping a sample into a bucket. Retract the tremie pipe 3ft from the top of the sand pack and begin
pumping.

6.3.4 Place a bentonite-chip or -pellet seal above the sand pack and below the annular well seal to prevent
infiltration of cement into the filter pack and the well. Hydrate the bentonite seal and wait a minimum of
4 hrs. before adding a slurry grout
Note: Use bentonite chips, bentonite pellets, or crushed, granular bentonite. The pellets should have a
minimum purity of 90% montmorillonite clay and a minimum dry bulk density of 75lb/ft3. No
bentonite will be placed into the well bore—place a cap over the top of the well casing before
pouring the bentonite pellets.

6.3.5 In special circumstances, an open borehole may be drilled to a depth below where the screen is set. If
grout is used to seal off a lower aquifer or as backfill up to the proper level, place a bentonite seal above
the grout and hydrate for 4 hrs. before the casing, screen, and sand pack are introduced. Allow the grout
to set up for a minimum of 24 hrs. before placing the bentonite seal. Place 5ft of sand pack between this
grout and the well screen. Place the bentonite seal in the borehole as described below. The minimum
width for the annular well seal (between casing and borehole) is
2in. for the ADB Project well

6.3.6 For wells that are 30ft. or less in depth:

6.3.6.1 Pour the bentonite directly down the annulus. Pour the pellets from different points around the casing to
ensure even application. A tremie pipe may be used to redistribute and level the top of the seal.

6.3.6.2 Fill the annulus between the well casing and borehole above the filter pack with a bentonite seal at least
2ft thick (vertically); hydrate and wait 12 hrs.
6.3.7 For wells deeper than 30ft:
The bentonite backfill material can be pumped or poured through a tremie pipe. The FTL shall determine
the method after evaluating the condition of the borehole walls. If there are no centralizers in the upper
portions of the casing, manipulate the casing to prevent pellets from hanging up in the narrow annulus
and to allow them to settle to the bottom as rapidly as possible.

6.3.8 Measure the distance to the top of the seal with an acceptable measuring device to verify that the proper
thickness of seal has been placed in the annulus.

6.3.9 Until the proper thickness of bentonite has been placed in the well annulus, repeat the application and
verification.

6.4 ANNULAR WELL SEAL


6.4.1 For placement of dry product annular backfill materials in intermediate and deep wells, refer to to
complete backfilling procedures.
6.4.2 If a cement-grout annular seal is to be installed, use only Portland Type I, Type II or Type I/II cement.
The grout must be mixed thoroughly with 2% to 5% bentonite powder to produce a non-shrinking seal.
The cement must be mechanically mixed thoroughly before it is pumped into the borehole.

6.4.3 If slurry of bentonite is used as an annular seal, prepare the slurry by mixing powdered or granular
bentonite with pre-approved potable water according to manufacturer specifications. The slurry should be
of sufficiently high specific gravity and viscosity to prevent movement of the overlying grout into the
saturated zone. Pellets may be added to solidify the surface of the bentonite slurry in order to prevent
cement intrusion.

6.4.4 In some cases a dry mixture of fine sand, silica flour, and bentonite powder or a mixture of cuttings,
sandy clay, or tight soil may be used where the fill material will have less permeability than the
198
formation. In general the cuttings cannot be easily emplaced because of screening and/or compacting
problems. Cuttings mixed with dry bentonite can be used for abandonment purposes.

6.5 SURFACE WELL SEALS MINIMUM DEPTH AND WIDTH:


The minimum depth of an annular well seal above the fill is 10ft. The minimum width of the annular seal
is 2inches. Allow a minimum of 12hrs. (HSWA requirement) after a bentonite-slurry seal has been
placed, then place cement grout from the top of the bentonite seal to the surface. Use grouts as specified
in project documents. Place grout in the annulus of the wells as described below.

6.5.1 Fill the annulus between the well casing and borehole wall with cement grout.

6.5.2 On all wells 30ft deep or deeper, pump the cement grout through the tremie pipe to the bottom of the
open annulus until undiluted grout flows from the annulus at the ground surface.
Note: The cement grout should consist of a mix of cement (Portland Type I, Type II, or Type I/II) and
2% to 5% bentonite mix. Use only grout mixed with pre-approved water.

6.5.3 When drilling in materials that will not maintain an open hole, leave the hollow-stem auger or temporary
casing in the hole during grouting to the extent practical. Remove them as the level of the grout rises
above the bottom of the auger.

6.5.4 If necessary, add more grout to compensate for the removed casing or auger and tremie pipe and to
ensure that the top of the grout is at or above the ground surface.

6.5.5 The protective casing should now be placed over the well casing.

6.5.6 After the grout has set (about 24 hrs.), fill any depression in the grout caused by settlement with a grout
mix similar to that previously described.

6.6 PLACEMENT OF DRY PRODUCT ANNULAR BACKFILL MATERIALS (INTERMEDIATE


AND DEEP WELLS)

6.6.1 The driller shall place all annular fill materials (dry products only) through a tremie pipe maintaining a
10ft minimum buffer between the targeted backfill depth and the bottom of the tremie pipe.

6.6.2 Both the driller and the site geologist shall in accordance with QP- 5.7, Notebook Documentation for
Environmental Restoration Technical Activities, record in logbook accurate tallies of tremie pipe and
drill casing to ensure that the exact depths are known at all times.

6.6.3 Both the driller and the site geologist shall, on a scheduled basis, compare their tremie pipe and drill
casing tallies to ensure they are in agreement. In the event they are not in agreement, backfilling activities
will be suspended until an acceptable resolution is attained and the depths can be verified to the
satisfaction of both parties.

6.6.4 The driller shall use potable water (municipal supply) as a transport fluid to carry dry materials such as
bentonite pellets and silica sand down the tremie to the desired depth. A polymer such as EZ-MUD,
approved by the CTR, may be added to the transport fluid to delay hydration of bentonite chips or pellets
in deeper applications. This will reduce the potential for swelling within the tremie pipe which commonly
results in plugging.

6.6.5 If a polymer solution is used, the driller must flush the tremie with one volume of the tremie rod with
clear water prior to filter pack sand emplacement
6.6.6 The driller shall record in a field notebook the quantities of water and additives used during the
placement of annular backfill material.

6.6.7 The driller shall use silica sand that meets the specifications in the Title II design drawing (typically
fine-grained 30/70 and 20/40 grade) for filter packs and transition zones between filter packs and
bentonite seals.

199
6.6.8 Fine-grained sands (30/70, 20/40 grade) shall be allowed to settle for 15 to 30 minutes after the pour is
completed before sounding the depth.

6.6.9 If the sand level is low, the driller shall allow an additional 15 to 30 minutes for the sand to settle and
then re-sound the sand level.
Note: Sands with grades greater than 20/40 can be expected to settle more rapidly and typically can be
measured immediately after emplacement.

6.7 DRILL CASING RETRACTION DURING BACKFILL OPERATIONS (FOR INTERMEDIATE


AND DEEP WELLS)
6.7.1 The driller shall retract the drill casing in stages as backfill materials are emplaced to avoid borehole
collapse in potentially unstable formations.

6.7.2 The driller shall maintain a 10ft minimum buffer between the targeted backfill depth and the bottom of
the drill casing to prevent backfill from getting between well casing and drill casing. This may result in
sand locking the casings or smearing bentonite across well screens

6.7.3 The driller shall determine the length of drill casing to be retracted between pours based on borehole
stability, the size of the batch to be poured, and casing stickup in the rig table. The site geologist shall
provide borehole stability information to the driller based on site stratigraphic, geophysical logging data,
and video logs if available.
For large intervals of backfill in stable formations, it may be acceptable to pull 100 or more feet of casing
followed by one large or several small batches of backfill. In unstable formations, casing should be
retracted at shorter intervals of 20 to 40ft, followed by small batches of backfill, to minimize borehole
caving into the annular space. Cave-ins may result in damage to the well casing and screens,
displacement of annular fill materials, and may compromise the integrity of annular seals.

6.8 VOLUME CALCULATIONS


6.8.1 Both the driller and the site geologist shall make volume calculations of all materials introduced into the
borehole prior to emplacement. Backfilling should not proceed until the calculated volumes are in
agreement.

6.8.2 Both the driller and the site geologist shall ensure that the calculated volume for the interval to be filled
is not exceeded regardless of the character of the formation.

6.8.3 The driller shall take extreme care when backfilling with bentonite below a screened section of the well
casing to prevent impact to the screen.

6.8.4 The driller shall ensure the target depth for standard batches of bentonite are at a minimum 20ft below
the bottom of the screen. The driller shall ensure that the remainder of the bentonite interval below the
screen is poured in small batches calculated to raise the level in the annulus by 2 to 3ft per batch.

6.8.5 The driller shall sound (measure) the bentonite after each batch until the desired depth is reached. The
bentonite shall be allowed to hydrate for a minimum of 30 minutes before installing silica sand.
Note: The volume of the annular space can be determined by subtracting the volume displaced by the
well casing (outside diameter) from the total borehole volume. The borehole volume and casing
displacement is determined using drilling reference tables or the formula for the volume of a
cylinder (V= r2h). Annular space volume (Va) is determined using
Va = Vt-Vc; where a = annulus, t = total, and c = casing.

6.8.6 The driller or the site geologist shall perform calculations for each batch. All calculations shall be
recorded in the field logbook.

6.9 SOUNDING BACKFILL DEPTHS (FOR INTERMEDIATE AND DEEP WELLS)


6.9.1 The driller shall sound the depth to the top of the fill material using a mechanical (weighted tape/wire
line) or electronic sounding device. The site geologist shall oversee and concur with each measurement
before recording the depth in the logbook and Title II drawing. The sounding line shall be run through a
200
sheave suspended over the borehole and lowered through the tremie pipe. Care should be taken to avoid
entanglement of the sounding line in the well casing centralizers. The driller and site geologist shall
maintain cognizance of centralizer locations relative to the tremie pipe at all times.

6.9.2 If a mechanical sounding line is used (weighted tape or wire line), the driller will carefully monitor the
tension on the wire or tape as the weight nears the depth where the fill is calculated to be. When an
electronic sounder is used, the driller shall carefully monitor the cable-counter and slow the sounder
winch as it approaches the calculated depth of the fill.

6.9.3 Once the sounding device tags bottom, the driller will verify the measurement by repeating the
measurement process two times with the same result, or within five tenths of a foot (+/-0.5ft). The site
geologist shall then record the confirmed measurement in the field logbook to the nearest tenth of a foot
(0.1ft).
Note: Measurements read from a cable counter or graduated tape must be adjusted to account for the
length of the weight on the end of the wire or tape. The height of the tremie pipe stickup (above
ground level) must be subtracted from the each measurement when referencing depths below
ground level.

6.9.4 In the event that the calculated depth and the measured depth are significantly different, the driller and
site geologist shall evaluate the difference and resolve any non-conformance(s). The driller and site
geologist shall review the casing and centralizer configuration in the Title II well design drawing to
ensure that a well-casing centralizer is not inadvertently being tagged. If the fill is lower than expected,
the geophysical logs, the video logs, and the drillers’ logs shall be reviewed to determine if voids or
fractures are present in the subject interval.

6.9.4.1 If the non-conformance renders the condition of the well unacceptable or indeterminate, the
Non-conformance shall be resolved in accordance with QP-3.4, Managing Non-conformance’s,
Deficiencies and Corrective Actions before continuing backfill operations.

7.10 INSTALLING PROTECTIVE CASING AROUND MONITOR WELL THE MINIMUM


ELEMENTS IN THE PROTECTION DESIGN INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:
7.10.1 The protective steel casing and locking cap should be weatherproof. The locking cap should be secured to
the casing by padlocks.

7.10.2 Set the protective casing (5ft minimum length) so that the top of the pipe is about 1.5 to 3ft above the
ground surface and grout it in place as shown in Attachments D and E.
7.10.3 Use 8-in.-diameter pipe for 4-in. well, 6-in.-diameter pipe for 2-in. well and 10-in diameter pipe for 5-in.
well (depending on approved borehole size). A drain hole near ground level that is 0.5-in. in diameter is
permitted.

7.10.4 Mark the location ID on the inside and outside of the cover with indelible ink, metal punch lettering kit,
or by writing with an arc welding machine/rod.

7.10.5 Form and pour the concrete protective pad around the protective steel casing. Pad dimensions will not be
less than 2ft × 2ft × 0.5ft.

The concrete pad should be sloped away from the casing for positive drainage. The standard regional
well pad configuration and design is shown in Attachment E. The brass monument shall be placed into
the concrete in the northwest corner of the pad, approximately 12 inches from the edges of the concrete.
Location and elevation coordinates and the FIMAD location I.D. number shall be clearly imprinted in the
monument.

7.11 RECORDING WELL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS


7.11.1 The driller and site geologist shall keep an accurate record of all well construction materials in the site
logbook. The records shall include at minimum the following:
 Type of material,

201
 Manufacturer name and address,
 Batch or control number,
 Calculations showing estimated volume of material placed during each lift
 Number of packages of each product used in each interval/lift,
 Size of individual packages,
 Volume and composition of transport fluids,
 Condition of materials and packaging; and
 Any other potentially valuable information.

7.11.2 After completing a unit of backfill (i.e. filter pack interval), the site geologist shall make and record a
comparison between the calculated and actual volumes of material required in the field logbook. Methods
of installation shall also be described and recorded in the field logbook.

7.12 DOCUMENTING THE FINAL WELL CONFIGURATION


7.12.1 The site geologist shall record the final measured depth of each complete unit of annular fill on the most
recently approved Title II well design drawing and in the field logbook.

7.12.2 The site geologist shall record all observations made during backfilling and depth sounding in the field
logbook.

7.12.3 Observations should include at a minimum the following:


 Differences in the design-specified and as-built fill levels of each unit of annular fill,
 Anomalous depth measurements,
 An evaluation of any problems encountered and the final resolutions, and
 Any other information or observations that may be useful in assessing the quality of the
installation.

8. WORKS
8.1. Concrete Works
8.1.1 Materials
Materials for construction works has to comply with following specifications:
Cement: Portland cement to British Standard BS 12
Reinforcement: Bars, Plain - Reference R. to British Standard BS 4449,
Deformed, Reference T to British Standard BS 4449, Fabric to BS 4443
Sand, coarse: Clean, free from lime, clay and any organic substance, less than 5 mm
Coarse aggregate: Clean, free from lime, clay and any organic substance, passing 20 mm sieve

The quantity of all materials required has to be included by the Contractor in the respective items of the
Bill of Quantity.

8.1.1.1 Cement
The cement to be used shall be normal Portland cement which conforms to British Standard BS 12 or
equivalent.
The Contractor shall keep the cement in a dry place above the ground. The Engineer shall be able to enter
into the cement store of the Contractor and check the cement storage conditions. Any deteriorated cement
sacks, shall be removed and the expenses therefore shall be covered by the Contractor.

8.1.1.2 Aggregates
The aggregates to be used for concrete shall comply with the relevant British Standards.

Fine fractions shall be used from natural sand. It shall be clean and with diameter less than 5 mm,
uniformly distributed. The addition of sand produced by crushing to natural sand shall be allowed only

202
with the permission of the Engineer, when he considers this addition as necessary for the improvement of
granular size. The maximum content of clays, silts and powders shall not exceed 3 % of the weight

Large fractions shall not be larger than 20 mm.

8.1.1.3 Water
Water used in the work shall be from a source approved by the Engineer or his representative. It shall be
free from oil, acid, alkali and any vegetable or organic matter which is harmful to any material with
which it is used. Where available, a drinking water supply shall be used.

Additive to Concrete
The concrete used in the work shall be a homogeneous mixture of Portland cement, coarse sand, coarse
aggregate and water.

If any additive is included in the concrete mixture, they shall comply with the following requirements:
a) No reduction of the concrete strength;
b) No change of the proportion of cement with fillers
c) No corrosion of the steel bars
d) Not causing the reaction of ”alkaline-fillers”
e) The dosage has to comply with the technical specification of the additive.
The class of concrete to be used in each structure or part thereof shall be as detailed on the drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer. The constituents of 1 m3 of each class of concrete shall be:
Class A Class B Class C
Weight of cement (s) kg 250 300 350
Weight of sand, coarse (s): kg 760 700 650
Weight of coarse aggregate (a): kg 1150 1170 1180
Water approximate: kg 175 175 175
2
Crushing strength, 28 days N/mm 10 20 25
Nominal volumetric proportion: c:s:a 1:2:5:5 1:2:4:1 1:6:3:2
Only sufficient water shall be added during mixing of the constituents to form concrete having sufficient
workability to enable it to be well consolidated to be worked into the corners of the formwork to give the
specified surface finish and specified strength.

8.1.2 TRIAL MIX AND TESTING OF CONCRETE


The Contractor shall not start preparation of concrete, without first testing a sample of concrete in
advance according to the mix design for the type of concrete desired.

The Contractor shall prepare all samples for any type of concrete with the same equipment and with the
same materials that he uses for preparation of the production concrete. He shall inform the Engineer 24
hours in advance of these tests so that he may participate in taking the samples

Every batch of concrete shall be tested for slump at the place of deposit in the presence of the Engineer or
his representative. The contractor shall provide slump cones at every place of mixing and deposit. The
maximum allowable slump shall be 15 mm. The contractor shall include the costs in his rates.

8.1.3 STEEL FOR REINFORCEMENT


Diameter, shape, strength properties and identification of the steel (ribbed steel min. 420/500 N/mm²)
should be according to BS4483.
If requested the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the certificate of the factory, which has supplied
the steel.

203
All for the installation of the whole construction necessary reinforcement works incl. delivery, cutting,
buckling, laying and the necessary connections to reinforcement have to be included in the BoQ as well
as cutting losses, reinforcement spacer, S-hooks etc.

The connections between construction walls, ceilings and intermediate floor have to be executed in a
way, that they are permanently waterproof and the conditions for the crack width control can be kept.

8.1.3.1 Steel Bar Bending


The steel shall be cut and bent in accordance with drawings and tables to be delivered by the contractor
approved by the Engineer. It shall be bent in a cool state and with the suitable equipment.

8.1.3.2 Placing of Steel Reinforcement for Concrete


Before application, the steel has to be released from constituents, which can affect the composite, e. g.
dirt, grease, ice and loose rust.

The steel to be placed in concrete shall be clean, not damaged, not corroded and without other matter
which prevent its connection to the concrete. The steel bars shall be connected with one another with the
required overlapping to be proved by the contractor. The steel shall be placed in conformity with the
design, and shall not be moved during the concrete placement. The welding, of spacers or connections
shall be approved by the Engineer. Spacers shall be of the same quality as those of the completed
concrete. The steel bars need to be covered with concrete at minimum 3 cm.

The Constructor has to co-ordinate the reinforcement approval with the local site management.

The approval of the reinforcement works is absolutely necessary before concrete placement and shall be
carried out by the Engineer.

8.1.4 TRANSPORTING, PLACING AND COMPACTING OF CONCRETE


The contractor shall notify the Engineer when concreting is about to start on each section of the work. No
concrete shall be placed until the Engineer has approved the formwork.

Concrete shall be so handled that at the point of deposition it is of the specified quality and approved
consistency, nothing having been added to it or lost from it since leaving the mixer.
Concreting shall be carried out continuously to the positions of joints prepared prior to starting.
The compression of concrete shall be done by mechanical vibrators of the type approved by the Engineer
and the contractor has to be sure that enough vibration equipment is on site.

The Contractor shall have spare vibrators in case of failure or defects of any of them.
Shuttering shall be such as to guarantee the profile and surface required by the concrete works and such
as to preserve the rigidity during the casting of concrete. They shall comply with direction, form and size
of concrete according to the design or to the instruction of the Engineer For major works, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer the drawing of the shuttering.
The joints of the shuttering are to be such as not to weaken the mark of concrete, not to prevent its
vibration, when they are removed, nor to damage the concrete or its outer appearance. The shuttering
shall be very clean. The plastering of defective surfaces of concrete is not allowed.

Before beginning with the assembling the shuttering are checked and cleaned carefully. All the surfaces
of the shuttering, which are in contact with the concrete shall be painted with a solution approved by a
laboratory accepted by the Employer to avoid the sticking of concrete. This solution shall be carefully
used, to avoid the pollution of iron bars and previous concrete. The shuttering shall be removed only as

204
ordered by the Engineer and their removal shall be carried out by a competent specialist in order not to
damage the concrete. The cost for shuttering shall be included in the concrete price.

8.1.5 CURING AND MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE


As long as the concrete is not hardened, it shall be protected from the damaging effects of wind, sun, rain,
high temperatures, or aggressive water. The concrete shall be cured by keeping it in humid conditions.
The exposed sides shall be covered and kept wet by means approved by the Project Architect

8.1.6 Repair to Concrete


The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer all the means to inspect the works during the
execution or after the completion and to make quality tests according to the standards or specifications.
The concrete shall be repaired using a method approved by the Engineer or removed completely when he
considers it necessary. The repairs shall not be considered as a justification for the extension of working
time. Any material resulting as waste from the repairs shall be removed from the site at the expense of the
Contractor.

8.1.7 Concreting in unfavourable weather


The contractor shall not place concrete in permanent work:
(a) During heavy rains or dust storms
(b) When the air temperature is more than 30°C.
When the air temperature exceeds 30°C, the contractor shall not place concrete in the permanent work
without taking such precautions as may be required to keep the temperature of the concrete during mixing
and setting below 38°C (e.g. keeping the concrete materials and formwork shaded from the sun, and the
aggregate and formwork sprayed with water)
Concrete shall not be poured against formwork which is hotter than 30°C without the approval of the
Project Architect

9.0 BOREHOLE DRILLING


9.1 Drilling of boreholes includes following works:
• Survey of location
• Drilling of borehole, including development of borehole, pump and water quality test
• Proper sealing of borehole in case of dry boreholes
• Mobilization and demobilization
Successfully drilled boreholes have to be equipped with submersible pump.
A concrete platform has to be constructed and the borehole has to be fenced. For some locations cattle
troughs for combined systems (for human beings and cattle) have to be constructed, if instructed by the
Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide all labor, transport, plant, tools, equipment and materials and appurtenances,
and shall perform all Works necessary to satisfactorily locate sites for drilling, construct and complete
successfully drilled boreholes including lowering of borehole assembly with PVC casing and Screen and
end cap, gravel pack at appropriate intervals and back fill, close near surface water table aquifer, cleaning
and development of said boreholes, pump test for 6 hours, chlorinate borehole, construct a platform and
drainage, fence the borehole area.
The Contractor shall employ only competent workmen for the execution of the Works, and all such
Works shall be performed under direct supervision of an expert driller/site supervisor.

205
9.2 Drilling Team
9.2.1 Inventory of Drilling Equipment and Materials
The Contractor shall specify in the Schedule of Drilling Equipment, borehole development and other
accessory equipment, its type and capacity that is to be used to undertake this work. Its capacity shall be
sufficient to cope with the Works as stated in the Contract. It shall at all times be kept in full working
order and good repair.
Prior to the commencement of the work the Employer or his representative shall have the right to inspect
the drilling and the pumping test units of the contractor. The Employer or his representative shall also
have the right to carry out a detail inventory of the materials to be supplied by the contractor (equipment,
materials, drilling tools, compressor, welding plant, casing and screens, pumps, generators, etc.)

If the Employer considers that the drilling equipment or any accessories in use on the site of the Works is
in any way unsuitable, inefficient or inadequate in capacity, the Employer shall have the right to call
upon the Contractor to put such equipment in good order within fourteen days or alternatively to remove
such plant and replace it with additional plant or equipment which the Employer considers necessary to
meet the requirements of the Contract. In the event that this requirement of the Contract is not satisfied,
the Client reserves the right to terminate the Contract immediately.
No extra payment shall be made for the Contractor's change of drilling equipment, labor or other
equipment required to complete the Works specified, nor for any incidentals thereto, the cost being
deemed to be included in the schedule of rates.

9.2.2 Drilling Unit


The drilling unit has to comprise of the following:
• Qualified drilling crew, including a Chief Driller and Chief Mechanic
• A standard rotary drilling rig for shallow and deep well drilling
• Drilling tools accessories and relevant equipment
• A compressor
• A welding plant
• Supply truck and light vehicle
• Water tank
• Necessary casings, screens, and other construction materials.

9.2.3 Pumping Test Unit


The pump test unit has to comprise of the following:
• Experienced pumping test crew
• For deep boreholes, submersible pump which can deliver 40-100 litters per second at a 100 meter
head.
• Diesel powered generator of appropriate capacity that can run the pump.
• All the necessary equipment, tools and accessories which are necessary to carry out pumping test
operation.

9.2.4 Identification number


The contractor will receive identification number by the Engineer for the boreholes contracted. The
identification number of the borehole should be punched on the pump body and on the pump platform

9.2.5 Site Selection


After contract signing the Contractor will receive approval from the Project Architect to commence work.
The Contractor shall be responsible to carry out a survey (either by geophysical / geological or
hydrogeological methods) to confirm the technical feasibility of drilling a successful borehole(s).

206
Special care must be taken to ensure that the sites chosen are at least 50 meters away from toilet pits or
any other sources of pollution such as garbage pits, sewerage tanks or spills / over flow from pipes.

9.3 DRILLING RECORDS


9.3.1 WORK-ON-SITE JOURNAL
The Contractor shall maintain a work-on-site journal in which all the information concerning the works is
recorded, a copy of which shall be delivered to the Engineer or his representative. The information to be
recorded by the drilling unit includes:
Well Log of Drilling Unit

Drilling cuttings from the borehole shall be collected and handled in a manner that they can easily be
identified. Samples shall be taken at 2 meter intervals. The samples shall be placed in sample bags or
boxes.

The driller shall log the samples and keeps a record on a daily log sheet including:
• Lithology
• Degree of consolidation or hardness
• If unconsolidated, nature of ground material, i.e. subjective description of grain size, degree of
rounding, clay content, colour.
In addition the Contractor shall prepare a representative sample of every distinct horizon or change of
rock type.

Daily Record of Pumping Test Unit


• Site name (name of village)
• Site location - GPS coordinates (± 20m)
• Borehole identification number
• Name of all crew members
• make, model, capacity of the test pump and generator
• Types of work performed and the duration for each type of work
• The static water level
• Pump position during testing
• Total time of the pumping test
• Total stand-by time
• Total shutdown time
• Total time on site
• Problems encountered and other noteworthy information.

9.3.2 FINAL REPORT (Well Completion Report)


After completing construction and pumping testing, the Contractor shall prepare a final technical report
for each well, in English, which must be submitted with the Contractor’s fee claim. The report should
include the following information:
• Site name
• Site location - GPS coordinates (± 20m)
• Borehole identification number
• Make, model, type and size of the rig
• Time and date of arrival and departure of the rig
• Number of kilometres indicated on the rig’s odometer at arrival and departure
• Time and date of the start and stop of drilling
• Compressor time for drilling, pump testing, and development
• Total shut down time (hours) due to breakdowns
207
• Total standby time (hours)
• Total drilling time (hours)
• Total development time (hours)
• Total time (days) rig on site
• Summary of logging results showing geologic strata and aquifer
• Static and dynamic water table
• Drilling diameter, depth, and position of casing, screens and grout
• Equipment and instruments used for the pumping test
• Data collection sheets of the pumping test and remarks about data acquisition
• The plotted graphs of the pumping test
• Summary of the analytical methods, calculations, and interpretation of the pumping test.
• Proposed pump placement
• Summary of observations, problems encountered, and recommendations
• Digital photos from the borehole site have to be taken and attached to the final report (photos must
indicate date and time):
(i) One taken before start of construction activities and
(ii) another one after completion of works (showing the borehole and punched borehole
identification number)
9.3.3 HYDRO GEOLOGICAL CONDITIONS
Hydro geological information can be obtained from the ‘Technical Guidelines and Manual for Borehole
with a Hand pump’ (UNICEF / MWR).

It should be clear that this information does not hold the Employer responsible for any locally different
conditions at the specific drilling site or for the particular problems the contractor may face while
executing his work.

The contractor will be responsible for carrying out hydro geological investigations at the sites selected for
SWDS.

9.3.4 BOREHOLE CONSTRUCTION


9.3.4.1 Borehole Design
General consideration in borehole designs can be obtained from the ‘Technical Guidelines and Manual
for Borehole with a Hand pump’ (UNICEF / MWR)

In addition the following considerations should be looked at when designing a borehole with a
submersible pump:
• The expected depth of the well shall be determined according to the hydrogeological structure of the
area where the well is needed to be drilled. Therefore the drilling method to be employed should be
identified and decided in order to achieve the required depth of the well.
• An apron/platform should be cast around the top of the lining (at least 1 m radius).
• Submersible pump specifications should be suitable to fit to the quality of water in the borehole.
• The screen should be properly positioned as per the attached designs in the Drawings.
• Disinfection of the borehole is required prior to commissioning of the water supply system.
Communities need to be informed about this as there might be unsubstantiated flow of information in
regard to disinfections (chlorination of water).
• Surface water diversion ditches should be provided to protect against inundation.

208
9.3.4.2 Drilling Rigs
In general drilling of a borehole can be executed by Rotary Drilling.

Rigs shall have air and water/mud flush facilities for drilling through the over burden and down the hole
hammer facilities for drilling in hard rock. The rig shall have sufficient working casings to drill through
the various rock types, and accessories needed for reaming, fishing, well development, pump testing, etc.
Rigs shall be able to drill up to 150 meters deep.

The flushing medium shall be air, water or stable foam. If, at any stage mud is necessary either as a
primary fluid or as an additive to create “stiff foam”, only degradable high quality polymer will be
acceptable. Bentonites are specifically prohibited.

9.3.4.3 Drilling Diameter


A minimum diameter of 8” (inches) at the completion of the borehole and installed with 6” casings and
screens is required above and below the water-conducting layer in order to install a submersible pump
with a diameter of 3 inches.
The Engineer or his representative shall determine the final drilling depth, based on the desired yield and
site specific geological and hydrogeological conditions. The Contractor shall require the Engineer’s
approval to abandon unsuccessful boreholes and initiate drilling at an alternate location.

The Employer will not be responsible for any loss of temporary casing which the contractor is unable to
pull out or lost due to snapping or breaking from the completed boreholes.

9.3.4.4 Soil Definition


Soft soil refers to soil of poor volume stability and low strength and may be composed of loose sands and
silts, wet clays, organic soils, or combination of these materials.
Hard rock refers to soil what must be crushed or hammered using specialized mechanical equipment.

For the purpose of these tender invitation formations which can be drilled using the conventional drilling
methods such as driving, jetting auger drilling, kludging rotary drilling techniques such as direct or
reverse fluid circulation rotary drilling, air circulation rotary drilling or such other techniques shall not be
considered as hard rock. The contractor shall notify the Engineer or his representative whenever he
encounters drilling formation which in his opinion may be classified as hard rock. The Engineer’s
decision on the classification of formation drilled material shall be final.

9.3.4.5 Borehole construction


The final borehole shall be of the following type, depending on the lithology and formations:
Type A - open hole in stable rock or formation, unscreened with plain casing through the overburden
only
1) Percussion, air rotary or mud rotary through overburden (alluvial, laterite, weathered or soft bedrock),
minimum final drilling diameter is 8" in overburden.
2) Percussion or rotary/percussion ("down the hole hammer"), using stabilizers (foam) where necessary,
in consolidated hard rock; minimum final diameter is 6"
3) Boreholes should be drilled at least 6 meters below any water bearing fractures to allow sufficient
space for a sedimentation sump.
4) Fractured bedrock considered not collapsing and left open
5) Installation of casing for overburden: minimum diameter 6”, sealing of casing with grouting, back-
filling, cementation of top 5 meters.

209
Type B - protected borehole in collapsing rocks in fractured or broken bedrock encountered in otherwise
stable formations, as above with slotted casing for formation support and plain casing extended to the
bottom.
1) Percussion, air rotary or mud rotary through overburden (alluvial, laterite, weathered or soft bedrock),
minimum final drilling diameter is 8" in overburden.
2) Down the hole hammer in consolidated hard rock, minimum final diameter is 6"
3) Fractured bedrock - water-bearing - considered to be collapsing and needs to be protected with
casing/screen (minimum inner diameter 6"
4) If necessary to prevent collapsing of overburden, installation of casing minimum diameter 6", sealing
of casing with grouting, backfilling, cementation of top 5 meters.
5) Installation of casing for overburden: minimum diameter 6", sealing of casing with grouting, back-
filling, cementation of top 5 meters.

Type C – Screened boreholes


In unconsolidated sediments, soft or very broken bedrock, supported by casing and screen, installed with
filter pack: C1 = formation filter, C2 = artificial gravel pack (sieved)

Type C1 - Screened borehole with formation filter


If a formation is not uniform and well sorted, a screen with a properly chosen slot size will result in a
natural development of a formation filter, close to the screen. This technique should be avoided because
of some required conditions not met in the context of South Sudan: a) a wide range of slots or screens is
not available to the contractors, b) sieve analyses of aquifers cannot be carried out at the moment.

Type C2 - Screened borehole with artificial gravel pack


1) Percussion, air rotary or mud rotary through alluvial or unconsolidated rocks, minimum final drilling
diameter is 8".
2) A minimum annular space of 1-2" between casing and borehole walls is required for gravel pack
installation.
3) Installation of screen or slotted casing with minimum inner diameter 6"
4) Installations of gravel pack at least 3 meters above the top of the first screen, topped with a one
meter clay seal, with backfilling material and cementation of the top 5 meters.

9.3.4.6 Bottom of the borehole


Boreholes should be drilled at least 6 meters below any water bearing layers or fractures to allow
sufficient space for sump. As far as possible, boreholes shall be drilled into the underlying bedrock or, if
the depth to the bedrock is too deep, drilling should stop in an impervious formation underlying the
aquifer - a clay layer for example.

The bottom of the hole acts as a sedimentation sump and a support for the casing and screen. The sump
shall be a bottom plain casing of at least 1.5 meter length - 3 meters recommended - with the same
diameter as the screen, and with its underside sealed with a bottom plug (wooden or PVC).

9.3.4.7 Casing Pipe and Sand Trap:


The boreholes shall be fully cased up to bottom of the borehole. The threads both male and female shall
be properly cleaned with a brush and cloth before they are joined. If the pipes used are with bell and
socket, these shall be cleaned using fluids and cemented with recommended solvent cement by the
manufacturers of the casing pipes and screen. Before lowering into the borehole the recommended time
for the joint set firmly has to be taken into consideration.

210
All necessary precautions during the transportation and storage of casing pipes to the drilling site have to
be taken to prevent distortions, bending or deformation of the pipe that could result in eccentricity along
the length of the pipe.

Pipes and screens must be stored on a proper location and should be kept away from prolonged sunlight
exposure

9.3.4.8 Screen
Screen design shall be determined in order to avoid drawdown of the water level into the screened section
of the well or below the first water strike in the water-bearing layers.

The screen should normally be installed within the coarsest section provided that the calculated pumping
drawdown does not reach below the top of the screen or below the main water strike.
Screening design
Notwithstanding the above, normally only the lowest 2/3 of the saturated strata (or parts thereof) should
be screened.

The length and position of the screened section affects the yield of the borehole. When the nature of the
aquifer is well identified, the screened section shall be designed conformably to the nature and
hydrostatic pressure in the aquifer.
A first minor water strike shall be sealed off with plain casing if it can be estimated that pumping will
lead to dewatering of the water strike.

Casings and screens shall have the same inner diameter and wall thickness.

The quality and standard of the casing and screens shall be in accordance with the standards set by the
American Petroleum Institute or the American Soil Testing and Materials Association or any other
international acceptable Institute.
Screen shall have a slot size of 0.75 mm to 2 mm depending on the aquifer material, as determined by the
Engineer. The open area of the screens shall be at least 30% of the surface area of the pipe, and maximum
entry velocity shall not exceed 0.03 m/sec.
Slots, which are prepared by using hacksaw, welding or oxy-acetylene, are not allowed.

Damaged and deformed casings and screens will not be accepted for installation.
Centralizers of suitable size (certified by the Engineer) shall be fitted to both casings and screens at 6m
intervals.
A 1-inch ID galvanized observation pipe shall be installed on the outside of the casing and screen before
the gravel pack is applied. Six to twelve meters of the observation pipe, as determined by the Engineer,
shall be slotted.

9.3.4.9 Filter pack


Artificial gravel pack (filter pack) is required to prevent particles entering the well and to improve
hydraulic properties in and around the catchment section of the borehole.

Gravel pack shall consist of siliceous material with rounded, smooth and uniform particles. Unstable
minerals such as feldspars, calcite (limestone), laterite, etc. will easily decompose and change the
properties of gravel pack. Flaky particles such as schist and micas will clog the screens.
Gravel pack should be clean and well-sorted, i.e. there must be no particles of clay or silt adhering to the
individual sand or gravel grains of the packs. Filter material should be treated with care to avoid any kind
of contamination.

211
The gravel shall be of appropriate size for the openings of the screen and type of geological formation.
The Engineer shall approve samples prior to placing. To avoid bridging of the gravel must be filled-in by
hand slowly and carefully. Mechanized equipment may not be used to fill-in the gravel. The correct
placing of gravel shall be controlled by continuous recording of the volume of gravel consumed and by
repeated measurement of the achieved level of packing.
The artificial gravel pack is combined with a suitable screen. Installation of gravel pack in the annular
space between screens and borehole walls, plus 3 meters above the top of the first screen. Gravel pack
shall be topped with a one-meter clay seal.

9.3.4.10 Grouting
Grouting is a standard practice for all public water supply boreholes. Typically, boreholes should be
grouted from the surface down to a depth of at least 5 meters to prevent leakage and percolation of
contaminants from the surface. Because of logistics constraints, grouting of the top 1.5 meter can be
admitted.
Following practices are optional in the existing context of South Sudan:
• Boreholes drilled in rocks that are overlain by thin overburden shall be grouted from the surface to
the rock.
• Boreholes drilled in sandy aquifer overlain by an impervious overburden shall be grouted from the
surface to the aquifer.
• in some formations where poor-quality aquifers are interspersed with high-quality water zones, the
poor-quality aquifers shall be completely sealed off in order to keep the water from the aquifer to
remain free from harmful bacteria or other contaminating factors.
• the minimum thickness for satisfying grouting or clay seal is 0.5 m, but a thickness of 1 m should be
used whenever possible to minimize contamination risks.
• Clay and backfilling material must be thoroughly compacted in order to avoid cracks between the
slab and the concrete cover afterwards.

9.3.4.11 Head of the borehole


The top casing and observation pipe shall come out between 55 cm and 60 cm above of the ground level.
It will be correctly cemented in the ground. If a submersible pump is not installed immediately, then the
top of the borehole must be sealed adequately to prevent the entrance of foreign materials.

9.3.4.12Borehole verticality
Installed casing shall be round and straight. Straightness and plumpness should be tested at the end of the
casing screen installation. The minimum standard of quality can be controlled by lowering down a
standard hand pump cylinder to the final depth of the borehole without opposing any resistance.

Any delays encountered in running casing and screen considered to be due to poor whole alignment shall
be at the Contractor's expense.

9.3.4.13 Soil sampling


During drilling, formation should be sampled at least every 2 m or less depending on the changes of
geological formation. Aquifer formation should be logged on the borehole completion form.

For collection, the Contractor shall cease drilling, circulate all cuttings to the surface, resume drilling and
collect the cuttings then brought to the surface. The Contractor shall take every possible precaution to
guard against sample contamination due to poor circulation, borehole erosion, or caving. Cutting
samples shall be bagged, labelled with borehole depth at time of collection, and stored in a position
where they will not be contaminated by site conditions or drilling operations. The Contractor shall

212
supply strong, transparent sample bags and labels as required. The driller in-charge shall also record the
drill time logs/penetration rate of each rod or at every three-meter interval

9.3.4.14 Interim Yield Tests


Interim yield tests shall be carried out at the first strike of water and at each stage during drilling when
the flow of water increases. The depths of measurement and the yield of water shall be recorded on the
daily log sheet. Interim yield tests should be carried out for at least 30 minutes to establish the sustained
yield at that depth of drilling.

9.4 BOREHOLE DEVELOPMENT


9.4.1 Borehole development
Borehole development improves the borehole performance and the quality of water. All boreholes must
be developed to the satisfaction of the Engineer or his representative on completion of drilling and after
casing, screen, grouting and filter pack are installed. The minimum requirement is the "air-lift" method
until the ground water runs clean and turbidity free, but in any case for a minimum of 3 hours. If this
condition is not achieved after 6 hours, air-lift will be carried-out until the water becomes limpid, but up
to a maximum of 12 hours with any extra hours on top of 6 hours to be invoiced accordingly if approved
by the Engineer.
Surging and jetting are acceptable standard methods in borehole development. Boreholes drilled in hard
rock formations shall be developed using compressed air after well completion until such time as clean
water without drill cutting or clay is obtained.
Routine evaluation of the borehole yields should be limited to the air-lift capacity test after development
of the well.

9.4.2 Pumping Test


The client or his representative shall decide the discharge rates at which pumping tests shall be carried
out. An electric water level indictor shall be used for the measurements of the water level.
Discharge measurements could be done either by standard v-notch, calibrated water meter, or by simple
container of known volume. Measurements by water meter are preferred.
Interruption caused by the negligence or technical defects of the pump, generator, or water level indicator
and other pertinent measuring equipment may cause repetition of the test at the expense of the contractor.
No bulk spilling of water is allowed to re-infiltrate in the vicinity of the well. The discharged water has to
be carried away by means of discharge pipe towards a natural drain.

After completing the development, a pump should be installed inside the well at a depth above the well
screen. Some measurements should be taken before and after starting the pump and these include static
water level before pumping, the rate of discharge, dynamic water levels at various intervals during the
pumping period, time of starting the pump, time of any change in the discharge rate and time of stopping
the pump.
Following measurement should be recorded:

• Measuring pump rates: Control of the pumping rate during the testing by a suitable and accurate
device for measuring the discharge rate of the pump, e.g. by a valve in the discharge pipe. The size of
the discharge pipe and the valve should be such that the valve will form one half to three fourths open
when pumping at the desired rate.

• Step Draw Down Test (Water level measurement): The depth to water shall be measured several
times during the course of pumping test. The depth shall be measured during the course of Step Draw
Down Test lasting 30 minutes each.

213
• Constant Rate Test shall be carried out for a minimum of 12 continuous hours and recovery
measurement taken. Readings shall be taken at close intervals during the first two hours of the test
with the time between readings being gradually as the test continues. Measurement should be made
every ½ minute during the first five minutes after starting the pump, then every 5 minutes for an hour,
then every 20 minutes for about 2 hours. From this point on, reading taken at hourly intervals are
sufficient until the borehole reaches the state of equilibrium i.e. no changes in drawdown.

9.4.3 Water Quality Test


A sample of water from each borehole shall be taken at the end of the constant rate test for both
chemical and bacteriological analyses.
The sample container shall be clean and clearly marked showing
• The name of the community,
• Number of the borehole, and
• Date of sampling.

The chemical analysis shall determine the following:


• pH
• Fluoride
• Arsenic
• Temperature
• Manganese
• Total iron
• Colour
• Lead
• Total hardness
• Chloride
• Zinc
• Total dissolved solids
• Total nitrates
• Copper
• Total suspended solids
• Sulphate
The bacteriological analysis shall determine
• Total coliform and
• Total fecal coliform.

Temperature and pH shall be measured when samples are taken.


Chemical tests shall be done at a recognized laboratory or with a recognized portable testing kit
previously approved by the client. Results of chemical water tests shall form part of borehole completion
reports and shall be on the headed paper of the laboratory signed by the chief chemist with the stamp of
the laboratory.

9.4.4 Borehole Disinfection


All successful boreholes shall be disinfected after completion. This can be achieved by placing a chlorine
solution into the well so that a concentration of at least 50 mg/l (0.005%) of active chlorine exists in all
parts of the well at static conditions. All borehole parts above the water level should be completely
flushed with the solution. The solution shall remain in the well for a minimum of 4 hours at the specified
concentration before pumping the well to waste.

214
9.4.5 Successful / Unsuccessful Borehole
Unless in very specific geological context (highly confined aquifers) or preliminary agreed between the
parties (installation of electric/mechanic pumps for example), the maximum drilling depth shall be 150
meters below the ground level.
A borehole is considered productive, positive or successful if a minimum yield of 3-6m3 (3000-6000
litres per hour) is measured at the end of the development process. If a pump cannot be used, then the
"air-lift" discharge shall be at least 800 litters per hour. Boreholes with capacity less than 3-6 m3/hour
shall not be fitted with a submersible pump.

A successful borehole must be plumbed and vertical to be considered successful.

A borehole is considered unsuccessful


• If the drilling depth has reached 150 m and the yield of the borehole is less than the quantity stated
above or
• if for any reasons due to drilling problems, collapsing conditions, breakdown of the machine or any
other reasons the borehole cannot be completed.

In that case another drilling attempt has to be made. Payment is done for the successful borehole only. In
case that both drilling attempts are unsuccessful only 50% of actual costs done for the second borehole
will be paid.
Back Filling Unsuccessful Boreholes
All unsuccessful boreholes shall be filled with drill cuttings or other suitable material to 1m below
ground surface and a 1m grout seal placed on top to properly cover the hole.

215
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
COLD WATER AND FIRE HYDRANT SERVICES ENGINEERING FOR THE OFFICE BUILDINGS
AT THE ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

216
ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD) – PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

CONTENTS PAGE:

PART 1.0: Tender Conditions

PART 2.0: Design Criteria

PART 3.0: Mechanical Engineering Services Installation (Plumbing)

PART 4.0: Tender Drawings

PART 5.0: Tender Declaration

PART 6.0: Tender Schedule of Rates

PART 7.0: Tender Breakdown

217
1.0 TENDER CONDITIONS
1.1 Introduction
The purpose of this document and supporting drawings/data is to illustrate and describe the Contract
Works associated with the Building Engineering Services (BES) Systems + Applications.

The information contained in the Technical Specification and depicted on the Drawings is for the purpose
of obtaining a competitive Tender for the Mechanical Engineering Services (MES) Contract Works
The Contractor must allow for liaising with other trades to ensure that the MES Installation is properly
coordinated / integrated into the Contract Works / Building Complex as a whole.
It is recommended that the Contractor visits the site in order to acquaint himself with the existing site
conditions, (access, existing site infrastructure services etc.), that might affect his Tender.

No claim arising out of any misunderstanding or neglect shall be considered.

1.12 Extent of the Contract Works


The MES Contract Works shall include all the necessary labour and materials and all
construction/building works, together with such tests, adjustments and commissioning of the mechanical
and electrical engineering services systems and applications as are required to form a “complete
installation”.
The MES Contract Works “Complete Installation” shall mean not only the major items of plant and
equipment detailed in this Document, but all of the incidentals/sundry components required for the
complete execution of the Contract Works.

1.13 Contract Works:


Design Development
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the design development work in connection with the
BES Contract Works; this is in addition to that of the fundamental design of the mechanical and electrical
engineering services systems and applications specified within this Document and supporting
drawings/data.

The Contractor shall allow, within his Tender, for the following particular design development
calculations:
Cold Water Plumbing
To determine the required lengths of Cold Water Pipes, Control devices and Valves sizes, based upon the
completed plumbing installation drawings developed.

Sanitary Fixtures
To determine the required lengths of Soil Pipes and Control devices based the completed Soil Pipes
installation drawings developed.

1.14 Contract Works:


Regulations and Standards
The MES Installation shall comply with the Technical Specification (s) set out within this Document with
all relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice and with all other relevant Statutory Instruments and
Regulations current at the time of Tender.

1.15 Contract Works:


Materials and Workmanship
All materials must be suitable for their intended use/application and must comply with the relevant
Standards and be installed in accordance with the Codes of Practice and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
All site operatives must be suitable qualified and experienced for the work that they are assigned to carry
out. All workmanship must be of a good standard.
The Project Architect/M&E Engineer shall reject poor materials and workmanship and it shall be the
contractor’s responsibility to put right such rejected Contract Works at his own expense.

218
1.16 Contract Works:
Programme
The Contractor shall allow adequate time within his overall Contract Works Programme for presenting
and receiving comments to / from the Project Architect / M&E Engineer with respect to:
(i) Design Development Information
(ii) Installation Drawings
(iii) Testing and Commissioning Procedures

1.17 Supervision of the Contract Works


The Contractor shall employ a competent, qualified and experienced Principal Resident Site Engineer,
who shall be in charge of the Contract Works during all working hours and in attendance until the whole
of the Contract Works has been completed and accepted on behalf of the Employer.
The Contractor’s appointed representative shall attend meetings on site and be empowered to answer on
behalf of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall appoint a Deputy Site Engineer to cover for periods of absence of the Principal
Residence Site Engineer.

1.18 Coordination of the Contract Works


The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the mechanical engineering services systems,
(Plumbing) such that each may be installed in a manner which ensures the correct performance of the
system and avoids conflict in the positioning of the various BES elements.
The Contractor shall include within his Tender for the detailed development of his Installation Drawings
to contribute to a fully coordinated and integrated BES Installation.

1.19 Contract Works:


Installation Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Architect/ M&E Engineer, Installation Drawings
for all of the MES systems to be installed under the Contract Works, together with such schedules, data,
calculations, systems schematics and other supplementary details necessary to execute the Contract
Works.

The Installation Drawings shall be fully detailed, depicting the positions and physical dimensions of all
of the MES Systems (Plumbing) Components.
The minimum scale for the production of the coordinated Installation Drawings shall be:
Plant locations + Switch rooms: 1: 20
Floor Plans 1: 50
Site Services 1: 200

The Contractor SHALL MAKE due allowance for the preparation of the MES Installation Drawings
within his Tender and within his Overall Contract Works Programme

1.20 Contract Works:


Fixing of the Services Installation
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the sizing, supply and installation of all supports/fixings
for the mechanical engineering services.

1.21 Contract Works:


Builders Work
Builders Work in connection with (BWIC) the MES Contract Works, such as duct, holes, basses, chasses
etc. shall be detailed by the Contractor as separated drawings.

The Contractor shall inform the Project Architect/M&E Engineer of any BWIC that may affect the
building structure and/or envelope.
The Contractor shall make due allowance for the detailing of the BWIC requirements within his Tender
and within his overall Contract Works Programme

219
1.22 Contract Works:
Testing and Commissioning
The Contractor shall ensure that suitably qualified and experienced personnel, together with the necessary
instrumentation, are available at the time required to set to work, test and commission the mechanical and
electrical engineering services systems.

The format of the testing and commissioning procedure, together with the details to be entered on the test
sheets, shall be agreed with the Project Architect/M&E Engineer.

The Contractor shall agree with the Project Architect/M&E Engineer a Programme for the testing and
commissioning of the various Plumbing Systems.
The M&E Engineer shall retain a detailed record of all the testing and commissioning procedures on site
for examination.

The testing and commissioning shall demonstrate, amongst other things, that:-
(i) All Plumbing and Sanitary Installations are properly install and physically protected.

1.23 Contract Works:


Record Documentation
The Contractor shall supply to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer, as a prerequisite to the Practical
Completion of the Contract Works, a comprehensive record of the completed mechanical and electrical
engineering services installation. This shall take the form of:-
(i) AutoCAD based disk detailing all INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.
(ii) 4 No. Dyeline prints of all INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.
(iii) 4 No. Bound A4 copies of the OPERATING + MAINTENANCE MANUALS, to include:
a. Copies of all testing and commissioning certificates.
b. Manufacturers/Suppliers technical data for the maintenance and operation of all plant and
equipment, together with a schedule of spares provided.
c. Schedule recording all installation drawings.

The Contractor shall maintain accurate records of all testing and commissioning procedures throughout
the course of the Contract Works for incorporation into the O + M Manuals.
The Contractor shall have available a DRAFT COPY of the Record Documentation for inspection by the
Project Architect/M&E Engineer prior to Practical Completion of the Contract Works.

1.24 Contract Works:


Variations
All instructions, variations, additions to the Contract Works are only valid when agreed to/signed for by
the Project Architect (Manager).
Should the Contractor receive, during the progress of the Contract Works, any instruction for additional
work, Which he considers may affect the completion of the Contract Works within the prescribed
Contract Period, he shall be required to formally notify the Project Manager in writing within four (4)
days of the receipt of such and instruction.

1.25 Contract Works:


Practical Completion
The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the MES Installation (Plumbing) and shall have
prepared his own defects inspection list and shall duly attend to the same, prior to offering the completed
MES Installation to the Project Manager for inspection and acceptance on behalf of the Employer.
The Project Architect/M&E Engineers’ inspection shall be one of formality and should not be considered
as and inspection for the purposes of forming the Contractor’s final list scheduling the Outstanding
Works.
The Contractor shall agree with the Project Architect/M&E Engineer, a suitable date for the FINAL
INSPECTION.

220
1.16 Maintenance of Services
Any works necessitating interruption or termination of any services required to be maintained or serving
areas outside of the designated works area shall be thoroughly coordinated and not be initiated until a
Programme of works indicating disruption time scales and/or temporary arrangements has been
submitted and agreed fully by all concerned.

1.26 Contract Works:


Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall be responsible under the Contractor for addressing/correcting all of the Plumbing
Contract Works defects occurring within a period of SIX MONTHS, commencing from the date of the
PRACTICAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATION.

During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall provide prompt and effective “call back” service
to attend to any urgent faults which may develop and which would affect the day-to-day function of the
building complex.
The Contractor shall retain a written log on site recording the details of the defect – i: e, date notified/date
attended, fault identified, action taken, together with any ongoing investigations/remedial work.

1.27 Contract Works:


Provisional Sums
Provisional Sums have been entered on the Mechanical Engineering Services Installation – Tender
Breakdown – Form of Tender Document.
These Provisional Sums provide for Works of Costs, which cannot be foreseen, defined or detailed at the
time of preparing the MES (Plumbing) Contract Works Tender Documentation.

The Provisional Sums include for the Contractor’s overheads and profit and therefore are to be included
in the Tender Breakdown as net sums without any further additions.
Instructions as to the deduction of expenditure in whole or in part of the Provisional Sums shall be
instructed by the Project Manager during the course of the Contract Works, as found necessary.

1.28 Contract Works:


Spares
The Contractor shall include within his Tender, recorded as separately identified costs, the supply of
spares for the:
I. Plumbing installation works
II. Sanitary Fixtures

1.29 Contract Works:


Schedule of Rates
The Contractor shall submit within his Tender, a priced copy of the Schedule Rates.
Each of the elemental rates shall include for all necessary labour and materials, together with overheads
and profit.

The declared Tender rates shall be used to evaluate all Works added, deleted and/ or amended against the
Contract Works Tender.
The Project Manager reserves the right to reject any tender which does not include the completed
Schedule of Rates, returned with the Tender Submission.

1.30 Contract Works:


Tender Breakdown
The Contractor shall, when submitting his Tender for the Contract Works, enter on the Tender
Breakdown – Form of Tender Document, Lump Sum Costs for each of the Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering Services elements as prescribed.
The Project Architect reserves the right to reject any Tender, which does not include the completed
Tender Breakdown.

221
2.0 Cold Water Service
2.1 System Description
The Bank building complex to be served with a potable cold water supply service drawn from the main
GUMA and dedicated Solar Powered Borehole water supply distribution pipework.

An incoming GUMA valves mains cold water connection to be installed within the secured perimeter
fenced Bank building as shown on the drawings.

A cold water supply connection to be made to this point to supply the 10m3 MDPE Water Tanks located
on a 9m high Water Tower to service the sanitary appliances and kitchen fixtures as set out in the
Architectural Drawings
(Refer to Architect’s Drawing for details of sanitary fittings).

75mm dia. Cold water supply connection to be made to the 10m3 MDPE Water Tanks connecting the
Fire Hydrant Booster Pumps and 50mm dia. MDPE pipe and associated fittings further reduced to 32mm
MDPE pipe and associated fittings connected as shown on the pipework drawings to be installed to the
pressurized water purification system supplying cold treated water to the building.

2.2 System Equipment + Materials


(a) Pipework
Heavy duty polyethylene (HDPE) pipework to BS6572, BS6570, WIS4.32.03 @12 bar
(120metres), (174psi) with screwed joints, hydraulic pressure tested.

(b) Valves
(i) Main Isolation
Loose jumper isolating stopcocks to be installed on all cold water service principal distribution
points.

(ii) Local Isolation


Screw operated ball valves to be installed on cold water service to Individual / groups of sanitary
fittings and cold water service to stand pumps.

(c) Thermal Insulation


All internal cold water service pipework to be thermally insulated and vapour sealed by the
application of 38mm minimum thickness of pre-formed rigid CFC free phenolic foam sectional
pipework insulation with aluminum foil outer covering, having a thermal conductivity of 0.02
W/moC

2.3 General Standard of Pipework and Fittings


(a) Pipework Generally
All pipework shall be run at least 10” from any electrical conduit or lighting and power cables. Pipes
shall be spaced in ducts, ceilings and voids, trenches and below floors in a manner that permits
subsequent access to any pipe for maintenance or removal without disturbance to the remaining
pipework.

Branches from mains in horizontal ducts shall be kept clear of vertical ducts.
Pipes shall not be solidly built into walls or plaster and joints shall not be positioned within the thickness
of walls, floors or in any other inaccessible position. Pipes shall be fixed with a minimum clearance of 1”
and a maximum of 1½” between the surface of pipe or covering and the finished surface of walls and a
minimum clearance of 4“ from finished surface of floor or ceiling at the lowest or highest points, within a
building.

Gradients on all pipes shall not be less than 1” in 20’0” in the case of domestic hot water service, except
where otherwise specified or detailed on the drawings or with the written approval of the Project
Architect/M&E Engineer. All mains shall be laid to the gradients to ensure venting and drainage of the
service. All screwed joints shall be clean threaded and the bore carefully reamed to ensure the pipe is free
from burns or obstructions.

222
b) CAULKING OF JOINTS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED
All cold water rising mains into the building for sanitary and kitchen use shall be treated and disinfected
as shown in the drawings by the Sub-Contractor after completion of the installation and testing and prior
to handover.
The treatment and disinfection process shall be in accordance with the World Health Organization
(WHO) recommendations and the Sub-Contractor shall obtain from the Sierra Leone Guma Water
Company a written statement certifying that the treatment and disinfection has been satisfactorily
undertaken.

The Sub-Contractor shall include in his Tender for all labour and material costs associated with the
treatment and disinfection including any costs incurred by the Sierra Leone Guma Water Company
particularly with regards to an analysis of a water sample.
Efficient plugs shall be inserted in all open ends during the progress of the work. Plugs of wood, paper or
rag etc., shall NOT be used.

The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the location and removal of any stoppage due to foreign
matter or air lock which is found to impede the flow of fluid after the systems are put into use, including
the cost of making good all pipework, insulation, building decorations or other damage caused in locating
and making good these defects.

All pipework shall be run in accordance with the working drawings and shall be run clear of other
services, only where it is unavoidable shall the Sub-Contractor be allowed to neatly set round to avoid
ventilation trunking, cable trunking, drainage and other services, structural beams and other obstructions.
Long sweep bends shall be used in preference to round elbows. Square elbows shall NOT be used. All
made or set bends shall have as large a radius as possible and shall be free from deformation of the bore
and the tube or any undue thinning of the wall of the tube.
All bends and sets shall be pulled cold on pipework up to 2” nominal bore, using a bending machine with
the correct formers for the size of pipe used.

Where the Project Architect/Engineer has given permission for fire pulled bends or sets these shall be
carried out using a forge and the whole length of the bend or set shall be heated and formed in one
operation. Any bend or set found to have been burnt or overheated shall be removed and replaced.

Tees shall be of the easy or twin elbow pattern except where square tees are installed to facilitate venting
and drainage.
Where a gradual reduction or increase in pipe diameter is required, i.e. pump connections, reducing valve
assemblies, etc., this shall be done by means of tapered pieces at least 6” long.

Reduction in pipe size shall be by reducing sockets, tees or taper pieces. These shall be of the eccentric
pattern to ensure proper drainage and the elimination of air pockets. Pipes shall be erected and provided
with flanges or unions as specified in in the document.

Flanges or unions shall be provided in runs of pipework at intervals of 12m and at all changes of
direction to facilitate maintenance. Flanges or unions shall be provided in plant rooms to enable any
items of plant or run of pipework to be dismantled. Mating flanges shall be mild steel on black ferrous
pipework and non-dezincification type gunmetal on copper pipework.
All pipework shall be in accordance with the BS given, in random lengths unless otherwise called for,
straight and free from blemish and damage. Ends shall be screwed to the correct length to the BS where
screwed pipe is called for and the ends shall be protected from damage by means of half sockets firmly
screwed on.
All black steel tubing shall receive one coat of primer protecting paint before leaving the works.
Water seals to be provided on drains from cooler condensate trays and any other items where the drains
are subject to pressure differentials.
Note that in all cases, the drains from pumps and cooling coils will not be less than ¾ “ size, with ample
rodding points suitable for maintenance.

223
(c) Pipework and Fittings
SERVICE PIPING FITTING
Mains cold water supply MDPE (PE 80) to BS6572, MDPE (PE 80) to BS6572, BS6570,
/ cold water BS6570, WIS4.32.03 @12 WIS4.32.03 @12 bar (120metres),
bar (120metres), (174psi) (174psi
Drain pipework all other UPVC – BS 4514 As for cold water mains/cold water
vents and exhaust piping down service/hot water service supply
Hose reel installation Galvanized steel tube to Screwed galvanized malleable iron
dry riser BS 1387 heavyweight fitting up to and including 2” diameter.
quality Flanged 2½” diameter and above.

Note: The mechanical Sub-Contractor shall ensure that there is no contact between ferrous and non-
ferrous materials.

If through any accident, defect or burst, pipes become fractured the Sub-Contractor shall replace the
same, free of charge to the Client.
All drains, and overflow pipework etc., from the cooler batteries, pumps, etc., shall be provided and taken
to the nearest gulley.

(d) Screwed and Flanged Joints


Screwed joints shall be used on pipework up to 2” diameter.

Flanged joints shall be used on pipework 2½” and above, except where exposed to view in corridors or
rooms when pipework up to and including 3” diameter shall be fitted with unions in lieu of flanges.

Flanged or union joints shall be fitted to all pipework 64mm diameter and above, except where exposed
to view in corridors or rooms when pipework up to and including 3” diameter shall be fitted with unions
in lieu of flanges.
Flanged or union jointed shall be fitted to all pipework at interval not exceeding 40’0” and at all changes
of direction, to facilitate erection and dismantling pipework.

All flanges on steel pipe shall be wrought iron of mild steel machines on face and edge with dimensions
and bolt holes drilling as follows to BS No. 10 Table ‘E’.
All flanges shall be truly parallel on face and bolts proved free in holes before pulling up.

Flanged joints shall be made with Taylor’s copper corrugated rings or Klingerite joints of the full face
pattern 2mm thick. Flanges shall be bolted together with hexagonal bolts and nuts to BS 916 of the same
material and finish as the flanges. Each bolt shall have washers and when pulled up the bolts shall NOT
protrude more than one thread through the nut.
Flanges on copper pipework shall be Admiralty quality gunmetal.
All joints on mild steel pipework in tank rooms and plants rooms shall be flanged. On cooper pipework in
tank rooms and plants rooms’ flanges shall be provided on all items of plant.

Silver alloy welding will only be permitted in special circumstances and must be agreed with the M&E
Engineer, prior to use.

(e) Unions
Unions shall be generally of malleable iron with two bronze seats as the Navy Pattern for service 2” and
under and below 50psi
Unions shall be fitted on the outlet of each screwed valve where installed, except in the case of draw –off
points and on pipework connections to items of plant.
The use of connectors or long screws and back nuts will not be permitted under any circumstances.

(f) Valves and Cocks


Valves and cocks shall be provided where called for on the drawings and as specified.
All valves and cocks in tanks and plants shall be flanged with the exception of drip point assemblies.

224
All valves and cocks on all services 2½” and above shall be flanged with the exception of drip point
assemblies.

Flanges shall be dimensioned and drilled in accordance with the details in the document.

Valves and cocks installed in normally visible positions in rooms and corridors shall be chromium
planted.
All chromium plated valves shall be of the easy clean type with composition disc hand wheels, elsewhere
hand wheels shall be of malleable iron.

All valves and cocks shall be fitted in such a manner that they are readily accessible for operation and
maintenance.
Stopcocks shall be provided for isolating individual sanitary fittings, and shall be chromium plated screw
down easy clean type with lock-shield and dust caps.
Washers suitable for the duty they shall be fitted. All stopcocks shall be in accordance with BS 1010
manufactured from Admiralty quality gunmetal.

The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that valves listed in the following schedules comply with the Water
Authority’s requirements and shall include the cost of all stamping necessary.

Service Hattersley Fig No. 0r Equal


Low Pressure Cold and Hot Water 33 X
Services up to and including 2” 35 F-D

Low Pressure Cold and Hot water


Services 2½” and above 599/1E-D

Cold Water Rising Main Internal to 33


Buildings up to and including 2” 35 F-D

Cold Water Rising Main Internal to 599/1E-D


Buildings 2½” and above

Pressured Tapped Measuring Orifice Valves 1432

Ball Valves
Ball valves shall be of the equilibrium type with cast iron bodies, copper ball float mild steel lever and
gunmetal working parts as Glenfield and Kennedy Ltd.

Non-Return Valves
Non – Return valves shall be of the swinging flap type gunmetal bodies with screwed or flanged ends,
Hattersley Fig. No. 47 or equal and approved

Non – return valves on hot water supply mains between the section and delivery of the circulating pumps
shall be of cast iron with flanged connections and gunmetal (Admiralty quality). The valve shall be so
designed that its action is sensitive to the slightest pressure difference Holden and Brooke ‘Senflux’
pattern.

Emptying Cocks
Emptying cocks shall be provided at all low points and on the dead side of all main section isolating
valves as Hattersley.
Emptying cocks shall be fitted to all items of plant and shall be lubricated plug type with cast iron bodies
and flanged connections Audco Fig. No. 62.
The outlets of these cocks shall be extended and hose unions with caps shall be fitted.
Three Way Cocks
Three way cocks fitted as escape taps on calorifier vent pipes shall be Hattersley.

225
(g) Strainers
Strainers where indicated on the drawings or specified to be fitted into pipework runs shall be of the ‘Y’
type in all cases and shall be of Hattersley manufactured in bronze to 2” diameter. Above 2” diameter
strainers shall be manufactured in cast iron by Hattersley.

Cast steel strainers shall be suitable for pressures up to 125 psi.


All strainers except where otherwise stated shall be flanged.

Where strainers are used to protect reducing valves they shall be provided with mesh gauze of the size
recommended by the manufacturers of the equipment they are to protect.

(h) Pressure and Altitude Gauges


Pressure and altitude gauges shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
Gauges shall be provided on the suction and discharge connections of each pump.
Gauges shall be mounted between the pumps and the pump isolating valves.

Pressure gauges shall be of the Bourden tube type 6” diameter brass cased. The gauges shall conform to
the relevant BS and shall be calibrated from zero to twice the working head in meters. The gauges shall
be complete with and adjustable red pointer and a bronze cock.

Gauges shall be installed such that they can be readily removed and such that they can be easily read.

Altitude gauges shall be fitted where shown on the drawings.


Pressure and altitude gauges shall be as manufactured by Sir W H Bailey, Hopkinson or Dewrance.

(i) Thermometers
Indicating thermometers shall be of the mercury in rigid stem type having 6” dial with needle pointer.
They shall be calibrated 500 F to 2480 F for hot water services. Where fitted on cold water mains they
shall be calibrated 500 F to 1040 F.
All thermometers shall have suitable oil filled well to enable them to be removed from pipework or plant
without draining down. Where such wells are installed in pipework the free cross-sectional area of the
pipe the flow should not be unduly restricted. This may necessitate a larger section of pipe to take the
well. This also applies to any other items taper pieces shall be provided at any pipe diameter change.

All thermometers shall be tested to read alike, between 1000 F and 2000 F in the case of hot water
thermometers, when bulbs are immersed in water and the discrepancy between the highest and lowest
reading shall be not more than 120 F.
Thermometers shall be installed such that they can be readily removed and such that they can easily be
read. Thermometers shall be installed on all main hot water service flow and returns on each hot water
service calorifier.

(j) Air Eliminators and Air Cocks


The Sub-Contractor shall provide and fix where indicated on the drawings and at all high points in the
pipework that require venting, automatic air vents of the Chas. Winn & Co. Ltd. Manufacture type ‘A’
with type outlet 2 or type ‘B’ with lock-shield cut –off valve. Eliminators shall be complete with air
bottles, isolating valves and discharge pipes.

(k) Expansion
All pipework shall be arranged so that expansion may be readily taken up by bends or changes in
direction. Where expansion cannot be accommodated in this manner and where indicated on the drawings
then expansion joints with flanged ends shall be used.
Where expansion joints are called for and fitted these shall be capable of the full expansion of the pipe
and shall be able to withstand both axial and transverse stresses when in operation and shall be installed
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Expansion joints shall be fitted in accordance with the drawings and in other positions where in the Sub-
Contractor’s opinion the use of an expansion joint will obviate undue stress being set up in the pipelines.

226
The pipework shall be stressed initially when cold by leaving gaps at the appropriate points equal to 50%
of the total expansion calculated for that section. This cold draw shall be taken up only after all anchor
points and brackets are grouted in and are rigidly fixed and proved firm by the Engineer or his
Representative.

Before the final pull up is made the amount of cold draw allowed shall be checked by the Engineer and
proved correct.
All pipes shall be fixed with sufficient clearance from walls, joints, floors or other obstructions capable
of resisting lengthwise expansion and special care shall be taken to avoid pipe fixings or supports near
junction with main pipe runs preventing movements of branches.

Connections of branch mains wherever possible shall be taken as near to anchor points as is practicable to
avoid undue movement or stress in the branch connection.
Where such connections are impracticable the branches shall be pre-stressed by cold drawing and due
allowance made for movement of the main pipe at that point.
Approved guides as required by the manufacturer of the expansion devices shall be provided to ensure
that the pipe expands co-axially with the pipe run and that the expansion joint takes up the full expansion
of the pipe without any undue bowing of the pipe. Expansion joints shall be fitted in the horizontal plane
unless otherwise specified. Positions of the guides shall be approved by the Engineer.

Expansion bellows shall be of suitable thickness for the pipe to which they are fixed and where fitted to
hot water services shall be manufactured from stainless steel.
Each expansion joint shall be flanged either side to the appropriate BS Flange Table, or as detailed in
Claus 2.1.03 of this Specification.
Anchors shall be provided as shown on the drawings and as necessary for any additional changes in
direction or additional expansion joints authorized by the Engineer.
Anchors shall be positioned such, that the pipe expansion is controlled in the direction intended.
Anchors shall be either forged steel clamps of adequate cross sectional area, bolted to a sole plate, or
formed of MS sections welded to the pipe and bolted to a sole plate.

The sole plate in each case shall be rigidly fixed to the building structure, subway or duct wall by means
of raw bolts or rag bolts firmly grouted in.
Anchors shall NOT be fixed to structural steelwork unless the written approval of the Engineer is
obtained. Wherever possible the forces on any anchor shall be equal in both directions, but in any case
the out of balance thrust shall not exceed 20 KN.

(l) Pipe Supports


The Sub-Contractor shall provide for all pipe supports on all runs of pipework. Supports shall be pipe
hangers and rods, clips, rollers and chairs etc., as required for the particular duty and for stable and
efficient support. The supports shall be chosen for the particular duty they are to perform and shall allow
free movement and expansion of the pipework. All supports shall be grade to the required levels for air
elimination and drainage.

Pipe fixings and supports shall be arranged at intervals not greater than the following distances apart:
Pipe Size Horizontal Vertical
Pipework Inches Runs Feet Runs Feet
Mild Steel ½” 6’6” 6’6”
¾” 7’9” 9’9”
1” 8’9” 9’9”
1¼” 8’9” 9’9”
1½” 9’9” 11’6”
2” 11’0” 11’6”
2½” 12’0” 14’6”
and above
Vertical pipes shall be stayed from the wall with a minimum of two clips spaced equally between floors
and ceiling.

227
Flanges, sockets and unions where installed shall coincide with support positions as far as is practicable.
Where vertical takeoff from horizontal pipes and mains occur, the horizontal main shall have a support
positioned at this point.

Supports shall be positioned adjacent to all valves and other special components to be removed for
maintenance leaving the pipework adequately supported at the free ends.
Pipework installed in the main vertical ducts and false ceiling areas shall be supported from channel iron
supports provided by the Sub-Contractor firmly bolted to the structural tabs. The Sub-Contractor shall
also include in his Tender for providing and installing all necessary nuts and bolts and for drilling the
flanges of channel iron as necessary for fixing all supports. The Sub-Contractor shall provide all hanger
rods, clips, ‘U’ bolts, roller and chairs etc.

The design and manufacture of supports shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before they are
manufactured or installed.
Pipes fixed both horizontally and vertically to walls in rooms shall be supported by malleable iron
schoolboard pattern brackets with split pipe holders into walls or with drilled back plates where they are
to be screwed to wood or ironwork.

For copper pipework, pipe holders or supports shall be of gunmetal or brass or prefabricated mild steel
brackets or clips which shall be lined with brass or copper strip where contact is made with the pipe.
Where pipework is covered with non-conducting covering, supports shall be as described above, except
that the design shall be such that the face of the covering shall be supported at least 1” clear of the
building structure.
All brackets, hanger rods, clips and roller and chairs shall be arranged to give ample movement for
expansion of the pipework.
All necessary ‘U’ bolt or other guides shall be provided to counteract side or vertical movement of piping
due to expansion.

The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for position and alignment of all built in brackets and supports
before concreting by the Main Contractor commences and the positions are maintained until the concrete
is set.

(m) Pipe Sleeves and Floor Plates


Sleeves must be fitted to pipes at all points where the pipes pass, through walls floors and ceilings.
Sleeves shall be of the “Armac” or other approved telescopic type for all ferrous pipework.
Sleeves for cooper, brass or gunmetal, Ferrous sleeves shall NOT be used.
All sleeves through floors shall project ¼” above finished floor surface except to the kitchen area where
the projection shall be 1¼” unless otherwise instructed and shall be fitted with split hinged floor plates
chromium plated finish. The Sub-Contractor shall arrange for the Main Contractor to haunch the
grouting or floor finish to support this projection.

The Sub-Contractor shall provide and fix chromium plates split hinged wall plates where pipes pass
through walls and are visible from within the room (s).
The Weight of the pipes shall not be borne by the sleeves and all sleeves shall be set concentric with the
pipes. Clearance all round shall be left to allow for free movement.
Sleeves passing through external walls and roofs to outside must be watertight and weatherproof using
asbestos yarn and lead wool caulked between the pipe and the sleeve, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that no pipes are bedded in the sleeves so as to
restrict movement, by any making good by the Main Contractor or others, or by any cause whatsoever.
The Sub-Contractor shall also be responsible for the accuracy and correct alignment and levels of all
holes required to be left or cut for the fitting of sleeves.
All sleeves required to be built into or embedded in structural concrete shall be placed in position by the
Sub-Contract before the concrete is placed. The proper care shall be taken by the Sub-Contractor to
check and ensure that the sleeves remain in the correct; position whilst concreting takes place and until
the concrete is set.

228
(n) Painting and Labeling
(i) Painting
The painting of all insulated and uninsulated pipework, steelwork used for supports, hangers and brackets
where exposed in rooms and corridors, other than in the tank room and main vertical duct, shall be
carried out by others to match the decorations, but the Sub-Contractor shall supply and apply one primer
coat other than that provided by the manufacturers, ready for receiving the finishes.

Where ferrous pipework is to be insulated the Sub-Contractor shall first paint the pipework with one coat
of red –oxide paint prior to the application of the insulation.
The Sub-Contractor shall paint, all uninsulated ferrous pipework, steelwork, used for supports, hangers
and brackets in the tank room, duct, and false ceilings with one coat of red – oxide paint.
The Sub-Contractor shall thoroughly clean down, wire brush and paint with one coat of red – oxide
followed by one coat of black bituminous paint al external steel work erected under this Contract.

The Sub-Contractor shall include in his Tender for making good any paintwork damaged before
handover.

(ii) Labeling
Valves with metal hand wheels:
The Sub-Contractor shall provide a black ivorine label for each with the duty and identification of the
valve shown in white letters. This information shall be repeated as in the valve charts. The labels shall
be secured within the hand wheels by the spindle nut.

Valves and composition hand-wheels and cocks with fixed operating Keys shall be provided with and
ivorine label for each valve or cock engraved with duty of the valve or cock and secure by means of a
brass ring loosely fitted around the spindle and retained by the valve hand wheel or cock key.
The brass ring and label shall be such that they cannot interfere with the correct operation of the valve or
cock, and the label shall be clearly seen when in position.

All labels shall be of black ivorine with white lettering.


Exceptions to above:
The following valves and cocks shall not have labels fitted:
(a) Valves on branch circuits in rooms
(b) DHWS and CW service stopcocks to draw-offs.
The Sub-Contractor shall not remove, cover paint over, deface or alter any labels fixed to items of
plant or equipment by the manufacturer.

The Sub-Contractor shall provide on all insulated and uninsulated pipes, except in occupied rooms
identification colour bands, at not more than ½” intervals on long straight runs of piping, near to all
valves, at all inlets and exits of trenches, ducts and building at all tees and unions.
Pipelines in plant rooms, ducts, voids, false ceilings etc., shall have detailed identification in accordance
with the latest British Standard and including arrows indicating the direction of flow, contents of pipe and
the pipe bore.
All identification bands shall consist of painted non-ferrous metal bands clipped securely to the pipe or
pipe insulation.

(o) Washing Out


Before being put into regular service, all installations shall be blown through and washed out to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the Sub-Contractor shall include for all the necessary disconnections and
reconnections of pipework and plant to enable this to be done.

(p) Spares
The Sub-Contractor shall supply, in suitable containers, sufficient lubricating motor oil and lubricating
grease, together with all filling can and grease guns, suitable for all plant and equipment supplied under
the Sub-Contract to last over a period of six months from the date of handing over. In addition to the
aforementioned items the Sub-Contractor shall supply the following spares at the time of handover:

229
3 Air Cock Keys
3 Keys for Lock shield Valves
6 Valve Packings for each type of Valve installed
1 Gland packing for each Pump
3 Sets of Joint Rings for each size of Flange installed
1 Set of Spanners to fit all Nuts on Plant and Pipework
1 Set of Spare fuses for all Control Equipment
1 Complete set of Replacements for all Filters including Grease Filters.

2.5 Plant and Pipework Services


(a) General Description of Installation
The Pipework Services and Associated Plant Installation shall comprise the following:
i Boosted Cold Water Mains and Firemain Service to Hose reels via Pressure Booster Pumps Sets.
The Cold Water Mains Pump located within the Water Treatment and Disinfection containment at
the basement level of the Water Tower and the Firemain Service Pumps located on concrete plinth
by the Water Tower and protected by secured metal fencing and covering from inclement weather.
ii Dry Riser Installation complete with individual inlets and inlet Breechings on each floor level piped
from rising mains water service.
iii Cold Water Down Service to all Sanitary Fixtures, Sinks in kitchenette and Standpipes from the
Cold Water Mains Pump
iv HVAC Air Handling unit condense lines piped to drain.
v Firemain Service to Hose reels for Firefighting including pipework and accessories from Firemain
Service Pumps

(b) Boosted Cold Water Mains (CWM) and Firemain Service (FMS)
The combined cold water/fire mains services shall be provided by 2 x 5m3 MDPE Cold Water Service
Tanks located at the top of the Water Tower.

The combine water tanks shall supply cold water to the Water Treatment and Disinfection containment
(Water Purification Unit) located at the basement level of the Water Tower supplying treated cold water
through a package pressure boosting pump set to all sanitary facilities and kitchenettes on ground and
first levels, Security post and Standpipes located within the secured perimeter fenced and cold water
Firemain Service via Pressure Booster Pumps to Hose reels as shown on the drawings
The cold water storage tanks located at top of the Water Tower is also supplied with incoming Guma
Valley Water Company (GUMA) mains water to ball valves and from the incoming Borehole mains
water to ball valves via Borehole Submersible Pump as shown in the drawings.
Pressure reducing valves shall be installed as shown on the drawings to balance the pressure required at
the various outlets on the booster pump systems.

(c) Cold Water Mains (CWM) Package Boosting Pump Unit


(i) BS MXV Fixed Speed Vertical Multi-Stage Pressure Boosting Pump Unit.
The Cold Water Mains (CWM) Package Booster Pump Unit shall be type BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C Model
as manufactured by CALPEDA or similar, the duty as specified below:
Voltage: 400V
Phase: 3~
kW: 1.5
Hp: 2
Suction (DN1): 37mm
Discharge (DN2): 37mm

This unit shall be complete with all necessary valves and interlocking controls to provide automatic
operation.

(d) Firemain Service (FMS)


(i) BS2F-2NMD 32/210C/A Fixed speed Horizontal Centrifugal Pressure Boosting Pump Unit
The Firemain Service (FMS) Package Booster Pump Unit shall be type BS2F-2NMD 32/210C/, Model as
manufactured by CALPEDA or similar, the duty as specified below:
Voltage: 400V
230
Phase: 3~
kW: 5.5
Hp: 7.5
Suction (DN1): 75mm
Discharge (DN2): 50mm

The unit will incorporate duplicate pumps for run and standby operation.
All interconnecting pipework within unit is shall be in 50mm galvanized steel tube to BS 1387: 1985
heavy weight quality.

(e) Pressure Reducing Valves


All pipework from booster pump unit to fixtures within the building shall be run in a medium density
polyethylene (MDPE) pipes for the Cold Water Mains (CWM) supplies and galvanized steel pipes to BS
1387: 1985 heavy weight quality for the Firemain Service supplies.

Pressure reducing valves shall be installed in the branch connection to the drinking water coolers on each
floor level. The pressure reducing valves are to be type LRV 151 as manufactured by Spirax.
All valves to be selected by manufacturer to obtain a maximum outlet pressure at the water cooler of 60
psi

(e) Drinking Water Coolers


Package drinking water coolers will be supplied and installed in the positions shown on the drawings
type SF 200 as manufactured by Acro-Kool Limited.

Units to be provided with PRV and isolating stopcock on each branch connection thereto.

(f) Local Water


The Sub-Contractor shall make himself fully conversant with the Local Water Authority Bye-Laws and it
is the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to inform the Water Authorities when work commences.

(g) Incoming CWM Supply


The Sub-Contractor shall commence the installation after the Water Board’s stopcock at basement level
as shown on the drawings.

(h) Final Connections


Taps and sanitary fittings shall be supplied and fixed under the Main Contract, but all final connections to
sanitary fixtures shall be carried out by the Sub-Contractor.

2.6 Cold Water down Service


(a) General Description
The cold water storage tanks located at the top of the Water Tower on a purpose made tank area
supplying cold raw water to the Water Treatment and Disinfection containment (Water Purification Unit)
located at the basement level of the Water Tower and supplying cold raw water to the Firemain Service
(FMS) Package Booster Pump Unit.

The Booster CWM connects to the tank via a delayed action Ball Valve. The cold water down service
distributes to all sanitary fixtures within the building via the floor areas and service riser ducts.

(b) Cold Water Storage Tank


The tank shall be of supplied and installed on pre-formed concrete floor on the top of the Water Tower as
shown on the drawings.
The tank shall be MDPE pressed construction as manufactured by Millar Tanks & sons Ltd, Kissy
Dockyard, Freetown or similar. Size 2M long x 1M wide x 1M deep and nominal capacity 5000 and 2000
liters respectively as shown for the cold raw water tank and the Water Treatment and Disinfection tanks
The tank is to be supplied with all necessary components for erection on site and shall be complete with
cover and access manhole and cowl ventilator.
The Sub-Contractor is to allow for all necessary pipe connection to all tanks including draincock, CWM,
CWDS headers, vent cowl, overflow and warning pipe, as shown on the drawings.
231
The Sub-Contractor shall check all builders work in connection with the tank installations to ensure
compatibility and ensure acceptance of same.

(c) Final Connections


Taps and sanitary fittings will be supplied and fixed under the Main Contract, but all final connections to
sanitary fixtures shall be carried out by the Sub-Contract.

2.7 First Aid Fire Fighting Equipment


(a) General Description
First aid firefighting Extinguishers are to be provided on each floor level including the electrical switch
room area at the basement level where portable C02 fire extinguishers will be provided under the
contract. A dry riser installation will be provided within the compound in protected areas for use by the
Fire Brigade.

(b) Hose reels Installation


Hose reels will be supplied and installed on each floor level of the automatic recessed swinging reel
pattern type FM as manufactured by Kidde Thorn.
Each hose reel to be complete with isolating stop valve with adequate labels identifying same.

(c) Dry Riser Installation


A 2” diameter dry riser will be supplied and installed as shown on the drawings complete with 1½”
diameter landing outlet valves, 1½” diameter double inlet breaching at ground level and all necessary
drain points etc. All dry riser equipment shall be as manufactured by Kidde Thorn with the dry riser pipe
in galvanized steel tube to BS 1387 heavy weight quality. All pipe joints to be in accordance with the
Standard Pipework Specifications.
All landing boxes for outlet valves and box for inlet breaching shall be as manufactured by Kidde Thorn,
as shown on the drawings.

(d) Portable Extinguishers and Fire Blanket


Portable C02 fire extinguishers will be supplied and installed as indicated on the floor drawings, in the
kitchen and adjacent the electrical switch room areas at basement level of the types and sizes as shown on
the drawings.

2.8 OVERFLOWS AND CONDENSE DRAIN LINES


(a) AHU Condense Drains
Condense lines from the cooling coil trays within each air handling unit shall be run in ¾” galvanized
pipe to BS 1387.
The condense line shall incorporate an anti-siphon loop and dirt pocket plug etc., as shown on the
drawings. The condense line shall run to a PVC pipes connecting to a central drain riser in 2” galvanized
tube to BS 1387, as shown on the Drawings. The condense drain riser shall connect to the drainage
system at basement level. The Sub-Contractor is to allow for all connectors to drain condense from the
AHU’s.

3.0 BS MXV Vertical Multi-Stage Pressure Boosting Pump with 1 Fixed Speed
3.1.1 Construction
The Pressure Boosting Pump with automatic operation shall consisting of 1 Vertical Multi-Stage Pressure
Boosting Pump with 1 Fixed speed on a common baseplate, with suction and delivery manifolds, gate
and non-return valves, pressure switches, pressure gauge, control panel and 200 liters diaphragm tank.

3.1.2 Operation
The control panel, with electronic card, manages the pump operation, the changeover of pump starting
sequence and it stops the system when there is no air in the tank (patented system).
Pumps starting in a cascade sequence, with a signal from the pressure switches.

3.1.3 Electrical control panels for fixed speed pump units.


Electrical control panels for pressurization units, all with electronic card with microprocessors, for
managing pump operation. The microprocessor carries out continuous secure checks during all the

232
various work phases of the pumps and incorporates all necessary functions, thus reducing electrical and
electronic components inside the panel.

3.1.4 Maximum clarity for all signals


The status of the unit shall be easily identified on the front of the electronic card with the following
signals:
- Power on led.
- No water led.
- Failure led.
- Pump running led
- Pump automatic operation led
- Pump stop led

3.1.5 Maximum simplicity of control


The front of the electronic card shall feature the following signals and controls:
- AUT-STOP push-button (1 for each pump)
- MAN push-button (1 for each pump)
- RESET push-button.

3.1.6 Performance - Fixed speed Pressure boosting set with 1 Vertical Multi-Stage Pump
Fixed speed pump
Mains: 400V 3~ Motor Pres. switch 1 Maximum capacity* Membrane Vessel
Motor: 400V 3~ bar litre litre
kW HP min max Q l/min Hm

BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C 1.5 2 6,5 8.5 60 66 100 200

3.6.7 Dimensions - Fixed speed Pressure boosting set with 1 Vertical Multi-Stage Pump
Fixed speed pump
TYPE Connection mm Weight
kg

DN 1 DN 2 Hf Hv h1 L1 m1
BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C 37mm 37mm 1065 1345 120 625 410
Dimensions not binding to be verified when ordering

3.6.8 The Fixed speed Vertical Multi-Stage Pressure boosting pump furnished for water supply service to the
building shall be supplied with the specified drivers, controls and pump accessory items by the pump
manufacturer. The pump, driver and control shall be:
􀁑 Guaranty by manufacturer against any defects
􀁑 Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) Approved
􀁑 Listed for water supply service.

4.0 SCOPE OF WORK


4.1 The Water Purification System at the Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD) shall include treatment and
disinfection. The system to be installed shall comprised of 2 x 2000Liter MDPE Cold Water Tanks, The
first tank shall be design for a gravity-fed system and will employ a sand pre-filter followed by
pulverized charcoal filter medium supported on a bed of gravel. Exposure to UV radiation after filtration
will neutralize biological contaminants. Power from the Bank’s photovoltaic panel can provide electricity
for the UV lamp. The treated and disinfected water will be stored in the second MDPE Cold Water Tank
and ready to be pumped to the building with a 1.5kW (2HP) Fixed speed Vertical Multi-Stage Pressure
Boosting Pump.

The pressure boosting pump sets model BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C shall be furnished with driver, controllers
and accessories as detailed in this specification. Pump manufacturer shall have unit responsibility for the
proper operation of the complete unit assembly as indicated by field acceptance tests.

233
4.2 Supply and installation, erection, testing and commissioning of the Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD) Water
Purification System with mechanical and electrical equipment, instrumentation, pipes, valves, fittings,
supports, cables etc. complete in all respects, and preparation & submission of drawings/other documents
to the Project Architect & obtaining interim & final Approval/Sanction/NOC (No Objection Certificates),
during and after execution of work as required.

4.3 Field Acceptance Test:


A field acceptance performance test shall be conducted upon completion of pump installation.
The test shall be made by flowing water through calibrated nozzles; approved flow meters or other such
accurate devices as may be selected by the Project Architect. Test shall be carried out in the presence of:
􀁑 The installing contractor
􀁑 The Project Architect/M&E Engineer
􀁑 The owner's representative

234
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING OF 2 X FIXED SPEED HORIZONTAL PRESSURE BOOSTING FIRE
HYDRANT PUMPS FOR THE ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD), LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

235
SPECIFICATIONS FOR HORIZONTAL FIRE HYDRANT PUMPS

1.0 GENERAL
This document shall be read in conjunction with all relevant commercial documents. In case of
contradiction between technical specification and other documents, data in technical specifications shall
prevail.

1.1 All work under this contract shall be carried out in accordance with the Technical Specification and the
latest revisions of International Standards & Codes, the Sierra Leone Fire Force Services and Norms, the
Electrical Distribution and Supply Authority (EDSA) Rules and Regulations.

BS 2F - 2 Fixed speed pressure boosting pump sets for civil use with 2 MXH

1.2 Construction
The Pressure Boosting Sets with automatic operation shall consisting of 2 (N+1) pumps on a common
baseplate, with suction and delivery manifolds, gate and non-return valves, pressure switches, pressure
gauge, control panel and 800 litres diaphragm tank.

1.3 Operation
The control panel, with electronic card, manages the pump operation, the changeover of pump starting
sequence and it stops the system when there is no air in the tank (patented system).
Pumps starting in a cascade sequence, with a signal from the pressure switches.

1.4 Electrical control panels for fixed speed pump units.


Electrical control panels for pressurization units, all with electronic card with microprocessors, for
managing pump operation.
The microprocessor carries out continuous secure checks during all the various work phases of the pumps
and incorporates all necessary functions, thus reducing electrical and electronic components inside the
panel.

In particular:
- Pumps starting in a cascade sequence according to water demand
- Changeover of pump starting sequence.
- Delay start-up of the 2nd pump in case of breakdown of pressure switch 1 or after a power cut
- Avoid pump starting in case of water hammering.
- Activate the alarm when pressure 1 fails.
- Activate the alarm when air cushion in the vessel drops.
- Stop the pump when air cushion is over*.
* Patent pending

1.4 Maximum clarity for all signals


The status of the unit shall be easily identified on the front of the electronic card with the following
signals:
236
- Power on led.
- No water led.
- Failure led.
- Pump running led (1 for each pump).
- Thermal block led (1 for each pump).
- Pump automatic operation led (1 for each pump).
- Pump stop led (1 for each pump).

1.5 Maximum simplicity of control


The front of the electronic card shall feature the following signals and controls:
- AUT-STOP push-button (1 for each pump)
- MAN push-button (1 for each pump)
- RESET push-button.

1.6 Performance - Fixed speed Pressure boosting sets with 2 Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps
Fixed speed pump
Mains: 400V 3~ Maximum Membrane Vessel
Motor Pres. switch 1 bar Pres. switch 2 bar
Motor: 400V 3~ capacity* litre litre
kW HP min max min max Q l/min Hm

BS2F-2NMD
5.5 x 2 7.5 x 2 6 8 5,5 7.5 500 56 500 800
32/210C/A
* Maximum pumps flow at minimum setting pressure of 2nd pressure switch.

1.7 Dimensions - Fixed speed Pressure boosting sets with 2 Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps
Fixed speed pump
Weight
Connection mm
TYPE kg
DN 1 DN 2 Hf Hv h1 h2 L1 L2 m1 B B2
BS2-2NMD
G3 G 21/2 890 1370 272 380 460 440 550 700 800 -
32/210C/A
Dimensions not binding to be verified when ordering

1.8 The Fixed speed pumps furnished for fire protection service shall be supplied with the specified drivers,
controls and pump accessory items by the pump manufacturer. The pump, driver and control shall be:
􀁑 Guaranty by manufacturer against any defects
􀁑 Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) Approved
􀁑 Listed for firefighting and protection service.

2.0 SCOPE OF WORK


2.1 The pumping equipment shall be installed at the Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD) at the Lungi Facilities
Sites as recommended in the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Sierra Leone Fire Force
Services Standard for the Installation of Horizontal Centrifugal Fire Pumps. The fire pump shall be
designed to deliver 500 litres per minute.
The fire pump shall also be capable of delivering not less than 150% of rated flow at not less than
65% rated head.

The pressure boosting pump sets model BS2-2NMD 32/210C/A shall be furnished with driver,
controllers and accessories as detailed in this specification. Pump manufacturer shall have unit
responsibility for the proper operation of the complete unit assembly as indicated by field acceptance
tests.

2.1.1 Preparation of firefighting scheme drawings and submission to the Project Architect and M&E Engineer
for their approval prior to execution of work.
2.1.2 Supply and installation, erection, testing and commissioning of the Ecowas Logistic Depot (ELD) Fire
Hydrant System with mechanical and electrical equipment, instrumentation, pipes, valves, fittings,
supports, cables etc. complete in all respects, and preparation & submission of drawings/other documents

237
to the Project Architect, concerned authority the Sierra Leone Fire Force Services & obtaining interim &
final Approval/Sanction/NOC (No Objection Certificates), during and after execution of work as
required.

2.2 Manufacturer's Factory Tests:


Each individual pump shall be hydrostatically tested and run tested prior to shipment. The pump shall be
hydrostatically tested at a pressure of not less than one and one-half times the no flow (shut off) head of
the pump's maximum diameter impeller plus the maximum allowable suction head but in no case less
than 250 psig.

2.3 Field Acceptance Test:


A field acceptance performance test shall be conducted upon completion of pump installation.
The test shall be made by flowing water through calibrated nozzles, approved flow meters or other such
accurate devices as may be selected by the Project Architect and the Sierra Leone Fire Force Services
authority having jurisdiction. The test shall be conducted as recommended in NFPA Pamphlet 20 by
􀁑 The installing contractor
􀁑 The Project Architect/M&E Engineer
􀁑 The owner's representative
􀁑 Concerned authority the (Sierra Leone Fire Force Services) having jurisdiction and with that
authority's final approval and acceptance.
Failure to submit documentation of factory and field tests will be just cause for equipment rejection.

3.0 HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS:


The fire booster pumps shall be of horizontal centrifugal fixed speed (single stage) construction
specifically labelled for fire service and shall be an approved Fire Pump Model
The pumps shall be connected to an underground 75mm fire main system. The suction supply for the fire
pump shall be from an elevated 10m3 storage tanks at a maximum pressure of pounds per square inch
(psig) and a minimum pressure of psig. The pump casing shall be cast iron with inch 125 pound ANSI
rated suction and inch (125), (250) pound ANSI rated discharge flanges machined to
International/National Standards dimensions.

4.0 ELECTRIC MOTORS:


The pump driver shall be horizontal foot mounted ball bearing induction motor rated horsepower, 3-
phase, 50Hertz with open drip-proof NEMA enclosure for operation on volt phase service. The motor
locked rotor current shall not exceed the values stated in NFPA Pamphlet 20. The motor shall be
mounted on a steel base common to the pump and shall be connected to the pump with a flexible
coupling protected by a suitable guard. The fire pump manufacturer shall accurately align the pump and
motor shafts prior to shipment. After field installation but prior to grouting the base, a millwright or
similarly qualified person shall check and verify or correct the shaft alignment.

5.0 ELECTRIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS:


The automatic electric motor controller shall be (UL listed), (FM approved) specifically for fire pump
service. The controller shall be designed for
􀁑 Full voltage
􀁑 Part winding
􀁑 Primary resistance reduced voltage
􀁑 wye-delta open transition
􀁑 wye-delta closed transition
􀁑 Auto-transformer
􀁑 Solid state (soft start) type starting
The controller shall be rated for the horsepower specified in this specification’s electric motors
section. The controller shall be capable of interrupting a short circuit current at least equal to the
available short circuit current in the controller supply circuit. This fire pump controller installation
requires withstanding ratings of not less than amps RMS symmetrical at an operating voltage of
volts.

238
The controller shall be:
􀁑 Floor or wall mounted for electrical connection to the motor by the equipment installer.
􀁑 Mounted on a common base with the fire pump and wired to the motor by the pump manufacturer.

6.0 FITTINGS:
The pump manufacturer shall furnish piping accessory items for the pump installation which will adapt
the pump connections to the fire protection system and test connection as follows.
Fittings subjected to pump discharge pressure shall be ANSI (125), (250) pound rating. Fittings subjected
to suction pressure shall be ANSI 125 pound rating.
􀁑 Eccentric tapered suction reducer
􀁑 Concentric tapered discharge increaser
􀁑 Hose valve test header
􀁑 Hose valves with caps and chains
􀁑 pump casing relief valve
􀁑 Automatic air release valve
􀁑 Hose valve head drain valve
􀁑 Suction and discharge pressure gauges

7.0 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS


7.1 Brief Description of Fire Hydrant System

7.1.1 Full Scheme (For general information of the tenderer)


2 No. Fire Hydrants Pumps (each electric motor driven) shall be installed in the pump chamber below
ground, pumping water from the 10m3 MDPE above ground water tank. The common outlets of fire
pump delivery system shall cater to the following:
i) Internal First Aid Hose Reels in each floor.
ii) External Fire Hydrants.
At the top of each Wet Riser an Air Vessel assembly with Air Relief Valve, a Drain-valve, pressure
gauge etc. shall be provided to take care of pressure surges and also for letting out entrapped air in the
system.

7.2 Operation
Fire Hydrant System & Sprinkler System
Water supply header and main pipe up to hydrant valve/landing valves shall be kept pressurized by the
jockey pump which shall start automatically on receiving the impulse from the pressure switch in case of
any pressure drop in the header. It shall stop at a pre-set pressure as soon as pressure builds up in the
header.

For smaller fires, first aid hose reel would be used; while hydrant valve would be used for bigger fires.

In the event of fire outbreak, opening of hydrant valve/hose reel will result in fall of pressure in the
header and electric motor driven fire pump shall come into operation automatically through the impulse
from the pressure switch. The fire pump shall be stopped manually only.

The setting of the pressure switches shall be done keeping the above sequence in consideration.
a) End suction type, horizontally mounted centrifugal pump, TAC approved, capable to deliver 500
litres per minute (lpm) of clear water at minimum 70 M TDH, coupled to a suitably electric motor
mounted on a common base frame and anti-vibration pads coupling, coupling guard and fixing bolts
etc. Motor HP shall be suitably selected to suit minimum discharge and residual head at the top most
hydrants. The characteristic curve should have a large range of discharge points for different heads.

239
7.3 C I Sluice Valve
C I components of the sluice valve shall be of Grey cast iron. The valves shall be flanged having solid
wedge gate valve, inside screw, gate valve with open-close indications etc. all conforming to
International/National but of nominal pressure rating of PN 1.6 as per TAC norms.

Test Pressure at manufacturer’s works


Flange drillings shall normally be as per pump manufacturer standards. However, if the manufacturer
drills the flanges to other standard specifications, the valves shall be supplied with a pair of matching
flanges, nuts, bolts, washers; rubber insertion etc. and such flanges shall have inside threads to suit pipes
of same nominal size as that of the valve.

The quoted price of the valves shall also include cost of arrangement for securing the valves in `open' or
`closed' positions by padlock/rivetted strap, where required per TAC norms.

7.4 G M Valves
Gun metal components of the peets valves i.e. Gate Valves, Check Valves i.e. non-return valves, and
Globe valves etc. shall be of Gun Metal conforming to Grade 2. The valves shall be having flanged or
screwed ends, gate valves with open-close indications etc. all conforming to ASTM and the Sierra Leone
Fire Services Codes.

7.5 C I non return valves


C I reflux valves, i.e. swing check type non-return valves, shall be conforming to manufacturer standards.
Test pressures shall be same as per CI sluice valves.

7.6 M S Pipes and Fittings


All M S pipes shall be heavy/medium quality as mentioned in the schedule of items up to 150 mm N B,
(minimum 6 mm thick) construction approved by Fire Standard.

All pipes outside the building shall be laid underground at a depth of 0.6m (approx.) and laying shall be
as per layout drawing, excavation, back filling of earth, cutting holes in existing structure where
necessary, providing puddle collars/pipes as required & making good the damages including making the
concerned portion of the structure water tight.

Erection of over-ground piping shall be complete with necessary pipe supports hangers with MS
angles/plate/nut bolts/clamps etc. with fabrication as required including providing MS puddle
pipes/collars as required for punctures through walls/slabs etc.

Erection of pipe lines shall also include chipping of wall; making holes inside RCC or brick walls, slabs
and necessary civil works for restoration of the surface after completion of erection. The quoted tender
rate shall include all the above works, as well as the cost of route markers for underground pipe lines as
per following specifications.

Route marker with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm
nominal size) of size 600mm x 600mm at bottoms and 500mm x 500mm at the top with a thickness of
100mm including inscription duly engraved as required (spacing approx. 15m or as directed at site). No
extra payment will be made on this account.

7.7 Gauges/ Switches


a) Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges with controlling cocks etc. shall be of approved make having pressure range, bourdon
material and dial size as specified in schedule of items.
240
b) Pressure Switches
Pressure switches with accessories shall be of approved make and design and shall actuate (cut-off'
and/or `make contact' as required) at pre-set pressures.

7.8 Landing Valves (Hydrant Valve)


Gun metal landing valve (Internal/External Fire Hydrants) with oblique type single outlet as per schedule
of quantities complete with hose coupling adaptor of 63mm size, instantaneous spring lock arrangement
and blank cap with chain conforming to International & National Standards. External Fire-Hydrants to be
provided with stand posts as specified in schedule of quantities. Orifice plates may be provided where
inlet pressure is required to be reduced as per WBFS requirement.

7.9 Branch Pipe


Gun metal, short type, instantaneous pattern branch pipe to suit fire hose delivery coupling of 63mm size
complete with G M nozzle of 20mm nominal size conforming to International & National Standards

7.10 Hose with Coupling


63mm nominal internal dia. hose, rubber lined wooven-jacketted coupling with Type-II (Reinforced
Rubber lined type), firefighting delivery hose 25M long each, fitted with gun metal coupling of 63mm
size with multi serrated tail and double instantaneous spring lock arrangement comprising of male half at
one end and female half at other end complete with rubber cup washer and conforming to International &
National Standards.

7.11 Hose Reel


Swinging hose reel conforming to IS 884 & comprising of 3 ply rubber hose of length specified in
schedule of items, 20mm (3/4") nominal bore (25kg/cm2/350psi bursting pressure), mild steel pressed
reel with 170 degree swinging, nozzle of G M chromium plated, with non-jamming controlling handle
which shall stay at the `ON' `OFF' position as set, wall brackets with `U' shaped reel carrier made of C I
complete with 25mm NB G M valve at the inlet, and orifice plates (if necessary for reducing pressure).

7.12 Air Vessel


Mild steel air vessel adequate size to take care of pressure surges during operation of the system and
venting of entrapped air in the system shall be complete with air relief valve, pressure gauge, drain valve
and shut-off valve at the inlet.

7.13 Valve Chamber


Valve chamber of adequate size to accommodate external valves shall be constructed as directed per site
condition.

7.14 Fire-Brigade Connections


Fire-Brigade connections (inlets) to Riser and Above Ground Storage Tanks shall be with one number of
63mm instantaneous inlets. Other aspects of the connection shall be as the Sierra Leone Firefighting
Codes.

7.15 Painting
All external steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove rust, scale etc. before applying the
primer.
a) All underground piping shall be provided protective wrappings as per TAC norms.
b) All over ground piping/hose boxes/landing valves/hose reel, M S frames etc. shall be painted with
two (2) coats of RED LEAD primer or equivalent followed by two coats of Post Office Red coloured
Synthetic enamel finish paint.

241
c) All other equipment shall be given a red oxide/zinc chromate primer and two (2) coats of synthetic
enamel.

8.0 SPECIFICATION (ELECTRICS)


8.1 Controls
i) Electric Motor driven fire & jockey pumps & diesel engine driven fire pump shall start
automatically through pre-set pressure switches in proper sequence as elucidated in Cl. 4.2 above.
ii) Stopping of all fire pumps shall be manual only.
iii) Audio visual alarm shall be sounded when fire pumps start/starts.
iv) Power supply 'ON' indication shall be provided in the Fire Pump Control Panel.

8.2 Electric Motors:


The pump driver shall be horizontal foot mounted ball bearing induction motor rated 7.5.horsepower, 3-
phase, 50Hz with open drip-proof NEMA enclosure for operation on 400 volt phase service. The motor
locked rotor current shall not exceed the values stated in NFPA Pamphlet 20.

The motor shall be mounted on a steel base common to the pump and shall be connected to the pump
with a flexible coupling protected by a suitable guard. The fire pump manufacturer shall accurately align
the pump and motor shafts prior to shipment. After field installation but prior to grouting the base, a
millwright or similarly qualified person shall check and verify or correct the shaft alignment.

The A C motor shall be approved type & totally enclosed fan cooled and shall have Class B insulation
with degree of protection IP55 conforming to manufacturer’s standards and frame.
The motor shall be suitable for both DOL and STAR/DELTA starting, as required. The motor terminal
box shall be suitable for receiving aluminium/copper cables and suitable for positioning on the motor
body at intervals 90 degree as required for the particular application. The motor shall have also two
distinct terminals for earthing. The motor shall be suitable for 415V (- 15% to + 5% variation) 3-phase
50HZ plus/minus 3% AC supply.

8.3 Motor Control Centre (MCC)


The MCC shall be made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 2mm, totally enclosed, self-supporting,
floor or wall mounted dust and vermin proof cubicle type construction with multitier compartmental
arrangement with degree of protection IP54.

It shall have a panel of uniform height placed with front access for operation as well as cabling. MCC
panel shall be completely front wired type having all device/termination etc., approachable from front
without any requirement of back access for maintenance repairs and cabling. Provision of cable entry
shall be from the top or bottom to match with cable layout of the pump room.

Main fire pump motor shall have star/delta or DOL starting as per TAC requirement. The motor control
circuit shall be provided with test facilities so that it is possible to test the control circuit with the main
motor circuit disconnected. Control voltage shall be 240 V, A C single phase derived from an isolating
MCCB.

The main busbar of the MCC shall be of electrical grade copper and shall have continuous current rating
as required but in no case less than the current rating of incoming switch fuse unit. The busbar shall be
easily accessible from the front of the cubicle and shall be colour coded for phase identification. A copper
earth busbar of adequate cross sectional area shall be provided in the bottom or top part of the cubicle and
shall run for the entire length of the MCC.

Start/stop push button, auto/manual selector switch and indication shall be provided and the MCC for
control of the motor.
242
Incomer cubicle shall incorporate voltmeter, ammeter with respective selector switches, power factor
meter and phase indication lamps.

Each outgoing cubicles shall have ammeter with selector switch and on/off, trip indication lamps.
Ammeters for incoming/outgoing cubicles, for motor it shall be suppressed scale type beyond full load
rating up to 8 times of full load current for taking care of starting current kicks.

8.4 Cables
All power cable types shall be certified and marked in accordance with the British Approvals Services for
Electrical Cables (BASEC) or equivalent. Cables shall be segregated from other services and shall
comply with IEE Specification 034.
All power cables shall be 4-core, XLPE/PVC/SWA/PVC armoured power cable rated for 0.6/1kV with
copper or aluminium conductor cables manufactured and tested as per BS 6724.

8.5 Installation accessories and earthing materials


One lot of installation accessories and earthing material shall be installed for equipment and cables and
earthing of equipment.

8.6 Power supply


For MCC one 415 V, A C 3-Phase and neutral 50HZ feeder of adequate capacity shall be made available
at the MCC incomer.

If the equipment is required to operate at any other voltage, necessary transformers & converters shall be
included in the scope of the tenderer.

243
Item Materials Name of Brand
1. Electrical Motor Driven Fire Pump
a) Pump BS2-2NMD 32/210C/A or Equal approve
b) Motor CROMPTON or Equal approve
2. Anti-vibration Pads Approved quality and make.
3. C I Valves Approved quality and make.
4. G M Valves Leader/Kitz or Equal approve
5. Hydrant valves, Fire Brigade connections, Minimax/Fireshield or any good brand with
GM branch pipes, couplings etc. Approved
Certification
6. Fire Hoses Approved make with ISI mark.
7. Hose Cabinet Good quality fabricated as per specification (sample
cabinet to be approved).
8. First Aid rubber hose (for swinging hose reel) Approved quality and make.
9. Power/Control Cables Havell’s or Equal approve
10. Push buttons Siemens/Schneider or Equal approve
11. Pressure Gauge H Guru/Fiebig.
12. Pressure Switches Fiebig.
13. Auto Transfer Switch Havell’s/GE/Emerson.
14. Indicators Lamps Essen/L & T/Siemens or Equal approve
15. Ammeters and Voltmeters Automatic Electric/IMP or Equal approve
16. Portable Extinguishers Approved make bearing relevant BS EN marking on
body as well as the 1st charge of chemicals/gases.
17. Star Delta/DOL Starter Siemens/Schneider/ABB
18. Contractors (Main and Auxiliary) Siemens/Schneider/ABB
19a) Bimetal O/L Relay with single phasing Siemens/Schneider/ABB
preventor, combined unit
b) Single phasing preventor (Negative sequence Schneider/ABB/Siemens
current sensing type)
20. XLPE/PVC/SWA/PVC armoured power All cable types shall be certified and marked in
cable rated for 0.6/1kV with copper or accordance with the British Approvals Services for
aluminium conductor cables manufactured Electrical Cables (BASEC) or equivalent.
and tested as per BS 6724 and flexible cables
21. Voltmeter, Ammeter Selector Switch Kaycee or Equal approve
22. Steel Conduits (conforming to IS in all respects
a) Galvanized BEC/NIC/AKG.
b) Black Enamelled BEC/NIC/AKG.
23. MCCB and Accessories Schneider (Compact NSX)/ ABB (T-Max) /Siemens
(3 VL)
24. CT Kappa/Matrix or Equal approve
25. MCB DB, MCB ABB/Schneider/Siemens
All the materials shall be BS/EN/ NFPA marked wherever available from the list of manufacturer given above,
wherever the BS/EN/ NFPA marked materials are not available, the materials shall be from the best quality
available in the market, subject to submission of satisfactory test report with prior approval from the Project
Architect.

244
INFORMATION & COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY (ICT) SYSTEM INSTALLATION

245
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
INFORMATION & COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY (ICT) SYSTEM INSTALLATION FOR
THE ECOWAS LOGISTIC DEPOT (ELD), LUNGI, SIERRA LEONE

246
ICT Terms of Reference

1) WAN Connectivity
The Ecowas Logistic Depot shall have two type of WAN and Internet connectivity at the Facilities at
Lungi.
 VSAT connectivity
 Internet Connectivity through local Provider.
The Ecowas Logistic Depot shall enter into a contract agreement with the service connectivity providers.

2) Network Active Devices


The network actives devices such as Routers, Switches, Firewalls, Access Points, and servers, others IT
equipment’s and Racks will be provided by the Ecowas Logistic Depot Authorities.

In addition, the Ecowas Logistic Depot will required complementary network equipment and services for
the new Complex. When the construction of the building will be on progress, in line with the Global
framework agreement with CISCO and partners to order directly from Cisco the required network active
devices.

The procurement of additional network active device will be handled directly by the Ecowas Logistic
Depot Authorities.

3) Local Area Network Data & Voice Cabling infrastructure standards

To streamline the cabling the Ecowas Logistic Depot has adopted the followings as reference standards
among others:
1. ISO/IEC 24764 (Generic cabling for data centers)
2. ISO/IEC 11801:2002 A1 & A2 (Generic cabling for customer premises)
3. and the CENELEC EN 50173-5 (Cabling for data centers)
4. TIA 606-A (Labelling Standard For Networks)

247
Cabling system
Section structure Spécifications Commets
information
Support Voice, Video and Data
Standard Cat 6A, 7, 7A (cat 7 preferred) Require data sheet from the service
(response to (ISO/IEC 11801:2002 category 7/class F) provide.
proposal and
installations will
be tested against
General

the standard)
Trucking shall follow the approved colour codes Trucking facility to allow for future
Installation
demands, the cabling system must be
requirement
easy to expand and maintain.
All proposed components including the patch cords The number of passive end points shall
Passive have to be produced by the same manufacturé be determined by the possible number
Components of staff to be accommodated in any
given area + an increase of 30 %.
The horizontal 4 pair cable shall be Category 7 The installation design and routing of
UTP
to meet the quality and performance criteria all cables shall take account of the
necessary to ensure correct operation of the manufacturer limits as specified in the
installation for frequencies to 500 MHz and to data sheet. Category 7 cable (CAT7), (
ensure the compliance with the warranty. The are specified in ISO/IEC 11801:2002
Minimum cabling
same standard shall be applied to patch cords. category 7/class F), It is a cable
type
standard for Ethernet and other
interconnect technologies that can be
made to be backwards compatible with
traditional CAT5 and CAT6 Ethernet
cable.
The RJ45 connector shall be screened to ensure The horizontal cable length shall not
protection against EMI and for Alien cross-talk exceed 100 m copper 300+ m for fibre
compliance
Network Outlets
(TO) cabling should take into account the esthetic and
should have a minimum distance of 90cm to 1m
between the cables and energy sources that can
cause electromagnetic disturbances such as energy
transformers, air conditioners
Each connector shall provide both T568A The number of network outlets shall be
and T568B colour code identification for dependent on the number of staff per
the pins at the rear of the connector. The punch given area.
down is to be in accordance with the T568B colour
code. Reassignment of pairs shall not be accepted
Network Outlets To avoid installation errors, the wire organizer of
Copper Patch the snap-in connector must be identified by the
Panels (RJ45) same standard colour coding as the wires.
All network outlets shall be provided with Cable labelling matrix shall be part of
labelling and identification. A transparent the infrastructure acceptance test
window shall protect the labelling tag.
Patch panels must have 19” equipment practice
dimensions to permit mounting in standard
cabinets, racks or bays
All patch panels must be equipped with a
cable management mechanism that provides
strain relief, earthling and grounding features
Horizontal Cabling

The presentation of the Patch Panel must


Copper Patch
provide for sliding mechanism for proper labelling.
Panels (RJ45)
In the rack, the Patch Panels shall be
Patch Cords
separated by metallic patch-guides that have
a closed front to protect the patch cords. The
height of these guides will be 1U or 2U
depending on the layout of the rack.
248
The Patch Panel shall provide an automatic
contact with the metal frame of the cabinet in
order to ensure grounding.
To achieve a Class EA Channel performance all
Patch Cords shall be minimum of Category 7.
All uplinks must be colour coded in RED The uplink connects the core
AND BLUE to differentiate the links to the (backbone in the server Room) to the
Uplinks
core (backbone) Floor Distribution switches for the
Voice, data video services.
All up links shall be with multimodal Optical fiber
The service provider shall provide the Choice For interconnecting buildings, exterior
between the 2 different types of fibers described cabling, single mode fiber should be
below: The Enhanced OM2 or OM3 fibers use.
providing warranted extended distance for the
transmission of high rate data, voice and video
signals and which shall be available to avoid
limitations due to bottlenecks in the longest
building and campus backbone links. The choice of
fiber will be made according to the present and
future bandwidth needs for the longest OF
backbone links
The OM3 or OM3 enhanced fibers shall be use to This is to allow for distances between
ensure the transmission of the signal over 300 (or buildings.
450 m) metres at 850nm. Please refer the table for
the fiber below.
Optical fiber Patch Panels shall be mounted
in 19” frames of the cabinets. The patch
Backbone Cabling

panels shall be supplied with adaptors fitted


and equipped with a mechanism that ensures the
retention and support of incoming cables.
Direct Termination of the connectors (LC) on to
the fibers as well as splicing of pigtails (LC) should
be possible
In order to trace patching between the active Identification/labelling scheme should
equipment ports and the cabling termination be in line with TIA-606-A
patch panels, the ports of the active
equipment should be properly documented
and labelled. Fixed permanent label are
required
All equipment room cabinet shall be in 42U The cabinets shall be able to host all
cabinet standard types of active and passive
Active equipment
equipment and provide facilities for
& panels
For an orderly cord storage and easy to extension to form a suite of cabinets
connections
management of cable installation, the following with no modification to the structure.
accessories may be use:
Closed 1 or 2 HU patch guides between the All equipment room cabinet shall be
patch panels; 42U (600x800mm) minimum
Lateral cable rings installed at both sides of he
frames. The patch rings should be easily removable
by rotation and have to be located on the front rails
of the 19” frames in the cabinets.

249
Please the arrangement of the cabinets
should ensure that:
Cabinet and Racks

1. Front rails of cabinets must be recessed to


Cabinet
installation

provide adequate room for patch cables and


arrangement
Wire management accessories.
sample as shown
2. Adequate space for cable management
in the diagram
3. Arrange switches and minimize patching
below.
between cabinets & racks
4. Perforated tiles at front cabinets
5. One edge of cabinets placed at edge of tile
Wi-Fi survey to The Wireless access points should be
be undertaken installed based on Wi-Fi survey and should
Wireless

for the locations. meet 801.1n standard


Cabling should
however be
internal as
standard
1. Allocate adequate space and careful plan
Space impact of
cabling systems

location of network areas (MDA HDAs,


Entrance Rooms, Telecom
2. Provide adequate space and coordinate location
of cabling pathways.
3. Space in server cabinets for patch panel and
cable management
Overhead cabling requirement should be The overhead cabling will
considered in the design of the Ceiling reduce losses due to airflow
height to permit rails. obstruction and turbulence.
For old Data centers where
Energy Efficiency – Pathways

overhead cabling was not


part the requirement, all
improvement work must
ensure that:
Overhead cabling All cabling under floor use
as standard. smaller diameter cable
conduits or alternative
network architectures to
reduce cabling volumes
• the cabling network must
avoid blocking airflow
to/from cabinets,
ventilated tiles, A/C, IT, and
telecom equip
DC Rooms, Equipment Rooms,
– Temperature: 18 – 27 °C (64 – 81 °F)
Energy Efficiency –

– Max Relative Humidity: 60%


Temperature &

– Max dew point: 15 °C (59 °F)


Humidity

– Min dew point: 5.5 °C (42 °F) to control ESD

250
The electrical cabling use to power
Network and the telecommunications
infrastructure should comply with industry
best practices. Especially the following
must be observed:
-Electrical cabling will be run separately
from data cabling
Electrical cabling Security

-There should be a telecommunication


earthing different from the building general
earthing.
-All the active devices should be connected
to the earthing
-All the telecommunications cabinets,
closets
should be connected to the earthing
-All the telecommunication devices should
be powered though double conversion UPS
system.
There should be lightening arrestor to
Protect the building and surge protection to
Protect the Infrastructure. Especially, there
should be a surge protector on all PSTN
lines.
The physical installations of network passive
and active devices must have detailed
documentation that include information:
 All products used
 The entire system as implemented and based
on the validated initial design
 A diagram of each type of distribution points
relative to MDA
 A comprehensive overview of the installation.
 A ground plane locating each sub-system
installation.
 The plans of the different levels of the building
Documentation

The provider with the location and designation end point


should provide relative to HDA
documentation in The installation shall be subjected to test on
soft and hard completion:
copies The set of tests that may be conducted may
include:
 The connectivity test of the copper
 The test made fibre (end-to-end)
 The type and serial number of the testing
devices use must be specified.
The Name of the operators ( Service provider
Engineers and approving officer)
Cabling should be certified against category
6A or 7 specifications and full tests This
certification will provide the length of each
cable, the rate of packet loss, the résistance,
impedance result made available in
electronic format

251
4) IT CABLING - REQUIREMENTS

A. Cabling base principles:


1. The trucking shall be made of 3 compartments inside.
2. Each network position workstation has one cable that extends to the equipment room. This cable,
known as the cables UTP category 7 will be used for horizontal cabling requirements.
3. Each uplink will operate at 1000 Mbps. The Uplinks will connect the different switches from the
floors to the servers Rooms. The uplink is multimodal optical fiber.
4. All the network points and cables from each floor will be connected to the patch panel located in a
VDI room at the same floor. The DVI room will be connected by fiber to the server room located
at the ground floor.
5. Total Positions shall be based on the design (site drawing) and number of staff regarding offices
allocation.

I. IT NETWORK CABLING
Minimal Country
Unit Total
Required functions technical Quantity of
Price price
compliance origin
Identification
Supply, installation and commissioning
of all the cabling, trucking and outlets UTP Cat 7
for a 1000Base T network.
A - Each Office will be equipped with positions configured as follows

LT LT PS PS

Each Network position is composed of:


 2 RJ-45 Outlets (LAN and Phone)
 2 Regulated Power Supply(UPS) outlets
 01 normal power outlet ( not on UPS )
Number of Network positions per office according to Staff allocation
Office for 1 person 2
Office for 2 persons 3
Office for 3 persons 4
Videoconference / Meeting Room according
8- 10
to the number of sets.

252